A GRAMMAR OF THE SANTHAL LANGUAGE BY THE REV. L. 0. SKREFSRUD, M.A,S.B. MISSIONARY TO THE SANTHALS. BENARES: PRINTED AT THE MEDICAL HALL PRESS, BENARES, FOR THE CALCUTTA SCHOOL BOOK AND VERNACULAR LITERATURE SOCIETY, 9, GOVERNMENT PLACE, EAST, CALCUTTA. 1873. PRINTED BY F. J. LAZARUS AND CO INTRODUCTIONO SANTHALI is the languagre spoken by a people called by foreigners the Santhals or Santals, inhabiting the western frontier of Lower Bengtal, from Orissa in the south to Bhagulpore in the north, of late made so prominent to the public by the Lieutenant-Governor of Bengal, Sir George Campbell's famous "Enactment for the better Government of the Santhals," Dr. Runter's highly interesting " Rural Bengal," his suggreqtive " Comparative Dictionary of the Langu. aiges of India and High Asia," and the Commissioner of Chutia Nagpore, Colonel Dalton's able "Ethnology of India." It is spoken with hardly more than a dialectical differ. ence, in common by Santhals, Kolhes, KocEu, Alahle,8, Iir. hQrs, Mundas, l6s and Korlos; but in grammatical structure Santhali is as superior to the others as is Sanskrit to its cognate languages. It beloags to what is called, the " Turanian family of speech," or what is denominated by August Sobleicher, as "ircompoundingr languagyes," and will, I believe, be found to.be seeond to none of these (not even t t-,he Turkishj which IV INTRODUCTION. is deemed to be one of the most philosophical of languages) in grammatical structure. At what period the Santhal language attained its present copiousness is not easily ascertained; but certain it seems from the traditions of the people (which I hope soon to publish with their institutions and poetry) that they had arrived at a not inconsiderable state of culture in the Punjab, when the Aryans entered India, although there are no indications showing that it had that richness which it now manifests in a degree far above what might be expected from a language of the same group as itself. The name by which the Santhals call themselves is Hor, man. Now this word is, according to the Santhal traditions, connected with the very origin of the human race. Pilchu Had-am (or Haram, the Santhal Adam,) says the tradition, is the father of all mankind, and his first-born was Hasd-a'c, which means of Hasd, the ale being the old genitive-sign in Santhali. It is evident that Had in the words Pilchu Hadcam, and Hasd in Hts-dalc belong to the same root, sd and d being interchangeable as sth is with th (in sthan tha-, etc.) It is true that the nasal in Htsd-aJ would have to be accounted for, as Hasd would not give Had, but Han.d; but INTRoIDUCTION. V the interchange of md and d is quite common in Santhali; as ond-oA=od.-on, to take out; hun4in -hudii=hu.riA (all of which are at present in use among the Santhals) small. Khond and Gond are probably instances of the same change. HEad is the root cf a very large number of the names o the aboriginal tribes of India:- Had-i, Har-i, (a low caste Hindu); Bold, Hor, (the Santhals); Ho, (the Hos); Kar, (the Kar-ens); Kod, (the Kod.as); Kor, (the Kor.kos); Kol, (the Kolhes and Kols); Kut-i, (a low workman); Khair, (Khairgar, Khairs); Kher, (Kher-o-ar--Kherwar, the ancient name of the Santhals); Ker, (the Kerus); Gar, (the Garos); Gour, Gur, (Gours, Gurka); Khond, (the Konds); Goiod, (the Gonds). HaBs, Has-in, two birds, who, according to the Santhal traditions, were the parents of Pilchu Haram and Pilchu Budhi, will be found to be from the same root. With regard to the ancient home of the Santhals, the traditions say, that the cradle of the human race (before the flood) was in the East (not east from the Santhal Parganas, but from the place whence the traditions took their rise); that the two first human beings were carried to the west to Hihiri-pipiri (a reduplication of Hiri-piri, which again is a jingle from Hiri (like Hako-pako) where seven sons and seven daughters were born to them that they proceeded to Sasafbeda, from VI INTRODUCTION. whence they removed to Khojkawman, where God, on account of their sins, destroyed the whole human race with firerain, two, however, being saved in the cave of Har-a, or Har-a-ta mountain. After the flood, so run the traditions, the Santhals, a part of the new race, took an easterly direction and came to Jarpi, whence (passing the Siipass and the Bahipass) they proceeded to Aere. (Iran?) From A ere they came to Khande (Afghanistan?) and from~ Khande, taking a north-easterly direction, they entered Chae (the Chinic Tartary?), and turning south-eastward, and passing the Chae and Champa passes, they arrived at Champs with the seven rivers, (Saptasind, the present Panjab?) where they lived for generations, and where many of their institutions were formed. From this place of prosperity and power (they had also kings of their own) they were driven by powerful enemies, and wandering through many places they came at last to Nagpore, from whence they removed to Sikhar (Hazaribagh District) and finally to the Santhal Parganas. They have lived near many rivers, they say, among which are the Maha nai, Sifjo nai, the Giru mi the Sura nai, the Ga mnai and the Gua nai. INTRODUCTION. NVII They are divided into twelve tribes, each of which is subdivided into twelve families. They were originally composed of only seven tribes, and the five additional are deemed inferior. One of the tribes is lost. The remaining eleven are as follows:1, Htsdak'; 2, Kishu; 3, Muarmu; 4, Mandri; 5, Hemrornm; 6, Soreen; 7, Tuda.,; 8, Baske; 9, Chore; 10, Paciia 11, Besra. The construction and arrangement of a Grammar of such an intricate language as Santhali is necessarily beset with many difficulties, especially when one has to collect the materials chiefly from the mouths of the people; and moreover to write in a foreign tongue, hence imperfections are inevitable; yet one thing I may say, and that is, that I have spared no trouble in endeavouring to make the Santhal part of the Grammar as accurate as possible, and I am sure that my Missionary brethren, who themselves feel the common difficulty in learning Santhali, will bear with me for any error which they may discover in the book. To those who are not acquainted with the language a few hints as to what parts of the Grammar they ought first to learn may not be unacceptable. After having learnt the first 20 pages, they should commit the full and abridged form of the Pronoun to memory; and having mastered which VIII INTRODUCTION. they would do well in learning 'the table of the tense-signs (page 144). The auxiliary verbs (page 146) should next be learnt, and then the regular verb (pages 156-270). It is of the highest importance, however, for the student to learn well the abridged Pronoun and the tense-signs, for these are as it were the very key to the language. In conclusion, I would here beg to offer my most sincere thanks to my highly esteemed and learned friend Dr. Wenger for his very valuable assistance in the arrangement and correction of the Grammar; to Dr. Lazarus, of Benares, for his personal care and skilful management in the printing of it; and last, but not least, to my aged and much respected friend Dr. Phillips, Sr., of the American F. W. B. Mission in Orissa, who is the oldest Missionary among the Santhals, and who published an outline of a Santhal Grammar 21 years ago, for the encouragement he has given me in my work, and for the recommendation given by him to the C. S. B S. in favor of these pages instead of a reprint of his own outlines. L. O. SKREFSRUD. P. S.-I am in possession of a large number of song s composed in a very old dialect of Hinde, and which may prove valuable to the Philologist. They have been handed down from Sage to Sage among the Santhals. I hope soon to publish them L. S. Co0 N T E-1 N I''S. SECTION 1.-Of the letters, 011.... 4. 0.. 11.-Of the pronunciation of letters, (a.) Vowels,.... a. 0...Is. 2 (b.) Consonants,........., 3 (c.) Semi-vowels, 0. **a.......a D 7 (%d.) Semi-consonants,.. Is....... 0 SECTION 111.-Of accen'tu ation,..... 0.. 11 0& IF IV.-~Of the permutation of letters,.. 12 CHAPTER 11.-Of nouns,.... go*.0...0 13 SECTION 1.-Of gender,..... 0.. 0.. 11.-Of number, &*a gas.....0* III11.-Of case,........ 0.1... 14 ivIY.-Of declension,.. 9. 0. G...* 150 CHAPTER 111.-Of adjectives,........ 20 SECTION 1.-Of gender"'...... i 11.-Of comparison of adjectives,. III.-Of numerical adjectives,.... 21 CHAPTER IV.-Of pronouns,.... 23 SECTION 1.-Of personal pronouns,...,.... i (a.) Full pronouns,.. -... So. 9 ia9 v (b.) Abridged pronouns or suffixes,... 29 X CONTENTS. SECTION II.-Of possessive pronouns,., III.-Of demonstrative pronouns, S IV.-Of interrogative pronouns,... S V.-Of relative pronouns,... S VI.-Of indefinite pronouns,. 30 35... 30... 35... 37 38 40 CHAPTER V.-Of verbs, (a.) Voices,.. (b.) Moods,.. (c.) Tenses,.. (d.) Genders, (e.) Numbers, (f.) Persons, (g.) Cases, (h.) Forms,.. (i.) Conjugations,........... 40 S......f... 41............ 43........... ib............ 44... 45 ~.......... 46 Tables of the formation of the verb. I. GENERAL FORM (active and reflexive voice), (a.) Nominative case (object inanimate), (b.) Accusative (object animate), (c.) Dative (object inanimate),... (d.) Dative (object animate), 47 48 49 50 II.-RESERVATIVE FORM. (a.) Accusative (object inauimate), (b.) Accusative (object animate),.... 51.. 52 53 IJ1.---INTENSIVE FORM, L.. 0 0 CONTENTS. Reciprocal. XI I.--GENERAL FORM,... (a.) Nominative case (ol (b.) Accusative (object a (c.) Dative (object inani (d.) Dative (object anims II.-RESERVATIVE FORII, (a.) Accusative (object i (b.) Accusative (object a III.-INTENSIV E FORM, 54 )ject inanimate),.. nimate),..... 55 mate),........ 56 ste),........ 57............ 58 nanimate),...... nimate),...... 59.......... 60 IV.-CONTINUATIVE FORM,... (a.) Nominative case (object inanimate), (b.) Accusative (object animate), (c.) Dative (object inanimate),... (d.) Dative (object animate),... Reciprocal continuative. (a.) Nominative (object inanimate), (b.) Accusative (object animate), (c.) Dative (object inanimate),.. (d.) Dative (object animate), Tables of the formation of the tenses. I.-GENERAL FORM,....... (a.) Nominative active (object inanimate), (b.) Nominative reflexive and passive (object inanimate),...... 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 73 XII CON TENTS. (c.) Accusative active (object animate),... (d.) Accusative reflexive (object animate), (e.) Dative active (object inanimate),.. (f.) Dative active (object animate),. (g.) Dative reflexive (object animate),... IL-RESERVATIVE FORM, (a.) Accusative active (object inanimate),... (b.) Accusative active (object animate),... (c.) Accusative reflexive (object animate), III.-INTENSIVE FORM,.... (a.) Active,......... (b.) Reflexive... Continuative form. (a.) Nominative active (object inanimate), (b.) Accusative active (object animate),... (c.) Accusative reflexive (object animate), (d.) Dative active (object inanimate),... (e.) Dative active (object animate), (f.) Dative reflexive (object animate),... Signs of the tenses stripped of all suffixed infixes,... 77 84 88 92 96 102 106 110 114 116... 118... 122.. 126... 130. 134... 140 and... 144 Conjugations of verbs. I -The auxiliary verb mnena, to be, to exist, II.-Of the auxiliary verb:kan, to be, III.-Of the auxiliary verb taheckan, was,..... IV.-Of the negative impersonal verb banu, not to be,...... 146 148 149 150 CONTENTS. V.-Of the genitive of mena, to have, (a.) Object inanimate, (b.) Object animate, cn~ CPL ~~~ C1~,C~ O)~ Paradigm of a regular transitive verb, (a.) Nominative case (object inanimate), (b.) Genitive with nominative,.... (c.) Accusative active (object animate),... (d.) Accusative reflexive,......... (e.) Dative active (object animate, (f.) Dative reflexive (object animate),... (g.) Reservative active (object animate), Reservative reflexive (object animate), Impersonal verb,...... CHAPTER VI.-Of adverbs, postpositions, conjunctions and Interjections. XIII 152 154 156 176 182 203 227 248 271 291 295 SECTION I.-Of adverbs. I.-Of time,...... S II.-Of place,...... SIII.-Of manner and quality etc., V I.-Of affirmation and negation,... 296..... 298..... 299. o... 300 SECTION II.-Of postpositions, * III.-Of conjunctions, * IV.-Of interjections, 0P a 0 o~ ib. ib. 302 CHAPTER VII.-On the Derivation and Composition of Words. XIV CONNTENTS A.-O--ON THE DE1RLVATION OF WORDS. SECTION 1.-Of nouns,... a. Nouns derived from nouns,. f I.-Personal from personal, SII.-Impersonal from personal, III.-Personal from impersonal, IV.-Impersonal from impersonal, Patronymics,.. Gentiles, Possessives, Collectives, Deminutives, Abstracts, b. Nouns derived from adjectives, (a). Inanimate concretes, (b). Animate concretes,... (c). Abstracts, c. Nouns derived from verbs, 3... o03... 301..... 305... 306..... 307..... 308.... 309..,.,....... f....,. *... 310...... 311. *......* (a). From the uninflected verbal bases,. (b). From the inflected adjective participles,. (c). From verbs formed from the substantive cases,..... d. Nouns derived from adverbs,.. (a). Without the insertion of n,.... (b). With the insertion of n,... 314 315. a SECTION II.-Of pronouns, SECTION III.-Of adjectives, (a). Adjectives formed from nouns,...... 316...... 317 CONT ENTS, XV (b). (c). (d). Adjectives formed from other adjectives,... 319 Adjectives formed from verbs,..... Adjectives formed from adverbs and postpositions,........ 320. SECTION IV.--Of verbs,......... (a). Verbs formed from nouns,....... 321 (b). Verbs formed from adjectives, (c). Verbs formed from adverbs,....... (d). Verbs formed from postpositions,..... 322 SECTION V.-Of Adverbs,............ 322 (a). By affixing te, kate, leka, and gi,...... (b). By doubling the word,..... (c). By infixing ke,.......... (d). By prefixing or affixing certain particles,... 323 B.-ON THE COMPOSITION OF ' I.-Compound nouns, (a). Nouns joined to nouns, (b). Adjectives joined to nouns,... II.-Compound Adjectives,.. (a). Nouns preceding adjectives,... (b). Adjectives joined to adjectives, III.-Compound Verbs, (a). Verbs joined to nouns, (b).-Verbs joined to adjectives,... (c). Verbs joined to verbs, (d). Verbs joined to adverbs, (e). Verbs joined to postpositions, (f), Verbs joined to certain particles, TORIDS. 324 w B uoi o~~ Y a +~~ rr~ II ~~r~ ~~~ 7 I~r nt a~~ ers 0 ~~~ 325 33 ~~r c~~ n.. n,, XVI CONTENTS. PART lII.-Of Syntax. CHAPTER I.-Of subject and predicate,..... 327 SECTION I.-Of the subject,.............(a). Simple Subject,............ 328 (b). Subject modified by a noun in the case,... (c). Subject modified by a noun in the genitive case,............ (d). Subject modified by an adjective,...... SECTION II.-Of the predicate,......... (a). Simple predicate,...... (b). Predicate modified by a noun,... (c). Predicate modified by an adverb,.... (d). Predicate modified by an adjective, SECTION III.-Of congruence,........ 329 (a). Concord of the verb with its nominative,... (b). Concord of the adjective with the substantive,........ 330 (c). Concord of the relative with its antecedent,............ 331 CHAPTER II.-Of nouns and eases,......... 332 SECTION I.-The nominative and vocative cases,... (a). The nominative case,......... (b). The vocative case,.......... SECTION II.--The genetive case,........ S IlI.-The instrumental case,...... 333 IV.-The dative case,........ 334 V.-The accusative case,....... V I.-The ablative case,........ S VII.-The locative case,........ 335 CONTENTS. CHAPTER II.-Of pronouns,... SECTION I.-Of personal pronouns, I I.-Of possessive pronouns, III.-Of demonstrative pronouns, IV.-Of interrogative pronouns, S V.?-Of relative pronouns, CHAPTER IV.-Of verbs, SECTION I.-Of the voices,... (a.) The active voice,. (b.) The reflexive voice,.. (c.) The reciprocal active voice, (d.) The reciprocal reflexive voice,.. (e.) The deponent voice,. SECTION II.-Of tenses,... III.-Of moods,.. SIV.-Of cases in connection wil S V.-Of the forms,.., 0 e 1) 0 0 r, a a XVII 335; 336 337 337 338 339.... 340... 357 1h the verbs, 365..... 367 CHAPTER V.-Of the arrangement of words and clauses, SECTION I.-Of words,..... 368 II.-Of clauses,........ 370 CHAPTER I. SECTION I.-OF THE LETTERS. The Santals being destitute of any signs or characters of their own, by which to express their language in writing, we are obliged to borrow them from some other language. And as the Roman character presents the fewest difficulties to the European Student, it appears advisable to adopt that character, with certain diacritical signs, to represent sounds peculiar to the Santal language. ~,, ~ _ __,,._ Vowels. Long. d e e o u~ Short. a% e e" b o_ o Neutral. a iou Nasal. a e e o o Diphthongs. ae, ao, ei, o, eo, eu, iu, oe, oe, oi, ua, ui, ai, au, oi. Consonants. Semi Semi Con Vowels. sonants. Faucal, h Gutturals, k kh g gh n Palatals, ch chh j jh n Cerebrals, t th d dh ns ch y r rh v I Wo Dentals, Labials, t th d dh ln p ph b bh m t' p' Sibilant, s ~Ys ( 2 ) SECTION II.-OF THE PRONUNCIATION OF LETTERS. VOWELS, a, is pronounced like the English a in father; as dal, to strike. e, is pronounced like the German d in dhnlich, or somewhat like the English a in fat; as jr, to sow. e, is pronounced a little more i.-(ee) like, than the English a in fate, or the German e in Segen; as jel, meat. i, is pronounced like the English i in police; as sid, day. o, is pronounced like the English a in fall; as 61, to write. o, is pronounced a little more iu-like, than the English o in note; as oni, he, or she; kol, to send. uz, is pronounced like the English u in prune, or full; as Il, mango; usul, high. q, is a neutral a, and is distinguished from the English o in nation, and the German e in Verstand, by being a deep guttural. It is probably the same sound, which Dr. Lepsius mentions, as existing in the Bornu language. i and u are only used as forming the second vowel in a ( 3 ) diplithong in connection with c, as far as I' have been able. toascertain. W; 2,;,, 5, 4, arenasal vowels. A""is pronounced like the French an or en, and 6 is pronounced like the French on. Each of those vowels retains its. respective sound with, the nasal element added to it; as. trgatreh early (before, the usual time);. hy,y.es; h76.also. ae. In this diphthong; as well as in all the others, the vowels retain their respectiVe sounds, like in German, and are not like in English, where ai is pronounced like, e* 'in' hair, oas like o-in load-; - as;, puera, to swim. ao,, as in &adrao; ei, as. in eil eo, as in.chheoV, and h7eo; eo, as in le-ohae; eu, as in ihem; iu, as in diuhe; oe, as in hoe; oe, as in hoe iceda; oi, as in koi4dts; ua, as in, sikuar; ni, as in nihar; gi, as in ginai, au; as ina. k rnumqu qi,' as in hej~ukane.i I. CONSONANTS. k1 is pronounced like the.English.. /in.king, so that nowi aspiration is heard; as k1i, crime. kh,.is the aspirated form of the preceding consonant;: as. khon, from. It is pronounced like Ickh in,in/c-haorn. g, is pronounced like g in give;' as gapa, to-morrow; The e is pronouncediii tho liain wayn ayy well as the othearvolweLJ. ( 4 ) gh, is the aspirate of the preceding consonant; as ghasao, to scour. n, is prounced like the English ng in ring; as ba., (bang) no. ch, the Santal palatals differ a little from the English in pronunciation. The former are pure, uncompounded letters, pronounced like the Hindui, Bengalee* and Ooria palatals (with the exception of n used as an initial), namely by placing the tongue quite flat up to the palate, a little behind the upper teeth, and allowing no concavation of the tongue by its striking against the lower teeth again at the reopening of the organ: there is nothing of that hissing sound heard in the pronunciation of the Santal palatals, which is slightly heard, when an Englishman pronounces ch, or j. chh, is the aspirate of the preceding consonant. j, stands exactly in the same relation to the English j, as the Santal ch to the English ch, namely by there being nothing of that hissing sound in the Santal j. jh, is the aspirate of the preceding consonant. n, this nasal, unlike the Sanscrit ra, may be both initial, final, and joined to other palatals. The Sanscrit letter, when pronounced in connection with other palatals, is pronounced just like the Santal; but when pronounced alone (as by the Hindus at present) it differs from the Santal U by the * I do not mean the corrupt pronunciation of some Bengalies, who pronounce cJh like tse. ( 5 ) tongue being a little hollow, when it strikes against the lower teeth again. This Santal nasal is pronounced by placing the tongue quite flat up to the palate and not allowing any concavation of the tongue at its leaving the gum and striking against the lower teeth again. This being a palatal nasal, it sounds, when preceded by a vowel, as if an i was inserted as an (ainy, the y being pronounced as in yes)-am6 (sounds somewhat like nyam). t, this cerebral (lingual) letter differs considerably from the English, and still more from the pure dental German t, in the pronunciation. It is pronounced by turning the tip of the tongue up against the hard palate and pronouncing the t, with, the tongue in that position; as tanga, an axe. th, is the aspirate of the preceding consonant; as then near, to, by, from. 4, stands in the same relation to the English, as the Santal t to the English t; as datc, tooth. 4h, is the aspirate of the preceding consonant. n, stands in the same relation.to the English n, as the Santal t to the English t. This nasal is never initial or final, but only joined to other cerebrals. (linguals). t, is a pure dental, not like the English t in take, but the German t in tief, only with the exception, that the Santal t has no aspiration whatever. th, is the aspirate of the preceding consonant. ( 6 ) -", is also a pure dental and sounds like the German d ýi idenken not like the English d, in did;.as ddul, to:strike. 6dh, is the aspirate of the preceding consonant. n, is a pure dentMl, W'hen joined to other dentals, but "when initial or final it is'not a pure dental, it is then pronounced just where the English n is pronounced, i. e. between the dental and cerebral (lingual), the tongue by closingo the organs 4touches at the root of the teeth, i, e. on the gum, instead of the teeth themselves,; as ns, this year; sahan, wood. p, is pronounced like the English p, with the exception of there being no aspiration in it. ph,:is the aspirate of the preceding consonant. ib, is like the 'English 'b; as botor, to fear. bh, is the aspirate'formdf the preceding consonant. m, his pronounced like the English m; as molog, the 'forehead. 4, 'is,pronounced 'like the English h in have; as As pleasure. s,.is not a dentail, nor yet a cerebral, but a palatal. It,ispronounced by drawing the tip of the tongue a 'little 'back rom:the' lower 'teeth, and the middle of it touching the pal~ate, expuiling the breath through the concavity of th'e tonguv, a that position:-thus the Santal is prodced Ii fhat position.:--thus the Santal 3*is,,Prodt iod. (7) SEMI-VOWELS. y, is pronounced like the English y in yes. This letter is used instead of e, when pronounced between two other vowels; as taecn=tayan, maeam=mayam, toeo=toyo. r, the sound, which this letter represents, is exceedingly difficult to pronounce for a European generally, there being only two countries in Europe (so far as I know) Sweden and Norway, (and even there only amongst the peasants) where it is to be found. It differs very much from the English r, in world, and still more from the dental or guttural r. It stands in the same relation to t as the dental r to t; it is a cerebral (lingual) r, pronounced by turning the tip of the tongue back against the hard palate, and letting the tongue glide quickly toward the root of the upper teeth on its way, when striking down against the lower teeth again. The Bengalees have also the sound; as for instance in boro. It is very necessary indeed to learn to pronounce this letter correctly, else the greatest confusion will be the result, which a few examples will show: Hor, is a road, but hor, a man; acrca, is red, but arak, is to set at liberty, etc. rh, is the aspirate of the preceding semi-vowel. w, is pronounced a little more o-like, than the English w. It is used instead of o, when it is placed between two other vowels; as heo( =hewa, eoer= ewer. ( 8 ) SEMI-CONSONANTS. M, cH, t', p'. The sounds, which these letters represent are peculiar to the Santal language; the first is a guttural, the second a palatal, the third a dental, or rather between dental and cerebral (lingual), and the fourth a labial. They have the peculiarity in common of never being initials, but only finals, and in certain cases middle letters. When succeeded by a vowel, as in the conjugation of the verb, they are changed into their respective soft sounds; as senolk= sonogo, rarecli--=rarejo, atet'=atedo, chcahap'= cha habo. An exception to this rule is caused by the vowel a; as chhaap'a~ (not chahaban)-, still this exception is very often disregarded. These sounds are not pronounced like other consonants by successively "closing and opening," and allowing the breath to touch the respective organs at their reopening, but by partly inhaling the breath and simultaneously closing the throat and the respective organs, and not allowing the breath to touch them at their reopening, but letting it pass unarrested out of the throat: thus an abrupt half consonant is produced. The "Schnalz-laute" (click-sounds) mentioned by Dr. Lepsius, as existing in some of the African languages, appear to have some similarity to these Santal jerks; but according to Boyce's description, they are not alike. ( 9 ) S These sounds are hard and pronounced very sharply and abruptly, so that it would be impossible to use the soft letters g, j, t, b as bases-, and as the hard guttural in English is lk, the hard palatal ch, the hard dental (not pure) t, and the hard labial p,-I therefore have thought myself justified in adopting k, ch, t, and p as the basis for these four Santal sounds, they being respectively a guttural, palatal, dental, and labial. It is true that the Santal guttural jerk is pronounced further back in the throat, than the English k, nay even further than the Arabic 3 q;* still, as in English k is the hard sound for g, p for b, and t for d &c., it seems, that no better basis can be had for it. The Sanscrit visarga (:) might (as it has been) be used; but that sound, as pronounced by the Hindus of Bengal and the North West, is no nearer to the Santal guttural sound, than l, it being a slight aspirate, which the former is not at all; on the contrary, it is an inspirate. And if we adopted (:) for the Santal guttural, what should we adopt for the palatal? the same? It might be done (as it also has been, and would be no greater irregularity, than the Germans using the same letter ch both as a guttural and palatal, as in ach and ich; but as we are compelled to use t as the basis for the dental, and p for the labial, it seems to be more consistent also to use ko as the basis, for the guttural, and ch for the palatal; for if p, which changes into b, when succeeded by a vowel, is the right basis for the labial (and we cannot use any other), and t, which changes into d, for - The Arabic 'ain when having the tashdid is very much like it; as Jx ( 10 ) the dental:-then also ch, which changes into j, and k, which changes into g, must be right as the basis for the palatal and guttural respectively. Besides this, if visarga (:) were used for both the guttural and palatal Santal sounds, an i would have to be inserted in the latter case, in order to make it sound somewhat like the Santal ch. For instance raarecR would have to be written rarei:, which would be incorrect, there being no i in the word; because, if there were, then, instead of being rarejo in the middle voice, present and future tenses, it would be rareijo; for it is the visarga (I mean the Santal palatal jerk) not the i, which should be changed into j, in the same manner, as it is changed into g, not taking away the preceding vowel, when used as a guttural in seno:= senog-o; tio:= tiogo, not tigo, which would be the case if the preceding i in rarei: changed intoj. 7d, is pronounced by sharply inhaling the breath, and quickly closing the throat below the guttural point, by which the breath is suddenly stopped, and on re-opening it, allowing the breath free passage through the mouth:-Thus an abrupt guttural jerk is produced; as aci, a bow. It is as if the k were cut off: only with the difference that it is pronounced below the guttural point, instead of where the English k is pronounced. ch, is pronounced by sharply inhaling the breath, and suddenly closing the throat (as by 1k) and at the same time ( 11 ) iking mwith the flat of the tongue sharply agac inst the palate, and re-opening it without allowing the breath to touch that organ0, (for in that case a pure palatal-with the exception of the closing of the throat-would be pronounced):-thus an abrupt half ch is produced. t', is pronounced by sharply inhaling the breath, and suddenly closiug the throat (as by k) and at the same time striking with the tip of the tongue at the root of the upper teeth, and re-openingt the mouth without allowing the breath to touch there (at the root of the upper teeth), hut letting it have free passage through the moith:--~thus an abrupt half t is produced. 7, is pronounced by sharply in haling the breath, and sud-:denly closing the throat (as by Al) and at the same time sharply closing the lips, and re-opening them without allowing the breath to touch them, but letting it free passage through the moutth:-thus a half p is produced. SECTION IlL-OF ACCENTUATION, All monosyllabic- wYords, when doubled, have the a-ccent an the last syllable; as d!cJ, J0ild. This is also the c-se wvhen the " mutual" r is inserted; as cUW, doyoti. In words -f te o syllables the penultima is generally -ccented; as k~~~id,5 a nausrm. iAn exception to this rld attends the four semi-coksonants; as rht', crai senei. Alsue words cnidin'g in a dipbthong; as 6i'd/c And finally 12 ) words terminating' in;i; tehACi, se6e;i I1l esides these there are many other exceptions. Words of three syllables are not very conumon in the Santal language, and when occurring, the accent varies; as p a is i pQoreri, sacictO. Jingling words of four syllables retain the accent they have, when separate. By the declension of nouns the accent is not altered. In the conjugation, the vowel preceding the semi-consonants 1- and t', is accented. But when those inspirations are followed by a vowel, and 13 consequently changes into g, and t' into d, then the succeeding vowel has the accent as dcU] kit'; dalkedea, SECTOIN fIV-OF THE PERMJ UTATION F01 LETTERS. The four semi-consonants, when followed by a vowel, are, as above mentioned, changed into the respective softer sounds, viz. 1I into g, chl into j, t' into d, and p' into b. An exception from this rule is, that where one of those semi-consonants is followed by a it ought not to be changed in to the softer sound. It is true, that many Santals do notadhere to this rule, but the best-speaking Santals do, and analogy shows, that it ought to be done; as cdalakW'c, instead o0 o, is sometimes changcd into iw, and c into yi ic. Ce whenc they are inserted between two vovwels; as Ie' o hwa, hw tdCC Stava, ( 13 ) CHAPTER II. OF NOUNS. To Nouns belong Gender, Number, Case and Declension SECTION I.-OF GENDER. The genders are three, masculine, feminine and neuter. The names of males are masculine; the names of females, feminine; and the names of inanimate objects, neuter. The Santals have three methods of distinguishing sex, viz. a. By difference of words; as herel, a man; mgiju, a woman; andia, a male; e~ga, a female. b. By difference of termination; as kora, a boy; kori, a girl. c. By prefixing a word indicative of the gender; as andia kil, a tiger; eAga k1l, a tigress. SECTION II.-OF NUMBER. Santal nouns have three numbers, viz. Singular, Dual and Plural. The dual is formed by adding kin, and the plural, by adding ko to the root. The neuter receives also kin in the dual, and ko in the plural. ( 14 ) SECTION III.-OF CASE. The Santal noun has properly speaking no cases, at Ieastnot in the classical sense, as the word never changes, but takes various affixes which give the required meaning; still,. those affixes being so constantly used, they may be regarded as forming cases, thus: facilitating the comprehension of theEuropean student. By those affixes eight cases may be formed, viz. theNominative, the Genitive or Pbssessive, the Instrumental, theDative, the Accusative or Objective, the Ablative, the Loca.-- tive, and the Vocative. The nominative is the root. The genitive is formed by affixing to the root ren, or aJY&, or af, or reald, or rea~. The first of these is used, when the succeeding noun designates an animate object, whereas the four last are used, when the following nonn is a neuter. Ren is formed from re, in, and on, that (as in on-i, on-kin, on-4o, on-parom)= re-on= ren; as ]J-re-on-/ko=~lirenko-, and aJU is formed from a, at, to, and l, which latter is the sign of' the neuter, as shown when a, at, to, is used in connection with the verb; as em-a-e-a-ko: em, to give, a, to, e, him,.a,, it, or it is, ko, they=they will give him, or lit. to give to him. it is they. In the above example the a is undoubtedly a pre-- position, and the e the 3rd. person singular. Dale-ak-me dak, water, a, to, at, k it (neuter), me, thou (imperative) =water to it thou= water it! (i. e. the tree). A.9 comes from a at, to. ( 15 ) and i, sign of the neuter like M1. Reald comes from re, in, and all, and reaz comes from re, in, and an (vide declensions of Pronouns). The instrumental case is formed by te, into, hotete by means of, or then or thech, which two latter come from thcai, a place. The dative case is formed by adding then, thech to the nominative. The accusative is like the nominative. The ablative is formed by kchon, khocl, khonak~, from. The locative is formed by re in, on, or talare, in the midst, or motore, among. The vocative is formed by prefixing interjections such as e!, eho! 0! It will be seen by the above, that the genitive, instrumental and dative are really all locatives. SECTION IV.-OF DECLENSION. The Santal language may be said to have three declensions, one belonging to masculine and feminine, and the other two to the neuter. Their respective terminations are as follows: ( 16 ) I. DECLENSION. 11. DECLENSION. Ill. DECLENSION. No11. Gen. Instr. Dat. Ace. Abl. ren then, te, hotete then khom realS, alE, reafi, aAi te, then, thechi khon, khonal, khoc/i re e! reakl, al, reaA, aiz te te kion, khomalS, kleho/ Loc. re Voc. e! The only difference between these three declensions is, that the instrumental of the first declension generally has then; as kora thenr e dalocholena, he was struck by the boy, and that the dative in the second declension has then, whereas in the third it has te. Te, is however also used to form the instrumental in the first declension. Nom. Gen. Instr. Dat. Acc. Abl. Loc. Voc. FIRST DECLENSION. Singular. Kora, the boy. Kora-ren, of the boy (as the mother-) Kora-then, te, hotete, by the boy. Kora-then, to the boy. Kora, the boy. Kora-Jehon, khonal, from the boy. Kora-re, in, on the boy. e Kora! O, boy! ( 17 ) Dual Nom. Korakin, the two boys. Gen. Korakin-ren,* of the two boys. Instr, Korakin-then, te, hotete, by the two boys. Dat. Korakicn-then, to the two boys. A cc. Korakin, the two boys. Abl. Korakin-khon, from the two boys. Loc. Korakirn-re, in, on the two boys. Voc. e Korakin, 0, two boys! Plural. Nom. Korako, the boys. Gen. Korakco-ren,* of the boys. Instr. Koraklco-then, te, hotete, by the boys. Dat. Koraclo-then, to the boys. Acc. Koralco, the boys. Abl. Korako-khon, from the boys. Loc. Korako-re, in, on the boys. Voc. e Korako! O, boys9 SECOND DECLENSION. Singular. Nomn. Taiga, the axe. Gen. Taliga-realS, etc.,t of the axe (as the iron of-) * If the succeeding noun is to express a duality, then kin is added to ren and if a plurality, then ko is added. t It must be borne in mind, that the succeeding noun (in the nominative) decides whether ren, or reak' shall be used, not the word to which the genitive sign is affixed. When the succeeding noun (in the nominative) is an animate object, then ren is used, whether the word in the genitive be aniB ( s18 ) Instr. Tasga-te, by, with, the axe. Dat. Taiga-then, to the axe. Acc. Tagga, the axe. Abl. Tariga-khon, khoci, etc., from the axe. Loc. Tatiga-re, in, on the axe. Voc. e Talga! 0, axe! Duat. Nom. Tafgakin, the two axes. Gen. Ta gakin-reald, etc., of the two axes. Instr. Tafigakin-te, by the two axes. Dat. Taigakin-then, to the two axes. Acc. Tahigakin, the two axes. Abl. Taigakcin-khon, etc., from the two axes. Loc. Taigakin-re, in, on the two axes. Voc. e Ta9gackin! 0, two axes! Plural. Nom. Tafigcako, the axes. Gen. Taigako-realk, etc., of the axes. Instr. Taigako-te, by the axes. Dat. Tcagako-then, to the axes. Acc. Taigako, the axes. Abl. Tawgalco-klhon, etc., from the axes. Loc. Taigako-re, in, on the axes. Voc. e Tafigako, O, axes! mate or inanimate; and when the succeeding noun is a neuter, then ren cannot be used, even if the noun in genitive is an animate object. 1 9 ) THIRD DECLENSION. Singular. Nlom., Buru,, the -mountain.,. Gen. Bu ru-rea1., ren, etc., of the mountain.. Instr.- Buri-t-e, by the mountain.,, Pat. Buru-te, to the mountain'., Ace.- Bauru, the mountain., Abi. BurU-khom, etc.,, from the mountaini.ý Loc. Burm-re, in., on.the. mountain. Voc. e -Buru.! 0,.mountain'! Dualk: Nom.. Bitruki A, the two mountaijis. Gen.- i/ irukin-rea1&,, etc., of the two- mountalin,.-. Instr. Bwr/tlkn-te, by the two mountains. Pat. Burulcin-te., to the-two mountains.. Ace. Burulcin, the two mountains. Abi. Buruloin-khon, from the two mountains,, Loc.- Thrulcim-re, in, on the6 tWo mountainas. Vo. e Rurukin! 0,two mountains! Plural, Nom., 13'rulco,' the mountains. Gen., Bmru/co-reak, 'etc., of the mountains., ln~str.: Buruko-te, by the mountains. Pat.. Burulco-te, to the mountains.. Ae. Burulco, the mountains. Abi. Bur~uko-1khon;,ete., from.the -mountain's. ( 20 ) Loc. Buruko-re, in, on the mountains. Voc. e Buruco! 0, mountains! CHAPTER Il. OF ADJECTIVES. SECTION I.-OF GENDER. Adjectives sometimes vary in gender and number, but not in case. A number of adjectives terminate in a, when used in connection with a masculine, and in i, when in connection with a feminine; as lelha loora, a foolish boy; lelhi lori, a foolish girl. Besides this the adjectives make no distinction of gender. SECTION II.-OF THE COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. Santal adjectives are not compared by regular inflexions, but by affixing the ablative termination khon to the word which in English would be preceded by than, in order to form the comparative; as in-khoon amem marama, you are greater than I; andby prefixing sanammkhon, in order to form the superlative; as sanamkhon onie maraia, he is greater than all -greatest. The comparative is sometimes expressed by arh6, more; as oni arhoe marcmia, he is greater; and the superlative is often formed by utar, exceedingly; as oni do marai utcqr, or sanami khon mmrai utar, he is greatest. ( 21 ) SECTION 111.-OF NUMERIC&L ADJECTIVES. The Santals are not far advanced in mathemnatics, their numerals only amounting to twenty. CARDINALS. ORDINALS. 1 rnii one. 1aha-ren* or-ý real'c, the first. 2 b~reaor bar, two &c. laha-tayom-ren, realý', or tala-ren. 3 p~a or pe. talatnyom-ren, real,-, or hareatayom-ren 4 pg-nea or pgn. peatayom-ren, realL 5 m e.ppneatayot-n-ren, reaR. 6 tiirui. mdryetayomi-ren, reak. 7 ýae. turui tayom-ren, reaký. 8 ird1. 6ae tayom-ren, reakc. 9 Are. iral tayom-ren, reak. 10( g~l. are tayom-ren, reak. 1i g~1mi. g~l, tayorn-ren, real-,. 12 g~lbarea or gelbar. g~lmilf tayom-ren, reak. 13 g~lpi~a or g~lpe. g~lbar tayom-ren, reaký. 14 g~lpfpnea, or g~lpgn. g~1pe tayom-rcn, reakc. 15 g~lmo~re. gWlpon tayorn-ren, reaK. 16 g~ltidrui. g~lmao'e tayom-uen, reak'. 17 g~l~ae. g~lturui tayom-ren, reak. 18 g~lirai. g~l.Zae tayomi-ren, reaK. 19 g~ldre. g~lirdl tayom-ren, reak. 20 miiisi. g),l1re tayorn-ren, real%. eWhen the succeeding noun is an animate object, then ren is used, anid when an inanimate, object, then 9aeelc', ak', reek, or ah are used. ( 22 ) By combination the Santals may count so far as upward to 400; as 1mit' isi.'20, bar isi, 40, pe isi 60, pon isi 80, m~.re isi 100, turmi isi 1120 etc. The Santals do not say three tens thirty, but mit'isi gel, one twenty and ten= 30, etc. Upwards from twenty. they say; mit'isi mit'.21, mit'isi barea22: mit'si pa 23, etc. MISCELLANEOUS REMARKS ON THE lADJECTIVES. By affixing the pronominal suffixes, any adjective may become a verb, and be conjugated through the different tenses and' moods; as marai, great; maraf mean, I shall. make you great; maraiiol1ilkanae, he is. making himself great. The oblique cases may also'be conjugated as a verb; as inirenkecle a,I made him mine;. aclthenkedeae, he made him -h.is adherent. NOTE.--From,teny instead, of saying gelmit' &c., g10khon.rmit' &c.- -y be 'used. ( 23 ) CHA PTER IV. OF PRONOUNS. Pronouns are of six kinds, Personal, Possessive, Demonstrative, Interrogative, Relative, and Indefinite; all of which have three numbers, viz., the Singular, Dual and the Plural. SECTION I.-OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. The personal pronouns have two forms, the full and the abridged, the latter of which may be annexed to any part of speech. FULL PRONOUNS. Singular. 1 1, I. 2 Am, thou. 3 A c/, self. 4 Oni* he or she Neuter Ona, it Dual. Plural. i Ali, Alas, wetwo. Ale, Abon, Abo, we Aben, youtwo. Ape, you. A kin, they two. them-selves. A,ko, they themselves Onkin, they two. Onko, they. Onakin, they two. Onako, they. A lan in the Dual, and abon and abo in the Plural are used, when the person addressed is included; whereas alin in the Dual and ale in the Plural are used, when the person addressed is excluded. * Oni, Onkin and Onko, are strictly speaking demonstrative pronouns from on, that, and i, kin, ko. ( 24 ) Aci self, is sometimes incorrectly written ai:, aa there is no i in the word, but the i-like sound is produced by the semi-consonant c/ being a palatal. Ac, self, is only used in the 3rd person. For the 1st and 2nd person there is no special form for self, but the personal pronouns with the addition of tege, are used as substitutes, when requisite. The Santals have no honorific pronouns, neither do they use the plural of the personal pronouns as such, in the way it is used in other languages; and yet they use both Dual and Plural in addressing a single person, but in a very peculiar and rather patriarchal way. The Dual is used between the son or daughter-in-law, and their respective father and mother-in-law, and all the older members of the family;t and the Plural is used between the husband's and wife's parents, and their brothers and sisters with their respective wives and husbands. But the most strange of all is, that the addressed person answers in the same number; as duup'ben Jawae! sit (lit. you two) down, son-in-law. Madin (not la or in) durup'a, yes, I (lit. we two) will sit down. Durup'pe sumdhi sit (lit. many of you) down, my child's father-in-law. Male (not bon or bo or in) durzup'kcana, yes, I (lit. we many) am sitting down. When two persons, being parents-in-law, speak about themselves, they do not use lac,i as every body else would do, SDual Akin, and Plural Ako. t As elder brothers and sisters with their wives and husbands, etc. ( 25 ) but thy use bon, or bo; as, e szmdhi, orklite bon chalaka, sebon baAa. 0, my child's father-in-law, shall we (you and I (lit. we all) go home or not? I cannot account for this singular way of using the dual and plural otherwise, than by assuming that it has sprung from the very correct notion of the husband and wife being one inseparable duality, so that when one is addressed, the other ought to be included; that the husband and wife suppose their respective parents, and elder brothers and sistersin-law, etc. to be so entirely one with the person they have married, that when they address any of them they include that person and use the dual; and that when parents-in-law address each other (or each others brothers and sisters with their respective wives and husbands) they think each other so interested in, and one with the married couple and their children, that they mentally combine them all with one person and use the plural. The Dual is never used to those who are younger than the married persons. Persons, who are not related to one another may also by mutual agreement address one another in the above manner. ( 26 ) DECLENSION OF THE FULL PERSONAL PRONOUN (vide Declension of nouns.) 1st Person Singular. N om. I, I. Gen. in-ren,* re/cin, renko; a1, ani, rea, reci, my, mine. Instr. It-te, hoete, then, thech, by me. Dat. Ii-then, theci, sem, sech', to or near or from me. Ace. Li, me. Abl. hi--khon, khonaJ khgc1, from me. Loc. Id-re, talare, in, on me. 2nd Person. Nom. Am, Thou. Gen. Am-ren, renkin, renko; al, agi, reak, reaithy, thine. Instr. Am-te, hotete, then, thece', by thee. Dat. Am-then, thee/, sen, sec/, to thee. Ace. Am, thee. Abl..A1 m-khon, klchona/, from thee. Loc. Am-re, talactre, in, on thee. 3rd Person. Nom. A chit self. Gen. Ack-ren, remkin, ren/co; aTS, ani, read, reah, own. Instr. Acd-te, hotete, then, theci, by self. Dat. Ac/-then, thed, sen, sec/, to self. SRen. (dual irenkin and plural renko) is used, when the succeeding nominative is an animate object, whereas all the others denote inanimate objects t Oni and ona declined n the same way. ( 27 ) Acc. A e'N, self. Abi. Ac/1-khomcdio, from self. I oe. Ac/i-re, tatare, in, on self. 1st Person, Dudl. 'Nom. Alin., or alcni, we tw'o. týGen. A ii-ren, renkin, renko;.ak3', -aA, recd3, i'eati, our,, ours. Instr. -Alin'-te, hotete, then, (heeN, by us two. Pat.. A lin,-ihen, 1thechi sen, sec/i, 'to us two..Acc. 'Alin') us two. -Abl. A li,'-khon, khoncd', from us two. L1oc. _Au'-re, tcalare, in, on us two. 2nd Person. 'Nom. A ben, you two. -',Gen. 'Aben-yen, renkin, ren'ko; aJk, aiz, reak", remo, yo;x, yours. Instr. A ben- te, h'Otete, then, thec/i, you two. PDat. A ben-then,. theeli, scm, sec/i, to you two. Ace. Ab3 Yb, you- two..Abl. Abcn-1ehon~, khona1k, from youl two. Loc. Aben-re,.tcdare' in, OH1 You two. 3rd Person. Nom. Akin, they two themrselves..en, Akcin-rem, ren/cin, rem/ca; alc, auz, reaih, re'a/J, their -ownI. Instr, Akin-ic, kgtctc, (Ihen,.t(helIt, by themnselves,. ( 28 ) bat. A kin-then, (heeli, to themselves. Ace. Akin,5 themselves. Abi. Akin-khon, khonaJJ, fro-m themselvesý. Loc. Akin-re, talare,5 in, on themselves. 1st Personi, Plural. Nom. Ale., abon or abo, we.t Gen. Ate-ren, renkin, renko;- aJ, afi, rea1e', reafi, onr, ours. Jnstr. A te-te, hotete, then, thecli, by us. Dat. A te-then, (hecli, sen, sec/i, to us. Ace. Ale, us. Abi. Ale-khon, kehona1o, from us. Loc. A te-re, talare, in, on us. 2nd Person. iNom. Ape, you. Gen. Ape-yen, renkoin, renko; ab," ai4, reak', reaii you yours. Instr. Ape-te, hgtete, then, thecli, by you. Dat. Ape-then, thecli, sen, sec/i, to you. Ace. Ape, you. Abi. Ape-kchon, khonak, fron. you. Loc. Ape-re, tatare, in, on you. 3rd Person. Nonm. Ak,-o, they themselves. Gen. A ko-ren, ren'ikin, renlko; ak,, ah, reafk, their own. Instr. A hco-tc, hotete, (hen (hecli by themselves, Dat. Ace. Abl. Loc. ( 29 ) Ako-then, thech, sen, sehe, to themselves. Ako, themselves. Ako-khon, khonalc, from themselves. Ako-re, talare, in, on themselves. SUFFIXES, OR ABRIDGED PRONOUNS. Singular.?, I m, thou e, he or she. Dual. li or laz, we two. ben, you two. kin, they two. Plural. le, bon, bo, pe ko we. you. they. When the words to which these suffixes are annexed terminate in a consonant, the full pronoun is used in the 1st person Singular, and an e is either prefixed or affixed to the 2nd person Singular. They are declined as follows: Singular. Nom. 4, I. Gen. t-i-n, My. Dat. a-d, to or for me. Ace. i, or ind, me. 1st Person. Dual. li,, la~, we two. ta-lii, ta-lai, our. a-lin, a-lai, to, or for us two. lin, lai, us two. Plural. le, bon, bo, we. tale, ta-bon, ta-bo, our. a-le, a-bon, a-bo, to or for us. le, bon, bo, us. ( 30 )' 2nd Person. N. m or em, thou. G. ta-mn, thy. ). a-m, to or for thee. Ac. m or me; thee. N. e, he, she. G. ta-e, his, her. D. a-e, to or for his or her. Ac., him, her. ben, you two. pe,. you; ta-ben, your (two.) ta-pe, your. a-ben, to or for you a-pe, to or for you. two. ben, you two, pe,;you. 3rd Person. kin, they two. ko, they. taJ-in, their (two:) ta-ko, their. a-kin, to for or a-ko, to or for them. them two. kin, them two. ko, them. SECTION II.-OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. These are supplied by the genitive case of the full personal pronouns. 1st Person, Singular. N. G. Itiren,* Iia1k, IRai, Izrea1, Ireafi, my, mine. IRren-reaJ, or Idrea1,-ren, etc., of my or mine. * In the dual renkin and in the plural renko is used, though not always, as the sign of number is often added to the succeeding word; as inren hapqne iama, amren hqpqnkin Aama, ihTren hJpqn ko Aama. These pronouns are used both as adjectives and substantives. ( 31 ) In str. Dat. Ace. Abi. Loc. Nom. Gen. Instr. Dat. Ae. Abi. Loc. Nom. Gen. Instr. Dat. Acc. Abi. Loc. Nilrert-te, hgtete, (hien, or l1"Iretk'-te, by mine. RLi'en-the~n or Threa1o-te, to mine. lyiqven, Jn~recWo, myj. I Jjlrem-1khon, or Threak'-Zchom or khonct1., from mine. inren-re, tctlare, or Jnireaik-re, taictre, in or on mine. 2nd Person. A mren, A ma1.', etc., A'mren-realc, etc., Amren-te, etc..,.Amren-then, etc., Amren, Amrea1k, etc., A mren,-1chon, etc., A mren-re., etc..,.3rd Person.. A ch'ren, A chreak1, etc., A chren-reakc', etc., Aeh'ren-te, then, etc., A clrert-(lcen, etc., A chren, A eIhreakl, etc., A chrena-lehon, etc.,. A ei~ren-re, etc., th y, thine. of thine. by thine. to thine. thine. from thine. in, on thine. his or her own. of his own. by his own. to his own. his or her own. from his own. in, on his own. 1st Person., Dual. Nom. Alin-ren * A linirea1k, aliniak, etc., our, ours (two) Gen. A lin'r6n-reak~ or alin' rea1k-ren', etc., of ours Instr. A lin'ren-te or atiireaklte, etc., by ours *Or Dual Alin'renkin, and Plural Alin" renko. (vide note on the preceding page.) Pat. Ace. Abi. Loc. Nom. Gen. Instr. Pat. Ace. Abi. Loc. Nom. Gen. Instr. Pat. Ace. Abi. Loc. INomn. Gen. ]Instr. Pat. Ace. AUl. Loc. ( 32 ) A lii~ren-then, or ali,&rerk'-then, Alin-'ren-1chon, or cdi,'reak'-khon, A li,~ren-re, or ali~ireaL-re, 2nd Person. A ben ren, abenreaim, etc., Abena ren-rea1ic, etc., Abenren-te, etc., A benren-then, etc., A benren, abenrectic etc.,.A benren lihon, etc,, A benren-re, etc., 3rd Person. A icinren, alein reaJ,, etc., A kinren-reakA', etc., Akib-nren-te, then, etc., Akinren-then, etc., A kinren, akin reakW, A Jeinren-ichon, etc., Aloinren-re., etc., 1st Person Plural. Aleren,* alerea11, etc., Aleren-real,-k, or alerea1~ren, etc., A leren-te, then, or alereak~-te, etc., Aleren-(hem, oy alerecr1'-fhen, -Aleren, alerea1', ete., A leren-khon, or alerea1--khon, Ateren-re or alereak.-re, etc., to ours our, ours from ours in, on ours your, yours of yours by yours to yours your, yours from yours in, on yours (two) (two) if their own (two) of their own by their own to their own their own from their own in, on their owna our, ours. of ours. by ours. to ours. our, ours. from ours. in, on ours. ( 33 ) Nom. Geii. Iustr. Dat. Ace. Abl. Loc. Nom. Gen. Instr. Datv. Acc. Abl. Loc. 2nd Person. Aperen, aperecW,* etc., Aperen-rea', or cpereak-ren, etc., Aperen-te, then, or apereak'-te, etc., Aperen-then, or apereak-then, etc., Aperen, apereakE', etc., Aperen-khon, or aperea1-khon, Aperen-re, or aperecd-re, 3rd Person. Akoren, akoreak', etc., Akleoren-reak', or akoreak'-ren, Akoren-te, or akoreak'te, Akoren-then, or aklcoreak'-then, Akoren-akoreal' etc., Akoren-khon, or akoreaM-khon, Akoren-re, or akcoreakd-re, your, yours. of yours. by yours. to yours. your, yours. from yours. in, on yours. their own. of their own. by their own. to their own. their own. from their own. in, on their own. Ren, as already mentioned, denotes that the following noun is an animate abject; as J4ren hpoQt my son. If the following noun is in the dual, then kin is added to it, and if in the plural, then ko; as inrenlkin hpQon, my two sons; Iiren ko hppon, my sons. On the south side of the Damuda river, towards Orissa, the singular has also a suffix, namely ic/; as 1irenich hQpQn, my son. AM, asi, real, reaA are used when the following noun is a neuter; as Iinak' taiga, my axe etc. Amongst old people * REMARKs.-The first is used, when the Nominative is animate, and the second, when it is inanimate. C ( 34 ) re is sometimes used instead of ren; as bohure efigat, the bride's mother. The genitive case of the suffixes, although its principal use is in connection with the verb, is often employed in connection with nouns; as orajltin, my house. But Santals very often dispense with possessive pronouns altogether, and simply use the personal pronouns to express that relation; as hopon in or inthopon, my son; am hopon, thy son, etc. SAnother possessive form tet't is often used in connection with nouns, which makes no distinction between gender and number; as hopon tet', his or their son; d.rtet', its branch. In accordance with the possessive case, the instrumental, ablative, and dative cases are also declined. Ren is formed from the locative re, iv, by affixing an n, which shows the object to be animate. Te, d;, is also changed into ten for the same reason; then comes from thaii a place. The Instrumental case. Nom. Inhoteten, or Ihhotete, the one* through or by me. Gen. ihoteten-ren, rea1', or Lihotete-ren, reak, of the one by me. Instr. Ihoteten-te, etc., by the one through me. * When kin or ko are affixed to ten, or then, then of course "ones" must be written. Irhoteten, and inthen are used as substantives. t This tet' is also used as a difinite article; as hotet' do bugigia, the man is good. At other times it is used like itself; as atotetregi in the village itself. ( 35 ) Dat. Iiiloteten-t(hen, etc., to the one tihroughi me. Acc. Ihhoteten, Lihotete, etc., the one through me. Ab. hihoteten-lchon, from the-one through me. Loc. 1,ihoteten-re, in the one through me; The, Dative case: Nom. i2then, the one near me. Gen. Jthen-ren or realr, etc., of the one near me: Instr. iA"then-te, by the one near me. Dat. Tithen-then, to the one near me.. Ace. i-then, the one near me, Abl; 1ithen-khon, from the one near me or from near me. Loc. Ibithen-re, in the one near me; The Ablative case has only 4i1hozi ren, which is declined like Iren; as Iikhonrente, by the one of (them) from me, etc. The genitive case of the instrumentaland dative cases is also declined like Liren; as hihoteteren then to the one of (them) through me; Lithenrente, by the one of (them) near me. In fact these cases. may be declihed, and re-declined, ad infinitum... SECTION III.-OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS Singular: Dual. Plural. Noi,* this (near).. Nokin, these two. Noko, these.. Oni, that (farther distant OnJkin, those two. Onko, those; or absent). * This o in noi sounds very much like an oo (h)7-in fact many Santhals pronounce iini.(oonee) ( 36 ) Honi, that (still far- Honkin, ther distant). Hani, that (furthest Hankin, distant). Ni, this (same) (near). Nikin, ti Ini, that (further dis- Inkin, t tant.) [distant.) Hini, that (furthest Hinkin, Noa, this (near) (neu- Noakcin, ter.) [tant.) Ona, that (further dis- Onackin, Hona, that (still fur- Honakir ther distant.) Hana, that (furthest Hanaki7 distant.) Nia,othis (same) (near). Niakin, Ina, that (further dis- Inakin, tant.) [distance.) Hina, that (furthest Hinaki? those two. I Honko, those. those two. hese two. hese two. those two. these two. those two., those two. Hanko, those. Niko, these. Inko, those. Hinlko, those. Noako, these. Onako, those. Honako, those. a, those two. Hanako, those. these two. Niako, these. those two. Inako, those., those two. I Hinako, those. 1 The first seven of these pronouns relate to animate objects; and the last seven to inanimate ones. These pronouns may be used both as adjectives and substantives. Nonkan, such as this Nonkankin, such Nonkanko, such one, etc. as these two. as these. Onkan, such as that. Onkankin, a I Onlkanko, Honkan, such as that. Honkankin,, I Honkanko, a ( 3!7 ) RaiaTan, such as th~at. Nen/can, such as ~his. -En/can, such as that. lien/can, such as that. NYon/canalzs, such as this. 0n/cana1k, such as that. Hon/c~ana1r,, such as that, Han/c~anal4,' such as that..A'en/canalo', such as this. En/canaký,, such as that. Hen/canct/, such as that. Hanicanlein, i NAen/cankzin, f E nkan/in, I 0lnkranaJ~cin, i -Nen/canalricin, en/c, ra n ( tk/i n, Itan/canico, o ifNen/c-an/co, i v Enkan/co, I i lien ican/co, NAon/canalc'co, 0On 4.anr a k.7co, Hon/Lcr.a n als/co, HwiilcanaN/co, En/canaklco, flen/canakk1o, IF of In the last seven pronouns ct1-., added to lean to denote the neuter, may be dispensed with, as also non/can, on/can, e tc., may he used" as neuter. These pronouns mnay be used both as adjectives and substantives. SECTION IV-.OF INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. Singular. 0Olcoe? who?2 Ghele.? what.? 0/ca which? Chet'? what?2 Dual. Olcoelzmn? what? Ohele/cin?6 what? 0/ca/cm? which? Ohet'/cin? what? Plural. Olcoe/co? who? Cihele/c-o? what? 0/ca- ic? which? Chet'/co? what? The two first of these apply to animate objects, and the two last to inanimate, ones. They are all declined like the personal pronouns. '( 38 ) SECTION V.-OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. The Santal language has no special relative pronouns for animcte objects, but supplies 'their place by the personal (full and abridged), the interrogative, and demonstrative pronouns; as holako hechlen, onkodo olokena? they who came yesterday, what has become of them? what has become of them who came yesterday? Hopon em rdnade tae, oni joharam lagit'e heclLakana, whose son you gave medicine to, he has come to thank you. Enbetarem rdnade, oni do phariaoena, to whom you gave medicine at that time, he has recovered. Hola jelem kirinl tede oni do okare menaea? the deer which you bought yesterday, where is it? Here are four examples, one for each of the four cases in connection with the verb. The interrogative pronouns chele and chet' are never used as relatives, only olcoe and olka or okata are used as such; as okoe nainam ko senackan, onie hejulckana, whom they have gone in search of, he is coming. oni ckiri~em metadini onie gociena, Whom you told me to buy, he has died. The interrogative pronouns are used as relatives, when the object is uncertain, whereas the personal and demonstrative pronouns are used as such, when the object is certain; as okoeko darealka, onko ko tAlma, they who are (may be) able, let them lift. Onko lco durealka, onko bare ttlochocdcom, they who are (in reality) able, let (allow) them (to) lift. Instead of relative pronouns the numerous participles and ger ( 39 ) unds are extensively used; as dildallede ko onkoko men daread'a, in do ba' baraeet'a, they who saw him strike, they are (will be) able to say; I do not know. Hola hecklen ko hor, on ko do okaenac what has become of the people who came yesterday? In the neuter the pronoun is often dropped altogether; as holam agulet', onado okare? where is that which you brought yesterday? There is another class of pronouns implying that the object is neuter, which combine demonstrative and relative meaning, and are indeclinable. They are as follows:Singular. Dual. Plural. nolce, this which znoeoekin, these two wh. nokoekco, these wh. one, that,, onekin, those two,, oneo, those,, hone, that,, honekin, those two,, honeko, those,, hans, that,, hanelin, those two,, haneko, those,, nelle, this,, nek'ekin, these two,, ne;ekco, these,, ene, that,, enekin, those two,, eneko, those,, hene, that,, henekin, those two,, heneko, those,, These pronouns are very often succeeded by the demonstratives; as one onam agulet', that which thou didst bring, etc. The same difference exists between nogoe and neKe, one and ene, and hone, hane and hene, as between noi and ni, on/can and enfcan, etc. ( 40 ) SECTION VI.-OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. The following are,some of the principal indefinite pronouns: Mit', one, a. Adi, much, many. Banar, both. Udi, much, many. Joto, all, the whole Uri, much, many. Sanam, all. Olcoe, somebody. Gota, the whole. Okoe hobah, nobody. A dorn, some. Okcoeko, some. E tal, other. Jahae okoe, any one. Tinal, soe, Ar, arho, more. CHAPTER V. OF VERBS. The Santal verb, in connection with the pronominal suffixes, (which constitute an essential element of its formation), is unquestionably the most important part of Speech in the language; and so extremely artificial and complex, and yet so simple and transparent, is it in its construction, that it does not even yield to the Turkish, which hitherto, with all its Voices, Negatives, Impossibles and Causatives, its Tenses, Participles and Gerunds, has been deemed to be one of the most philosophical of languages; for what the Santal vero lacks in Negatives and Impossibles, it more than makes up for in cases. ( 41 ) To Santal verbs belong Voice, Mood, Tense, Gender, Number, Person, Case, Forms and Conjugation. a. VoicES. The voices are five in number, viz: 1. ACTIVE. a. The General Form; * as Dal-et'-ko-kan-a-e, he is striking them; Dar-et'-kan-a-e, he is fleeing. b. The Reservative Form; as Dal-ka-koo-kan-a-e, he is striking them; (and leaves them).. c. The Intensive Form; as Am-e Da-dal-kan-a, he is striking thee. 2. RECIPROCAL ACTIVE. a. The General Form; as Dapal-et-kan-a-e, he is striking together (something). b. The Reservative Form; as Dapal-ka-k-kan-a-e, he is striking together (and leaves it). c. The Intensive Form; as Da-k-pa-l-kan-a-e, he is striking together. 3. REFLEXIVE. a. The General Form; as Dal-ok-kan-a-e, he is striking himself; Gujuml-kan-a-e, he is dying. b. The Reservative Form; as Dal-k-oE-kIan-a-e, he is striking himself. c. The Intensive Form; as Dal-og-ok-kan-a-e, he is striking himself. 4. RECIPROCAL REFLEXIVE. * Vide Explanation of the different Forms, p. 45. ( 42 ) a. The General Form; as Dapal-ok-kan-a-e, he is striking mutually= fighting. b. The Reservative Form; as Dapal-lc-o'-kan-a-e, he is fighting. c. The Intensive Form is wanting. 5. DEPONENTS; as Horo-e-irol-kcn-a, he is cutting Dhan. Remark 1. The Intensive Form and the Deponents have only six* tenses, the Future, the Present, and the Imperfect, and the three Inchoatives. Remarle 2. The Reflexive voice is extensively used as a Passive both with the Common and Neuter Gender; the Simple Reflexive being generally used in connection with the Neuter, and the Reflexive Causative with the common Gender; as Dal-ok-kanac, it is being struck; Da~lochoJl-kanue, he is being struck. (lit. he lets himself be struck.) But the simple Reflexive is also employed for the common Gender; as Sab-ol-a-e, he will be caught. Remark 3. In the Santal language there are a number of impersonal verbs with the accusative case; as tetazet'-ko-a, they are thirsty (lit. it thirsteth them); menald-ko-a, they are; banuK-ko-a, they are not. Remark 4. There are verbs in the Santal language, which would seem to belong to the Neuter voice; but, so far * With certain verbs many of the other tenses are also used; as 9hoe. emlena, I will not give (this or that). ( 43 ) as I have been able to ascertain, they are all in reality either Reflexive or Deponent or Impersonal verbs. b. MOODS. There may be said to be five moods in Santalee, viz., the Indicative, the Subjunctive, the Benedictive, (or Precative) the Imperative, and the Infinitive; as Dal-a-e, he will strike; Dal-khan-e, if he will strike; or Dal-cho-e, he may strike, or Paset'e dal, perhaps he will strike (these are different * particles used in connection with the Subjunctive); Dal-ma-m! mayest thou strike, or that thou strikest; Dalme! strike thou! Janhe dld e senakana, he has gone to thrash out Janhe. Remarl. Besides these moods there are two participles (adjective or relative and adverbial), and one Gerund for each tense. c. TENSES. Of tenses there are twenty three, viz. the Future, the General Incomplete Present, the Special Incomplete Present, the Recent Past, the Anterior Past, the Perfect, the General Incomplete Past, the Special Incomplete Past, the Indecisive Pluperfect, the Decisive Pluperfect, the Inchoative Future, the Inchoative Present, the Inchoative Past, the Optative, the Conditional, the Contingent, the Preliminary Future, the Preliminary Expostulative, the Preliminary Persuasive, the Preliminary Admissive, the Continuative Future, the * The subjunctive is also expressed without any particle, as Senkcate ar nelkoe, chet'e mena? going and (if) he sees them, what will he say? ( 44 ) Continuative Present, and the Continuative Past: each of which has a Causative throughout all voices, moods, numbers, persons, and cases. d. GENDERS. There are two genders in connection with the verb, the common and the neuter; as Awr-oJU-ae, he will fall; nur-oJd-a, it will fall. (Nom-case) Dal-ka-e-a-ko, they will strike him; Dalka-1-a-ko, they will strike it; (Acc. case) Dal-a-e-a-ko, they will strike for him; Dal-a-o-a-ko, they will strike at it. (Dat. case) e. NUMBER. Santal verbs have three numbers in the common gender, viz., the Singular, the Dual and the Plural; whereas the neuter Gender has only one, the Singular. When Duality or Plurality is to be expressed in the neuter gender, then pronouns must be prefixed; as Dala-e, he will strike; Dal-a-kin, they two will strike; Dal-a-ko, they will strike, Ona 9iurola it will fall; onakcin Auro'ia they (neuter) two will fall; onaklo iuro7ka, they (neuter) will fall. f. PERSONS. There are three persons in Santali, 1st the speaker, 2nd the person spoken to, and 3rd the person spoken of. The 1st person dual has two forms, one used when the person addressed is excluded (as alid, we two)-, and one when he is included (as alai, we two)-, and the 1st person plural has three forms, one employed when the addressed person is ex ( 45 ),eluded (as ale, we), and two, when he is included (as abon or abo) (vide Pronouns). g. CASES. In many languages, cases have no connection with the conjugation of verbs, but in Santali the verb is influenced by four eases, the Nominative, the Genitive, the Dative and the Accusative, which moreover may be joined and rejoined, till it makes in all nine; as 1. the Nominative, 2. the Nominative with Genitive, 3. the Nominative with two Genitives, 4. the Nominative with Dative, 5. the Nominative with Dative and Genitive, 6. the Nominative with Dative and two Genitives; 7. the Nominative with Accusative, 8. the Nominative with Accusative and Genitive, 9. the Nominative with Accusative and two Genitives; as Dalae, he will strike; Daltaeae he will strike his; Daltaetiqiae, he will strike his who is mine; Dalaeae, he will strike for him; Daleaetaee, he will strike for him who is his; Dalue-tue-tiinae, he will strike for him who is his, who is mine; Daleae, he will strike him; Daletaeae, he will strike him who is his; Daletaetidae, he will strike him, who is his, who is mine. Remark. It will be observed, that the oblique cases are infixed between the root and the final a,* whereas the Nominative case is affixed to it. h. FORMS. There are four forms, viz. the General, the Reservative, the Intensive, and the Continuative;as, nel-a-e, he will see; * As Dacl-ko-a-e, He will strike them, dal being the root, ko the oblique,(acc.) case,, the "final a" and e the nominative case. ( 46) nel-ka'-a-e, he will see (and leave it for a while); nenel-a-e he will look at it; nam-a-e, he will get; d7am-ka-k-a-e, he will get (and keep till further); iea-nam-a-e, he will seek; Dalakae-tahen-a-e, he will continue striking. i. CONJUGATION. Conjugations there are two viz., the Inflective and Uninflective; as Dual-ko-a-e, he will strike them; on7io-e Da-dal-a, he will strike them. Only the Intensive Form is conjugated according to the 2nd, the General, Reservative and Continuative forms being conjugated according to the 1st conjugation. Remark. To these forms may be added a Repetitive which follows the General, the Reservative and the Intensive forms; as Daldalkedean, I repeatedly struck him; Daldallcadeae,he repeatedly struck him (and left him there); Dak'dal-kan-a-e, He is striking. TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE VERB. GENERAL FORM. _-4--- ACTIVE VOICE. NOM (OBJECT INkNIMATE.) Dal-a-e, He will strike (it). GEN. WITH NOM. Dal-tae-a-e, * He will strike (it) his. GEN. WITH GEN. AND NOM. $ Dal-tae-tin-a-e, He will strike (it) his who is mine. NOM. CAUSATIVE. Dal-ochoe-a-e, He will cause (it) to be struck. GEN. WITH NOM. Dal-ocho-tae-a-e He will cause (it) his to be struck. GEN. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dal-ocho-tae-ti&-a-e, He will cause (it) his who is mine, to be struck. * This may also be translated: he will strike for him. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dal-olc-a, It will be struck. Dal-ok-tae-a, What is his will be struck. Dal-oK-tae -tind-a, What is his, who is mine will be struck. Dal-ochok-a, It will be caused to be struck. Dal-ochokl-tae-a, What is his will be caused to be struck. Dal-ocholo-tae-tii-a, What is his, who is mine will be caused to be struck. - ACTIVE VOICE. Acc. WITH NOM. (OBJECT ANIMATE.) Dal-e-a-e, He will strike him. ACC. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dal-e-tae-a-e, He will strike him, who is his. AcC. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dal-e-tae-tini-a-e, He will strike him, who is his, who (again) is mine. AcC. CAUSATIVE. Dal-ocho-e-a-e, He will cause him to strike or to be struck. Acc. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dal-ocho-e-tae-a-e,.He will cause him, who is his, to strike oi to be struck. ACC. WITH GEN. GEN. AND' NOM. Dal-ocho-e-tae-tii-a-e, He will cause him, who is his, who is mine, to strike or to be struck. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dal-o'-a-e, He will strike himself. Dal-ok-tae-a-e, He, who is his, will strike himself. Dal-o1Z-tae-ti -a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will strike himself. Dal-ochok'-a-e, He will let himself be struck. Dal-ocho1k-tae-a-e, He, who is his, will let himself be struck. Dal-ocho1-tae-ti?-a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will let himself be struck. ACTIVE VOICE. REFLEXIVE VOICE. DAT. WITH NoM. (OBJECT INANIMATE.) Is wantino Dal-a-1-a-e, He will strike at or on it. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dcal-alE-tae-a-e, He will strike at (it) his. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dal-ca-1o-tae-tii-a-e, He will strike at (it) his, who is mine. S DAT. CAUSATIVE. Dcal-ocho-a-1'-a-e, He will cause (it) to be struck at, or allow it to be struck. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NoM. Dal-ocho-a-E-tae-a-e, He will cause (it) his to be struck at, etc. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dcal-ocho-a-k'-tae-tin-a-e, He will cause (it) his, who is mine, to be struck at, etc. ACTIVE Vi2E POICE. AREFLEXIVE VOICE. DAT. (OBJECT ANIMATE.) kDal-a-e-a-e, He will strike for or towards him. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NoM. Dal-a-e-tae-a-e, He will strike for or towards him, who is his. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dal-a-e-tce-ti-c-a-e, He will strike for or towavrds him, who is his, who (agaiu) is mine. S DAT. CAUSATIVE. Dal-ocho-a-e-a-e, He will cause te be struck for, or allow him to strike or be struck. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dal-ocho-a-e-tae-a-e, He will cause to be struck for or allow him who is his, to strike or be struck. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM, Dal-ocho-a-e-tae-tid-a-e, He will cause to be struck for or allow him who is his, who is mine to strike or be struck. Dal-jo2-a-e, He will strike for himself. Dcal-joi-tae-a-e, He, who is his, will strike for himself. cDal-joA-tae-ti-a-e,I He, who is his, who is mrine, will strike for himpself. Dcal-ocho-joi-a-e, IlHe willeause to be struck for himself. Dal-ocho-joh-tae-a-e, He, -who is his, will cause to be struck for himself. Dal-ocho-)joh-taei-tqi-a-e, He who is his, who is mine, will cause to be struck for himself. TH'E RESERVATIVE FORM. ACTIVE VOICE. Ace. WITH Nom. (INANIMATE.) Dal-ka-k'-a-e, He will strike it [and leave it (till further)] Acc. WITH GEN, AND NOM. Dal-ka-k-tae-a-e, He will strike what is his. Acc. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. SDaZ-ka-1-tae-tii-a-e, He will strike what is his, who is mine. Acc. CAUSATIVE. Dal-ocho-ka-k'-a-e, He will cause it to be struck. Acc. WITH. GEN. AND NTOM. Dal-ocho-ka-k'-tae-a-e, He will cause what is his to be struck. Acc. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dal-ocho-kca-k'-tae-tii-a-e, He will cause what is his, who is mine, to be struck.. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dal-koE-a, It will be struck (and left till further.) Dal-lco'-tae-a, What is his will be struck. Dal-cok'-tae-tini-a, What is his, who is min e will be struck. Dal-ocho-lcoE-a, It will be caused to be struck. Dal-ocho-kold-tae-a, What is his will be caused to be struck, Dal-ocho-kold-tae-ti,-a, What is his, who is mine will be caused to be struck. ACTIVE VOICE. Aco. (ANIMATE.) (him). Dal-ka-e-a-e, He will strike him (and leave Ace. WITa GEN. AND NOM. Dalc-ka-e-tae-a-e, He will strike him, who is his. Acc. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dal-ka-e-tae-tin-a-e, He will strike him, who is his, who is mine. Ace. CAUSATIVE. Dal-ocho-lka-e-a-e, He will cause him to strike or be struck. Acec. WITH GEN. AND Nor. Dal-ocho-ka-e-tae-ca-e, He will cause him, who is his, to strike or be struck. Ace. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dal-ocho-kca-e-tae-tid-ca-e, He will cause him who is his, who is mine, to strike or be struck. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dal-co1-a-e, He will strike himself. Dal-lko1-tae-a-e, He, who is his, will strike himself. Dal-coJE-tae-tid-a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will strike himself. Dal-ocho-kok-a-e, He will let himself be struck. Dal-ocho-kok1-tae-a-e, He who is his, will let himself be struck. Dcal-ocho-kolE-tae-tii-ca-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will let himself be struck. THE INTENSIVE FORM. ACTIVE VOICE. NO~m. (OBJECT IN ACTIVE TO PRECEDE-ý THE VERB.) Da,-dal-ct-e, He will strike. Nom. WITH GEN. Dct-dal.-tae-a-e, He who is his will strike. Nom. WITH GEN. ANTDGEN. Dct-dal-tae-tin--a-e, He who is his, 10ho is Zl mine will strike. tNomi. CAUSATIVE. Da-dat-o1kcho-a-e, He will cause to strike. Nom. WITH GEN. Dc& dat-o1kcho-tae-a-e., He, who is his wvill cause to strike.' Nom. WITH GEN. AND GEN. Dct-cal-o1'cho-tae-tini-a-e, He who is his, who is Mine, will cause to strike. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dcd-og-o1k-c-e, + He will strike himself or be struck. Dat -og-o1'-tae-a-e, He, who is his. will strike himself or be struck. Dad-og-o1'-tae-tiai-a-e, He who is his, who is mine, will strike himself, or be struck. Dcd-oohog-oA2'-a-e, He wvill let himself bestruck etc. Dal-ochog-ok'.-tae-a-e, He, who is hi's will let hi Lmself be struck. Dal-ochog-okc-tae-titi-a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will let himself be struck. *As oni-f& dadal-cs, I will strike him; ona-ri dadal-a, I wil-l strike it. t' This ca'usative has also another formn Dal-ok' cko-a-e, He wvill cause to be struck. +1 Or (inanimate) Dal-og olc'-c, It wvill be struck. RECIPROCAL. GENERAL FORM. ACTIVE VOICE. NOM. (INANIMATE.) Dapal-a-e, He will strike together. NoM. WITH GEN. Dapal-tae-a-e, He will strike his together. NOM. WITH GEN. AND GEN. Dapad-tae-tin-a-e, He will strike his, who is mine, together. NOM. CAUSATIVE. Dapal-ochoe-a-e, He will cause to strike or be struck together NOM. WITH GEN. Dapal-ochoe-tae-a-e, He will cause his to strike or be struck together. NOM. WITH GEN. AND GEN. Dapal-ochoe-tae-tiyi-a-e, He will cause his, who is mine, to strike or be struck together. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dapal-ok'-a, I will be struck together. Dapal-o1l-tae-a, What is his will be struck. together. Dapal-olr-tae-tin-a, What is his, who is mine will be struck together. Dapal-ocholc-a, It will be caused to be struck, together. hDapal-ochokl-tae-a, What is his will be caused to be struck together. Dapalochok-tae-tin-a, What is his, who is mine will be caused to be struck together. ACTIVE. VOICE. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Ace. (ANIMATE.) Dapcd-e-a-e, lie will cover* him.. Dapcd-ok'-a-e, He will strike mutually= fight Ace. WITH GEN. AND, NoM. Dctpcd e-tae-ca-e, He will cover him who. is his. Dqapc-oAk-tae-a-e, He, who. is his, will fight., Aec. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NO.M D apc4-e-tae-tin-a-e, He will cover him, who; Dapx4l61S-tae-ti a- e, Heý who is. his, whoil is his,, who is mine., mine,, will fight., Ace. CAUSATIVE. Dctpcd-ocho-e'-a-e, He will cause him. to, strike DctpcU ochok~-a-e,. He will let hiii self be caused niutually=fight. to. fight.. Ace. WITH GE N. AND Non. Dapa-ocho-e-tae-a-e, He will cause him,. who, Datp ocho1k-tae-a-e: He- who is his,. will letia his to figh't. himself be cau~sed to fight. Ace. WITH GEN. GEN, AND NO0N3. -Dapald-ocho-e,-tte,-tit-z-a-e, He will cause. him Dpico~[e6~ae He, who.. i's his,, wh& who is his, who. is. mine, to fight, is mine, will let hims-elf be caused t& fight. -The direct meaning of the Reciprocal is not used- in connnection with Dal, in the three first cases, whereas it L"' witia ot~her verbs; -as 'sns-e -e he will1 get hima, ilrpcsm-e-a-e' he -will get him together with another., ACTIVE VOICE. REFLEXIVE VOICE. DAT. (INANIMATE.) Dapal-a-k-a-e, He will strike (them) against Is wanting. one * another. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-a-k-tae-a-e, He will strike what is his, against one another. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-a-k-tae-tidi-a-e, He will strike what is his, who is mine, against one another. DAT. CAUSATIVE. Dapal-ocho-a-1r-a-e, He will allow it to strike or be struck together or cause it to get cover. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-ocho-ak-tae-a-e, He will allow his to strike or be struck together etc. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. D1pal-ocho-a-k-tae-tin~-a-e, He will allow his, who is mine, to strike or be struck together etc. O 0r -nr+ a nvafl nn ACTIVE VOICE. DAT. (ANIMATE.) Dapcal-a-e-a-e, He will strike together for him. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NoM. Dcapal-a-e-tae-a-e, He will strike together for him, who is his. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOMr. Dapal-ca-e-tae-tiq-a-e, He will stike together for him, who is his, who is mine. DAT. CAUSATIVE. Dapal-ocho-a-e-a-e, He will allow him to fight, or strike together. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-ocho-a-e-tae-ca-e, He will allow him, who is his, to fight, or strike together. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-ocho-a-e-te-tin-a-e, He will allow him, who is his, who is mine, to fight etc. REFLEXIVE YOICE. Dapal-joh-a-kin, They two will fight for themselves (quitely alone.) Dapcal-jo-tae-a-kin, They two who are his will fight for themselves. Dcapal--jo-tae-tid-a-kdn, They two, who are his, who is mine, will fight for themselves. Dcapal-ocho-joi-a-e, * He will cause to fight or be fought for himself. DapaT-ocho-joh-tae-a-e, He who is his will cause to be fought for himself. Dapal-ocho-joi-tae-tin-a-e, He who is his, who is mine, will cause to be fought for himself. * The Reflexive causative in connection with Dapal is seldom heard, whereas it is often used in counection with other verbs; as khusti-e-tepen-ocho-joh-kan-a, he causes posts to be put together for himself, THE RESERVATIVE FORM. ACTIVE VOICE. Acc. WITH NOM. (INANIMATE). Dapal-kalS-a-e, He will strike it together (and leave it) Acc. WITa GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-kak-tae-a-e, Hie will strike his together. Ace. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-kak'-tae-tid-a-e, He wll strike his who is mine, together. Ace. CA.US*ATIVE. Dapal-ocho-kck-a-e, He will cause to strike or be struck together. Acc. WITH GEN AND NOM. Dapcal-ocho-lcak'-tae-a-e, He will cause his to strike or be struck together. Ace. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-ocho-ka1-tae-tin-a-e, He will cause his, who is mine, to strike, or to be struck together. REFLEXIVE VOICE DapaJ-1oJM-a, It will strike or be struck together (and left till further.) Dapal-kok'-tae-a, What is his will strike or be struck together. Dapal-lcko'-tae-tin-a, What is his, who is mine, will strike or be struck togerther. Dapaq-oeho-kok'-a, It will be caused to be. struck together. Dapcal-ocho-kok-tae-a, What is his will be caused to be struck together. Dapac-ocho-1oo'-tae-tid-a, What is his mine, will be caused to be struck together. ACTIVE VOICE. Ace. WITH No. (ANIMATE). Dpalp-ka-e-a-e, He will cover* him. Acc. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dacpal-ka-e-tae-a-e, He will cover him, who is his. Ace. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-1ca-e-tae-tid-a-e, He will cover him, who is his, who is mine. Ace. CAUSATIVE. e Dapacl-ocho-ka-e-a-e, He willcausehim tofight. Ace. WITH GEN. AND NoM. Dcpalc-ocho-cka-e-tae-a-e, He will cause him, who is his, to fight. Acc. WIEH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dapacl-ocho-ka-e-tae-tiqz-a-e, He will cause him, who is his, who is mine, to fight. REFLEXIVE VOICE..Dacpalc kol-a-e, He will fight. Dcpal-dkol-tae-a-e, He, who is his will fight. Dctpal-ko1z-tae-tit-a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will fight. Dapal-ocho-ko1-a-e, He will let himself be caused to fight. Dcapa-ochoJ-kol-tae-a-e, He, who is his, will let himself be caused to fight. Dapat-ocho-a1k'-tae-ti'-a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will let himself be caused to-fight. * The direct meaning is used in connection with other Verbs; as onitulmch' iA iepel-ka-e-a (from iel to see) I wil give him an interview with him (and leave him there.) THE INTENSIVE FORAM.' ACTIVE VOICE. NOM. DalEpal-a-e, He will strike together. NOM. WITH GEN. [gether. Dakpal-tae-a-e, He, who is his, will stike toNOM. WITH GEN. AND GEN. Dak'pal tae-tit-a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will strike together. + NOM. CAUSATIVE. [together. DakSpal-okchoe-a-e, He will cause to strike NOM. WITH GEN. ~ Dacpdal-okicho-tae-a-e, He who is his, will cause to strike together. NoM. WITH GEN. AND GEN. Daklpal-okcho-tae-tin-a-e, He who is his, who is mine, will cause to strike together. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dapal-og-ok-a, It will be struck together. [together. Dcapal-og-olS-tae-a, What is his will be struck Dapal-og-ok-tae-tin-a, What is his, who is mine, will be struck together. [struck together. Dapal-ochog-ok-at, It will be caused to be DDapal-ochog-okt-tae-a, What is will be caused to be struck together. Dapal-ochog-o1-tae-ti,-ct, What is his, who is mine will be caused to be struck together. * The real force of the Instensive form can not so well be shown in the verb dal as in del. and dam. It shows rather an effort made for gaining the object, than the gaining of the object itself: -am-et'-kan-a-e, he is getting, Ma- am-kan-a-e, he is seeking to get; Si-et'kan-a-e he is ploughing, Si si-kan-a-e, he is learning to plough (said about children). It thus coinsides in some cases with the form which in other 'languages (E. g. in Sanskrit) is called desiderative. + The causative may also be used in connection with the common gender with the direct meaning, (as dapal-ochogok'-a-e, We will be caused to fight) and in the simple Reflexive with the meaning of covering oneself. emcark. It will be observed, that the first ok' has been changed into og. As the first syllable is doubled in the active voice Intensive Form, in the same manner is the last syllable doubled in the Reflexive voice Intension Form; as Da-dal, a-e, Dal-ok'-o'-a- =Dal-og-ok'-a. + There is a second form Dapcl-ok'-choe-a-e, He will cause to be struck together (things.) THE CONTINUATIVE FORM. ACTIVE VOICOE NOM. (OBJECT INANIMATE.) Dal-akcae-taken-a-e, Hewillcontinue to strike. NOM. WITH GEN. Dcal- kcae-taehaen-etae-a-e, He will continue to strike his. NoM. WITH GEN. AND GEN. Dcl-akcae-tcahen-tae-tini-a-e, He will continue. 0 to strike his, who is mine. NOM. CAUSATIVE. Dal-ocho-&ae-tah en-ca-e, He will continue causing to be struck. NOM. WITH GEN. Dal-ocho- cdcae-tahen-tctae-a-e, He wil contin ue causing his to be struck. NOM. WITH GEN. AND GEN. Dal-ocho-akeHe-take-teti--e, He will con tinue causing his, who is mine, to be struck. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dal-alcan-taken-a, It will remain struck. Dal-akaen-tahen-tlae-c, What is his will remain struck. Dal-ackan-tahen-tae-tia-a, What is his, who is mine, will remain struck. Dcdl-ocho-caka-taken-ca, It will remain caused to be struck. Dcl-ocho-akctcaen-tahen-tae-a, What is his will remain caused to be struck. Dal-ocho-kac n-tnhen-tcte-tin-a, What is his, who is mine, will remain caused to be struck. ACTIVE VOICE. Ace. WITH NOm. (ANIMATE.) Dalc-acca-e-tahen-a-e, He will continue to strike him. Acc. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dal-alca-e-tahen-tae-a-e, He will continue t: strike him, who is his. ACC. WITH GEN. AND Now. Dal-aka-e-tahen-tae-ti4-a-e, He will continue to strike him, who is his, who is mine. Ace. CAUSATIVE. Dal-ocho-aka-e-tahen-a-e, He will continue causing him to strike, or be struck. Acc. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dal-ocho-aka-e-tahen-tae-a-e, He will continue causing him, who is his to strike etc. Acc. WITH GEN. GEN. HND NON. Dal-ocho-aaca-e-tahen-tae-tin-a-e, He will continue causing him, who is his who is mine etc. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dal-akcn-tahen-a-e, He, will continue to strike himself. Dal-ackan-tahen-tae-a-e, He, who is his, will continue to strike himself. Dat-akan-tahen-tae-tin-a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will continue to strike himself. Dac-ocho-akan-tahen-a-e, He, will continue letting himself be struck. Dal-ocho-akan-tcahen--tae-a-e, He, who is his, will continue letting himself be struck. Dal-ocho-akcn-tahen -tae-tioi-a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will continue letting himself be struck. ACTIVE VOICE. AREFLEXIVE VOICR DAT. WITH NOM. (INANIMATE.) Is wanting. Datl-akco-a1M-taken-a-e, He will continue to strike on it. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dal-akco-alStahen-tae-a-e, He will continue to strike on his. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dal-akcao-a1o-tahen-tae-tin-a-e, He will cona, tinue to strike on his, who is mine. DAT. CAUSATIVE. Dal-ocho-akaeo-aE-tahen-a-e, He will continue causing to be struck on. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. DaZ-ocho-acoao-aM-tahem-tae-ae-a-e, He will continue causing his, to be stiucke on. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND N3M. Dal-ocho-akao-aki-tahen-tae-teid-a-e, He will continue causing his, who is mine, to be struck on. ACTIVE VOICE. DAT. (ANIMATE.) Dal-akcao-ac-e-tahen-a-e, He will continue to strike for him. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dal-cakao-a-e-tcahen-tae-a-e, He will continue to strike for him, who is his. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dal-akao-a-e-tahen-tae-tzii-a-e. He will continue to strike for him, who is his who is mine. DAT. CAUSATIVE. Dal-ocho-alcao-a-e-tahen-a-e, * He will continue causing to be struck for him. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dal-ocho-aklcao-a-e-tcahe n-tctae-a-e, He will continue causing to be struck for him, * who is his. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dal-ocho-acccto-a-e-tahen-tae-tisi-ca-e, He will continue causing to be struck for * him, who is his who is mine. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dal-cakao-an -tahen-ca-e, He will continue to strike for himself. Dal-akao-an-tahen-tae-a-e, He who is his, will continue to strike for himself. Dal-akao-an-tahen-tae-tiz-a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will continue to strike for himself. Dal-ocho-akao-acn-tahken-a-e, He will continue causing to be struck for himself. Dal-ocho-akao-an-tahen-tae-a-e, He, who is his, will continue causing to be struck for himself. Dal-ocho-aao- mean-tahen-ace-ti,-a-e, He, who is his, who is mine, will continue causing to be struck for himself. * Or allow him to strike. CONTIN~UATIVE FORM. IRECIPROCAL. ACTIVE VOICE. Nom. (OBJECT INANIMATE.) Dapad-ctkae-toahen-a-e,. He will continu.e to, strike together. NOw. WITH GEN. Dcapcd-caoce-tahen-tae-ca-e, He will continue to strike together what is his. NOw. WIm' GEN. AND GEN. Dapal-aize-tahen-tae-tin-a-e, He will continue to strike together his,. who is. minea. NOw. CAUSATIVE. Dcapcd-ocho-akae-tcthem-a-e, He will continue. causing to strike or, beý struck'together. NOw. WITH GEN. Dcapat-ocho-akcte-tahen-tae-ca-e, He-will continue causing his, etc. Now. WITH GEN. AND GENT. Dapo-ocho-akae-tahen-tae-tini-a-e, Hewl continlue causing his, who is mine, etc. REFLEXIVE VOICE, Dctpal-_alcan-tahem-ca, It will remain struck. together.. Dapalakarn-tahem-tae-ct, What is his will re-, main struck together. Dctpal-akan-taher&4ae-tiyz-a, What is his, who. is mine will, remain struck together. DapaZ-ocho-akan-tahem-a,. It will remain caus-. ed to be. struck together. D-apal-ocho-akan-tahen-tcie-a, What is his will remain caused to be struck together, Dap~al-ocho-cakan-tahem-tae-tin'-c, What iis his. who is mine.,..will remain caused to be struck together. ACTIVE VOICE. Acc. (ANIMATE.) Dapal-akla-e-tahen-a-e, He will continue to cover * him. Ace. WiTrI GEN. AND NOM., Dapa-alcae-tahen-tctae-a-e, He will continue to cover him, who is his, Acc. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOwm. Dapal-.aka-e-tahen-tae-tiii-a-e, He will continue to cover him, who is his, who is mine. S Acc. CAUSATIVE. Dapal-ocho-accka-e-tahen-ca-e, He will continue causing him to fight. Ace. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-ocho-aka-e-tahen-tae-a-e, He will continue causing him, who is his, to fight. Acc. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dcpal-ocho-aka-e-tahen-tae-tii-a-e, He will continue causing him, who is his, who is mine, to fight. REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dapal-akan-tahen-a-e, He will cmntinue to fight. Dapctl-ackan-tahen-tae-a-e, He, who as his, will continue to fight. Dap2cl-aklia-tahen-tae-tid-a-e, He, who is his who is mine, will continue to fight. Dapal-acho-akctn-tthen-a-e, He will continue letting himself be caused to fight. Dapcd-ocho-accam-tahen-taen-ae-e, He, who his will continue letting himself etc. Duipal-ocho-akan-tahen-tae-t i--ca-e, He who is his, who is mine, will continue letting etc. * The direct meaning is used in connection with other verbs; as Aapm-a ka-e-tahen-a-e, he will continue giving him interviews (with such and such a person) (from inm to get.) REFLEXIVE VOICE i NmTrr-~~ ~CT~fl~(~~ AUll V IN V OCE. V DAT. (INANIMATE.) Is wanting. Dctapal-akao-a-k'-tahen-a-e, He will continue to strike against one another. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM: Dapal-akao-ak'-tahen-tae-a-e, He will continue striking what is his against one another. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NoM. Dapal-akao-a-k'-tahen-tae-tit-a-e, He will continue to strike against one another what is his, who is mine. DAT. CAUSATIVE. Dapatl-ocho-akao-a-k'-taken-a-e, He will continue to allow it to strike or be struck together. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dacpal-ocho-ak'ao-a-k'-tahen-tae-a-e, He will continue to allow his to strike or be struck together. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-ocho-akao-a-k-taen-tae-tid-a-e, He will continue to allow his, who is mine to strike or be struck together.. L V 1 ACTIVE VOICE. DAT. (ANIMATE.) Dapal-akco-a-e-tahen-a-e, He will continue to strike together for him. DAT. WITH GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-akao-a-e-tahen-tae-a-e, He will continue to strike together for him, who is his. DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dcepal-acao-a-e-tahen-tae-tid-a-e, He willcontinue to strike together for him, who is his, who is mine. DAT. CAUSATIVE. e Dcpal-ocho-akao-a-e-tahen-a-e, He will continue to allow him to fight.* DAT. WITHS GEN. AND NoM. Dapal-ocho-alcao-a-e-tahen-a-e, He will continue to allow him, who is his, to fight.* DAT. WITH GEN. GEN. AND NOM. Dapal-ocho-ckao-a-e-tahen-tae-tid-a-e, He will continue to allow him who is his, who is mine to fight.* REFLEXIVE VOICE. Dcpat-akco-an-tahen-a-kin, They two will, continue fightingt by themselves. Dapal-akao-an-tahen-tae-a-kin, They two who are his will continue etc. Dapal-akco-an-tahen-e-tae-tid-a-kin, They two who are his, who is mine, will continue etc..Daal-ochoakao-an--takhen-a-e, He will continue causing to fight t or be fought for himself. DapaZ-ocho-okeao-an-tahen-tae-a -e, He who i his well continue causing to fight + etc. Depal-o-cho-akao-an-tahen-tae-tisia-e, He who is his, who is mine will continue etc. Remark. Deponents are verbs with Reflezive forz and Active uaganing and seed no special Table. ' Or strike together. t Or covering for themselveo T Or be atruk together, TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. ACTIVE. MATE) NOMINATIVE CASE (OBJECT INANI f TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. Dal-a-e, He will Dal, Struck. strike. GENERAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. Dal-et'-a-e, He strikes. Dal-et', Who strikes. o SPECIAL INCOMPLE TE PRESENT. Dal-et'-kan-a-e, He Dal-et'-kan, Who is is striking, striking. RESENT PAST. Dal-ket'-a-e, He struck, Dal-ket', Who struck, or has struck. or has struck. ANTERIOR PAST. Dal-let'-a-e,Hestruck Dal-let', Who struck, or had struck. or had struck. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. Dal-khan, Willing to strike. Dal-et'-khan, Striking. Dal-et'-kan - k h a n, Striking now. Dal-ket'-khan, Having struck. Dal-let'-khan, Having struck. GERUNDS. Dal-realc, te, then, khon, re, *Of, by, in (etc.) striking (general.) Dal-et'-reak', te, then, khon re, Of, by, in (etc.) striking. Dal-et'-kan-reak', te, then, khon, re, Of, by, in (etc.) striking now. Dal-ket'-reak-, te, then, khon, re, Of, by, in (etc.) having struck. Dal-let'-reak, te, then,khon, re, Of, by, in (etc.) having struck. * The Gerund are declined like nouns. (Vide declension of nouns.) - - TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIES ADVRBIAL PARTICIPLES. GENERAL INCOMPLEITE PAST. DNl - et-tahZ 1can-a - e, Dal-et'-tahZklan, Who Dctl-et-tah~len4-~han, He used to strike, used to strike, or Usingr to strike. or was striking, was striking. SPECIAL' INCOMPLETE PAST. Dal- et'-kan-tahZ-lear- Dal- et'-kart-tahle"'a n. Dal-et'-lean-tahZ kan-! a-e, He was strik-, Who wasstriking. khan, Being (then) INDEISV striking. INDCIIV 0LP RET Dal-let'-tahZkan-a- e, Dal..et?-.t a h 'ka n, Dal-let'-tah~lkan-khan, He had struck. Who had struck. Having struck.' GERLJNDS. INCHROATIVE FUTU Dal-iagit'-e) lie will be about to strike. INCHOATIVE PRESE Dal-lagidl-ok~-kan-a-e, He is about t o strike. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal-lIagid-ok3-kart-tah~cn-aeHe was about to strike. RE. Dal-lagit', Who will be about to strike. NT. D al- lagidok'-ka n, Who is about to strik.e. Dat-1agi*doAM.-kan-tqh can, Who was about to strike. Dal-iagit'-lhan, Be-. ingr about to strike. Dal-lagidoi' k a n - khan, Being (now) about to strike. h~kan-khan,.Being (then) about to Dal-et'-ta h Z k a n - r e a M te, then, ichort, re, Of, by, in (etc.) usinge to strike. Dal-,et'-lcan-tah72 Jan-r,-e a te, then, khon, y-e, Of, in (etc.) striking then. re, etc., Of, by, in (etc.) having struck. Of, by, in (etc.) being about to strike. Ddt1-lagidoke'-lan..reak, te, re, etc., Of, by, in (etc.) being about to strike now. Dal-lagi~dole-kan-tahlekan.. reak, te, re, (etc.,) Of, by in (etc.) being about to strike then. An~JECTIVE PARTICIPLE S. PRIILS E~~s PARTICIPLES. GERUNDS. OPTA&TIVE. Dal-ke-a-e, He would strike. CONDITIONAL. (OAo) Dal-le-a-e, Hle would (not) strike. CONTINGENT. Dctl-ke, Who would (like to) strike or have struck. DaZ-Ze, Who may have struck. DaZ-ke'-1hctn, Wishhag to strike. DaZ-Ze-1dian, In case of striking or having struack, DaZ-ke-rea1S-te, re, etc. Of; by, in wishing (or the possibility) to strike. Dcd-le-realS-te-re., etc. Of,; by, in (etc.) striking, Dat-kiet' -gi-e, strikes, will, Swould strike. -lle Or PRELIMINARY FUT Dai-le-gil-e, He will first strike. PRELIMINAR~Y Ex Dctt-Ze- n ahý- e, lie must first strike. PRELIMINARY PER, Dat -le-ba-e, He must first strike. lURE* POSTULATIVE. SUASIVE. DaZ-Ze-nah"1, First striking, or having first struck, DaZ-Ze--bai, First striking or having first struck. PRELIMINTARY AD Dal-le-en-a-e, He must first strike. PRELIMINTARY BjENE Dal-ie-ma-m! Mayest thou first strike! PRELIMINARY IMPE Dctl-le-m! Strike first! BENEDICTIVE. Dat-ma-rn! Mayest thou strike!1 IMPERATIVE..Dat-me! Strike thou! INFINITIVE. Dal, To strike. ADJECTIVE PAETIOIPILS. MISSIVE. DICTIVE. RATTYO ADVERBIAL PARTICIPL 5. Dat-i e-ena, First striking, or having first struck. GtJ 'DS, TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES, THE REFLEXIVE VOICE. NOM. WEITH A00. (INANIMATE,) TENSES,. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES.I ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. Dal-oT-a, It will be IDal-ok, Which will Dal-olS-khan, If to struck. be struck, be struck. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. Dal-ok-kan-a, It is Dal-ok-lkan, Which Dal-ok-kan-khan, Bebeing struck. is being struck. ing struck (now.) GERUNDS. Dcal-oE-reak', te, Te etc., Of, by, in being struck. Dal-ok'-lcan-reak, te, re etc., Of, by, in being struck (now.) RECENT PAST. Dal-en-a, It was struck. ANTERIOR PAST. Dal-len-a, It was struck. SPECIAL INCOMPLE Dala-ok-klan-tah -ka n a, It was being0 struck. Dal-en, Which was* Datl-en-khan, Hay- Dal-en-reak, te, re etc., Of, struck. ing been struck. by, in having been struck. Dal-len, Which wast Dal-len-khan, Hay- Dat-len-rea, te, re etc., Of, struck. ing been struck. by, in having been struck. TE PAST. Dal-olk-kcan-tahekaIn, Which was being struck. Dal-ok'-kan-tahJekan, khan, Being struck (then.) Dal -olc',-kcan-ta kklcan-reak', te, re etc., Of, by, in being struck (then.) * Or has been, t Or had been. T,14sE sE. IA D3ECTIVE PAiRTICIPL1S. INDICISIVE PLUPER FECT. Da19-len-tah'ekIan-a, It Dat-len- ta h k an, had been struck. Which had b e en INCHOATIVE FUTU Dal-ok'-lagit', It will be about tobe struck* struck. RE. Dat -ok-iagit', About to be struck. INCHOATIVE PRESE'NT. Dal -o7V-1agidok~-1an-a, SIt is about to be struck. Dal-o1S-lagidok~-1 an, About being struck (now.) ADV~ERBIAL PAtIICIPLES. Dat-len- t a h'60 Ic a nikhan, Havingr been struck. Dal-ok-lagit'-lchan, Being about to be struck. Dal-o19-tagidoMc-kankhan, Beingr about to be struck (now). Dal-ok'-lagidoAk-kantah~an-khan, Being about to be struck (then.) Dai-kolc-khan, If it only wo-uld be -struck, GERUNDS. Dal-ter&-tah'kan-reaAY,te, ye, Of, by, in havingr been struck. Dal-oMc-lagit'-reakc, te, re etc. Of', by, in being about to be struck, Dal-ok'-lagidok3-kan-rea1Y, te, re etc., Of, by, in being about to be struck (now.) Dal-ok~-iagidok'-kan.-tah'ekan-vectk, te, tre etc., Of, by, in being about to be struck (then.) Dat-kok'-re'ak, te, re etc., Of by, in the possibility of being struck. INCHOATLVIt PAST. Dal-ok~-tagido~o'k a n- Dat-ok 94 tahdcan-a, it was tahtka9 about to be struck. being s OPTATIVE..Dal-Ico1r,-a, It will1, Dat -ko k, may, would, might would, be struck. struck, agidoA~kan-,b, About truck (then.) Wh ic h m i ght be TNSEs. CONDITIONAL. (Oho) Dal-len-a, It will, can, would could not be struck. CONTINGENT. Dal-en-gi, It will or would be struck. PRELIMINARY FUTU Dal-len-gi, It will (must) first be struck. PRELIMINARY EXPO Dal-len-nakhh, It must first be struck. PRELIMINARY PER Dal-len-baa, It must first be struck. PRELIMINARY ADM Dal-len -e n - a, It must first be struck. AD5EeTrvE PARTICIPLES. I ADn RBIAL PARTICIPLES. GERUNDS, Dal-len,Being struck or in case of being struck. RE. STULATIVE. SUASIVE. ISSIVE, Dalc-len-7ham, Being or having been struck. Dal-len-taht, Being first struck. Dal-len-reak', te, re etc., Of, by, in being struck. Dat-len-bah, first struck. Dal-len-ena, first struck, Being Being TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTIOIPLESS PRELIMINARY BExNEDIOTIVE. Dctl-len-ma! May it first be struck! PRELIMINARY IMPE, RATIVE. Dal-ten-ma! Let it first be struck., BENEDICTIVE. Da19-o1'-ma!' May it be struck! IMPERATIVE'. DaZ-o1k-ma! Let it be struck. INFINITIVE. Dal-ok~, To be struck.,, ADVERBIAL PARbTICrLES. GmuNm TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE VERBS. 41v TATE ACCSTIVE. (A NIMATE.) TiiE TENSES. FUTURE. Dal-ko-a-e, He will strike them. GENERAL INOCMPL Dal-et'-ko-ct-e, H e strikes tbem. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVEIRBIAL PARTI CIPLES. Dal-ko,* (the) struck -Dcl-ko-lchar&, Strik(ones.) ingr them. ETE PRESENT. Dal-e~t'-ko, Th ey IDctl-et'-ko-khan, whom they strike. Striking 'them. SPECIAL INCOMPLEfTE PRESENT. Dal-et'-ko0-t kan-a-e, Dal-et'-ko-kai Heis striking themn. whom the stricking. RECENT PAST. Dai-kket'-ko-a-e, He Dal-lcet'-ko, struck, or, has whom they struck them. 0 ~,They Dal..et'-ko-kan-kha n a are Striking them (now.) They Dctl-ket'.k o-khan, struck. Having s t ru c k GERuNDS. Dctlko-rectk, te, 're, Of, by, in strikingr themn. by, in striking them. Dal-et'-ko-kan-rexak, te, 're-, Of, by, in striking them now. Da2-ket'-ko-retk', te, 're, Of, by, in having struck them. *Any of the pronominal suffixes may be affixed or infixed to show the nominative and accusative respectively; as Dcsl-e-a-1ko, they will strike him; DaZ-ben-a-lcin, they two will strike yol'two. tf In I1at and 3rd person singular et' is generally dropped; as Daijaeh-kanae, Dab-e-kanae. TEnSEs.- ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ANTERIOR PAST. Dal-let'-ko-a-e,* HeI Dal-let'-ko, T h e y struck orhad struck whom they struck. them. GriNERAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Dal -et-Jo-tah~an-a- Dal-et'-ko-tak'e-1o a n, e) He used to They whom they strike them. used to strike. SPECIAL INCOMPLE TE PAST. Dal-et'-ko-kan-t a h-- Dal-et'4ko-Jcan-tahý 6 -loan-a-e., He was kan, They wvhoin striking them. they were striking. p ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. GERUND&~ Dal-let'- k o - ko h a n, Dal -let-k 0-Teak., te, r e, Having s truck Of, by, in having struck them. fthem. -4 00 IINDICISIVE PLUPER Dal-let*-ko-taht1can-aelt He had struck them. INCHEOATIVE F1JTU Dal-ko-lagit'-e, He will be about to strike them. Dat -et'-ko-tah-en/oan - kohan,, Using to strike them. Dal-et'-ko-1can-tah -e ican-ichan, Strikingr them then. Dat-i et'-1co-tahek~ank/man,, Havin g struck them. Dctt-ko-lagit-lc h a n, Being about t o strike them. FECT. Dat-iet'-ko-tah'eJcan, They whomn they had struck. RE. Dat-ico-tagit', T h e y whom they will be about to strike. Dal- et'- ko -tah~kan-eakc, re, Of, by, in. using strike them. II teo to Dat-et'-lco-lcar-tah Z Je a n - rea1M, to, ye, Of, by, in striking them then. Dat-tet'-ko-tah~1can-'r a M to, re, Of, by, in having struck them. Dat-lco-tagit'-realc, te, re, Of, by, in being about to strike them. There is yet another forma for this tense: Dcl-lkm~'-ko--c~-. t Also for this tense is another form, D4.l-lk'-ko. ta~-kanaci. TE-NSES. TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. INCHOATIVE PRERELNT, Dal-ko-taqid-olSz-kcana-e, He is about to strike them.. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dcd-7,ko-lagid-olS"-kan iafiý7can-a-e, He was about to. strikethem. OPTATIVE, SDal-Jce-ko-a-e,' HI e. C~ would strike them. CONDITIONAL. (01o) Dcd-le-leo-a-e, He would (not) strike them. CONTINGENT. Dat-ket'-lco-gi*-e, He. strikes, will or would strike, them. Dal-ko-lagido I-k an, They whom they are about to.' strike. Dal-ko-lagidolS-k~an - tah-ekart, T h e y whom they were about to strike. DaZ-kekea, T'hey whom they would strike or have struck. Dal4-le-o,. T-h e y whom they m~ay have struck. ADVERBIAL PARTLOIPLES. GERUNDS. DaZ-ko-laqgidolS-'kan - Dal-ko-lagidolS-kan,-realS, ichan, Being now re, Of, by, in being aabout to strike them.. bout to. strike them now. Dal-koo-agidolS-kan- ID-at-7o-lagido1S-kan-tah~-e tah~can-khan, Be- kan-realS, te, re, Of~, by, i-ng then about to in being about to. strike, strike them. them then. *Datl-ke-ko- 7o h a n,Wishing to. stcike the~m., * Jal_-le-ko-kchaib, In case of strikin-g them. Dal-kce-k-o-realS, te, re, Of, by, in wishing or having opportuniity to strike them.. Dal-e-kco-realS, te, re, Of., by, in striking theia. ~'The difference between leiclan and kekhan is that the former shows only the condition, whereas the latter also expresses the wish; as onam elndih-lchan sin' tekolec, If you gave it to me I would, take it; oname emkinlclsn adiV'( Qrccskakok'ci, If you only would give it -etc. TENSES. IUADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. PRELIMINARY FUT URE. Dal-le-ko-gi-e, He t will first strike them. PRELIMINARY EXPO STULATIVE. Dal-le-lco-nah1-e, He must first strike them. PRELIMINARY PERS UASIVE. Dal-le-ko-ba-e, He 00 must first strike them. PRELIMINARY ADMI SSIVE. Dal-le-ko-en-a-e, He must first strike them. PRELIMINARY BENE DICTIVE. Dal-le-kc o - m a - m! Mayest thou first strike them! PRELIMINARY IMPE RATIVE. Dal-le-ko-m! (or Ico me), Strike thou them first! GERUNDS. Dal-le-kco-nohi, First striking them. Dal-le-ko-bait, First striking then. Dal-le-ko-ena, First striking them. z 02 4-t 04 E-44 E$-4 r4-) 4.24 0/ E-4 4-l z z 82 TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. THE REFLEXIVE VOICE. ACC. WITH NOM. ( ANIMATE.) TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. Dal-o'-a-e, He will Dal-olt Who will strike himself.* strike himself. SPECIAL INCOMPLE TE PRESENT. oo Dal-ol-kan-a-e, He Dal-ol-kan, W h o is striking himself. is striking himself. RECENT PAST. Dal-en--a-e, He Dal-en, Who struck struck, or has struck or has struck himhimself. self. ANTERIOR PAST. Dal-le n -a - e, He Dal-len, Who struck struck or had struck or had struck himhimself. self. ADVERBIAL PART ICIP LES Dal-oJl-khan, Willing to strike himself. GERUNDS. Dal-ok-reald, te, re, etc., Of, by, in (etc.) striking himself. Dal-ol-kl an - k h a n Dal-ok-kcan-rea',, te, re, etc. Striking him s e1 f Of, by, in (etc.) striking (now.) himself (now.) Dal-en-khan, Having Dal-en-real te, re, etc., Of, struck himself, by, in (etc.) having struck himself, Dal-len-khan, Hav- Dal-len-reak, te, re, etc. Of, ing struck himself, by, in (etc.) having struck himself. * Or Dal-ok-a-m, thou wilt strike theyself etc. + Any of the pronominal suffixes may be affixed, to show the nominative; as Dalok'-ko, they who will strike themselves, Dalok'-ben, you two, who will strike yourwselves. TE N SES. IADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. SPECIAL INCOMWPLE TE PAST. Dal-o1k-kan-tah~Jcart - Dat -ok~-1an-tah-eJcan, a-e, He was strik- Who was strikingr ing himself. himself. INDECISIVE PLUPEB Dat-ten -tahekan-a-e., He had struck himself. FECT. Dat-ten-tah~kan, Who had struck himself. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLEMS. Dalt- o1-kan-tah;7rankhan, Striking himself (then.) Dat -ten-taht k h an khan, Having struck himself (before.) Dat-o1'-lagit'-kh a n, Being about to GERUNDS. INCHOATIVE F1JTU I Dat-o1k-tagit'-e, He will be about to strike himself. INCROATIVE PRESE~ Dat-ok'-tcgidold - kana-e, He is about to strike himsel~f. ~E. Dat-olc'-tagit', Who will be about to Dat-okc-kan-tah-elan-reaAk,' te, re, 2re etc., Of, by, in (etc.) strikingr himself, (then.)? Da71-en-tahZ1can-?,eakr,, te, re etc., Of, by, in (etc.) having struck himself (before.) Dat -o1Y-larit'-recWr,, te., re etc., Of, by, in (etc.) beingr about to strike himself. r1e, etc., Of, by, in (etc.) being about to strike himself (now.) Dat-o1k-taqidokr.-1can - tcahokninea (et.) bein ab.)Out a'.e1by te, reetc., bigaoft to strike himself (then.) strike himself. strike himself. Dat-olr'-tagidokr,-1ran, Dat-o 1M-tagido1k-1canW ho is about to khan, Being about strike himself. to strike himself (now.) Dat -c1-lagido1M-1can- Dat-o1'-tagido7V-kantah~Jcan., Who was tah~kan-khan, Beabout to strike ing about to strike himself. himself (then.) INCHOATIVE PAST..Dal-oJk-tagido1' - kan - talAklcan-a-e He was about to strike himself. TENSES, OPTATIVE. Dal-kold-a-e, He will or would strike himself. CONDITIONAL. (Oho) Dal-le - a - e, He will or would (not) strike himself. CONTINGENT. Dal-en-gi-e, He strikes will or would strike himself. PRELIMINARY FUTU Dal-len-gi-e, He will first strike himself. PRELIMINARY EXPOc Dal-len-nahý-e, He must first strike himself.. ýADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. Dal-kok, Who will Dal - k o k' - k han, or would strike Wishing to strike himself. himself. Dct-len, Who may Dal-len-kchan, In have struck him- case of striking or, self. having struck himself. RE, GERUNDS. Dal-ko1'-reak', te, re, etc., Of, by, in (etc.) wishing to strike himself. Dalc-len-reak', te, re e t c., Of, by, in (etc.) striking himself. STU LATIVE. SIVE. PRELIMINARY PER Dal-len-ba - e, He must first strike himself. SUA Dal-Zen-nahci, Having first s t r u c k himself. Dat-len-ba*, Having first struck himself. TENSEs. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLEs. PRELIMINARY AD MISSIVE. Dat-len-en-a-e, He must first strike himself. PRELIMINARY B ENE DECTIVE. Dal-len-ma-rn! Mayest thou first strike thyself! ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. GERUNDS, Dal-len-ena, Having first struck himself. PRELIMINARY IMPE SDal-len-me! Fi rst strike thyself! BENEDICTIVE. Dal-okl-ma-m! Mayest thou strike thyself! IMPERATIVE. Dal-old-mei! Strike thyself i INFINITIVE. Dal-o1d, To strike oneself. RATIVE. TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. ACTIVE. DAT. WITH NOM. (INANIMATE.) CO 00 TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. GERUNDS, FUTI'URE. Dal-a-k-a-e, He will Dal-ak'E,*Thatatoron Dal-a-W-khan, Strik- Dal-a-7r-reak', te, re, Of, strike at or on it. whichone willstrike. ing at or on it. by, in striking at it. SPECIAL INCOMPLE TE PRESENT. Dal-a-k'-kan-a-e, He Dal-ak-kan, That at Dal-a-k-kan- ki h a n, Dal-a-k'-kan-realS, te, re, is striking at it. which one is strik- Striking now at it. Of, by, in striking at it RECENT PAST. ing. now. Dal - at'- a - e, He Dal-at',Thatatwhich Datl-at'.khan, Hay- Dal-at'-reak, te, re, Of, struck at it. one struck. ing struck at it. by, in having struck at it. PERFECT. Dal-aklcao-at'-a-e, He Dal-akao-at', That at Dal-akao-at'-k h a n, Dal-akao-at'-reak, te, re, has struck at it. which one has Having struck at it. Of. -by. in havin struck struck. SPECIAL INCOMPLE TE PAST Dal-a-l-kan - ta h - Dal - akc' -kan-tahZckan-a-e, He was kan, That at which striking at it. one was striking. Dal-ak'E-an - t a h Z - kan-khan, Striking at it then. Z5 If at it. Dal-alc-k!an-tahlckan-reak, te, re,, Of, by, in striking at it then. * Any of the pronominal suffixes may be affixed to show the nominative. 003 T.Et~sFx. ADJTECTIVE PARTICIPLES. AýDVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. INDECISIVE PLUPER FECT. Dat -at'-tah~ean-a -e, Dat-at' - ta h ' kan, Dai-at'-t a-h ic a nHe had struck at it. That at hich one ichanz, HIa vi ngZ had struck. struck at it. DECISIVE PLUPERFECT. Dat -akao-at' - t a h Z - Dt'-cdckao -at'- hah_ - Dal-a~rao-at'-tah~ca -!can-a-e, He had kan, That at which khan, HI a v i n g struck at it. one had struck. struck at it. INCHOATIVE Fwu nuwx Dal-a-kr,-lagit'-e, He Dal-a-k-lagit', That Dal-a-1r,-tagit'-khan, will-, b~e about to at which one will Being' ab o ut t o strike at it. be about to strike, strike at it. INCHOATIVE PlIES ENT. Data-ladok-c- Dal-a-Ylo-agidok'-kan, Dat -a-7V-tagido1r, Irana-e, He is about to That at which one khan, Being now strike at it. is about to strike, about to ~strike at it. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dat -a-k~-lagido1k-kan- Dat-a-Zo'-tagi, lolc.-kan- Dal-a-1,--tagido1oi-1cantah-eka n-6-a - e, He tah'eJcan, That at tah-e1can-khav., Býewas about to strike which one was about ing thea about to at it. to strike, strike at it. CONDITIONAL DaI~ aoa, Is wanting. Dat -alrao-ak~, That Dlao-iaMc7,h an9, at which one may Having struck at it. have struck. I Da -aft'-tah-e1can-9vea1,', te", ye, Of, by, in having struck at it. Dal- -alaoat'-tq ih-1an-rea1',, te, re, Of, by, in having, struck at 1't. Of, by, in beinjg about to strike at it. Dat -a1~c-tagidoJA-7kan-v~eaA-,, te, ye, Of, by, in being now about to strike at it. kan-rea1',, te, re, Of, by, in beingr then about to strike at it. Dal -akao-a M-i-ea1k, te, re, Of, by, in having struck at it. GERUNDS. TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. CONTINGENT. Dal-at'-,gi-e, He strikes, will or would strike at it. PRELIMINARY EX'POSTULATIVE. Dal-alao-a-1e-nahi-e, Dal-akao-ak-n a h, He must first strike First striking at it. at it. PRELIMINARY PER SUASIVE. Dal-akao-a- kZ - b a - e, Dal-akao-a 7r - b a, He must first strike First striking at it. at it. PRELIMINARY AD MISSIVE. Dal-alcao-a -k-ena-e, Dal-akao- a k - e n a, He must first strike First striking at it. at it. BENEDICTIVE. Dat-a-kJ-ma-m M ayest thou strike at it. GERUNDS. T0 Remark. By leaving out the nominative Suffixes, the dative case Neuter may be used as a passive; as dare mack-at'-a, the tree was cut a little, E-4 t-4 01C 4 -9 12 TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. ACTIVE VOICE. DAT. WI 'H NOM. (ANIMATE.) TENSES. FUTURE. Dal-a-ko - a -e, He will strike for them. SPECIAL INCOMPLE] SDal-a-ko-kan-a-e, liHe is striking for them. RECENT PAST. Dcal-at'-ko-a-e, H e struck or has struck for them. PERFECT. Dal-akao-at'-ko-a - e He has struck for them. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. IADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. GERUNDS. Dal-a-ko, They, for whom they,* or one will strike. P E PRESENT. Dal-a-ko-lcan, They, for whom, they are striking. Dal-at'-kIo, They for whom they struck. Dal-akao-at'-ko, They for whomthey have struck. Dal-a - k o - kc han n, Striking for them. Dal-a-ko-kan-lrh an, Striking for them now. Dal -at'-k o -k han, Having struck for them. Dal-a-kao-a t' - X o - kchan, Having struck for them. Dal-a-ko-realc', te, e e t c., Of, by, in striking for them. Dal-a-ko-lcan-reaA2, te, ie etc., Of, by, in striking for them now. Dal-at'-ko-reakl, te, ye etc., Of, by, in having struck for them. Dal-alao-at'-ko-realA, te, re etc., Of Ly, in having struck for them. * Impersonal. (Germ. fur welche man schlagen wird.) TE iis Fs. SPECIAL INCOMPLE Dat-a-leo-lean-ta h Z - kan-a-e, He was striking for them. I NDICISIVE PLUPER Dal-at'-ko-taht la n - a-e, He had struck for them. DECISIVE PLUPERFE t~ Dal- alrao-at'-kro-tah Z - kan-a-e, He had struck for them. 'ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. ADJECTIVE PAR.TICIPLES. TE PAST. Dat-a-leo-lan -ta h& Dal-aleo-lan~-t a h& lean, They, f o r lean-lehan, Strikwhom they were ilig for them then. striking. FECT. Dal-at'-leo-tah~lean, Dal aJ'-leo-tah-lchaii GERUJNDS. Dat-aklo-lean- t a h Z a n - ieak', te, re etc., Of, by, iii strikingO for them then. Dat -at'-leo-tah~lan- r e a I' te, ie etc., Of, by, in havingr struck for them. Dal-aleao-at'-leo-takh le a n - reake, te, re etc.., 0 f, by, i n having struck for them. They, for whom they had struck. CT. Dat -alcao-at'-leo-tahýle an, They, for whom they h ad struck. INCHO0ATIVE, FUTLTR E~. Dat -aleo-tag-it'-e, He Dat -alco-tagit', They, will be about to for whom they will strike for them. be about to strike. INCHOATIVE PRESE NT. Dal-a-leo-tagidole'-lean- Dat-aleo-lagido1k-lan, a-e, He is about to They, for whom they strike for them. jare about to strike. lehan, Hav ingi struck for them. Dat -cdao-at'-leo-tahZlean-k ban, Having struck for them. Dat -aleo-tagit'-lehan, Beingr about to strike for them. Dat-akeo-tagicloke-lanleaBeing now about to strike for them., Dat -alo-lagit'-ieaJk, etc. Of by, in about to strike for te, re being them. Dat -akeo-l~a Yid o 7z - le an - ireak', te, y,-e etc. Of, by, in being about to strike for them. TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICI PLES. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal-a-ko-lagido1-kan Dal-ako-lagidok'-kan. tahcwkan-a-e, H e tah~kan, They, for was about to strike whom they were for them. about to strike. CONDITIONAL. Is WANTING. Dal- ak ca o - a - k o, They for whom they CONTINGENT. may have struck. Dal-at'-ko-gi-e, He S strikes, will or would 4 strike, for them. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. Dal-ako-lagido--kran -tah1kanl-khan, Being then about to strike for them. Datl - akcao-a-ko-khan, In case of having struck for them. Dal-ukaao-arlo-nahf', First striking for them. Dal-akco-akco-bati, First striking for them. Dal-akao-a-ko-ena, First striking for them. GERUNDS. Dal-ako-lagqido1'-k/an-tahZ - kan-reak', te, Ire etc., Of, by, in being about to strike for them then. Dal-akao-ako-reak', te, r e, Of, by, in having struck for them. PRELIMINARY EXP'OSTULAT] Dal-cakao-a-ko-nahf-e, He must first strike for them. PRELIMINARY PER SUASIVE. Dal-ak/o-a-k o-ba - e,. He must firststrike for them. PRELIMINARY ADM ISSIVE. Dal-akao-a-ko-en-a-e, He must first strike for them. VE. TE.NSES. BENEDICTIVE. Dal-a- ico -m a -m.Nayest thou strike for them!1 IMPERATIVE. Dctl-a-lro-rn! (or ako-me!) Str i k e thou for themI INFINITIVE. to~ Dal-a-lco To strike for ta themn.,ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL. PARTICIPLESj GERIUNDS. TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. THE REFLEXIVE VOICE. (ANIMATE.) TENSES. FUTURE. Dal-joisc-a-e, He will strike for himself. SPECIAL INCOMPLE SDal-joii-kan-a-e, He is striking for himself. RECENT PAST. Dat- an-a-e, He struck or has struck for himself. PERFECT. Dal-akao-an-a-e, He has struck for himself. DATIVE WITH NOMINATIVE. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. Dal-joh,* Who will strike for himself. TE PRESENT. Dal-joai-kan, Who is striking for himself. Dal-an, Who struck ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES Da-joi-khan, Striking for himself. Dal-joi-kan-k han, Striking now for himself. Dal-arn-khc-an, Having GERUNDS. Dal-joh-reaA., te, re, Of, by, in striking for himself. Dal-joA-kan-reak, te, le, Of, by, in striking for himself now. Dal-an-rea1d, te, ye, Of, by, in having struck for himself. Datl-akao-an-reaA, t e, re, Of, by, having struck for himself. for himself. struck for himself. Dal-alcao-an, Who Dal-akao-an- ik ham, has struck for him- Having struck for self. himself. ~I Any of the pronominal suffixes may be affixed to show who will strike for himself; Dal-joih-ko, Dal-joh-ben, Dal-joh-kin., 0 TENSES. ADJECTiVE PARTICIXPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES, SPECIAL INCOMPLE TE PAST. Dal-joi-kan-tah'-Jcan- Dcal-joA-kan-tah -kan, Dal-joA-kan-tahJana-e, He was striking Who was striking k h a n, Striking for himself. for himself. then for himself. INDECISIVE PLUPER FECT. Dal-an-tahIcan-a-e, Dal-an-tachkkan,, Who Dal-an-tahkcan-khan He had struck for had struck for him- Having struck for himself. self. hi mself. DECISIVE PLUPERF ECT. Dal -cckao-an-tahkIcan Dal-akao-an-takhlIkn,, Dal-akao-tan-tahkcana-e, He had struck Who had struck khan, Having for himself. for himself.. struck for himself. INCHOATIVE FUTURIE. Dal-joi-lagit'-e, He Dal-joi-lagit', Who Dal-jo0'- lagit'-khan, will be about to will be about to Being about to strike for himself. strike for himself. strike for himself. INCHOATIVE PRESE NT. Dal-joA-lacgido1o-kan- Dal-joi-lagidok'-kan, Dal-joA -lagido1-kcan a-e, He is about to Who is about to khan, Beingnow strike for himself. strike for himself. about to strike for INCHOATIVE PAST. himself. Dat-jot-laqgidok'-kan- Dal-joA-lagidok'-kan- Dal-joA-lagidok4-kan tah/kan-a-e, He tahZkan, Who was t ah hEkan - k h an was about to strike about to strike for Being then about for himself, himself. tostrike for himself. GERUNDS. Dal-j6o-kaIn-tah~kan-rea 1, te, re, Of, by, in striking then for himself. Dal-can-tahakan-reaI',te, re, Of, by, in having struck for himself. Dal-akao-an- tah~Ian-rea Y, te, re, Of, by, in having struck for himself. Dal-j6o-1agit'-reak, te, r e, Of, by, in being about to strike for himself. Dal-joh-lagido-kc arn -rea k', te, re, Of, by, in being about to strike for himself now. Dal-jon -lagidoM-kan-t a hkan-reak', te, re, Of by, in being about to strike for himself then. - - TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. CONDITIONAL. Is Wanting. Dal-an, Who may have struck for himself. CONDITIONAL PERF ECT. Is wanting Dal-ackao-an, Who mvat h~~~av struck fr Cr ADVERBIAL PARTICPLES. GERUNDS. Dal-an-khan, In case Dal-an-reak, te, re, Qf, of striking f6r him- in striking for himself. self. by,; PRELIMINARY FUT Dal-an-gi-e, He will first strike for himo self. 0 CONTINGENT. Dal-an-gi-e, He will or would strike, or strikes, for himself. PRELIMINARY EXPO Dal-an-nahze, He must first strike for himself. PRELIMINARY PER Dal-an-ba-e, He must first strikefor him. self. y kI vuck 1 f pripir fnIr himself. URE. Dal-akao-an-k ha n, Having struck for oneself. Dal-an-nahsi, First striking for himself. Datl-an-bani, First striking for himself. Dal-alcao-an-reaM3, te,:e, Of by, in having struck for oneself. STULTIVE. SUASIVE. TENSES. PRELIMINARY ADMI Dal-am-en-a-e, He must first strike for himself. PRELIMINARY PERF Dal-alko-an- nah-e, He must first have struck for himself. PRELIMINARY PERF Dal,-ake'ao-wcv-ba-A ADJECTIVE VARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. SSIVE. Dal-an-ena, F ir s t striking for himself. (GERUNDS. ECT EXPOSTULATIVE. ECT PERSUASIVE. g He must first have struck for himself. PRELIMINARY PERF ECT ADM Dal -akao-in- ena-e, He must first have struck for himaself. PRELIMINARY BENE DICTIVE. Dal-an-ma-m! Mayest thou first strike for thyself. PRELIMINAIRY IMPE RATIVE. Dal-an-me, Strike thoufirstforthyself! i Dal-akao-an-n a ha, Having first struck for himself. Dal-akao-a n - b a 4, Having first struck for himself. Dal-alcao-a n - e n a, Having first struck for himself. ISSIVE, .TEN5i sF,. BENEDICTIVE. Dat-joi-mct-ro! Mayest thou strike for thyself! IMPERATIVE. Dal-jogi-me,! Strike thou for thyself! INFINITIVE. Dat -joih, To strike for oneself. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES.~ GEhRUNDS. Q TABLES OF THlE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. THE RIESERVATIVE FORM. (A.NIMTimýs) AOC. WITIM TE NSE8 Af4OIE ATCPES. FUTURE. C Dal-ka k'-a-e, H e Dal-1cct1, * Which will strike it (and one wills trike (and leave it.) leave.) SPECIAL LNCOMMPLE TE PRESEN'r. Dnl~kat Xan-a-e, He Dal4=a1,- kan), Which is striking it. one i striking. RECENT PAST. Dal- ka t' - a - e Hie, DId-lealt', Which onie struc-k It, struack. PERFECT. Dal-akat-a- 6, H e.bat;-akat', W h i c h has str-uck it. one has struck. SPECTAL INCOMPLUTE PAST. Dal - kaJr,,ý, kanit - taAZ- Dal-kak-kan- t a h 6 - 'kan-a-e, He was kan, Which o n e striking it. was striking. NOMi. ACTIJXE. ADMWAIAL PARTICIPLn58. dal-ka1k-khian, Striking it (and leaving it.) Dal-kalc-kan - khan, strik'ing it now. OERMINMDq. Da1. ka!V-reakJ4 te, re, by, in striking it. Of', Pat4kat'-k/ian, Having struck it. DJal-akat'-khan, Having struck it. Da-kZnak-kan-t a h - - kavn-khan, S 8triking it then. Dal-kak-kan-re'ak,, t e, r e, Of, by, in striking it now. Dtl-kat'-reaZ., te, 're, Of, by in havingr struck it. DPal-afkat'reak., te, re, Of. by, in having struck it, Dal-kakic-kan-tah-eZk.an-r-eaIP.te, re, Of, by, in striking it then. * Any of the Pronominal suffites may be affixed to show the nominative case. TENSES INDECISIVE PLUPER Dat -kat'-tah'ekan - a - e, He had struck DECISIVE PLUPERF Dal-cdcat'-tah'ekan-a-e,' He: had struck it. ADJECTIVE PABTICIPLIES. FECT. Dal-kat'-t a h -e k a n, Which one had struck. ECT. Dat-alrat'-tah - 7r, a n, 'ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLE&. Dal-kat'-tah '6 k a n - kchan, H a v ing struck it. Dal-akat' - tah~kan - G7ERUND S. Dal-kat'-tah~kan-reak', tM, ye, Of by, in havingr struck it. Dal-akat'-tah'ekan-reaYt, te, 0 INCHOATIVE FuTURli Dat-kak1-lagit'-e, He will he about to I strike it. INCHIOATIVE PRESEN Dal-kaki-lagidoloS-kana-e, He is about to strike it. INCHOATIVE PAST., Dat -hakI-lagicdo1'-1antaheh~an-a- e, H)e was about to strike CONDITIONAL. Is wanting. Which-, o ne h ad khan, H a v ing re, Of, by, in having struck. kstruck it. struck it. Dat -kakI-lagit', Which Dal-7-aJ'-tag'it'-kha n,. Dat- -haA-lagit'-reak-., te, r e, one will be about Beingabout to -strike' Of, by, in being about, to to strike, it. strike it. Dat -kak- lag ido1k-kan, Dal-kcakl~agidok~-kan- Dat-kak'-tagido1M-kan- reak' Which one is about khran, Being now te, ye, Of, by, in being, to strike, about to-strike it. now about to strike it. Dal-k-a1,-,-1ctgidoA,'-kan- Dal-ka1'-lugidoAk-kan- Dal-kaAk-lagidoA2- kan-tahztah~kan, W h i c h tah:Vran-khan, Be-; kan-reak, te, re, Of, by, in. ne was about to ing then about to being then about to strike strike, strike it. it. Dat -ak~ae, W h i c h Dat-alcce-frhan, (In Dal-akae-rea1k, te, re, etc. Of they m ay h a ve case) of havring by in (etc.) havingr struck. str~uck,, struck it., TE~s~. ADJECTIVE PARTIOWCLES. CONTINONT. Dal-kai7-g- " He, strikes, will or would s8trike it. PRELIMINARY EXP OSTULATIVE. D'al-alcae-. ah-7-e, He must first have struck 'It. PRELIMINARY PER SUASIVE, Dcd-akcae--ba- e, H. e must first have struck 'it. PRELIMINARY ADM ISSIVE. D al-alcae-.en-a-e, He m~ust first have struck it. PRELIMINARY BEN EDICTIVE. Dal-alea--ma.-m! Mayest thou be striking (it.) ADVERnBUAL PARTICIPLES.j Dal-aP'me-vnaK, H1aving struck it. GERUNDS& Hay 0 - Dal-akcte-ba~,f ing struck 'It. Dc4-aleae-enc, ing struck it.. H1ay-I PRELIMINARY IME Dai-akae-ne! Be thou strikin-g! RATIVIL I33ENEDICTIVE. Dal-1c. a - Y- m a - Mayest thou strike it! I MPERATIVE. Dat-Jca-k-me! Strike it! INFINITIVE. Dal-kak~, To strike it. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERI3IAL PARTICIPLES. OERtNDS. 0" Remarks. The preliminary future is formed in' an irregular way: dat-kak'-ge-re-e, he will &A~s strike, TABLES OF THE.FORMATTON OF THE TENSES. THE RESERVATIVE FORM. ACTIVE. ACC. WITH NO-if. (ANIMATE.) TENSES. FUTURE. Dal-1~a-ko-a - e, H e will strike t hem (and leave them till,further.) SP ECIAL INCO.MPLETE Dal,-ka-Jro-kam - a - e He is striking them. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. Dal-1ka-7o, * T h e y whom they willI strike (and leave.) E PREýSENT. Dcd-k~a-o-kan, They whom thy are strik ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLE5S.I Dal-ka-7co-khan, strik-' ing them. Dc4-1~a-leo-kan-1ohan, Strikingr them now. GERUNDS. Dal-1Ica-7ko-rea1J-, te, re, Of, by, in striking them. Dcd-kca-ko-kan-reak~, te, rej, Of, by, in striking them incr RECENT PAST. Dal-1kat'- *1ko-a-e, H e Dal-Icat'- k o, They struck them. whom they struck. PERFECT. Dal-alcat'-lo-a-e, Hie Dal-akat'-ko, The y has struck them. whomithey have struck. Da~-cat'--k o - k h a n, Dal-kat'-ko--reak', te, ye, O f, Having struck them. by, in having struck them, Dat -a tat'-ko-k h a n, DaZ-akat'-ko-real& t e, r e, Having struck them. Of, by, in having struck them. *Any of the pronomninal suffixes ray. bei Affixed to show the nomninativeor case. TEM5Es. ADJECTIVE -PARTxICILES. SPECIAL INCOM-PLVITE PAST. Dat -1a-1ko-kan-ta h- 9 - kan-a-e, He w a s striking them. INDECISIVE PLU a-e, Hehadstruck themn.. DECISIVZ PLUPEEB Dal-ka-ko-&tn-tahe kan, They whom they were striking. 'PERFECT. Dal-kat-ko-tah'/cctn, They whom they had struck. FECT. Ai~vERBIAL PARTICJIPLES. Dat-/ca-ko-kan-tak e - kan-Ichan, striki-ng them then. Dat-k ~aI"ko-tahi~/cankhian, Having struck them. GEIIUN;DS. Da -lca-ko-kan-t a h 'e k a njrec., te, re, O f, b y, i n striking them then. Dal-kat'-kco-tah-ekani-r e a 9 te, re, Of') by, in having struck them. Dal-akat'-k o - t a h 'e 7c a n - rea1k,te,re, Of, by, in having struck them. Dat-k-a-ko-layit'-reakM,te, re, Of, by, in being about to strike them. Dat -ka-ko -tagido Ri - k a n - reaWi, te, re, Of, by, in being now about to strike them. Dcd/-akat'-ko-tah'elkan- Dal-akat)-ko - t a h 'e Dat -akat'-kco - t a h e - a-e, He had struck ican, They, whom kan,-khan, Having them. they had struck, struck them. INCHOATIVE FUTU RE. Dal-ka,-lco-tagit -e, He Dat -ka-ico-lagit' They Dat-ka - k o - 1 a g i t'will be about to whom they will be khan, Being about strike them, about to strike, to strike them. INCHOATIVE PRE SENT. Dat -kc-ko -tag i d o R - Dat -ka-ko-lag idokc- Dat-ka-ko-tagi do Rikan- a -e, H e is kam, They whom- kan-khan, Beiirg about to striket~hem. they are now about now about to strike to strike, them.. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal-kca-ko-lag i d o 71-, - kan-tah-ekan - a - e He was about to strike them. CONDITIONAL. Is wanting, ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. Dal-ka-keo- lagi d 6i- - kan-tah'elan, They whom. they w er e about to strike. Dal-aka-kro, T h e y whom they may have struck. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLER.JI GERUNDS. Da~-ka-k~o-lagi d o kc - kan-tah~kan-kha n, Being then about to strike them., Dal-kea-ko-Zagidok', -kI a ntahe1can-recak,-te,re, 0Ot, by, in beingO then about to strike them. DaZ-aka-k~o'- k h. a n, Dal-aka-koo-vea~ic, te, ye, Of, Having struck them. by, in hav.'ngO struck them. 0 Go CONTINGENT. Dal-kat'-ko-gi-e, He strikes, will or would strike them. PRELIMINARY -Ex POSTULATTYR, Dal-aka-ko-na hs'' e ) He must first have struck them.- I ]PRELIMINARY PE RSUASPVIE. Dai-aka-ko-ba-e, He must first h a ve struck them. Dal-akca- ko - n ah '?, Having first struck them. Dat -akýa-ko- bait, Ha-- ving first struck them, TriNSES. I ADJEOTIVE PARTICIPLES. PRELIMINARY ADM ISSIVE, Dal-aka-ko-e n - a - e, He must first have struck therin PRELIMINARY BEN1 EDICTIVE. Dal-aka-ko-m a -mm Mayest thou be striking them! PRELIMINARY IMPEMRATIV.S. Dal-alca-lco-m! Be thou striking them! BENEDICTIVE. Dal-ka-ko-ma-m! Mayest thou strike them! IMPERATIVE. Dac-k~a-ko-m! (o r - ko-me!) St rike thou them 1 INFINITIVE. Dacl-ka-ko, To strike, them. ADVER E3TAL PARTICIPLES. Dat-aka -ko-ena, H aving first struck them. ERMUNDS. TABLES OF THE FOR~MATION OF THE TENSES* RESE RYAT IVE FORM. (ANIMATE.) REFLEXIVE VOICE. TEN~SES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PALMTIIPLES. GERUNDS. FUTURE. Dal1-kolS-a-e, He will Dal-kok~,* Who will Dal-kok,-1k1an, Strik- Dct-1ok'-rea1k, te, re, Of, by, strike himself.. strike himself. ing himself, in striking himself. SPECIAL INCOMPLE TE PRESENT..Dct-ko1,-,-k~an-a-e. He' Dat-1co1o'-Jcan, Who Dal-lkok'-kan-1chan, Dat -Jeo1-kan-reake, te, re, Of, is strikingo himnself. is striking himself. Striking himself now. by, in strikingr himself now. 1' SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Da4-ko1k-kan-tah~kani- 'Dal-1co1o-kctn-tah~kctn, 'Dal-1ok~-kcn-tah'rt'kan- Dal-ko1,'-kan-tth~k~an-rea1i,, a-e, He was strik- Who was striking' khan, S t r i k ii n g te, re, Of, by, in striking ing himself. himself. ihimself then. himself then. PERFECT. Dal-alcan-a-e, He has Dai-akan, Who has Dal-akan-ichan, Hay- Dat..a kan-,reak', te, ye, Ofby-, struck himself. struck himself. ing struck himself, in having struck himself. DECISIVE PLUPERF ECT-. Dal-akan-tah~kan-a-e, Dal-akan-taht k a n, Dal -a ka-aý a acnthknra~ te, He had struck him-ý Who had s t r u ck ichamHaving~struck re, Of, by, in having struck self. himself. himself. himself._________ *Any of the pronombial suffixes may be affixed to show the Nominative case. Rem arA.-The Preliminary Future is formed irregularly.; as dcd-kok'-ge-re, I will first strike -myself. TI'ENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. INCHOATIVE FUTU RE. Dal-kok'-lagit'-e, He Dal-kok-lagit', Who will b e a b out to will be about to strike himself. strike himself. INCHOATIVE PRESE NT. Dal-kold-lagido'-kcan- Dal-ko1'-lagido'-kIan, a-e, He is about to Who is about to strike himself. strike himself. INCHOATIVE PAST. SDal-kold-lagidokY-kan- Dal-co1k-lagidok-kavntakh-kan-a-e, He was theZkan, Who was about to strike him- about to strike himself. self. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES, I GERUNDS. Dcal-kco-lagit'-khan, Being about to strike himself. Dal-ko1-lagidok'-kankichan, Being now about to strike himself. Dal-lko-lagidok'-kantahZkan-khan, Being then about to strike himself. Dal-kok', lagit' reak', -.te, re, Of, by, in being about to strike himself. Dal-kold-lagidok'-kan-reak', te, re, Of, by, in being now about to strike himself. Dal-kok'-lagidok-kan-tah&kan-reak, te, re, Of, by, in being then about to strike himself. D D PRELIMINARY EXP OSTULATIVE. al-akan-nahi-e, He must, first have struck himself. PRELIMINARY PER SUASIVE. al-alcakn-ba-e, He must first have struck himself. Dal-akan-nah~t, Having first struk himself. Dal-akcan-bai, Having first struk himself. TENSES. I ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLE%. PRELIMINARY ADMI SSIYE4 Dalt-akcan-en-a-e, Hie must first have struck himself. BENEDICTIVE. Dal7ko1z-ma-im! Mayi est thou strike thy., self IMPERATIYIR. Da1-ko1z-me! Strike thou thyself! INFINITIVE. Dal-kok,, To strike oneself. ADVERBIAL PArTICIPLES. VDat..akan-tena, Striking first himself. GE RUNmS. -A~ -A1~ TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSE'S.. INTENSIVE FOREM. (ANIMAkTE-.) ANO3. CA 'TIENSES. AnJEAcTIVE PARTICIPLE S. FUTURE. Da-dal-a-e, He will.Da-dal, Str i k i n Y strike, strikes. z SPECIAL INCOMPLE TE PRESENT. Da-dal-kan-a-e, He is Da-dat-karb, Who is striking. striking. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Da-da i-k an-t a h -- Da-dal-kan-tah-ek-an, kan--a-e, Hle w as Who was striking. INCHOATIVE FUTU RE. Da-dat-lagit'-el II e Da-dali-liagit', Wh o wvili be about will be cabout to to strike, strike. INCHOATIVE PRESE NT. D a-da[- lag icloh3-kcan- Da-dal-lagidolS-7oan, a-e, He is about to Who is about to gQfvikla strike. 3-E. A CTI VE. ADVEABIAL PARTICIPLES. Da-dal-ichan, Strikin cp Da-dal-Joan -ihan, Being striking, now. Da-dal-lran-tah'61canikhan, Being striking then. GERrJNDS. Da-&-d-ivecd,-, te, re, Of, by, in striking. Da-dal-kean-recd., te, ye, Of, by, in, striking now. Da-da-h~an-tuh~1can-r ea1k, te, y-e, Of, by, in striking then. Da-dal-l agiet-lc han, LDa-dcd-lagit'-reakr, te, ye, Being about to Of, by, in being ab ou t strike, to strike. Da-dal-la~qiroJk-1a n- Da-dal-lagidohr,-kan-r e al' khan, Being about te, re. Of, by, in being to strike now, now about to strike. TENSES. INCHOATIVE PAST. Da-dal-tagidoA3'-loantahý1oan-a-e, HI e was about to strike. INFINITIVE. Da-dal, To strike. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ]ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. Da-dad-lagido1E-kan- Da-dal-lagidolS-lcntha-ekac, Who tah'lcan- khaan, was about to strike. Being about to strike then. GERUNDS. Da-dat-1agidok-kan- tah Z - kan-~reak', te, 're, Of, by, in being then about to strike, Remark.-The Repetitive Form dcl-dal has also an intensive form; as Dak'-dal-a-e, he will go on to strike (till he is ready). The full form would be da-da-dal-a-e, but the repetition is effected by the P'; as Bek'-naoich', instead of Be TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. THE INTENSIVE FORM. (ANIMATE). -REFLEXIVE VOICE. TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. Dal-og-ok-a-e, He Dal-og-o1, Who will Dal-og- o P- k ha n, will strike himself. strike himself. Striking himself. SPECIAL INCOMPLET E PRESENT. Dal-og-ok'-kan - a - e, Dal-o g - o 7o- kJ a n, Dal-og-okl'-kan-khan, He is striking him- Who is str i k i ng Striking now him - self. himself. self. SPECIAL INCOMPLE TE PAST. Dal-og-ok'-Jan - tah Dal-og-o1-kJan-tahe - Dal-og-ok'-kan-tahe - kan-a-e, He was. kan, Who was kan-khan, Strik - striking himself. striking himself. ing then himself. INCHOATIVE FUTU RE. Dal-og-oc'-la gi t' - e, Dal-og-o k'- a g it', I Dal-og-ol-logit'-khan, He will be about to Who will be about Being about to strike himself. to strike himself. strike himself. INCHOATIVE PRESE NT. Dal-og-ok-lagi d o 1'-- Dal-og-ok'-lagid o 71- Dai-og-ol-lagi do k - kan-a-e, He is kan, Whoisabout kan-khan, Being about to strike him- to strike himself, now about to strike w Ihimself. GERUJNDS, Dal-og-ol-reak'-te, re, 0 f, by, in striking himself. Dal-og-okl'-Jan-reak', t e, re Of, by, in striking himself now. Dal-og-olE-kan-tah - ko a n - reak" te, re, Of, by, in striking himself then. Dal-og-ol'-lagit'-rea7l, te, re, Of, by, in being about to strike himself. Dal-og-oo'-lagido k' - k an - real', te, re, Of, by, in being now about to strike himself. IJ.llN XSe INCHOATIVE PAST. Dat -og-ok~-lagi do1kkan-tah~1can~ - a - e He was about to strike haimself. BENEDICTIVE. Dat -og-o k' - m a - m Mayest thou strike thyself! IMPERATIVE. SDal-og-ok'-me, Strike ~4thou thyself! INFINITIVE. Dal-og-ok', To. strike oneself. A&DJECTIVE I'ARPIOIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. Dcd-og-olJ'-Zagi d o ISkan-tah'eJcan, Who was about to strike himself. Dat -og-olS-tlagi d o 15 - GERUNDS. Dat-og-olS-lagidok'-Ian- t a - h'eJ'can-reawo, te., re, 0f, by, in then beingr about to strike himself. Being then about to strike himself. I Remark.-By ommitting the nomninative suffix "e"' the subject will be in-animate, and is used passively-;as 641-pyogY~.a, it will be struck. TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. THE CONTINUATIVE FORM. (OBJECT INANIMATE TENSES. FUTURE. Dal-akae - tahen-a - e, He will continue to strike. S SPECIAL INCOMPLE SDal-akae-tahen- kana-c, He is continuing to strike. SPECIAL INCOMPLET Dal-akae-tahkkan-a-e, He was continuing to strike. INCHOATIVE FUTU Dal -akae-tahen-lagit'e, He will be about to continue to strike. NOMINA TIVE. ACTIVE. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. Dal-alcae-tahen, Who Dal-akcae-tahen-khan, will continue to Continuing to strike. strike. TE PRESENT. Dal -ackae-tahen-kan, Dal-akae-tahen-kanWho is continuing khan, Continuing to strike. now to strike. E PAST G ERUNDS,. Dal - akae - tah-Uan, Who was continuing to strike. RE. Dal-alkae-tahen-lagit' Who will be about to continue to strike. Dal-akae-tahen-reaA', te, re, Of, by, in continuing to strike. Dal-akae-tahen -kan-reak, te, re, Of, by, in continuing to strike now. Dal-akae-tahklan-rea1, te, re, Of, by, in continuing to strike then. Dal-akae-tahen-lagit'-reak', te, ye, Of, by, in beincg about to continue to strike. Dal-akae-taht klan - khan, Continuing then to strike. Dal-akae-tahen-lagit'kichan, Being about to continue to strike. TENSES. jADJECTIVE PARITICIPLES. INOHOATIVE PRESE NT. Dai-aca-e-tahcrt- tagi- Dai-akae-tahcm-iagidolc'-kan-a-c;, He, is dolz-kan, Who is about to continue about to continue "to strike, to strike. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal-ak~ae-tahcrn - 1 a - Dat -alcae-tahcn-lagigido1S-b7an-tah~zan- do1M kJan-tah~lc a 9?, a-e, He was about Who was about to to continue to strike, continue to strike. OPTATIVE. He would continue to strike. CONDITIONAL. (Oho) Dat-aJcae-tah7~ ic-a-c, Hew would (not) continue to strike. CONTINGENT. Dat -a kae-taht'-k et'-gi-e He continues, will or would continue to strike, ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES.1 -Dal-akac-tahert-tag i - dok-ka-lca-har&, Being now about to continue to strike. Dat-akac-tahcn-tctgidok?,'kanaqt-th-6kanikhan, Being then about to continue to strike. Dat-akcac-ta h Z- kce - khan, (If oneý) willing to continue to strike. Dat~akcac-tahZ-Zc-1chav,, In case of continuing striking. Dat -alac-tahcn-t ag ictok kan-rcak', tc, ye, Of by, in being about to continue to strike now. D at-alcac-tahen-ta g i do iSIcar-tah~1can-rc-alS, te, re., Of, by, in being then about to continue to strike, Dat-alcac-tahekan-rcalS, tc,,re, Of, by, in wishing to continue to strike. Dat-a kac-tah'e,-lc-r eelS, tc. re, Of, by, in continuing strikin.g. GERUNDS. Dat-a icac- t a h Z k e Who would continue to strike. Who may have continued to strike. TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLEs. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. gRUND,. PRELIMINARY FUTURE. D a-akae-tahZe-legi -e, He will first continue to strike. PRELIMINARY EXP OSTULATIVE, Dal-akcae-tah'-le-nahi-I jDal-akate-tah-le-nae, He must first hi, First continucontinue to strike. ing to strike. PRELIMINARY PERS UASIVE. Dal-akae-tahT Je-ba-e, Dal-akae-tcah-le-bau, He must first con- First continuing to tinue to strike. strike. PRELIMINARY ADMI SSIVE. Dal-akae-tah--le- e n - Dal-akae-tah2-le-ena, a-e, He must first I First continuing to continue to strike. strike. PRELIMINARY BENED ICTIVE. Dat-aJave-tahk-le-mam! Mayest thou first continue to strike. PRELIMINARY IMPE RATIVE. Dal-akae-tah2-t e -m! Continue thou first to strike. ?13 PH ý 0 - z CO3 iz c -- 4t ~0 -'0 121 TABLES OF THlE FOR1MATION OF THlE TENSES, THE. CONTINUATIlVE FORM, (ANIMATE.) ACC. WITH NOM. ACTIVE. TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. GERUNDS. FUTURE. Dat--ak1a-ko -Rtahen-a-e, Dat-akJa-Jko-t a h e ii, Dat-a Jca-ko-t a h e ni - Dal -ak-cL-ko-tahen-qveaTr', te, He will continue to They whomthey will lkhan, Continuing re, Of, by, in continunstrike themn. continue to strike, to strike them. ing to strike them. SPECIAL. INCOMPLE TE PRESENT. SDat-a Joa-/oo-tahen-lcan- Dat-aka-koo-t a h en- Dat -ala-Jco-t a h e n - Dat-aka-ko-tahen-lcan-rea1k aý t-,e, He is continu- 1oan, They, whom. loan-Joham, Conti - to, re, Of, by, in contilug to strike them. they are continuing nuingr now to strike nuing to strike them now. to strike,. them. SPECIAL INCOMPLE TE PAST. Dat -a~oa-1koo.tah~Jo a n - Dat-akea-ko-tah~1can, Dat-a,7oa-ko-tah'eJcan - Dat -alca-loo-t ah'eJoan-r e a M a-e, He was conti- rjlhey, whom they khan, Continuing te, re, Of by, in connuing to strikethei. were continuing to then to strike them. tinuing to strike them. strike. INCHOATIVE FUTU RE. Dat.-akJa-Jo-tahen- ta- Dat-aloa-lco-tahen-ta- Dat-alod-ko-tahen-ta- Dat-aka-ico-tahen- l ag i t'git'-C, He will be git', They whom git'-krhaen, Be i n g realS, te, re, Of, by, in about to continue to they will be about about to cont i n u e being about to continue strike them. to continiue to strik~e, to strike them, to strike them. TENSES. IADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. INCHOATIVE PRESE NT Dat -alca-Jo-taken-l a - Dal-alca-ico-tahen-ta- Dal-akaca-o-tabhen- la - giclolS-kan-a-e, He is gidok'-Joa ib, They' gidolS-ican- i0 h a n, about to continue to whom they are about Being now about to strike them. to continue etc. continue. to strike Dat-alca-ko-tahet-l a - Dal- ck-ko- tahe'n-tla- Dal-alcalo-tahen-tagig~idoJr'-Jc~an-tah'e-kav- qidol(Jcan-tahilcan', do1,-_kaq1-1han, Bea-e, He was about to They, whom they Ing then about to continue to strike were about to con- continue to strike them. tinue to strike, themn. OPTATIVE. Dal-ak1a-Jo-tah'e-ke-a-e Da[-ak~a-1co-tah-e- 7e e, Dal- a Ja-1eo-tah'e-k e - He would continue They, whom t h e y khan, Wishing to GERUNDS. Dat-alca-ko-tahen-lagido 19 - lcan-reak, te, re, Of, by, in being now about to continue to strike them. Dal-alca-/co-tahen-tagido ic' 1can-tah~Jcan-reakc te, r e,ý Of, by, in being then about to continue to strike them. 9Aal-aoa-1co-tahZ-ke-rea1S, te, 're, Of, by, in Wishing to continue to strike them. Dal-akca-1co-tahZ-Ie-reak', te, 're, Of, by, in havin g continued to strike them. to strike themi. CONDITIONAL. (Oho) Dal-alca-ko-tahe'le-a-e, He would (n ot) conti n ue to0 strike them. I would continue t o strike. Dat-cdct-k~o-taht - 1 e They whom t he y may have continued t6 strike,0 continue to strike them. Dat-a Jca-Jco-tahe& I eikhan, In case of having continued to strike them. TENEss. CONTINGENT. Dal-aka-ko-tah-e-k e tgi-e, He continues, will or would continue to strike them. PRELIMINARY FUT Dal-aka-ko-tah--le-gi - e, He will first continue to strike them. PRELIMINARY EXPc Dal-akca-ko-tah ' - Ze - nah-e, He must first continue to strike them. PRELIMINARY PERS Dacl-aka-ko-tahe - e - ba-e, He must first continue to strike them., PRELIMINARY ADM Dal-aka-kco-tahe-le-ena-e, He must first continue to strike them. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES, URE, STULATIVE. UASIVE. ISSIVE. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. Dal-akca-ko-tahe- 1 e - nah1, Having first continued to strike them. Dal-cka-1ko-taht- l e - bai, Having first continued to strike them. DaZ-aka-io-tach- leenc, Having fi rst continued to strike them. GERUNDS. TE ENS Es. PRELIMINARY BENEI Dal-akct-ko-tcahl-[e-re-ma m! Mayest thou first - continue to strike them! PRELIMINARY IMPE Dal-alca-ko-tahZ-le-m! Continue thou first to strike them!1 BENEDICTIVE. Dcal-alca-ko-tahen-mam! Mayest thou continue to strike them! IMPERATIVE. Dal-Wca-leo-tahen-me! Continue thou to strike them 1 INFINITIVE. Daal-aka-ko-tahen, To continue to strike them,, ADJECTIVE PArICIaPLEa. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. DICTIVE. RATIVEO %GERUNXDS i TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. REFLEXIVE. (ANIMATE.) ACC. WIT] SNOMINATIVE. IADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. Dal-akan-tahen-a - e, Dal-aka n - t a h en, He will continue to Who will continue strike himself. to strike himself. SPECIAL INCOMPLEITE PRESENT. Dal-takn-tahen-kan- Dal-akcaan-tahen-kan, a-e, He is continu- Who is continuing ing to strike him- to strike himself. self. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Dal-akan-tahl2kan-a-e, Dal-akan-tahtIk a n, He was continuing' Who was continuto strike himself. ing to strike himself. INCHOATIVE FUTITU RE. Dcal-akan-tahen-clagit'- Da7,-akan-tahen-lagit', e, He will be about Who will be about to continue to strike to continue to strike himself. himself. Dal-akan-taken-khan, Continuing to strike himself. Dal-akcan-tahen-kctankhan, Continuing to strike himself now. Dal-akan-taht-ka n - khan, Continuing to strike himself then. Dal-al an-tahen-lagit'kIchan, Being about to continue to strike himself. GERUNDS. Dal-akan-tahen-reak', te, re, Of, by, in continuing to strike himself. Dal-akan-tahen-kan-rea M, te, re, Of, by, in continuing to strike himself now. Dal-ackan-ta-kekan-rea1d, te, re, Of, by, in continuing to strike himself then. Dat acan-tahen-agit'reak', te, re, Of, by, in being about to continue to strike himself. TENSES. AfDJECTIVE PARTiCtPLES. xADVERBIAL PARTiClPLEt. GERUng. INCHOATIVE PRESEjNT. Dc t-atcaan-tahen-lctgid- Dcdal-akn-talihe-lagid- Dal-alcan-tahen-l-ajqid Dcd-alan-tahen-Zag i d o PcoJS-kan7-a-e, He is olS-ican, Who is ol-Jean-Ihan, Be- kan-reak, te, re, Of, by, about to continue about to continue ing now about to in being now about to to strike himself, to strike himself, continue to strike continue to strike himself. himself. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal-alca7-tahen Iazgid. Dal-alan-tahen-agid- bal-alc can-tahen-Zagid. Dc-alcan-tthen-lag i d o ko1o-lkcn-tahlkcan-. a oati-tcah e kc a n, o1kan-tah k I a n - kan-tah~Jcan-realk, te, re, e, He was about to Who was about to Ichan, Being then Of, by, in being then continue to strike continue to strike about to continue about to continue to strike himself. himself. to strike himnself. himself. OPTATIVE. Dat -aican-tah~-Jolca- D c~n Zl-ko 0JM Dat-alican-tahM-kI o k Dal-alean-tahe-lcolJ-rea1M, te, e, He would con- Whcs wmiid Prif.;nIl 7.7, TXT:11.. I -*4 n-9 k.-1 - *, 4 tinue to strike himself. CONDITIONAL. (OhQo) Dat-aJean-tah-eten-a-e, He would (not) continue to strike himself, to strike himaself. DaZ-aZ-anar-talig- I en, Who may have continuedto strike himself. continue striking himself. Dat-alcan-tah'e-- e n - khan, In case of having continued striking himself, irs~, 'Lu~yY ILl VV i0JLII~ IA) continue to strike himself, Dat-alcan-.tah'-ten-rrea, te, re, Of, by, in continuing to strike himself [3 TENS ~s. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES, CONTINGENT. Dal-akan-tcthe-en-gi - e, He continues or would continue to strike himself. PRELIMINARY PUT URE. e, He will first continue to strike himself. PRELIMINARY Ex~ OSTULATIVE. Dal-clrkan-tcah~e,- I e n - ncthz-e, He must first continue to strike himself. PRELIMINARY PER SUASIVES. Da~l-cdan-tah-e-len-bae, Hle must first continue to strike himself. PRELIMINARY ADM ISSIVE. Dcdi-alcan-tcthZ-len-ena-e, He must -first continue to strike ADVERBUfL PARTICIPLIES. Dal-ctkcn-tah'e'- I e nnahl', First having continued to strike himself. Dat -akan--tak-e-l e n - bafz, First having continued to strike himuself. DcU-akean-tah'e- I e n - ena., First having continued to strike himself. GERUNDS# TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLEs., ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES5. GERUNDS. PRELIMINARY BEN EDICTIVE. Dali-a kct-tath' - I e n - ma-rn! Mayest thou first continue to strike thyself! PRELIMINARY PIPE RATIVE.. Dal-alrcan-tl th-6- I e. n me! Continue thou first to strike- thy-~ self! BENEDICTIVE. Dai-alcar-tahen-m a ml M3a ' est thou continue to strike. thyself! Dal-alran-tahen..m e!o Continue thou to strike thyself!I IN~FINITIVE. Dat -alcan-tahen, To, continue to strikeoneself. Remark. The neuter is conjugated in the same manner as the common gender,, the nomninative sufi~xes being cl course exeluded; as Dalcskantahence, it will continually be struck. TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES0 ACTIVE. DAT. WIT"H NOMI. (I NANIMATE.) TENSES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. D~a[-a1reao-a41r-.tahen-a- Dat-a Jvo-a-1 -tahen, e, He will continue At, or on which thiey to strike at or on it. willicontin ueto strik~e. SPECIAL INC0MPLETIE. PREiSENT. Dal-a7,cto-a-1r,-tahe n - Dal-a 1ao-a-1M-tahen - 1can-ý-aýe, Hie is con- kan, At which they tinning to strike 'at, are continuing; to or on it. strike. SPECIAL INCOMPLET E. PAST. Dal-akeao-a-1S,'-tahZ- Dal-akao-a-S- t a h,kan-a-e, He was 7caq?, At which they continuing to strike were continuing to at, or on it. strike. INCHOATIVE, FUTUR E. DWal7-aTao-a-1k-ta hen- Dal-a1rao-a-hk-tahen - lagit'-e, He will be tagit'. At which about to continue to they will. be about strike at it. to cont-inue to strike. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLE5.1 GERUjNDS. Dal-akeao-a-Jk-tahen - khan, Continuing to strike at it. Dal-akcw-a-kM-tahen - kan-1-,han, Continuing to strike at it now. Dcd-alcao-a-k~-tah~-e kart-lhan, Continuing to strike at it then. Dal-ak~ao-a-le'-tahen-r e a te, 're, Of, by, in continuing to strike at it. Da1-alrao-a-1c'4ahen- k a n - rea1', te, Ile) Of, by, in now continuing to strike at it. Dat -a 7rao-a-1c-tah~'k-an-rea14 te, rle, Of, by, in then continuingý to strike at it. Dat-a Jcao-a-1e,-tahen-lagi t' - ireaJz', te, ise, Of, by, in, being about to- continue to strike at it,, Dal-a1lao-a-JJ-tahem - lagit'-khan, Being about to continue to strike at it. J_ r~rinm I IAJECTIVEi?ARTIOIPLES.] INCHOATIV E PRE.SEINT.I D~at-akJao-a-kM-tah ~ n- Dal-cdt-ao-c-k'-tahen - 1qaaidok'-kan-ct-e, He lagido1o'-ka n,. At is about to continue which they are. to strike at it. about to continue to strike.. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal-akao-a-1k- t ah e. n - tagiodo1- oa n 4ta h 'e" Skan-a-4, He. was Sabout to continue to strike at it. OPTATIVE. Dat-al-aao--a-k'-tahZ-oe,a-c, Heý would con-. tinue to. strike at it. CONDITIONAL. (Qho) Dc-al-aao-a-7&' tah-e-le -a -.e, He. would (not) continue to strike at it. Dat-alao-a-lM - tah~n lagido1z'-kan-tah~nloan, At which they were about to continue to strike. Dat-a, Jao-a-Wo-tah'.ke, Atwhich they would continue to, strike., Dat-akao-a-1k3-tahZ,-1e, At which they may have- continued to strike., ADvERBIAL PARTICIPLES. D-at-a,1rao-c& l9_taheru - lagidol'-lean-.kha n, Being now about to, continue to: strike: at it. Dat-akao-a-l9-tahen - Zagido1,c-k~an- t a h 'e koan-,khan,. Being then about to continue. to.strike at it. D-aZakao-a-M-tahZ-k-ekhan, Wishingr to. continue. to strike at it. Dal-akao-a41X-tah-te,k~han, Having continued to. strike at D~aI-aloa-a-lc'ta~hen-ta g, i* -;ý? doAg-kan-veaJi, te, re, Of, by,. in now being about to,. continue etc., JDal-alcao-a-k.-taheln - t a gi-, do1M-kam-tah~lcan-reak', te,, re, Of, by, in then beingr7 about to, cont~inue etc.. Da~t-akýao~a-k'4ah'e-ke-reak',.te, 9-e, Of, by, in wishinogr to continue etc.. Dat _akao-,a-k-tahiý-le-reaAW, te, re, Havi ng continued to strike at it.. GERU-N1D,5; -L TENSES. CONTINGENT. Dal-alm o - a -lo- t ah ~-c ke~t'-gi-e, He will or.would continue -or, continues to strike at it, PRELIMINARY FUT Dttl-akao-a-1r,-tcth~-egi-e, He will first continue to strike at it. PiRELIMINARY Expo nah?,-e, He must first continue to strike at PRELIMIN~ARY PERS 6a-e, He must first continue to strike at it. PRELIMINARY ADmi Dal-akao-a-k~-tahZ-le em-a-c, Ile must first continue to.qfri'kp q+~ it. ADJECTIVE PAnlciPLES. 'ADVERBIAL PARTIC~IPLES. UREM STULATIVE. UASIVE. SSIVE. nahi, First, continuing to strike at it. bafi, First continuingr to strike at it. Dal-akcao-a-k'-tthe1-1eena, First continuing to strike at it. GERUND&~ z p.4 4 - +.~-445 pqI 0 0 ~ 0 ~ 133 TABLE.S OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. ACTIVE. (ANTIMATE.) DA TIRE JVIl TENLSES. ADJECTIVE PARTIIcPL~ES. FUTURE.. Dali-ctlcco-ct-ko-tahen-" Dcd-aPrao-ct-ko-tahem, a-e, He will con- They forwhomthey tinue to strike for will continue to S them. strike. SPECIAL INOOMPLE TE PRIESENrT. TH NOMINATAIVE9. ADVERBIAL P-ARTCIPLjES-. Eaýak-acto;-c-ko~tahenkhcan, Continuing to -strike for them. Dal-'ct/ao-a-ko-tahenkan-khan, Continuing now to strike for them.. OE'RtNDS., ye, Of, by, in continuing to strike for them. Da-alcaoz-a-ka-tahe n - k a reak,, te, re, Of, by, in now continuingr to strike for them. Dal..kalco-a-Jo-tahen-. lcan-a-e, He 'is continuing to strike for them. Dcd-abcao-a-leo-tahenkan, They, for whom they are con-.; tinuing to strike. SPECIAL TNCOM1'LET!E PAST. Dal-a'kao-a-ko-tcth'-- kan-a-i.e, He was continuing to strike for them'. Dctl-ctkco-a-ko4ah'ekan, They, f or whom they were continuing to strike. Pbal-ckao-aý-ko;-tah'e" - Dat.-akaoý.a-.ko--tahekaniý.reaXk, kan-keham, Conti - te, ye, Of, by, in then nuing then to strike continuing to strike for for them. the m. TENSES. iADJECTIVE PARTICIrLES. ADVERBIAL PAnTICrPLES. INCHOATiVE FTTU'R-E. Dal-akao-a-lco-tahen- Dal-aAao-a-lzo-tahen- Dcd-akcao-a-io-tah-entagit'-e, He will be tagit', They, for lagit'-ohan-, IBeing about to continue whom they will be about to continue to strike for them. about to continue to strike for them. etc. INCHOATIVE PRESE NT. Dal-Wcao-a-keo-tahen- Dal-akao-a-Joo-tahen- Dcd-akao-a-ko-tahenlogidokM-kan-a-e, He logido1-17anv, They, tagidoll-kan,-khan, is about to continue for whom they are Being now about to to strike for them. about to continue continue to strike GERUNDS. INCHOATIVE- PAST. Dcd-akao-al-ko-tahenlogidolJ-kan-ta h Z - Ican-a-e, He was about to continue to strike for them. OPTATIVE. Dal-akco-a-ko-ta h Z - ke-a-e; He would continuie to strike for them. to strike. Dat-akao-aJ-ko-tahenlogido1 -kcn-ta h Z - kan, They, for whom they were about to continue to strike. Dal-a-kao-a-Z-o-tah;n:ke, They, for whom they would continue to strike. for them. Dal-akcao-a-ko-tahentagido1,-Akan-t a h '*'kan-kharb, Being then about to continue to strike for them. Dal-alcao-a-ko-ta h Z - ke-ichan, Wishing to continue to strike for them. Dal-alcao-a-ko-tahen-lagit' - reakX, te, re, Of, by, in heinog about to continue to strike for them. Dai-alcao-a-koo-tahen-lagidok1-kan-reaJA, te, yle, Of, by, in now being about to continue etc. DlalZacao-a-ko-tahern-lagido1k-1can-tah1c*an-reakl, te, re, Of, by, in then being about to continue etc. Dal-akao-a- ko-tahe-Jce-reakc, te, re, Of, by, in wishing to continue to strike for them. TENsES. CONDITIONAL. (Oho). Dal-ckao-a-kotafli-le-a - e, He would (not) continue to strike for them, CONTINGENT. Dal-akao-a-ko - tahZket'-gi-e, He will or would continue to strike for them. PRELIMINARY FU Dal-akao-a-Jco-ta h Z - le-gi-e, He will first continue to strike for them. PRELIMINARY Exro Dal-akao-a-ko-ta h e - le-nahi-e, He must first continue to strike for them. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLE., GErUNDS. Dcal-akcao-a-ko-tahe - le, They, for whom they may have continued to strike. TURE. STUJLATIVE. Dal-akaco-a-ko-tah e - le-khan, In case of having continued to strike for them. Dal-akao-a-ko-tach - le-rnah, Having first continued to strike for them, Dal-akco-a-k o -t a h - - I e - reak', te, re, Of, by, in having continued to strike for them. TENsES, ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. PRELIMINARY PERS UASIVE. Dal-akcao-a-klco-taht-le-' ba-e, He must first continue to strike for them. PRELIMINARY ADM ISSIVE, Dal-akao-a-ko-ta h e - le-en-a-e, He must first continue to strike for them. PRELIMINARY BENE DICTIVE, Dal-akao-a-ko-tah'e-lema-rn! Mayest thou first continue to strike for them! PRELIMINARY IMPE RATIVE. Dal akao-a-ko-ta h Z - le-n! Continue thou first to strike for them! BENEDICTTVE. Dal-alcako-a-ko-takenma-m! Mayest thou continue to strike for them' ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. Dal-akao-a-ko-tah ele-baA, Having first continued to strike for them. Dal-alcao-a-ko-tah Z - le-ena, Having first continued to strike for them. GERUND&, IMPERATIVES _Da-.~akao-a-ko-tcthenmie!. Continue thou to strike for them! INFINITIVE. Dctl-ctlco-a-ko-tahen,, To continue to strike for them. ADJECTIVE PAETIOIPLES. (ADVEEBI1AL PARTICIPLES.GRINS GERUNDS. Remark-:-The nominative- case may also be added here to the Adjective Participles; as _Dalakcaoakotahenko, they who will continue to strike for thea.. TABLES OF THE FORMATION OF THE TENSES. REFLEXIVE. (ANIMATE.) TENSES. FUTURE. Dal-akao-an-tah en - a-e, He will continue to strike for himself. DAT. WITH NOM. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. Dal-akao-an-tah e n, Who will continue to strike for himself. SPECIAL INCOMPLENTE PRESENT. Dal-akao-an-tah e n - kan-a-e, He is continuing to strike for himself. Dal-akao-an-tahe n - kan, Who is continuing to strike for himself. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. Dal-akao-an-tah e n - kchan, Continuing to strike for himself. Dal-alao-an-tahe n - kan-ichan, Conti - nuing to strike for himself now. Dat-akao-an-t a h ' - kan-khan, Conti - nuing to strike for himself then. Dal-ackao-an-tahen - r e a 1i, te, re, Of, by, in continuing to strike for hi m - self. Dat-akao-an-ta h en - k a nreal1, te, re, Of, by, in now continuing to strike etc. Dal-akao-an-tahekcan-reak, te, re, Of by, in then continuing to strike etc. GERUNDS. SPECIAL INCOMPLEITE PAST. Dal-akao-an-tahkkana-e, He was continuing to strike for himself. Dal-akao-an- t a h 6 - kan, Who was continuing to strike for himself. TENSES. INCHOATIVE FUTUR Dat -a Jcao-am-tah e ra - la git'-el He will be about to continue to strike for himself. ADJECTIVE PA11TICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. GENS GERUNDS. INCHOATIVE PRESEJ Dat -akJao-an-tahentagido1,'-/an - at - e He is about to continue to strike f o r himself. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dat -akJao-an-tahen tagido1z'-1oan-ta h 'e" - kan~-a-e, He w a s about to continue to strike for himself. OPTATIVE. Dat -akao-ctn-tah~-Jc-okJa-e, He w oulId continue to st rik e for himself. E. Dal-alcao-an-talte n - laglit', -Who will be about to conti n u e to strike forhimself. NT. Dal-akcao-art-tahentaqido1k-kan, Who is about to continue to strike for himself. Dal-a7ýao-an-tahe n - lagido1'-Jcan - t a h 6 kam,Who was about to continue to strike for himself. Dat -a kao-an- t a h e. - kolS, Who would continue to strike for himself. Dat -okao-an-t ahentagitf-khan~, Bei ng about to continue etc. Dal-alcao-an-tahem1agido7kc-1can-1,ha n, Being now about to continue etc. Dctl-alcao-an-tahe q? - lagictoklc-han-tah Zkan-k-han), Bei n g then about to co n - tinue etc. Dat -akao-ctn-tah-Jco1c'khan, Wishing to continue to strike for oneself. Dcd-akao-anA-tahevn-ta g i t'r-ealS,. te, rer Of, by, in being about to continue to strike etc. Dat -akao-an-tahen-t cgidoloS-kan-realS, te, re, Of, by, in now being about to continue etc. Dat -a lcao-an-tahen-tagido M~ -kan tah'Ukan-reakc, te, re, Of, by, in then being about to continue etc. Dal-alcao-an-taht-kolS-reak~, te, re, Of, by, in wishingr to continue to strike etc. TENSE4S. CONDITIONAL. (QhQ)' Dal-alcao-a n - tahZ-len-ct-e, 'He -would (not) continue to. strike fox himiself. CONTINGENT. Dctl-aic o-a~n-tah~n-en gi-,e, He continues or would continue. 1;z to stri~ke, for himS self.' PRELIMINARY FTJT Dctl-ctcapo-aan-tcthZ-lemgi-e, He will, first continue to strike, for. hirn'self. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLEs ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. Dal-akao-ai-t~ah'e-lev, Dc*2-alcao-am t a~ h Z - Who may have con- len-ic ham, -In case tinued to strike for of having continuhimself. ed to strike etc.. GERUNDS. Dat-ctkao-an-taht-l en-rea1', te, re, Of, by, in having continued to strike for oneself, UREý. PRELIMINARtY ExpIOSTIJLATIVE, Dal-akcao-an-tahZ-tennahs-, He ust first continue to strik~e etc. Dat -a~rcao.-antah-e4en iiaht', IFirst h a v-t ing continu ed t o strike for him~self. TENSES. IADJECTIVE PRELIMINARY PER SUASIVE. Dal-akao-an-tahi-len-- ba-e, He must first continue to strike etc. PRELIMINARY AD MISSIVE, Dal-akcao-tan-tahk-lenen-a-e, He mrnust first continue to strike etc. PRELIMINARY BEN EDICTIVE. Dal-akao-an-tcalh-lenma-m!, Mayest thou first continue to strike etc. PRELIMINARY IMPERATIVE. Dal-akcao-an-tahZ-tenme!, Conti nue thou first to strike etc. BENEDICTIVE. Dal-akao-an-tah en - ma-m!, May est thou continue to strike etc. PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES.' GERUNDUS. Dal-akao-an - t a h - - len-baz, First having continued to strike for himself. Dal-a1kao-an- t a h z - len-ema, First having continued to gtrike for himself. p44 Z '-4 z E-Q A z 144 THE SIGNS OF THE TENSES STRIPPED OF ALL INFLEXIONS. Future. General 'incomplete Present. Special incomplete Present,, Recent Past. Anterior Past. Perfect. General 'Incomplete Past. Special incomplete Past. Indecisive Pluperfect. Decisive Pluperfect. Inchoative Future. Inchoative Present., Inchoative Past. Optative. Conditional. Contingen t. Preliminary Future. Preliminary Expostulative. Preliminary Persuasive. Preliminary Admissive. Preliminary perfect Expostulative Preliminary perfect Persuasive. Preliminary perfect Admissive. Preliminary Benedictive. Preliminary Imperative. Benedictive. Imperative, NO3L. AND AMC Root. et', or ed. et'-kan, or ed-/can. ket', or Iced. let', or led. et'-or ed-tah-/can. et'-, or ed- Icantahi~can. -lagit'. -lagido1klan. -lagidogicantah~/&n. ke. le. ket'-or ked-gi. le-gi. le-nah'i le-ba. le-ena. le-ma-m, ben, pe! le- M, ben, pe! - mia-rn, ben, pe! - me, ben, pe! ACTIVE. DATIVE. ACC. RESERVATIVE FORM, ACC17SATIJ a-. ka-. OR. a-kan. ka-/can. o1kkan. at',or ad. kat',. or kad. en. len. akaoat', or ak-aoad. a/cat', or akad. a-kan-tah-e/can. ka-/can-tah~/can. okc'/antah~kan. at'-or ad-taheIcan. kat'-,or kacl-tahe can. lentahean ala Ito kaa -tak/an akat'-,or a/cad-tah'ekan. - a-lagit'. ica-lagit'. olclagit' a-lagidok~kan. ka-lagidoikkan. o1'lagido~c'can. a-lagidokc'kantah'/can ka-lagidok~kantaht/can. o 7,'lag ido1kkan tah'6 kok'. len. at'-,or ad-gi. krat'-,or kad-gi. engit. a-gere. ka-gere. len gl. len nah'.. len ba. len ena. a/caoa-enahi. alca-nah'. a/caoa-ba. a/ca-ba. a/caoa-ena. alca-ena. len ma-rn, ben, pe. len me, ben, pe. a- ma-rn. ben, re! /a-ma-m, ben, pe! We' ma m, ben, pe. a- me, ben, re! ka-me, ben, pe! Ok" mre, ben, pe. DATIVE. Ijoh/can. an. akaoan. jo~kantah~kan. antah-/can. a/caoantah'ekan. johlagit'. joh~agidol3/an. jodlagido1kkantahe-/can. angi. an nahU an ba. an ena. akaoaln.nah".. a/caoan ba. a/caoan ena. an ma-rn, ben, pe! an me, ben, pe! joA ma-rn, ben, pe! jofi me, ben, pe! 400C. RESERVATITTE FORM. ko/k. ko/d/an. a/can. kokk/antaht/can, akantah-e/can. kokclagidoklcan. k-oAlagiclolc'antah Z/can, ko/cgere. a/can naMA-" a/can ba. a/can ena. ko1' ma-rn, ben, pe! Icok',-me, ben, pe! REFLEXIVE, Remark. 1 The stroke 1 - " denotes, that the accusative or dative infixes shall be put there; as " a-kanu" may become aekanu, akolean, ak'kcen etc. Remark. 2 It is only necessary to affix the causative sign ocho to the root, in order to form the causative. Remnark. For a table of the abridged pronouns vide page 29-30. (1 145 ) ( 146 ) CONJUGATION.-OF THE DEFECTIVE IMPERSONAL VERB MENA to PRESENT INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Mena- - a, I exist, or I am. 2 Mena-m-a, Thou art. 3 Mena-e-a, He or she is. DUAL. 1 Mena-lin-a, We two are. 2 Mena-ben-a, You two are. 3 Men a - k in - a, They two are. PLURAL. 1 Mena-le-a, We are. 2 Mena-pe-a, You are. 3 Mena-.ko-a, They are. Neture. Mena1--a, It is, they are. SUBJUNCTIVE with " [han."" SINGULAR. Mena-,n-khan, If I am. Mena-m-kJhan, If thou art. Mena-e-klhan, If he is. DUAL. Mena-lii-kl h a n, If we two are. 3lena- ben - ichan, If you two are. Mena-kicn-lch an n, If they two are. PLURAL. M ena-le-kchan, If we are. Mena-pe- k h a n, If you are. Mena-kco-kchan, If they are. Mena1i-Jchan, If it is. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset' mena- ti, Perhaps I am. Paset' mena-m, Perhaps thou art. Paset' rnena-e, Perhaps he is. DUAL. Paset' mena-li i, Perhaps we two are. Paset' mena-ben, Perhaps you two are, Paset' mnena - k in, Perhaps they two are. PLURAL. Paset' mena-le, Perhaps we are. Paset' mea - pe, Perhaps you are. Paset' mena-kho, Perhaps they are. Paset' meniak, Perhaps it is. Remark. The other Tenses are wanting. For the Past of this tense vide " TaUxkana," 14 7 OF YERBS. exist, ta 6be. TENSE. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. 1 M~en-s, I who am'. 2 Mfnca-m, Thou, whoo art. 3 Mele a-e, He orshe; who is. 1. Menai, ltWetwo,who are. 2 Jiena-ben, are. 3 -iiena-kin, are. You two, w hlo They two, who G EERIJNNDS Mlena~hj-r~ea, te>, re, k-hion eta. Of, by, in from my being. Me'nar-rei1l, te, 1e, I/Chon, Of, by, in thy being. 3enae.-rea1', te, Te, kkon,. Of,ý by, in his being. MenatiU- e1, te, re-, ihon, Of. by, in our (two) being. Menabeni-vea1., te, re, k h o u Of, by, in your (two) beihg. Menakcin-reaJ3, te, re, lk hi o q?, Of, by, in t-heir (two).being, Mena~e-reaJ,, t, re ichon,, Of by, in from our being. Aienape-reair, te, r e, i h o n,, Of, by, in from your being. Menako-rea1, te, re, ich o n, Of, by, in, from their being,.. Meniudo,-rea1, te, re, khon, Of by, in from, its. being. I Mena-le, We., who are. 2 Menet-pe, Yout, who are. 3 Mena-ko,. They, who are. Neuter. Men-IcY, It, which is. Remasrk. This verb means to exist, and is not used as a copulae to form a predicatee: hence it is wrong to say Herel menana, sewn badia? for that mneans, you man, are you (here for instance) or not? and not, are you a man or not.1; (Vide kancc)ý. ( 148 ) U1-OF THE COPULA KAN, to be. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. IKan-a-n-, Iam. 2 Kan-a-rn, Thou art. 3 Kan-a-e, He,or she is. SUBJUNCTIVE with 11 Mihnn" SINGULAR. Kan-ldccn-ln', I am. Kan-Johan-ern, thou art. Kan-lohan-e, he is. if if I f DUAL. DUAL. 1 Kctrta-ini~, We Kan-khan-linf, If two are, we two are. 2 Kan-a-ben, Kan-Johan-ben,, You two are. If you two are. 3 Kan-a-.loin, Kan-khan-loin, 'They two are. If they two are. PLURAL. PLURAL. 1 Kan-a-le., W e Kan-Johanile, if are. we are. 2 Kan..a-pe, You Kan-Joehan-pe, If are. you are. 3Kan-a-ko., They Kan-Johan-leo, I f are. I they are. Neuter. Kan-a, it Kan-lehan, if 'it.is. is. SUBJUNCTIVE, with CC Pset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-in'- *Jkea(n Perhaps I am.Paset' - e m - Jo a n, Perhaps thou art.P a s e t' - e - Jo a n, Perhaps he is.-. DUAL.Pas~et'-lisi-lean, Perhaps we two are.Paset'- ben -lean, Perhaps you two are. Paset'- lo i /n - lea n, Perhaps they two are.PLURAL. Paset'-le-kJan, PerPaset'-pe-kan, Perhaps they are.,, Paset'-loo-loan, Perhaps they are.-- Paset'-Joaru, Perhaps it is. Bemc'ark. This verb is always used as a Copula to form predicates; asi Mctrcsh-k-aaae, he is great, Bugi-7eanae, he is good. This stroke (-) denotes, that the adjective or noun shall be in serted. ( 149 ) III.-OF THE PAST TENSET TA HEK AN. INDICATIVEs. SINGULAR. 1 Tah-ekcn-a-n-', was. 2 Tah~Jcctn-a-m, Thou wast. 3 Tah~kan-a-e, He or- she was. I SUBJUNCTIVE With SINGULAR. Rth~Jcan-Jchan-in" If I was. Tah~ an-khan- em, If thou wast. Tcth'e1kan-khan-e., If he ws DUAL. If we two were. Tah~kan-lvhcn-ben,' If you two were. Tah-kamn-khan-Jcim If they two were. PLURAL. Tah~'e7an-Jchan-le, SUBJUCTIVE with "1 Paset'," SINGULAAR. Paset'-ifi-talhaJccn,, Perhaps I was. Pa~se['-em-tah~1ean, Perhaps thou wast,, Paset'-e-tah-e/can, Perhaps he was. DUAL. Paset'4liAi-tah-eJ~an, Perhaps we two were Pa~set'-bogr-tah'eJcan, Perha-ps you two were.ý Paset'-Jc~in-tah'e*kan, Perhapsthey two were PLURAL.. DUAL. I TahZ 7mn-a-lir~ We two were. 2 Tah~lcam-a-ben, You two were. 3 Tah-leam-a-kin, They two were. PýLURAR. I Tahoekan-ct-le,' We were. 2 Tahh'cart- a - e You were. 3 Tahe-klan-a-ko, They were. Neuter. Tah-1octn a., It was. IPaset'-ie- tah-ekvm, If we were. Perhaps we were. Tah-ekan-lehan-pe, Paset'-pe-tcah'kan, If you were. Perhaps yoa were. tahZkarn-khan-ko, Paset'-ko-tah-ekan, If they were. Perhaps they were. Tahtkcan-khar&, Paset'-tah-ekcan, PerIf it was. haps it was.. Paticiple: Tdhhekcum, ThhZlcankim, Tcth'Jcanleo, he they two,, they, who were, Gerund: Tath-kcan-reaA3, te re etc., Of by, in beinag then. Remark. Thisi tense is iised as past tense both for Jlen, and for Fans. ( 150 ) IV.-OF THE NEGATIVE IMPERSONAL VERB INDICATIVE. S IINVULA1R. ~iBanu-gi-n- -a, I am not.,2 _Banu1Or,-me-a., Thou art not. -3 Banu- g i-c 76'-,,a, He is -1ot. DUAL. We two~are not..2 Bann13-b en -a, You two.are not. -3 Banul3-k i n.-a, They two are not. SuBJUNTivEF w.vith Khan. SINGULAR. Banu-gin' It-,han, If I ami not. Banukml3e-ki-h a n', IIf -thou art not. If be is not. DUAL. Bct1Iu1'- lipi-chi a n,.Ifwe two are not. PLURAL..1 B~annl.;'--1a, We -are not. 9 Bantuk-p -, You are not, 3 Banu-k-ko-_-a,, They are -not, -Ne~uter. Banul3-, It is not. ' Ban ul3-ben-k-ha nI ITf you ztwo' are not. Banulo3-lcin.-i7can, If they two are not. PLURAKL. BanuJ3-l- k 14 a n, If we are -not. flanml3-p'e-lc- h'an,-b If you -are not. Banul3,-c-ko~h a n, If th-ey are -not. Banml3.-k~han, 1 f 'it is'not. SUBJUCTIVE, *ith Paset'. SRIN GULAR. Paset', b a nmt- gi-S Perhaps I avr not. Pa~set' ba n u 1r3 -m enc Perhaps th, o'u a rt -not. Paset' hanu -,. i- c N Perhaps *he is not. DUAL. Paset' b a nu13-',li Pi Peihaps -we two are -not. Pasde 'banm 13- b e n, Perhaps you.two are, not. Paset' bcnu 1,-,-k i n, Perhaps the~y t w:@a are not. PLURAL. Paset' b~aqtn M 13-ie Perhaps we are not. Paset' bann13,-pe, Perhaps you are not. Paset' ba % lr- k.o, Perhaps the y a re not. Paset' banml3, PerIbaps it is not. Remark. This verb is the negative of Pftna, not of Lean, consequently it can not Ve used. like the Eaglish Co~pula ( 151 ) BAtYU, not to be. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. 1 Banugiq2, I who am not. 2 Banulmý-me, not. Thou who art 3 Banugicl', lie or she is not. GERtJNJmS Bainugin-rec4i-, to, ye, Of, by, in my not being. Batnqzi7z-me-rea1., to, ro, Of, by, in tby not being. Banugzitfi-real-', te, re, Of, by, in his not being. Ranu!ki-li.ý-real3, to, ivo, Of, b'y3 in our (two) not being. Banu/?4oen-reaCk, to, Te, Of, by, in your (two) not being, ~Banul~MiYn-re alS to, ro, Of, by, in their (two) not being. I BaYnm-Uii, are not. 2 Bamu1i~-6on1, are not. 3 Banuml7c~im, are not. We two who You two who They two who I Banu/k-le, WATe who are not. 2 Banumk-pe, n CA You who are Ban~2u1t-to rea+M t e 5 in our not being. Bcai-bl7k-pe-i-ealk. to re, in your not beino' Banlz-Jeo l te, re., in their not beingo Of, of, Of, by, by, by, 3 Banuztk-ko, They who are niot. Neuter. Banidu'l, That, which is not. Banulj-roealr,', to, re, Of, by, in it not being. --- ]enzngak. There are several term Inations to this negative verb, as, banuk' aneb, banicu'-anakc', bansk'-(tnerh banigich'an, the three first being Neeuter and the laat 31-d person commoln gender. ( 152 ) Y.-OF THE GENITIVE or MENA..A. OBJECT INANIMATE. JNDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Mena-1k-tin-a, I have (lit, mine is.) 2 Alena-iS-tam- a, Thou hast. 3 Mena-1k-tca e - a, He or she has. DUAL. 1 Mena-1k-talin-i-a, We two have. 2 Mena-k'-tabe'n-a, You two have. SUBJUNCTIVE with Kklaan." SINGULAR. NT ena-lk-tin, -khan, If I have. Nlena-lr,'tam-kham, If thou hast. Mena-1k-tae- k/an, If he has. DUAL. If we two have. Mena-k' t a b e n7 - khan, If you two have. Mlena-iS- t al7e i nkhan, If they two have. PLURAL. Mena-l'-tale-khan, If we have. Mlena-JS-tape-/c/an, If you have. Mena-k-tako -k/ian, If they have. SUBJUNCTIVE with C9Paset'.") SINGULAR. Paset' mena-1k- t i n'; Perhaps I have. Paset' mena-Ic'-tarn, Perhaps thou hast. Paset' 'mena-7i - t a e., Perhaps he has, DUAL. Perhaps we two have. Paset' mena-1k-taben, Perhaps you two have. Patset' mena-k-talcin, Perhaps they two have. PLURAL. Paset' mena-lc-tale, Perhaps we have. Paset' rena-1k-tape, Perhaps you have. Paset' mena-1o-takco, Perhaps they have. 3 MJena-1~takin-a, They two have. PLURAL. 1 Mena-1k-tale -a, We have. 2 Mena!1i3-tape- a, You have. 3 Illena-lc-talco - a, They have. Neuter. Remark. 1. Banulc'tinla, I have not, is conjugated in the same manner as menalctinaic. Remtark. 2. The Intensive form Reflexive, M~ena-g-ok'-tae-a, with its -negative, Banu-g-ok' -tae-a, hie makes as if he has, he makes as if he has not, is used ironically. ( 153 ) ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. GERUNDS. 1 Mena1otii, Which I have. 2 MenalEtam, hast. 3 Menmitae, 1 Menakdtalii, have. 2 Menak'taben two have. 3 Menaltakin two have. Which thou Which he has. Which we two Which you, Which they Miem~-ticI-r I te, re, by, in my having, MenaE tam-rea1', te, re, by, in thy having. Mena- tae-veakd, te, re, by, in his having. Menac' tali,'-rea1', te, re, by, in our (two) having. Of; Of, Of, Of, Mena1o taben-reakd, t e, r e, Of, by, in your (two) having. MenaMk takin-rea1d, te, re, Of, by, in their (two) having. 1 Mena1tade, Which we have. 2 Mendi1tape, have. 3 Menaltcdiko, have. Which you Which they Mena1d tale-rea1o, te, ye, by, in our having. Mena1 tape realS, te, re, by, in your having. Meral takco-realo, te, re, by, in their having. Of, Of, Of, Remark. The Neuter has no Genetive Suffix, hence the Genetive case of the nouns must be used in order to convey the idea of "it has"; as dcarereak', adi dlar menak'a, the tree has many branches. ( 154 ) B. OBJECT ANIMATE. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Mena-,t-t a e - a, He has me. * 2 Moania-mr-tae - a, He has thee. 3 Mlena-e t ce - a, He has him, or her. DUAL. 1 Mena-liln-tae-a, He has us two. 2 Mena-ben tae-a, He has you two. 3 Mena-kin-tae-a, He has them two. PLURAL. I Mena-le-tae - a, He has us. 2 Moena-pe-tae - a, He has you. 3 Mena-ko-tae - a, He has therm. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." SINGULAR. lMlenataoe - khan, If he has me. Menamtae-kha n, If he has thee. Menae tae-kha n, If he has himl or her. DUAL. Menali:i tae-khca, If he has us two. Menabe n- taoe - khan, If he has you t wo. Mena k intae - khan, If he has them two. PLURAL. Meonale tae-hkan, If he has us. Moenape tae-khan, If he has you. elonako tae-khAan, If he has them. i SUBJUNCTIVE With " Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset' me n a2z t a, Perhaps he has me., Paset' mne n a m t a e Perhaps he has thee. Paset' gmenaceta e, Perhaps he has him, or her. DUAL. Paset' menali it t a e, Perhaps he has us two. Paset' mena-be nit a e Perhaps he has you two. Past' mena k in t a e Perhaps he has them two. PLURAL. Paset' me a I e t a e, Perhaps hlie has us. Paset' mso ena e t aee, Perhaps he has you. Paset' me n a k o t a e, Perhaps he has them. Or I, who am his (still) exist or am (here or there); as opoan qeenactaea, se gc'cnk'en? Is his son still alive, or is he dead? gidra menako taea, se oraek'te ko chalaoena? Are his children here (or there,) or have they gone home. Remark. Any of the nominat've suffixes may be substituted for tac; as enalakoa, menaelkotitia etc. ( 15- ) ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. I Meitanitae, has.* 2 Menadtae, has. 1, whom he Thou whom he GERUNDS. i Menpc'rtae-9v-ealo', te, ie, Of, by, in his having me. IIMen.C6n tae-qealo, te, Te, by, in his having thee. Of,ý by, Menaetae, He, or her, whom Menaetae-9reah, te, re, Of, he has. in his having him or her. I kncdliiitae, We two, whom he has. 2 Menambemte, You whom he has. 3 Menccakintae, They whom he has. two, two, IMealinitae-reai', te, qe, Of, by, in his having us two. Menabentae-recak, te, qe, Of, by, in his having you two. Menackiitqae-realc' te 're, Of, by, in his having them two. Me7?matIetae,-reaJr, te re, Of, by, in his having us. Menctpetae-realoS, te 7re, Of, by, in his having you.. iVnnemctotae-rea1S te, ve, Of, by, in his having them. I Alenatetac, bas. 2 Menacpetae, he has. We, whom he You, whom whom 13 Mentakotae, They, he has. r01, I (who am his), wvlho am alive or am here. -Rentcok. BamtW11otae, he has none, is conjugdted in the same mainner; as Mt~1EnateeG. ( 156 ) ACTIVE VOICE. 1. PARADIGM OF A REGULAR TRANSITIVE VERB. A. WITH THE NOMINATIVE CASE. FUTURE TENSE. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Da-a-nd, I shall strike. 2 Dal-a-m, Thou wilt strike. 3 Dal-a-e, He or she will strike. DUAL. 1 Dal-a-lin, We two shall strike. 2 Dal-a-ben, You two will strike. 3 Dal-a-kin, They two will strike. PLURAL. 1 Dal-a-le, We shall strike. 2 Dal-a-pe, You will strike. 3 Dal-a-ko, They will strike. SUBJUCTIVE with " Khan." SINGULAR. Dal-khan-in, If I shall strike. Dal-khcan-em, If thou wilt strike. Da-lc-han-e, If he or she will strike. DUAL. Dal-klhan-li, If we two shall strike. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Pcaset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-id-dal, Perhaps* I shall strike. Paset'-em-dal, Perhaps thou wilt strike. Paset'-e-dal, Perhaps he or she will strike. DUAL. Paset'-li,-dal, Perhaps we two shall strike. Dal-khan ben, If Paset'-ben-dal, Peryou two will haps you two will strike. strike. Dal-kharn-kin, If Paset'-kin-dal, Perthey two will haps they two will strike, strike. PLURAL. PLURAL. Dal-khan-le, If Paset'-le-dal, Perhaps we shall strike, we shall strike. Dal-khan-pe, If Paset'-pe-dal, Perhaps you will strike, you will strike. Dal-klhan-ko, If Paset'-ko-dal, Perhaps they will strike, they will strike. Note.-This tense is rather non-descript than exclusively future; it may be used to express future present and past tense. It is always used when a general statement has to be made; as, for hunting, we go to the hill, qffer a sacrifice, and then ascend. ( 157 ) (7ELERAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-et'-a-n, strike. * SUBJUNCTIVE with "F/ctan." SINGULAR. SUBJUNCTIVE Nviti "Eka" SINGULAR. I Dccl-et'-7;han-ir71, If IPaset'-i0.'dal-et', Per-' I strike.* haps I strike.'* D a I- e te - a -in, Dal-et'-krha n - emn Paset'.'em-dccl-et', Per.' Thou strikest. If thou strikest. haps thou strickest. Dai-et'-a-lFiA, He Dal-et'-lchan-e, if Paset'-e-dctl-et', Per.or she strikes, he or she strikes. Ihaps he or she strikes..DUAL. DUAL. Dal-ee-a-ZienWe Dal-et-khan-Zini, two strike. If we two strike. DUAL haps we two strike. Dai-et'-a -b en, Dal-et'-1han - ben, IPaset'--ben-dat.'et', Per.' You two strike. If you two strike. haps you two strike. 3 Dal-e t' - a - k- inv, Dat -et-lelan-kin, Paset'-lcin-dal-et', Per.' They two strike. If they two strike. haps they two strike, 'PLURAL. PLURAL. PLURAL. I Dat.'et'-a-le, We Dali-et'-lhan-le, if Paset'-te-dat.'et', Per.' strike, we strike. haps we strike. 2 Dai-et-a-pe, You. Dat-et'-khan-p e, 'Paset'-pe-dal.'et', Per-' strike. If you strike. haps you strike. D a Z- e t' - a - leo, Dal-et' khan - k o, Paset'-leo-dat-et'; Per-'..They strike. -If they strike. haps they strike. *Or am striking'. Note.-This tense Is not the English present indefinite, but is ani incomplete present e. -i. it can not be used without regard to time to express general truths -etc., bOut is confined to an action going on (not necessarily just -now) but not finished. (See remarks on this tense). ( 158 ), SýPECIAL INCOMfPLTETE PJESENI. INDICATIVE.' SUBJUNCTIVE With "KIEt am " SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 1Dctl-et'-kcan-a-y'l, Dal-et'kct-kaL4hanI ami strikingý. i7,l, If I aml strikitllng. 2 Dctl-et'-kctnav-a-m, Dal-et'kctn-kktn.Thou art strik- epx, if thou art ing,. striking. 3Dal-et'-kcan-a-e, Dte'a-hn He or she is e, If he or she strikillg, is striking.C 1)UAL. DUAL. 1 Dal-dt-kan-a-Uni, Dai-et'kan-khanWe two are, stri- Ui~, If we two king.n are striking. '2 Dal-d-ect'- n --a - Dat -et'kawn-lchan - benb YAou two beni, If you two are striking, are striking. 3 Dal-et'-kca i- - a - Dal-et'kan-l--chan -. kin, They two kin, If they two are strikino', are striking. PLURAL. PLURAL. I Da l-et'-kcan-a-le,' Dal- et'kauun-khan - We are strikiing. le, If we are striking. 2 Dal-et'ca'n-a-pe, Dal-et'kcan-khanYou are. strikin g. pe, If you are strikingr. 3 Dat -et'kan-a-ko, Dal-et'kan-kkan - They are strik- ko, If they, are ing. strikin (Y SUBJUNCTIVE, withf 46Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-iiA-dla-et"Ik a n Perhaps I am strik, Pasct-'-ernb-da[-e~t'kan, Perhaps thou, art striking. Paset'-e-dal-et' k a 1-, Perhaps he or she is strik-ing. D UAL.Perhaps we two are striking., Pas3et'-be~n-dal-et'kan,, Perhaps you two are striking. Paset'-kcin~daZ-et'kan,. Perhaps they two are striking. PLUR1AL. Perhaps we are strikinU Paset'-pe.-daZ-de'kan, Perhaps you. are striking. Paset'-ko-da-etk a n Perhaps: they a-restriking.e Note.--This tense is more confined to thev preient moment, than thegeneral incomplete present. (15-9 ) RE CENT PAST. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-1cet'-a-ý1, I stru ck. * 2 Dal-/cet' - a - i thou st~ruck'st. 3 Dal-kcet'-a-e,. He or she struck. DUAL. 1 Dal-kcet'-a- Ii;, We two struck. SUBJUNCTIVE with SINGULAR. Doi-lodt-kehan-iyA If I struck.t If thou struck'st. Dal- lcet'-iclsan -e If lie or struck. she DUAL. If we two struck. * SUBJUNCTIVE -With " aset'." SINGULAR. Pctset'-iA-d a 1 - le, eap Perhaps I struck. Paset'-es-_ d1 a 1-4; et' Perhaps thou struck'st. Paset'-e-ctat-ket', Perhaps he or she struck. DUAl. Pas eat' - 1ii A1-d a 1-ke' Perhaps we two struck..Paset'-be'n-d a 1-Ik et' Perhaps you two struck. Pasat'-lcin- di a 1- 7k- e Perhaps they two struck. PLURAL. Pasat'-ia-dai-ket', Per-. haps we struck. Paset'-pe - di a 1 -7rc a ' Perhaps you struck. Pasat'lco-dal-k-et', Perhaps they struck. Dcci-lcet'-a-b a n, IDcci-ic et'-lc-han-beli, You two struck. If you two struck. Dat-lcat'a-lci n, Dat -ket'-lchan-lcin, They two struck. I If t h ey twNvo PLURAL. I Dal-icet'- a - I a, We struck. 2 Dal-kat'- a -pre You stru ck. 3 Dal-lcet'- a- loo They struck. struck. PLURAL, Dal-ic t'-klan- I e, If we struck. Dal-kaet'-k~han-pa, If you struck. Dat-loet'-lchan-lo, If they struck. I* Or have struck just now.t This is never used as a Conditional. Note.-T his tense always expresses something momentary, a point, not a line. Tt has great similarity with the Greek Aorist and the Latin perfectuni hitoricum, and still greater with the Bengalee past tense in lam, la, To. ( 160 ) ANTERIOR PAST. INDICATIVE. 0,INGULAR. 1 Dal-let'-a-,', I struck.* 2 Dal-Ie t'- ca - m, Thou struck'st. 3 Dal-i e t'- a - e, He or she struck. D U[AL. I Dal-let'-a-lii,We two struck. SUBJUNCTIVE " Khan." SINGULAI Dal-let'-khan If I struck.1 Dcal-let'-khan If thou stru( Dal - let'-khcarT If he or struck. DUAL. Dal-let-ikhanIf we two st Witih SUBJUNCTIVE With " Paset'.". SINGULAR. -i n, Paset'-ii -da l - le t', Perhaps I struck.~ -em, Paset'-e - da 1 - Ie t', k'st. Perhaps thou struck'st. - e) Paset' -e - a a 1 - 1 e t', she Perhaps he or she struck. DUAL. li,, Paset'- liU, - dal - I e t', ruck. Perhaps we t wo struck. -ben, Paset' - len - dal-1e t', ruck. Perhaps y o u t wo struck. -kin,. Past'-kin- dea 1 - e t', truck. Perhaps they t wo struck. PLURAL. - e, Paset'-le-d ai - le t'. Perhaps we struck. -p e, Paset'-pe- da 1 - Ie et' k. Perhaps you struck. -k o, Paset'-ko- da I - le t' ck. Perhaps they struck. 2 3 Dal-let'-a-b en, Dal-let'-khan You two struck. Ifyou twost Dal-let'-a- le in, Dal-let'-khan They two struck. Iftheytwos PLURAL. 1 Dal-let'-a-le, We struck. 2 Dal-let'- - -pe, You struck. 3 Dal-let'- a - ko, They struck. PLURAL. Dal-let'-khan If we struc Dal-let'-khan If you struc Dal-let'-khan If they stru ~--- * Or had struck. + This tense is never used as a Conditional. + Another form Dal-lak'-ai is also used.. Note.-This tense, like the Recent Past, always expresses something momentary. It denotes, let something was done, but has lost its effect either by its not remaining in that state, or that something has afterwards taken place, and that it is of no more importance. The reason why it has been called Anterior Past is, that it precides the Recent Past in time, ( 16 1) GENERAL INCOMPLETE. PAST. IINDICATIVE. SINGULAR, a-, Iused to strike. 2 Dai-ct'-tahJoa na - n, T ho u used'st to strike.3 Dai-ct'-tahlt~kan - a-c, He used to: strike.. DUAL. 1 DaZ-ed-tah-e1oan, - a-ii1:* i, W e t w o, used to strike. 2, Dal-et'--tahdle,`n,ý a-ben, Y'u. two used. to.. strike., 3 Dat-ct'- tah-ektna-kcin,. They two, used to strike. PLURAL. 1 Dal-ct'- tah-eoan-. a-te, We. used.. to strike. 2 Dat'et'- tah-eJoan~ a-pc, You used,, to strike. 3Dait.et" tah- la n" a - o,. They used to--strike., SUBJ.UNCTIVE with. " K/ian." SINGULAR. Dul,-et'-tah -e Jo'ainJo han-ini. 1I f I used to strike. DaV-ct'2tahZ Jo an - Johan-&r,m If thiou used'st to strike.. Dai-t'Lta4h Z k a n. - lchan-c, If he, used to strike.. DUAL. Dai,-ct'-tah Z 7,wb-a n Johan-Uik,l If wetwo used to strike. Dqi1,-cet'-taht* kha;m'-, khhan-bcn, If' you, two used to -strike., Dali-ct'-tah ~k, an. - kohan-on If.' thiey two used to strike., PLURAL. Dal-ct'-'t-a hlJ an - Jo han-icý, If we, -used to strike., Da-ct'-ta-h -ekdan - Joha. pc,_ If yo u -used to strike. Dal-ct-ta- It Z- a it Johan~q-kof they., I: used. to strike.. SUBJUNCTIVE with. Bepset'."* SINGULAR: Joan,_ Perhaps I. used to strike. Pa,~et"'cr-dat-e ty'-t a h-Joanll Porhaps, th ou u sed.'.sýt to stri ke.. Pasct'-c-da[-ct'-ta it te - kan,. Perhaps hie, used to strike.ý DUAL, Jolan, Perhapqý we two, used, to.stri~ke. Pasct-_bcn-d a i-ct'-tahlehlan, Perhaps you two used to strike. Faset' -loin-ta" I et '-tah~coan, Perhaps they two - used to strike. PLURAL. Pasct'-lc-da t-et'-tathC-. Joa,m I Perha-,ps we. used to strike. Pae'P-al-e._thJoan, Perha~ps you used. to strike. kan,.Perhaps they. used to strike. Or was striking or als'o sometimes, I struck. -Rem~arAe. This ten~se denotes that somethi ug, was -going on at.tViose, tim ena. not neecessarily. then.. K ( 162 ) SPECIAL INCOMIPLETE PAST. INDICATIVE. S UBJUNCTIVE, w ith "ýKhan " SINGULAR. SINGULAR. IDal-et'kanrtahe? - 1al-et'1kan- t a h ~-e kan-a-,9, I was icam-ichan-in,', If strikingr* I was striking. 2 Dal-et'kcan-ta k e- Dal-et'kan-rt a h8~ kan-a?-ml, Thou kan-khctn-e'qm, if' wast striking, thou wast striking, 3 Dat-et'1can-tahe Dal-e['Jcan-t a h Z - kan-a-e, He or kan-lchan-e, If he she was striking,. or she was striking. DUAL. DUAL. 1 Dai-et'1can-tahe,- Dal-et'1an-t a h 6 - kan!-a-tin', We kan-khat-in' ~,if two were striking. we two were striking. 2 Dal- et'lean!4a h -!- Dal-~et'lcan-t a ht z kan-a-ben, You ican-ichan-ben, if twowere striking, you two were striking..3 Da -et'1can-tah- - Dat-et'lan-t a h a kan--a-kin., They 7ran ekhan!-Ncn, If two were striking, they two were striking. PLURAL. PLURAL. 1 Dal-et'kan. tahe- Dal-et'lean-t a h ~ lkan-a-le, We Jcan-khan-te, if were striking, we were striking. 2, Dal-et'kan-tahe' Dal-et'1kan-t a h e kaný-a-pe, You Ilcan..lhan-pe, If were striking, you were striking,..3 Dal-et'1can-tahe - V.al- et'lcart- t a h Z kan-a-lco, They kan'-ihan-ico, I f were striking, they were striking. SUBJUNCTIVE, with SINGULAR. Paset'-1 't-dal-et'lea n tah~1can., Perhaps 1 was striking. Paset'-em-dal-et'Jcantah'(5.can, Perhaps thou wast striking. Paset'l-e-dal-et'lcan-t a-k hOlean, Perhaps he or she was striking. DUAL. Paset'-NL~dal-et' lantah~kam, Perhaps we two were strikingr. Paset'-ben-dai-et'lcantah'Zlcan, Perhaps you two were. strikingr. Pa~set'-loin-ctai-et'lcantah~Jcan, Perhaps they two were striking. PLURAL. Paset'-le-dal-e t'c, a rAtah'~Jan, Perhaps we were striking. Paset'-pe-dali-et'lca n tah~Jcan, Perhaps you were striking. Paset'-4ýo-dal-et'lea n tah-1can, Perhaps they were striking, *Or was trying to strike. Not~e.-This tense denotes that. something was going on, (incomplete) when another action took place. This tense is also used to denote, that the Agent was attempting to do something, but faile. (163 ) IN DECISIVE PLUPE RFECT. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-le t'- ta hekan-a-l", I had struck..* 2 Dal-iet'-tah~1ana-rn, Thou hadst struck. 2 Dat-let'-tahk-oana-e, He or she had struck. DUAL. 1 Dai-left-tahZ1o'ana-lini, We two had struck. 2 Dal-let'-tahZ~canaz-ben, You two had struck. 2 Dal-let'-tahVekana-kim, They two had struck. PLURAL. 1 Dat-iet'-tah-ekrana-le, We had struck. 2 Dal-let'-tah~Jcana-pe, You had struck.. 2 Dal-ie t'- ta h Zkan-a-ko, They had struck. SUBJUNCTIVE with "IMbhan." SINGULAR. Dal-let'-tah~Jra n - khun-in,. If I had struck. Dal-19et'-tah-,Ira n - Jchan-emn, If thou hadst struck. Dal-le['-tah~k a n - khctn-e, If he or she had struck. DUAL. Dal-let'-tali~le a n - ki.han-tin, If we two had struck. Dal-let-tah~Ir a n - Irhan-ben, If you two had struck. Dat-i et'-tah-el a nkhan-kin, If they two had struck. PLURAL. Dcd-let'-1ah~J a nIrhan-le., If we had struck. Dal-iet'-ta4-ela n - khart-pe, If you had struck. Dal-i e t-tahekanIrhan-Iro, If they had struck. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Paset. ' " SINGULAR. Pase['-i a-i-dal-let'- t a hE~kan, Perhaps I had struck. Pasqet'-em-cal-let'-t a - h-elean, Perhaps thou hadst struck. Pasel'-e-da[-let'-tah Z - Iran, Perhaps he or she had struck. 'DUAL. Paset'-lipi-dal-let' -t ah~ean, Perhaps we two had struck. Paset'-ben-dal-let'-ta - hMIan, Perhaps you two had struck. Paset'-kirn-dal- let'- tah~Iran, Perhaps they two had struck. 'PLURAL. Iran, Perhaps wve had struck. lea n, Perhaps you had struck. Paset'-Ico-dal-le t'-t a - h'eIr'an, Perhaps they had struck. O r wouldi have struck. Note.-This tense denotes that a certein action was already over, and had lost its importance, or had aegain been altered, when another took- place in the past. It is also used to denote that something had been attempted, but had failed. (See remarks3 on this tense.) ( 164 ) INCHOATIVE FUTURE. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-lagift-i, * I shall be about to strike. 2 Du-lag.t' - e m, Thou wilt be about to strike. 3 Dcl-lagit'-e, He or she will be about to strike. I)DUAL. 1 Dal-lagit'- tii n We two shall be about to strike. 2 Dal-lagit'- b en, You two will be about to strike. 3 Dal-lagqit'-k i, They two will be about to strike. PLURAL. 1 Dat-lagit'-le, We shall be about to strike. 2 Dal-ltag it' -pe, You will be about to strike. 3 Dal-lagi t'- l o, They will be abiout to strike. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." SINGULAR. Dcal-lagit'-ke h an - in, If I shall be about to strike. Dal-lagit'-klh a n - e6, If thou wilt be about to strike. Dal-lagit'-kIhan-e, If he or she will beabouttostrike. DUAL. Datl-agit'-khan-lit, If we two shall be about to strike. Dal-tlagit'- han-ben If you two will be about to strike. Dal-lagif-khai-kin If they two will be a bout to strike. PLURAL. Dal-tagit'-khan-Ie, If we shall b e about to strike. Dal-lagit'-kh (a n - pe, If you wiill be about to strike. Dal -lagift'-lkhen-ko, If they will be about to strike. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Paset " SINGULAR. Paset'-i14-dal-1 a g it', Perhaps I shall be about to strike. Paset'-em-dal-I agi ft, Perhaps thou wiltbe about to strike. Paset'-e-dal- l agi t', Perhaps he or she will be about to strike. DUrAL. Paseft-lid-dala 4i, Perhaps we two shall be about to strike. Paset'-ben-dal-agl', Perhaps you two will be about to strike. Paset'-kin-dal-lag i t', Perhaps they two will be about to strike. PLURAL. Past'-le-dal- 1 a gi t', Perhaps we shall be about to strike. Paset'-pe-dal-lag i t', Perhaps you will be about to strike. Paset'-lko-clatl-I ag it', Perhaps they will be about to strike. Note.- What has been said about the simple future, holds also good in this, namely that it is used to express general statements and must in such cases be rendered in English, by the Present Indefinite. (See remarks on this tense.) * Or Lagat'.. ( 165 ) JNDIOATTVE.P SINGULAR. 1 Dal-lagidolokxl a-', I am abo to strike. 2 Dal- la id ido lean-a-rn, Th art about strik~e. 3 DalI- Ia gi*d olM-7c a-e, He or she about to strike DUAL, I Dctl-lagiolo'-le, a-lipi, We two about7 to strike Dal-lagidok-1ca' a-ben, You t~ are aboutI strike. 3 Dal-lag gidolA kan-a-lein., Tb two are about strike. PLURAL. 1Dal-lagibdold,-lect a-le, We a r about to strike 2 Dal-tagidoli- lea a-pe, You a r about to strike, 3 Dctt-tagidogka~ a-leo, They at about to strike. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. SUBJUNCTIVE with iSUB "Khtan." SINGULAR. ~n- Dat-he gidolz'-Imn - Pas'el Lit /c1tn-in", If am le an abouit to strikej aboi 7r,'- Dat -tagi~dolz-kan - Paset' ou k/han - e an, lefan, to thou art Abo ut art~ to strike. 2al, Dat-lagidokklan - Paset is khan-e. I f hi e lean, or she is, about or si to strike. strili DUAL. n-m Dat-ta qitok-n - Paset' are lchan-tiltz, if we two. kan, *-are about to strike, are 7, Dat -tagiol' -lean - Pasetý ro lkhan-b e a, I f Ok3-ie1 0o you two are about you to strike, to st - Dat-tagido-idckan - Paset ey lehan-le i n,, I f o ld`-/c to they two are they about to strike, to st PLURAL. n- Dal-tagidold-lean - Paset'e lehan-te, If we are' lan, about to strike, are a in- Dat-tagdold.-lean - Pasel' e lehan-pe, If you are ql:73-1ck about to strike. care a _t-Dat-tagidoldleka an - Pase-t e lehan-ko, If they ol,-lea? about to strike.. are ab JUNCTIVE, With "Faset"' SINGULAR. Perpaps I am At to strike. -ean-dat-tagidole' Perhaps thou about to strike. Perha-1 p s lie ýrie is about to:e. DUAL. Perhaps we two ibout to strike. '-ben-da7ltagi~dan, Perhaps two are about rike. '-le~in-dfd-t1agid1n)a Perh ap s two are about rike. PLURAL. Perhaps we0 bout to strike. - pe-dat1- lag idtn,, Perhaps you bout to strike. '-leo-dat-l agicdlaPerhanps th-ey out to strike. ( 166 ) I NCH OATIVE PAST. INDICAllIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE with KIhan" SINGULAR. SINGULAR. I Dca-tcgi~do1/kan- Dal-lagido1oka n - tah~Joan-a-ý, I tah~1cctn-khan-ti,, was ab o ut t o If I was about strike. to strike. 2 Dat-tctgilbolRkctn- Dal-lagi'WoM7ý-an - taheloa n - a - m, taht-1can-k h a n - Thou wast about em~, thou wast to strike, about to strike. 3 Dal-lagido1kam- Dct-lagidoMlekan tahe',kan-a-e, He tah"lcan-lihan-e, or she was about If he or she was to strike,, about to strike. DUAL. DUAL. 1 Dal-tagidoMkean- Dal-lagidolca n -a SUBJUNCTIVE With 11Paset'." SINGULAR. kan-tah'e"kan, Perhaps I was about to strike. Paset'ern-dal-lagido!Jkcan-tah~kart, Perhaps thou wast about to strike. Paset'-e-dalt-agild o 1$. 1can-tahit lan, Perhaps he or she was was about to strike. DUAL. Paset'- lii' - dal-laqido1c'-lean-taht le a n,) Perhaps we two were about to strike. Pset'-bert-dal-l agi'diS- lan - tah Z1t-,a n Prasyou two were about to strike. Pvaset'-kin-dal-lagid - o1A'-lani-tah'e.'r la n, Perhaps they two were about to strike,, We two were about to strike. 2 Dal-iagidoiSa ntah~cau-a- b e n, You two, were about to st~rike. 3 Dai-lagidolc'han-m tah~7can-a-lo i n,) They' two were about to strike. If we two were about to strike. Dal~agidolSk lan - tah~lean-khlan -ben, If you two were about to strike. Dal-tagidolS -lav, - t ah -e I.a n-,7c h a n - kin, If they two were about to strike, ( B37 ) INCHOATIVE INDICATIVE. SUBJUN PLURAL' PL 1Dal-tagildo1Skaý.n- Dat-lia tah;71~an - a;-1 e, tahtl1x We *were about If we to strike, to stri, 2 Dal- lagitdokkct'en.; Dat-ct6 tah~kan - a -p c, tah~kc You were about If y to strike, about ~3 Dal-lZagido1~ranz- Dal-1a9 tah~kan - a -k o, tah~/c They were about If t to strike, about PAST (Continmued). OTIVE With SUBJUN URAL. p1 idokle. anA- Paset'-le&n-Aihan-le, kan-tahi were abouft haps w( Lke. to strik ~idO~ka n - Paset'-pe~n mchan-pe, kan-tak ota were hapsyo to strike,. to strik TOLV with ek~an, PerSwere about -dat -lagido1'-ý 6 7.a n, Per-; u were about idoklc a n - Paset'-ko-dal -tagidok'n-;khan-ko Jcan-tah~lcar&, Per-- hey were haps they were to strike, about to strikes .( 168 ) OPTATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dcal-e-a -, I would * strike. 2 Dal - 1 e - a - m, Thou would'st strike. 3 Dal-ke-a-e, He would strike. DUAL. 1 Dal-ke-a-li,, We two would strike..2 Dal-ke-a -:b e r, You two would strike.:3 Dal-k e -a -kin, They two would strike. SINGULAR. Dal-ke-khan- i A, If I would strike. Dal-1re--khan-e rm, If thou would'st strike..Dal-ke-lhan-e, If he would strike. D UJAL. Dal-ke-Khan-l id4i, If we two would strike. Dal-ke-khan-beme, If you two would strike. Dal-ke-khan-k i n If theytwo would strike. PLURAL. Dal-ke-ikhan-1e, If we would strike. Dal-ke- kJhaw- pe, If you would strike. Dal-ke-khan-ko, If they would strike. SINGULAR. Paset'-in'-dal-ke, Perhaps I would strike.* Pffset'-em_-dal-ke, Perhaps thou would'st strike. Paset'-e-dal-ke, Perhaps he would strike. D UAL. Paset'-lid-dal-ke, Perhaps we two would strike. Paset'.ben-dal-ke, Perhaps you two would strike. Paset'-kin- d al - J e, Perhaps they two would strike. PLURAL. Paset'-le-dal-ke, Perhaps we would strike. Paset'-pe-dal-ke, Perhaps you would strike. Paset'-ko-dal-ke, Perhaps they would strike. PLURAL. 1 Dal-me-a-le, would strike. We 2 Dal-ke-a-pe,You would strike. 3 Pal- k e-a- k o, They would strike. * Or will strike, or would have struck. Note.-The difference between Dal-klce-khan, and clal-le-khan, is that the first is only used when the thing is wished for, whereas the latter is used both when wished for and when not; Apcri-r en-kii-lhan, cli-h rasnakok'a. If you (only) would give me the arrow-head, how glad should I be! (Vide remarks on this mood). ( 169 ) SiTNGULAR. I (Oho) Dal-le-a - rnl, I should (not) strike.'.2(Oho) Dal9-ie-am, Thou would'st (niot) strike.* 3 (Oho) Dal-e-a-e, He would (n.o t) strike.* DUAL. 1 (Oho) Dal-le-a-i-:,i, We two should (not) strike.* 2(QhQ) Dal-le-aben., You two "Wouldi (not) strike.*:3 (Qhg) Dal-Ie - a-hrin, They two would (not) strike.* PLURAL. 1 (Oho) Dal-le-a-le, We should (not) strike.*:2 (Oho) Dal-te-a - pe, You would (n ot) strike.* -3 (Oho) Dal -ic-aho, They would (not) strike. CONDITIONAL. SINGULAR. D-al-te-1ohan-i~i, If I should striketDal.-le-khan - e m, If thou would 'st strike.t DaL-le-khan-e, if he would strike.jDUAL. Dal-ie-hhan- Iii n-) If we two should strike~t Dat -1e-ichan- b e-n, If you two would strike.t Dal-le-k~han-lc i n, If they two would strike.t PLURAL. Dalte-le-han,-le, If we should strike.t Dat -te-kh a n - p e, If you would strike.t Dat-le-kha n - o, If they would strike.t SINGULAR. Pacset'-irz'- dol-le, Per-, haps I should strike." Pa~set'-em-dcd-le, Perhaps thou would'st strike.+ Paset'--e-dal-le, Perhaps he would 'strike.+ DUAL. Paset'-lii?-cala-le, Perýhaps we two should strikeji Paset'-be n - d atI - I e, Perhaps you tw o would strikeji Paset'-le i n - da I -I e, Perhaps they t w o w'ould strike.+ PLURAL. Paset'-le-dal-le, Perhaps we should strike.+ Pasqet'-pe-dal-le, Perhaps you would strike.+ Pas'et'-ko-dat-le, Perthey would strike.+ *Or will or shouldI (not) strike, or would (not) have struck. ~Or if I struck, or had struck, or will strike, or if 1 strike. tOr will strike,, cGr had struck. Notc.-(Yide dctl-/e-ns-klsen) Del-le-khcns is uised'both when the thinig is wish. ed and not wished for; as Onie ei'e-UAn-k1een, a~di bat-h' in' dal-lee-e. It he, had (,,eated me, I should have struck him severely. Reesark. This is only used negatively. ( 170 ) SINOVL~kR. 1 Dal-ket'-gi - if, * I will strike. 2 Dal-ket'- gi - m Thou wilt strike. 3 Dal-ket'-gi-e, He will strike. DUAL. 1 Dal-ket'-gi- ii, We two will strike. 2 D-l-kret'-gi-be n, You two will strike. 8 Dal-Met'-gi-k in, They two will strike. PLURAL. 1 Dal-ket'- gi-le, We will strike. CONTINGENT. SINGULAR DUAL,. PLURAL SINGULAR. Paset'-i0.-dal-Jcet'- g, Perhaps I will strike. Paset'-em-dal-ket'-gi, Perhaps thou wilt strike. Paset'-e-dalket' - gi Perhaps he will strike. DUAL, Paset1ini-dcal-7et*- i, Perhaps we two will strike. Paset'-ben-dal-ket'-gi, Perhaps you t wo will strike. Paset'-kin-dal-ket'-gi, Perhaps they t w o will strike. PLURAL. Paset'-le-dat-ket' - gi, Perhaps we will strike. Paset'-pe-dal-ket'-gi, Perhaps you will strike. Paset'-ko-dal-ket'-g s, Perhaps they will strike. 2 Dal-ket'-g i - p e, You will strike. 3 Dal-ket'gi- k o, They will strike. I--`- - -- ~- I-~--- ~---D~-~E~-~D~-s~-FPFS~ * Or would strike, or would have struck, or I strike; as bae doho li.-khast adonr hech' ruar engi. If he does not keep me then I will come back Hola-m dal-le-khan, adoe dar ket' gi, ado-sn chikca-ke-a? If you had struck her yesterday and she had ran away, what would you then do or have done; hgr ini ba,tao ama ho! Sulusga kulhi talatem chalak'a, Gadiolem parom ket'gi, ado Damram tioket'gi. You go through Salungah, pass Gadliol, and you are in WDamra ( 171 ) 'PRELIMINARY FUr SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-te-gi- ti, I will first strike. 2 Dal-.le~g - m, Thou wilt first strike. 3 Dal-ie-gi-ce, He will first strike. rCUREF-. SINGULAR. DUAL. I- Da1-le-gi-lii, We two will first strike. 2 Dal-lc-g i -.b e n, You two will first strike. 3 Dal-le-gi-l7e in, They two will first strike. PLURAL. 1 Dcd-le-gi-le, We will first strike. DUAL, PLURAL. Pts'et'-i,"-dal -1 e - g i Perhaps I will first strike, Paset'-ern-dcdl-le - g i Perhaps thou wilt first strike. Faset'-e-pxt I -lIe - g i Perhaps he will first strike. DUAL. Paset'-tin'-dal-Ze - gib" Perhaps we two will first strike. Paset'-bem-dal-Ze -g i, Perhaps you two will first strike. Perhaps they two will first strik~e. PLURAL. Paset'-le-dal -lZ e - g i,' Perhaps we will first strike. Paset'-da-le-gi, Perhaps you will first strike. Paset'-ko-dct-tI e -g s, Perhaps they will first strike, 2 Dat-le-qi--,pe, You will first strike, 3 Dcal-egli-1o, They will -first strike. ( 172 ) PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULATIVE. 1 2 2 3 1 2 3 I OY SINGULAR. D)UAL. PLURAL. Dal-le-nahi-, I Dal-le-nah'- i i, Dal-e-nah-ide, We must first strike. We two must must first strike. first strike. Dal-le-nahi- rm, Dale-le-nahi-ben, Dal-le-nahit-pe, You Thou must first You two must must first strike. strike. first strike. Dal-le-nah i - e, Datl-le-nahi-k i n, Dal-le-nahi-co, They He must first They two must must first strike. strike. first strike. PRELIMINARY PERSUASIVE. Dal-le-ba-i, I Dal-le-ba-li, We I Dal-le-ba-le, We must first strike. twomustfirststrike. must first strike. Dal-I e - ba - m, Dal-le- b a -be n, Dal-le-ba-pe, You Thou must first You two must must first strike. strike. first strike. Dal-le-ba-e, He Dal-le- ba - k in, Dal-le-ba-ico, They must first strike. They two must must first strike. first strike. PRELIMINARY ADMISSIVE. DaBl-le-en-a-', I Dal-le-en-a- li 2, Dal-le-en-a-le, We must first strike. I V e two must must first strike. 2 Dal-le-en-a - m, Thou must first strike. 3 Dal-le-en - a - e, IHe must first strike. first strike. Dal-le-en-a-b e n, You two must first strike. Dal-le-en-a-k i n,. They two must first strike. Datl-le-en-a-pe, You must first strike. Dal-le-en-a-klo. They must first strike. Note.-The difference between these three tenses (or rather moods) is as follows: The first is used in remonstrating or rctorting; as Chak' bamn agu-lak', a? Acnnlenahtii enccnachiA aguea, Why did you not bring it? I must first get it and then I will bring it. The second is used consideratively as adin dalea, I will strike him very much. Sap'le bamn, you must first catch him (remember:) and the third is used admissingly; as ht, sap'le enan, yes (it is true) I must first catch himn, ( 173 ) PRELIMIINARY BENEDICTIVE OR PRECATIVE. T-, SINGULAR. 1 Dal-le -rm - A! May I first strike! 2 Dal-le- m a- rn! iMayest thou first strike! 3 Dal-le - m a- e! May he first strike! DUAL. I'LURAL. Dal-le- m a-li! Dal-le-mu-le! May May we two first we first strike! strike! D t-le-ma -be n! Dal-le-ma-pe! May May you two first you first strike! strike! Datle-ma - lek in Dal-le-ma-ko! May May they two first they first strike! strike PRELIMINARY IMPERATIVE. 2 Dal-le-m! Strike Dal-le-ben! Strike Dal-le-pe! S t tri k e thou first. you two first! you first. BENEDICTIVE OR PRECATIVE. 1 Dal-ma-A! May Dat-ma-HiA! May I strike! we two strike! 2 D a I - mn a - mn! Dal-ma-ben*! May Mayest t h o u you two strike! strike! 3 Dal-ma-e! May Dal-ma-kin! May he strike! they two strike! Dal-ma-le! strike! Dal-ma-pe! you strike i May we May Ma y Dal-ma-kco! they strike! 2 Datl-.mee! thou i or t-hat. IMPERATIVE. Strike i Dal-ben! Strike Dal-pe! Strike you you two! Note.-The 1st and 3rd person in all three numbers are the same in Benedictive and Imperative-thus dal-maei may both mean, May 1 strike, mid let rme strike PA RTICIPLES. ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTIý-FUTURE. CIPLES.,Dal (koin, keo), Struck. Dcd-r han, Striking. GEN ERAL INCOMPLETE PRE SENT. Dal-et', Who strikes. IDai-et'-khan, Striking. SPECIAL IINCOMPLETE PRE SENT. Dal-et'-lcan, Who is striking. IDaZ-et'-ka~n-khan, Strik GERIJNDS. Dal-rea1k, te re, Of, by, in striking, [*1ing. Dcd-et'-reai7,c, te, re, Of, by, in strikDai-et'-kan-rea1r', te, Me Of, by, in striking now. RECENT PAST. Da-~tWho struck or has struck. A.NfTERIOR PAST. Dij-let', Who struck or had struck. GENERAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Dal-et'-tah~Jran, Who us ed to strike or was striking. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. D~at-et'- 1ran-tah~ka n, W h o was striking. iNDICISIVE PLUPERFECT. D at -1et'- tahZ lan, Who h a d struck. ing now. Dal-ket'-;khan, struck. Dat -1et'-kk-an., struck. HavingI Dcti-ket'-reakr, te, re, Of, by, in having struck. Havingy having struck. Of, by, in Dal-et'-tah~1can - 7c h a n. Dat-et'-tah~Jran-rea7ki; te, re, Usingr to strike then. by, in using to- strike then. Of; Dat -et'-Jean- t a h Z h a n -~Dat -et'-kvan-takZ1"'lrctn-reaki-, te, re, khan, Striking then. Of, by, in striking then. Dall-tet'-tahV1rhan-1cha 'n,j Dat-tet'-tak-Jcan-reak, te, r"e, Ofý Having struck, by, ini having struck, ( t75 ) 40 4 4-j~-~ z0 0 I t CQ CC~o ~;z 0 02 - I a 'Cd 0 Cd ~0 0 t3 -4-D 0 ci) tPIS,.~ E-4 Cd Ci)'.1 kýH Icz Q02 CIS -~ 6 -02q ( 176 GENITIVE WITH NOMINATIVE. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-tin-a-e, He will strike my. 2 Dal-tam-a-e, He will strike thy. 3 Dal-tae-a-e, He will strike his. DUAL. 1 Dal-tcldiU-a-e, He will strike our. (two). 2 Dal-taben- a -e, He will strike your (two). 3 Dal-takin- a - e, Be will strike their (two). PLURAL. 1 Dal-tale-a-e, He will strike our. 2 Dal-tape-a-e, He will strike your. 3 Dal-takco-a-e, He will strike their. SUBJUNCTIVE with ' Khan." FUTV RE TENSE. SINGULAR. Dal-tid-kchan-e, If he will strike my. Dal-tam-khan- e, If he will strike thy. Dal-tae-khan-e, If he will strike his. DUAL. Dal-talind-khan-e, If he will strike our (two). Dal-taben-khan-e, If he will strike your (two). Dda -taklin- -han-e, If he will strike their (two). PLURAL. Dal-tate-kha n - e, If he will strike our. Dal-tape-khan - e, If he will strike your. Dal-tako-khan- e, If he will strike their. SUBJUNCTIVE with' " Paset." SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dal-tid, Perhaps he will strike my. Paset'-e-dal-tam, Perhaps he will strike thy. Paset'-e-dal-tae, Perhaps he will strike his. DUAL. Paset'-e-dcl-talid,Perhaps he will strike our (two). Paset'-e-dal-t a b e n, Perhaps he will strike your (two). Paset'-e-dal-t a k in, Perhaps he wi 11 strike their (two). PLURAL. Paset'-e-dal-tale, Perhaps he will strike our. Paset'-e-da 1- t a p e, Perhaps he will strike your. Paset'-e-da 1 -t a k o, Perhaps he will strike their. Note.-The 3rd person Singular of the Nominative suffixes "e" has been affixed to the final "a" to show how any of those suffixes may be added to form tho required subject of the sentence; as Dal-tam-a-ko, They will strike thy. Dal-tako-a-m. Thou wilt strike their etc. ( '.77 ) GENERAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. INDICATIVE. Dal-et'-tin--a-e, He strikes my. SPECI He is striking0 my. Dat -ket'-ti,--a-e, He struck or has struck my. Dal-tet'-tit-a-e, He struick or had struck my. GEN a-e, He used to strike my. SPE Dal-et'-Jcam-ta h' -6 was striking my. IN Dat -1et'-taJ~1, a n7, - titz'-a-e, He had struck my. SUBJUNCTIVE with "Khan." Dat -et'- tin -lhan-e, if he strikes my. AL INCOMPLETE PRDal-et'lcan - t i n' - khan-e, If he is striking miy. RECENT PAST, e, If he struck mly. ANTERIOR PAST. e) If he struck ERAL INCOMPLETE Dal-et'-tah7l/c a n - fý,n.1ehaln._.o Tf SUBJUNCTIVE with "1Paset." Paset'-e-dal-et' - t i n',) Perhaps he strikes My. ESENT. Paset'-e-dal-et'-kct n tin', Perhaps. he is striking my. Perhaps he struck my. Perhaps he struck mny. PAST. Paset'-e-dai-et'-tah -e - ibm) P'A Psrb n hie used to strike he used to strike my. Imy. DIIAL INCOMPLETE1 PAST. Dat -et'-kia n-tah Z - Paset'-e-clal-et'-kca n If he was strik- haps he was strikimg My ing my. DECISIVE PLUPERFI EdT. Dat-i et'-tahl5 ba n - Paset'-e-dat-tet'-tahz ti~z-khan-e, I f kan-tin*, Perhaps he he had struck jhad struck my. my. L ( 178 ) IN CHOATIVTE FUTURE. Dctil-ti-ila g 6 it'v He will be about to lstrike my. Dal-tin'-lagi d o Md - kacn-a-e, He is about- to strike may. Dai-tixii-tagi di o Id - Hie was about to strike my. Dat-ke"t~-ct-e, He will.or would strike 'My. (hQo) Dal- le -ti,ý ae, He will- r would. (no) strike my. Iohan,-e, I:f he will be about to strike my. INCHOATIVE PL{ESE Dali-tifi-lagic1 o ic - kan~-1ohan-e, I f he is abouit t to strike my. INCHIOATIVE PAST,) Dalp-tin'-laqiclo Id kan-t a k /cJa n - klwin-e, If he was about to strike my. OPTATIVE. Dal-Je-tin'-Jo han-c, if he would strike my.' CONDITIONAL. If he will or 'would strike my. CO~NTINGENT. Paset'-e-dat-titiA-lagibt', Perhaps he will be about to strike my. NT. dokld -Jan, Perha p s he is about to strike my. clolo-an tahZ Jo 'a nj Perhaps he was about to strike my. Past',e-dal-k7 e. t i U_5, Perhaps he w o u1d strike my. Paset'-e-dali-le - t i n" Perhaps he will or would strike my. Da~ot-tin i, aset'-e-dat-ket't 47, Hie' strikes, or will gi-e, Perhaps he will or would strike, my. or would strike my. P RELIMINARy FUTU RE. Da-l-t~4gieHe Paset'-e-dat-le - t I",i ' -will 'first str i k e gi-e, Perha p s h e my. will first strike my. SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. PRELI MINARY EXPOSTU LATIVE. D&ui1e8ti.6n;nahz- e, Dal-le-talin. nahzi-e, Jial-le-tale-na hb - eIHIe must first He must first! H mutfrtsik.strike my. strike our (two.) our, ( 179 ) SINGULAR. PRE Dal-e-ti'A-ba-e, He must first strike my. PRE Dal-te-tid-en-a- e, He must first strike my. PRE Dal-letiti- ma - e * May hefi rst strike my i PRE 2 Dal-le-tid m e! Strike thou first my! Da -t i 4i - m a - e! * May he strike my! 2 Dacl- tli - ne! Strike thou my! DUAL. LIMINARY PERITSUAS Dacl-e-talin`-ba-e, He must first strike our (two). LIMINARY ADMISSI Dal-le-tali, - e n - a-e, He must first strike our (two). LIMINARY BENEDIC Dal-le-talin'-ma-e! Mayhe first strike our (two). LIMINARY IMPERAT Dal-le-talip'l- Im.e! Strike thou first our (two). BENEDICTIVE. Dal-talid-ma - e May he st rik e our (two)! PLURAL. IVE. Dual-le-tale-ba-e, He must first strike Our. VE. Dal-le-tale-en - a - e He must first strike our, TIVE. Dal-e-tal e - m a - e! May he first strike our! IVE. Dal-i e - ta 1 e - m e! Strike thou fi rst our! Dat- t a Z e - m a - e May he strike our! IMPERATIVE. Dal-talin - me! Strike thou our (two)! Dal-tate-me! thou our! Strike * Or that he may or might etc. * Note.-It will be observed, that besides in the Future tense, only the Synopsis of the Genitive case has been given, as the student will easily be able to insert any required Genitive Suffix between the tense-sign and the final "a." This form is used when the object is Neuter. kDJEOTTVE PARTICIPLES. ADVERBIAL PARTIFUTURE,. I CIPLES. I.Da2-tin * (tamn talc.) Who jDal-tipi-lchan, Striking,, ýýill s[rik~e my (JhY, our etc.) mny. GENKuaAL INCOMPL ETi PRES ENT. Srk Dat ~ 1 ei-i' Wosrkes my. Datl-et-tim-kchan, Srk ing my. SPEECIAL INC'CMPLETE, PRES ENT. Dalt-1a-t' Who is strik- Dat -et'-lcam-tin - kh a n, in g my. Strikingr my now. Dat -ket'-ti1, Who struck my. Dat-ket'-titi-I-Aan, Hay.. in g struck my. GERUNDS. Dat-tit, tam, tape-reaMr, te, re, etc, Of, by, in striking my, thy, your, Dal-e-t'f,i-realo, te, re, etc. Of, by, in striking my. Dal-et'-k~an-tini-reaP, te, etc. by, in strikingr MY now. Of) Dal-ket'-tin'-reaM, te, etc. in havingr struck my. Of, by) ANTERIOR FAST. l-let'-ti,', Who struck my. Dal-et'-tii-khan, ing struck my. GENERAL INCO0MPLETM PAST. Dal et'-tahZ/oar-tin', Who used Dal - et' - tah-eklan, to strike my. __ khan, Used to 00 Hay Dat -1et'-tin'-reakM, te, etc. Of, by,,in having struck my. DaZ- et-tahZ 7ca&- tin rea1', te., etc. Of, by, in using to strike my. strike O]' CIIAL IIUILYW Ab5. my. Dat -et'-hart taIC/tican-tin', Who Dal- et'-kan. tclth~Jcm- ti'i'- DaZ-et'-Joctn-tahZ~an-tin'-reaf~, t e, was striking -my thien. /han, Striking my then. etc, Of, by, in striking my then. Dat-let'-tahT~i'cm-tini, Who had Daf'-let'-tahZ~Je a n - t i n' - Dat-tet'-tah~eJcan-tini-reak', te, etc, s truck my. khan, Havingr struck my. Of, by, in having struck my. *Any of the Genitive suffixes inay of course be affixed; as Dat-ket'-tani horv the person who s3truck thy, ja-WWe -i'Ael lt'koce. I saw them' striking your (two.) INCHOATIVE FUTURE. Dal-tin'-lagit', Who will I about to strike my. 1INCHOAOTIVE -PRE~SENT. Dal_ tini-1ayi, oo'1c-an, Who about to strike mny. )e DaZ-6ti.-tagit'-khctm, Beingr about to strike my. r isj INCHOATIVE PAST. Who was about to strike my.ý OPTATIVE Dal-ke-tini, Who would strike my. CONDITIONAL. Dal le tin, Who may have struck my. INFINITIVE 1Jal-ti'-.tat -tae-etc., To strike mly etc. Dal -tin" - lagidolS.- k amn - kh~,Being -now about to strike my. Dal-ti,'-lag&1oM~-Tcan-ta - h~-km kam, Being then about to strike my.' Dat-Ice -.ti,'-Jcham, Wishingc to strike my. Dat -tin'-lagit'--reak', te, etc, Of, by, in being about to strike my. Dat-tin"-lagidolf,-kam-rea!4." re, MReI Of, by, in being about to strike my. vroa1S, te, etc, Of, by, in being then about to strike my. Dal-1ce-tin'-rect iS, te, etc, Of, by, in wishing to strike my. Dad-le-tin`-1han, Havingj Dat-te-ti,-rea1S, te, retc, In first btruck my, case of or having str'uck my. Rernark -The 'Orel iniinary Exposlulative, Persuasive and Admuissive Dal-le-tin`-n-ahi, DPabl e-tin'-ah, Dal-e. ti '-ena, being first obliged to strike my, are not unfrequently heardý ( 182 ) FUTURE. WITH THE ACCUSATIVE INDICATIVE. SINGULAR, 1 Dal-iin-a-e, He will strike me. 2 Dal-me-a-e, He will strike thee. 3 Dal-e-a-e, He will strike him or her. DUAL. 1 Dal-lid-a-e, He will strike us two. 2 Dal-ben-a-e, He will strike you two. 3 Dal-kin-a-e, He will strike them two. PLURAL. 1 Dal-le-a-e, He will strike us. 2 Dal-pe-a-e, He will strike you. 3 Dal-ko-a-e, He will strilke them. SUBJUNCTIVE with 'j Khan." SINGULAR. Dal-in-khan-e, If he will strike me. Dal-me-lcha n - e, If he will strike thee. Dal-e-klhan-e, If he will str ike him or her. DUAL. Dal-lii-kh a n - e, If he will strike us two. Dal-ben-khan - e, If he will strike you two. Dal-lkin-kcha n- e, If he will strike them two. PLURAL. Dal-le-khan-e, If he will strike us. Dal-pe-khan-e, If he will strike you. Dal-ko-khan-e, If he will strike them. ZASE. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'- e- dal - i, * Perhaps he will strike me. Paset'-e-dal-me, Perhaps he will strike thee. Paset'-e-dal-e, Perhaps he will strike him or her. DUAL. Paset'-e-dal-lin, Perhaps he will strike us two. Paset'-e - da - be, Perhaps he will strike you two. Paset'- e- d a - k i n, Perhaps he will strike them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-.da-le, Perhaps he will strike us Paset'-e-dal-pe, Perhaps he will strike you. Paset'-e-dal-ko, Perhaps he will strike them. * Or may strike. Note.-In this case all forms are made to agree with a Nominative of the third person singular common Gender. The student will easily be able to affi-x any required nominative suffix to the final " a." 183 ) GE1NERAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. INI)ICATIVM. SINGLTLAR.. Dal-ed-ij-ct - e, He strikes me.* 2 Dal. et'-me-aC - e! He strikes thee. 3 Dal-ed- e- a -, e, He~ dct~ukes h~im SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." SINGULAR. Da1-ed-ini-khan-e, If hie stri kes Imine.* Dat-et'-me-Jrha n - e, If he strikes thee. Dal-ed-e-1chanm - e) If he &;st~rikett hbim S UBJUNCTIVE with c Paset'," SINGULAR.' Pacset'-e -(Ada-ed - i - 'PA Perhaps he S'trikes Pat8et'-e.-dalt-e t' - m e, Perhaps he strikes th'ee. Paset'-e-dal - e d - e, Perhms he strikes or her. or her. him or her. DUALDUAL DUAL. 1 Dal-et'-lin'-a - e, D et'al-d 14-khan - Paset'-e- dal-et'- ii 'i He strikes u s ý, If he strikes Perhaps -he strikes, two. us two. us two. 2 Dal-et'-ben-a- e,. Da.l-et'-bern-klhan- P aset'-e-dal-et'-.ýb e n, He srikes y o u *e, If he strikes Perhaps he strikes two. you two. you two. 3 D4l-et'-Jin-a- e, Dal-et'-1kin'kh an- Pasei'-e-dal-et'- 1ti nt, He striwes them oe, If he strikes Perhaps he strikes, two. t theif two. tPera two. PLUYRAL. PLURAL. PLURAL. I Dal-et'-le - a e, Dad-et'-le-lchan-e, P a-set'- -e - dal- e t' -1 e, He strike s u s If he strikes us. Perhaps he s-t-rikes is. 2 Dal-et'-pe- a - e Dal-et'-pe-bhamd-e, Paset'-e-dal-et' - pe He strikes you. If he sgtr-ikes y-ou. Perhaps he strikes you. 3 Dal-et'-ko- a - e, Dut-et'-'o-'han-e, F Paset'-e-dat-e-C-k 0o, He strikes them. If he s tri k-,e s Perhaps he strikes them. them. Or is striking. ( 184 ) SPECIAL INCOMPLETE P INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE with SINGULAR. SINGULAR. I*Dal-ed-?*i.i-carn- *Dal-ed-in'-Jccn-a-e, He is stik- lchan-e, If he is ing me. striking me. 2 Dal-et-me-Iran - Dctl-et'-r e -le a n a-e, He is strik- khan-e, If he is ing thee. striking thee. 3 t Dal-eci e-Jcan- t Dat-ect-e- le a n - a-e, He is strik- khan-e, If he is ing him or her. striking hint &c. DUAL. -DUAL. 1 Dal-et-lift-kan- IDal-et'-lin'- k a n -.a-e, He is strik- kchar&-e, If he is ing us two, strikingr us two. 2 Dald-e t'- b e n- Dal-et-ben -Jle a/ kan-a-e., He is -Jchan-e, If he is striking you two. striking you two. 3 Dal-et'-loin-lcctn- Dat-et'-kin-kca n - a-e, He is strik- kchan-e, If he is ingr them. two. strikingr t h e mn two. 0 -PLURAL. PLURAL. 1 Dal-et-le-Je a n - Dal et'-lec - le a n - a-e, He is strik- kcha-n-e, If he is ingr us. strikingr us. 2 Dal-et'-pe-7ea n - Dal-et'-pe - I.a n~ - a-e, He is strik- khan-e, If he is ing you. striking you. 3Dal-et'-Iko-1ka n - Dcd-et'.Io - 7r a n - a-e, He is strik. khbam-e, If he is inX tLem. striking them. Or usually dal-inh-kan-acs.e Or usually dal-e-kcsn-ae., RESENT. SUBJUNCTIVE with SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dal-ed-in' - ican, Perhaps he is striking me. Paset'-e-dcd-et' - m e - kan, Perhaps he is striking thee. ~ Paset'-e-dal-ed - e - kaqn, Perhaps he is striking him. &c. DUAL. Pa~set'-e-dat-et'- Zi i n" - lean, Perhaps he is striking US two. Paset'-e-dal-et'- b e n - kan, Perhaps he is striking you two. Paset'- e-dal-t'-kc i n - kan, Perhaps he is striking them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dcd-e t' - 1 e lean, Perhaps he i striking us. Paset' e-dal- e t' e - kcan, Perhaps he is strikingoZ you. Paset'-e-dc - e t' - Je o - lean, Perhaps he i striking them. ( 185 ) RECENT PAST. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-ked-iit-a- e, He struck me. 2 Dal-kcet'-nme-a-e, He struck thee. 3 Dal-ked-e- a - e He struck him or her. DUAL. 1 Dal-kcet'-liin-a- e, Hestruck us two. 2 Dal-lret'-ben-a- e, He struck you two. 3 Dal-ket'-kin-a-e, Be struck them two. PLURAL. 1 Dsl-ket'-le-a-e, He struck us. 2 Dal-ket'-pe-a -e, He struck you. 3 Dal-1yet'-Ico-a- e, He struck them. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khlan." SINGULAR. Dal-ked-it-lccan-e, If he struc k me. Dal -ket' -melkhan-e, If he struck thee. Dal-lced-e-khan-e, If he struck him or her. DUAL. Dal - k e t'- Ii A - k'han-e, If he struck us two. Dal- k e t'- ben - khan-e, If h e struck you two. Dal- k e t' - k in - khcan-e. If he struck them two. PLURAL. Dal-ket'-le-khan-e, If he struck us. Dal-ket'-pe-kha n - e, If he struck you. Dal-lcet'-kco-k han - e, If he struck them, SUBJUNCTIVE with " Paset." SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dal-lked - i n, Perhaps he struck me. Paset'-e-dal-ket'-m e, Perhaps he str u c k thee. Paset'-e-dal -k e d - e Perhaps he struck him or her. DUAL. Paset'-e-dal-ke t'-1 i si, Perhaps he struck us two. Paset'-e-dal-klet'- ben, Perhaps he struck you two. Paset'-e-ddl-ket'-r! in, Perhaps he struck them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dal-ke t' - e, Perhaps he struck us. Paset'-e-dal-ket' - pe, Perhaphs he struck you. Paset'-e-dat-ket'- k o, Perhaps he struck them. ( 186 ) ANTERIOR PAST. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1Dat-tect-i',i a -e He struck* me. 2 Dal-let'-me-a e, He struck thee. 3 Dat-led- e- a -e, He 9truck him or her. DUAL. I Dal-let'-li Al - a e, He struck us two. 2 Datlet'-ben-a- e, He struck you two., 3 Dal-let'-kin-a-e, lie- struck them two. PLURAL. 1 Dal-let'-te- a - e He struck us. SUBJUNCTIVE with "1Khan." SINGULAR. Dat 1ed-i,'-kha n - e, If he struck* me. Dal-et'-me-kehan -. e, if he struck thee. Dal-led-e-1r~ha'-e, If he struck him or her. DUAL. Dal-et'-Zin'-khart - ý, If he struck us two. Dat-I et'-ben-lchan - e, If he struck you two. Dat -1et'-Jcrin-khane, If he struc k them -two. PLURAL. Dal-let'-Ze-khart-e, If he struck us. SUBJUNCTIVE, With' "Paset'." SINGULAR. Past' -e-dctt-t e d - i i Perhaps he struck* IPast'-e-claZ-Z e t' - m e, Perhaps he struck Paset'e-da 1 -t e d - e Perhaps he struck him or her. DUAL. Paset'-e-dali-t e t'- -ii Perhaps he struck us two. Paset'-e-dat-tet'-b e n, Perhaps he struck you two. Pasdt'-e-dat-et'-Jci n., Perhaps h be struck them two. PLURAL Paset'-e-dat-t e t' - Ie Perhaps he struck us. Paset'-e-dat-te t" - p e, Perhaps he struck you. Pcaset' e-d at- Z et' - k. - Perhaps he struck. them. 2 Dat-let'-pe- am e, Dcd-tet'-pe-Jchan-e, Ile struck you. If he struck yo-u. 3 Dat-tet-ko -a - e, Dat - et'-ko-khan-e,,He struck them. If h e struck them. *Or had struck. Note.--The other form mentioned in the Nominative case Anterior Pasts, is not used in the, 1st and 3rd person Singular, and even seldom in the otherpersons; as Dai-lek'-.-o-a-e, He struck them. ( 187 ) GENERAL INCOMPLETE PAST. INDICATIvE. SINGULAR. I Dal-ed-ii- t a h kan-a-e, He * struck or used to strike me. 2 Dal-et'-me-tahic - kan-a-e, He struck or used to strike thee. 3 Dal-ed - e - t ah kan-a-e, He struck or used to strike him. DUAL. 1 Dal-dt'-linl-tah 1 -kan-a-e, He struck or used to strike us two. 2 Dal-et'-ben-tahZ - kan-a-e, He struck or used to strike you two. 3 Dal-et'-Join-ta-thZkan-a-e, He struck or used to strike them two. PLURAL. 1 Dal-et'-le-ta h - ckan-a-e, He struck or used to strike us. 2 Dal-et'-pe-ta h - - ekan-a e, He struck or used to strike you. 3 Dtal-et'-ko-tah - kan-a-e, He struck or used to strike them. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." SINGULAR. Dal-ed-i n - t a h Z Joan-khan-e, If he struck or used to strike me. Dal-et'-mre-ta h Z - kan-khan-e, If he struck or used to strike thee. Dal-ed-e-tahZkc ankhan-e, If he struck or used to strike him. DUAL. Dal-et'-li-t a h - - Joan-kJohan-e, I f he struck or used to strike us two. Dat-et'-ben - tahtkankhan-e, If he struck or used to strike you two. Dal-et'-/oin-tah - - kan-Jkhan-e, If he struck or used to strike them two. PLURAL. Dal-et'-l e - t a h7 -ka n - k h ca n - e, If he struck or used to strike us. Dat-et'-pe- t ca h - lkan-khan-e, If he struck or used to strike you. Dal- t'-ko- tah 2a e - kan-kJhan-e, If he struck or used to strike them. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Paset'." SINGULAL' Paset'-e-dal-e d - i - tahiJkan, Perhaps he struck or used to strike me. Paset'-e-dal-et' - nme - tahkoan, Perhaps he struck or used to strike thee. Paset'-e-dal-ed-e- t a - hkuJan, Perhaps he struck, or used to strike him. DUAL, Paset'-e-dal-et'- li - tahikJan, Perhaps he struck or used to strike us two. Paset'-e-dal-et'- b e n - takheJon, Perhaps he struck or used to strike you two. Paset'-e-dal-et'-k i n - tahJkan, Perhaps he struck or used to strike them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dal-et'-le-tahZkan, Perhaps he struck or used to strike us. Paset'-e-dal- e t' - pe - tahk/Jan, Perhaps he struckl or used to strike you. Paset'-e-dal- e t' - ko o - tahFJoan, Perhaps he struck or used to strike them. * Or was. strikiug. ( T'ide Nom. case). ( 188 ),SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. INDICATIVE. SUB3JUNCTIVE with SUBJUINCTIVE"wit'h " Khan." "4 Paset'.") SINGULAR. SINGULAR. SINGIULAR. 1 Dal-ed-i ni-k an- - Dal-ed-in4 - 7c an, Paset'-e-dal-e d - i n' tahca-aeHe takZ1can-1,-hanr-e, f lean-tah~1can, Perhaps was striking me.* be was strikingm~e. he was striking me. 2 Dal-et'-me-Jca n- Dal-et'-me- Je, a n - Paset'-e-cala-e t' -?n e' tah~kan-a-e, He tali Jean-1khan-e, If 7an-tah~1can, Pe'rhaps was striking thee. he was striking thee. be was striking thee. -3 Dal-ed-e-lc a n - Dat-ed-e-Jean-t a - Paset'-e-dal-ecl-e-lcantah~1can-a-e, H e hZlcan-Jchan-e, If t a hec amn, Perhaps was strikingjhim.* he wasstrikinghim. he was striking him. DUAL. DUAL. DUAL. Dal-et'-lin-k-an-- Dal-et-lin" kran-ta- Paset'-e-dal-et'- I i n" - tah'ikan-a-e, He h~lean-lch 'an-e, If he Jcan-tah~1ean, Perhaps as striking us two. was strikingr US two, he wasstrikingUS two. 2 Dal-et'-ben-lcan - Dat-et' -ben-kc amn - Paset'-e-dul-et'-be'n - tah'eJcan-a-e, H e tah'e1can-1ehan-e, kan-tah~ian, Per.was striking you If he was strik-- haps he -was- striktwo. ingr you two. ing you two. 3 Dal-et'-lcin-lcan - Dal- et'-lcin-lcan-, Paset'-e-dal-et' -kintahZkcqn-a-e, H e tah'elan. klian-e. kan-tah~lcan, Perwas striking If hie was strik - haps he was strikthem two. ing them. two. them two. PLURAL. PLURAL. PLURAL. I Dal-et'-le- k an, - Dal-et'-le-lcan- ta- Paset'-e-da I- e t'- I e - tah-e1can-a-e, H e h~kan-khan-e, If kraq?-tahZ4:an, Perhaps was striking us. he was striking us. he was striking us. 2 Davl-et'-pe-ko an - Dat-et'-pe-kan-ta - Paset'-e-clal- e t' - p e - tak-e'lan-a-e, He hWcan-khan-e, If lean -tah~kun, Perh aps was striking you. he was str~ikingyon. he was strikingc you. 3 Dal-et'-ko-kc a n - Dal-et'-7ro-1can-tahZ- Faset'-e-dal- e t' - le o tah~1can-a-e, H e kcan-lchan-e, If he kcn - tahe"kan, Perh aps was striking them. was striking-them. he was strikthem., Or Dal-if-kan-tah-ekan-a-e. tOr Dal-e-lcan-taktkan-a-e. ( 189 ) IN DICISIVE PLUPERFECT. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dai-led-i,[-tahe leoan-a -e, He had struck me. 2 Dai-iet'-me-t a - h~la'n-a-e, He had struck thee. loan-a -e, H-e had struck him. DUAL. hleomu n- a -e, H e had struck us,SUBJUNCTIVE with SINGULAR. Dali-led-ini-tah e - kan-Jo~han-e, If he had struck me. kan-lohan%-e, I f he had struck thee. Dai-ied-e- t a h e - Joan-Jo~han-e, If he had struck him. DUAL, Dat -1et'-1lii'-tah '6 - loan-Jo han-e, If he had struck us~ 2 two. two. Dail-let'- ben -t a - Dal-iet'-ben-ta h Z htlroan-a-e, H e kart-Johan-e, If had struck you he had struck two. you two. Da-liet'-tlrin-taq - Dal-i et'-kin-t a h -e h-elan-a-e,, H e loam-Joham-e, if had struck them he had struck two. them two. PLURAL. PLURAL. Dcti-iet'-ie-tah'e6- Dat-i et'-ie-t a h z kam-a-e, He had loan-lohan-e, If struck us. he had struck us. Dal-iet'-pe-tah'e- Dat -iet'-pe-ta h 'el - kan-a-e, He had loan Jo~han-e, If he struck you. h-ad struck you. Dai-iet'-Joo-tahe - Dat-i et'-/o.o-ta h e, - loam-a-e, He had loart-lohan-e, If he.struck them. had struck them. I SUBJUNCTIVE with Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dal-lel - i 4~ - tah~Joan, Perhaps he had struck me. Paset' -c-dat-i et'-rn e - tah~lon, Perh a ps he had struck thee. Paset'-e -dali-i1e d - e - tah-e-oatn, Perhaps he had struck him. ]DUAL. Paset'-e-ctaet-ie'i li - tahdolean, Pe rh a ps he had struck u s.two. Paset'-e-dat-iet'- b en - tah-eJoan, Perha p s he had struck you two. Paset'-e-dai-tet'-Jo, i ntah~Joan, Perha p s he had struck them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dai-l e t' - I e - tah'eJoan, Perha p s he had struck us. Paset'-e-dai-t o' - p etah-Joan, Perhaps he had struck you. Paset' -e-dat-i et' - Jo o - tah-ekan, Perha p s he had struck them, ( 190 ) INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-itn-lagit' He will be ab to strike me. 2 Dal-me-lcagit' He will be ab to strike thee. 3 Dal-e-la gif He will be ab to strike him. DUAL. 1 Dal-lidi-lagil' He will be ab to strike us t INCHOATIVE FUTURE. SUBJUNCTIVE With SU I Khan." SINGULAR. -e, Dal -i Y - agi t'- Pase out khan-e, If he Pe will be about to ab strike to me. -e, Dal-m e-lagit' - Pase out khan-e, If he will Pe about tostrikethee. ab - e, Dal-e-tagit'-khcm - Pas out e, If he willbe about Pe to strike him. ab DUAL. - e, Dal-Ji n"- I a g i t'- Pas out khan-e, If he will Pe vo. be about to strike ab BJUNCTIVE with " Paset'." SINGULAR. t-e-dal-ii-lagit', rhaps he will be )ut to strike me. t'-e-dal-me-lEgit', rhaps he will be out to strike thee. et'-e-dal-e-lag i t', rhaps he will be out to strike him. DUAL. et'-e-dat-lid-lagit', rhaps he will be out to strike us 2 3 us two. two. Dal-ben-lcagit-e, Dal-ben- a g i t' - Paset'-e-dl-ben - la - He will be about khan-e, If he will gi', Perhaps he will to strike you two. be about to strike be about to strike you two. you two. Dal-kin-lagit'-e, Dal-kin- l a git' - Pas t'-e - cd ca 1 - k in - He will be about khan-e, If he lagit', Perhaps he to strike them will be about to will be about to two. strike them two. strike them two. PLURAL. PLURAL. PLURAL. Dal-le-lagi t' - e, Dal-le-tagit'-khan- Pcaset'-e-dal-le-lagit', He will be about e, If he will be a- Perhaps he will be to strike us. bout to strike us. about to strike us. Dat-pedagit' - e, Dol"-pe-lagit'- khan- Paset'-e-dal-pe-acgit, He will be about e, If he will be about Perhaps he will be to strike you. to strike you. about to strike you. Dal-ko-lagit'f - e, Da- Ic o - lagi - La Paset'-e-dal4oolagit', He will be about khan-e,If he will be Perhaps he will be to strike them, about to strike them., about to strike them. 2 3 ( 191) INCHOATIVE PRESENT. INDICATIVE. SUBJU NCTIVE with "Khatn. " SINGULAR. SINGULAR. Dal-i4b-lagild-ol- Dat-i n'-lagi d-o 19 - lecn'-a-e, He is a- kan-lehan-.e, f he is bout to strike me. about to strike me. Dal -me-la g i d - Dal-me-lagid-ole - o1'-lean-a-e, He lean-lchan-e, If.is about to strike he is about to thee. strike thee. Datlre-agid-o M~3- Dal-e-lagi d - o Mo - kan-.a-e, He is a- lean-khan-e, if he is bout to strike him. about to strike him.0 DUAL. DUAL. Dal-lin' la g i d - Dal-liqi-lagid-o M~ - oA3-kan-a-e, He kan-lchan-e, If is about to strike be is about- to us two. strike us two. Dal-ben-la g i d - DaZ-ben-1agi',d-ol~ - oh3-loan-a-.e, He kan-lehan -e If is about to strike be is about to you two. strike you two. Dal-kinklg i d - Dat-kin-lagid-olkoJ'-lccra-a-e., He koan-Johan-e, is about to strike If he is about to the~m two. strike them two. PLURAL. PLURAL. Dal-le-lagid-o15- Dal-le-lctgi d-o l1 - lean-a-c, He is a- Joan-Jhan-e, If lieu bout to strike us. about to strike us. Dal-pe-lagid-ok- Dal-pe-lagid- o1klean-a-c., He is a, lean-lohan-e, Ifbe is bout to strike you. about to strike you. Dal-co-lagid-oli- Dctl-k)o-lagict - olSlcan-a-e, He is a-, lan-khan-e, Ifiheis.bout to strikethem., about to strike them. SUBJUNCTIVEO With "c Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dal-in-lagido1k-Joan, Perhaps he is about to strike me.. Paset' -e-dal - me - t a - gid-ol'-kan, Perhaps he is about to strike thee., Paset'-e-dal-e-lagi d - ogk' lan, Perhaps he is about to strike him. DUAL. Paset'-e-dl-lZPin -1I a - gid-oko-Jcan, Perhaps he is about to. strike u.s two. Paset'-e -d at - ben - tagid-oklc-Jan, ' Perhaps is about to strike you two. Paset'-e-dal-Jein -1t a - gicl-ol~-1can, Perhaps he is about to strike them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dal-le-laIo1k-lan, Perhaps he is about to strike us. Paset'-e-dal-pe-lagidolS-lean, Perhaps he is about to strikeyou. Paset'-e-dal-Joo~lagidoJk-lan, Perhaps he is about to strike them, ( 192 ) INCHOATIVE PAST. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. I Dal-in-lagid-oldkan-tahllcan-a-e, He was about to to strike me. 2 Dal-me-lagidolikan-tah Z ic a n - a-e, He was about to str i k e thee. 3 Dal-e-lagid-o 1o - kacn-tah-han-a-e, He was about to strike him. SUBJUNCTIVE with SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." " Paset'." SINGULAR. SINGULAR. Dal-ini-lagi d - o ki Paset'-e-dal-i- lagidkan-tah - lo a n - olS-kan-tah-lca n, khan-e, If he Perhaps he was was about to about to strike me. strike me. Dal-me-lagid-olk - Paset'-e-dal-me-lagi - kan-tah Z k a n - d-o-1-lcan-tahkIa n, kchan-e, If he Perhapshe was was about to about to strike thee. strike thee. Dal-e-lapi d - o 715- Paset'-e-dal -e-lagid - kan-ta h Z ha n- ol - oan - t ahik an, khun-e, If he Perhaps he was was ab o u t t o about to strike him. strike him. DUAL. DUAL. 1 Dal-tin-lagid-ok'- Dal-tin-lagid-olS - kan-tah-kican-a-e, kam-tah o a n - He was about khan-e, If he to strike us two. was about to strike us two. 2 Dal-ben-lag i d- Dal-ben-lagid-ol1 -ole'-k an - t ah - kan-tahkccleankan- a- e, He khan-e, If he wasaboutto was aboutto strike you two. strike you tivo. 3 Da l -kin-la g i d- Dal-kin-lagid-oldok-lckan-t a h - kan-ta h e k ankan- a - e, HL e khan-e, If he was about to was a b o ut t o strike them two. strike them two. DUAL. Paset'-e-dal-lid-lZgidolr - kan- tah Ic an, Perhaps he was about to strike us two. Paset'-e-dal-ben-lagidolM-kan - tah tl a n, Perhaps he was about to strike you two. Paset'-e-dal-kin-lagidoli-klan -tah- ka n, Perhaps he was about to strike them two. ( 193 ) PLURAL. I Dal-te-1agid-o d" loan - tahZ k, a na.-e, He. was about to, striket US. 2 D~al-pve-lagid- o~c',kan~-tahVcan-a-e, He was about to, strike, you., S. Dal" Ico-lagid'oS-~ ican - NOh, ic a n- - a-e,, He' was about to str ik e th-em,. PLURAL. Dal-le-lagid - o Ic - kan-tah -e le a n - khan-e, I ~ h e was about toll strike us. Dal-pe-lagidZ-o ic'kcan-itah-- k, -a;khrtn-e,- I f h e was, about t ol strike you. Dal-Jcolagid-olc'Jcamn-tah -e Ic an - Ichan-e, I f h e was about to. strike themi PLURAL. Paset'-e-dal*Ie-lctgida~rc'-Ian -.t~ah Z1 an, Perha ps. he wa s about. to-strike us. Paset'-e-cdal,-pe-I4ictgct. ogc-1can-tah~Ican, Perhaps heý was about. to, strike you,. Pa~set'"-e-dall'"co-il'agid-' olrc'- kan -tah Jc a nI Perha ps h e wa s about to strik~e them. m ( 194 ) OPTATIVE. SINGULAR. I SINGULAR. 1 Dal-ke-i-a- e, * Dal-ke-A-khan- e, 2 3 1 2 3 He will or would * If he will or strike me. would strike me. Dal-ke-m - a - e, Dal-ke-m-lchan-e, He will or would If he will or strike thee. would stri ke thee. Dal-ke-a-e, IHe Dal-ke-khan-e, If will or w ou d he will or would strike him. strike him. DUAL. DUAL. Dal-cee-id-a- e, Datl-kce-tlid-khan-e, HIle will or would If he w i 1. 1 o r strike us two. would strike us two. Dcl-ke-ben-a- e, Dal-ke-ben-khan-e, He will or would If he wi 11 or strike you two. I would strike you two. Dal-ke-kiin-a- e, Dal-ce-kin-khanlie will or would e, If he will or strike them two. would stri k e them two. SINGULAR. Paset'-e-d a 1- k e - n* Perhaps he will o would strike me. Paset'-e-dal - k e - m Perhaps he will ( would strike thee.,,r Paset'-e-dal-k e, Perhaps he will or would strike him. DUAL. Paset'-e-dal-ke - li ', Perhaps he will or would strike us two, Paset'-e-dal-ke - b e n, Perhaps he will or would strike you two. Paset'-e-da-lce - k i n, Perhaps he will or would strike them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dal - k e - 1 e, Perhaps he will or would strike us. Pa.set'-e-d&-I e - pe, Perhaps he will or would strike you. Paset'-e-ddl- l e - Ic o, Perhaps he will or Swould strike them. 1 2 3 PLURAL. PLURAL. Dacl-kle-le- a - e, Dal-ke-le-khan-e, He will or would If he will o r strike us. would strike us. Dal-ke-pe -a - e, Dal-ke-pe-kchan-e, He will or would If he will or strike you. would strike you. Dal-ke-ko- a - e, Dal-kce-ko-kchanc-e, He will or would If he will or strike them. would strike them 4 Or have struck. ( 195 ) CONDITIONAL. SINGULAR. 1 (Oho) Dal-le-ia-e, He will or would (not) strike* me. 2 (Oho) Dal - em-a-e, He will or would (not) strike thee. 3 (Oho) Dal-le-ae, He will or would (not) strike him. DUAL. 1 (Oho) Dal- elin-a-e, He will or would (n o t) strike us two. 2 (Oho) Da-le-bena-e, He will or would (not) strike you two. 3 (Oho) Dal-le kin-a-e, He will or would (not) strike them two. PLURAL. 1 (Oho) Dal-te-lea-e, He will or would (not) strike us. 2 (Oho) Dal-lepe-a-e, He will or would (not) strike you. 3 (Oho) Dal- leko-a-e, He will or would (not) strike them. * Or have struck. SINGULAR. Dal-le-ni-kha n - e, If he will or would strike * me. Dal-le-m-khan-e, If he will or would strike thee. Dal-le-khan-e, If he will or would strike him. DUAL. Dal-le-lin-khan-e, If he will or would strike us two. Dal-le-ben-khan - e, If he will or would strike you two. Dal-le-kin-khan - e, If he will or would stri k e them two. PLURAL. Dal-le-le-khan- e, If he will or would strike us. Dael-lee-kehan- e, If he will or would strike you. Dal-le-ko-khan-e, If he will or would strike them. SINGULAR. Paset'-e-d a 1 -1 e -, Perhaps he will or would strike* me. Paset'- e - dal-i e - m, Perhaps he will or would strike thee. Paset'-e-dal-le, Perhaps he will or would strike him. DUAL. Paset'-e-dal-l e- 1z, Perhaps he will or would strike us two. Paset'-e-dal-le- b e n, Perhaps he will or would strike y ou two. Paset'-e-dal-le- k in, Perhaps he will or would strike them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dal - 1 e- 1 e, Perhaps he will or would strike us. Paset'-e-dal- e - p e, Perhaps he will or would strike you. Paet'- e-dal- e - k o, Perhaps he will or would strike them. ( 196 ) CONTIiNGENT SINGULAR. SIN G U LA R. 1. Dal-lied-iAi-yi-ec, lie strikes, will or would strike* Me. 2 Dai-ked-me -gi - e, lie will or would strike thee. 3Drid-iced-e-gi - e fie will or would.strike him. DUAL. ii~~ ~~ Da-ie'-iqi-e, He will or would st rike us two. 2 Dcd-lcet'-ben-g i, - 'e, He will or would strike you SINGULAkR. Paset '-e-dai -ied - i n~ - gi, Perhaps he will or would strike* mne. Paset'-e-dal-ket' - tmegi, Perhaps he will or would strike thee. Paset'-e-dai-lcecl-e-g i,) Perhaps he will or would Strike him. DUAL. qi, Perhaps he wil~l or would strike us two. Paset'-e- dal -ket'- ben - gi, Perhaps he will or would strike you two. Paset'-e-dal-1cet'-1cin gi, Perhaps he will. or would strike them two., DUAL. Paset'-e-dcd-ket'-te-gi, Perhaps he will or would strike us. Paset'-e-dad-lcet' -pe gi, Perhaps hie will or would strike you. Pa~set'-e-da 1lk e t' -fr. o - gq', Perhaps he will or would strike theiu, two. 3 Dat-ket'-Jcin -gi-e, e) lie will o r would s tr ik e them two. PLRUAL. 1.Dat-lcet'-le-gi- e, He. will or would strike us. 2 Dal-lcet'-pe-gi-e, He will or would, strike you. 3 Dai-let'-Jco-gi-e, He will or would strike them. SOr havye struck, or lie ctxi'kes ie. S197 ) PREL{IMINARY FUTURE. SINGULAR I SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 1 Dale n - gl i - e, He will first stritke me. 2 Dal le-m - gi- e, He will first strike thee. 3 Dal-le-gi-e. He will first strike him. DUAL. 1 Dal-le-lin-g i - e, He will first strike us two. 2 Dcal-le-ben-gi-e, He will first strike you two. 3 Dal-le--kin-gi- e, He will first strike them two. PLURAL. 1 Dal-le-le- gi -, He will first strike us. PaYset'-e-dald e-d-g i, Perhaps he will first strike me. Paset'-e-da-le-m- gi Perhaps he will first strike thee. Paset'-e-da 1- l e - q i, Perhaps he will first strike hilm. DUAL. Paset'-e-dal-le tin-g i, Perhaps he will first strike uis two. Paset'-e-dal-lec - b en, gi, Perhaps he will first strike you two. Paset'-e- d al-tc-kin-gi, Perhaps hlie will first strike them two. PLURAL. Pascet'-c-al-lce-lc - q i, Perhaps he will first strike us. Past-ce-dal-le-pe-q i, Perhaps hlie will first strike you. Paset'-e-dal-le-lco-g i, Perhaps he will first strike them. i 2 Dal-le-pe-g i -e, He will first strike you. 3 Dt-let-lco-g i - e, He will first strike themi. ( 198 ) PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal. le-,l-nahi-e, He must first strike me. 2 Dal-le-m-nahz - e, He must first strike thee. 3 Dal-le-n ach- -, He must first strike him. DUAL. P Dal-le-lid-nah'-e, Datl-le - He must first He mu strike us two. us. Dal-le-ben- nachi - Dal-le-i e, He must first He mu strike you two. you. Dat-le-kin-nah z - Dal-le-k e, He must first He mu strike them two. them. LURAL. le - n ahi -e, ist first strike e- nahe, - st first strike o -n aah - e, st first strike PRELIMINARY PERSUASIVE. 1 Dal-le-n- b He must strike me. 2 Dal-te-m-b He must strike thee! 3 Dal -le-b He must f strike him. X-e, Dal-te-lini-ba-e, Dal-le-te- ba-e, He first He must first must first strike us. strike us two, S- e, Dal-le-ben-b a - e, Dal-te-pe-ba-e, He first He must first must first strike strike you two. you. - e, DatL-le-kin-b a - e, Dal-le-lcko-ba-e, H e r rst He must first must first strike Sstrike them two. them. PRELIMINARY ADMIISSIVE. 1 Dal-le-1-en- a-e, He must first strike me. 2 Dal-le-m-en-a-e, He must first strike thee. 3 Dal-le-en - a - e, He must first strike him. I Dal-le-kidi-en-a- e, He must first strike us two. Dal-le-benq-en-a-e, He must first strike you two. Dal-le-kin-en-a-e, He must first strike them two. Dat-le-te-en-a-e, He must first strike us. Dal-le-p e - en - a - e, He must first strike you. Dal-le-k o - en - a- e, He must first strike them. ( 199 ) PRELIMINARY BENEDICTIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-le-n-ma-m! Mayest thou first strike me! 2 Dal-le-m-ma- e May he first strike thee! 3 Dal-le-ma-n May I first strike him! DUAL. PLURAL. Dal-le-l i d - m a - Dal-le-1 e - m a - pe! ben! May youtwo May you first strike first strike us two! us! Dal-le-ben-ma-ko! Dal-le-pe-ma - k in! May they first May they two first strike you two! strike you! Dtal-le-kin-ma-lid Dal-le - ko - m a-m m May we two first Mayest thou first strike them two! strike them! PRELIMINARY IMPERATIVE. 1 Da l- l i n - rne! Dal-le-l i n - m e! Dale-le-pe! Strike Strike thou first Strike thou first you first us! me. us two! 3 Dal-le-m! strike Dal le-kin-ben! Dal-le-ko-n thou first him! Strike you two Strike thou first first them two! them! BENEDICTIVE. 1 Dal-in,-m a - m! Maye st thou strike me! 2 Dal-me- m a - e! May he strike thee! 3 Dal- e-ma-! May I strike him! Dal-lin-ma ben! May you two strike us two! Dal-ben-ma-kin! May they two strike you two! Dal-kin-ma-lin! May we two strike them two! IMPERATIVE. Dal-le-ma-lko! May they strike us! Dal-pe-ma-le! May we strike you! Dal-lco-ma-pe, May you strike them! 1 Dal-in-me! Dal -li -ben! Dal-le-pe-! Strike thou me! Strike you two you us! us two! 3 D a - e - me! Dal-kin-ben! Dal-ko-pe! Strike thou him! Strike you two you them! them two! Strike Strike Note. The 2nd person in Preliminary Imperative is the same as the 2nd person Preliminary Benedictive, and the 2nd person Imperative is the same as 2nd person Benedictive, ( 200 ) ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. Dal-iti (kin or ko) -(hQr) who will strike me. GENERAL INCOMPLETE PRE Dat -et'"-me, Who strikes thee.,SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRE Pcdt-ed-e-1rlan, He, whom Athey are strikingr. RECENT PAST.,Dat-ket'-tin-i, Who struck us,two. ANTERIOR 'PAST. Dat-tet'-ben, Who -struck -YOU two. GENERAL INCOMPLETE PAST, Dalt-et'-kin-tah~/can., They two-, whom they used to -strike. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Dat-et'-te-kan-tah~kan, Who was strikin'g us. INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. Dalt-let'-pe-tahZ1can, Who was striking y611. INCHOATIVE FUTURE. Dctt-ko-tagit', They, whom they will be about to strike.. GERUNDS. Dat -ko- 'ea1r.. te, re, ICho1n, OW, by, in striking them. SENT. Dal-et'-ko-reaiS, te, we, Of3 by, in striking them. SENT. Dat -et'-lco-lci a- rea1,', te, re, Of, by, in strikingy them now, by, in having struck them, Dal-tet'-k-o-reaM!, te, re, Of, by, in having struck them. re, Of, by, in using to strike them then. Dat,et'-kor 64an-tah.Zkan-rea k, te, re, Of, by, in strik-ingl thbe m thenl. re, Of, by, in having struck them. Dat-o-tgit''re1~,te, re, Of, by, in beinga about to strike them, ( 201 ) ADJECTIVE PARTTCIPLES. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. Dal-ko-lagidoll-Jan, They, whom they are about to strike. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal-Jko-dagido1l-kan-tahVkan, Tlhey whom they were about to strike. OPTATIVE. Dal-ke-ko, They, whom they would strike, or have struck. CONDITIONAL. Dal-le-lro, They, whom they may have struck. GERUNDS. Dal-ko-lagidok'-kan-real1, t e, re, Of, by, in being about to strike them now. Dal-eo-lagicdold-Jckani-taht7ka nreakl, te re, Of, by, in being about to strike them then. Dal-ke-ko-real, te, re, Of, by, in wishing to strike them. Dcal-le-ko-reak', te, re, Of, by, in having struck them. Note-It will be observed, that the noun, which succeeds the participle is the Nominative, when the accusative suffix or infix is either 1st or 2nd person, whereas it is the Accusative, when the Suffix is 3rd person; as Dal-le-hkgr Dal-pe ho) the man, who will strike us, or you; but Dal-ko hkg is the men whom somebody has struck. ( 202 ) ADVERBIAL PA RTICIPLES. FUTURE. Dal-me-khan, Striking thee. GENERAL INCOMPLETE PRE- I Dal-ed-i-c-khan, Striking me. SENT. SPICIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. RECENT PAST. ANTERIOR PAST. GENERAL INCOMPLETE PAST. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. INDICISIVE PLUPERFECT. INCHOATIVE FUTURE. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. INCHOATIVE PAST. OPTATIVE. CONDITIONAL. PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULATIVE. PRELIMINNRY PERSUASIVE. PRELIMINARY ADMISSIVE. INFINITIVE, Dal-ed-e-lckan-hlkan, Striking him nOW. Dal-lret'-li-c-khan, Having struck us two. Dal-let'-ben-khan, Having struck you two. Dal-et'-kin-tah~kan-khan, Using to strike them two then. Dal-et'-le-kan-cahak a n - k h an, Striking us then. Dal-let- pe-tah~kan-khan, Having struck you. Dal-leko-lagit'-khan, Being about to strike them. Dal-ho-lagidoi-kan-kha n, Be - ing now about to strike them. Dat-ko-lagid-olo-kan-tah ' k an - khan, Being then about to strike them. Dal-ke-kco-leha n, Willing uto strike them. Dal-le-ko-lehan, Striking or having struck (i. e. in case of ) them. Dal-le-ko-nahi, Striking them first. Dal-le-ko-baA, Striking them first. Dal-le-ko-ena, Striking them first. Dal-ko, kin, pe &c. to strike them, them two, you &c. Note.-Any of the Nominative Suffixes may be affixed to the Adjective Participles in the Accusative case, so that both Accusative and Nominative may be represented in the same participles; as Dal-ked-e-A, I, who struck him; Dal-ket'-ko-pe, you, who struck them; Dal-kecl-ia-kin, they two, who struck me; Dal-ket'-pe-le, we who struck you; Dal-ket'- le-pe, you, who struck us. Any of the Accusative Suffixes can of course be infixed in the Gerunds; as Dal-ko-re, Dal-pe-r'e, Dal-lii-re, &c. ( 203 ) REFLEXIVE (AND PASSIVE.) C. WITH T INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-ol - a -, I shall strike myself. 2 Dal - o 9 -a- n, Thou wilt strike thyself. 3 Dal-olk-a-e, He will strike himself. DUAL. 1 Dal-ol - a-li, We two will strike ourselves. 2 Dal-o k - a-b e n, You two will strike yourselves. 3 Dal-ol-a - k i n, They two will strike themselves. PLURAL. 1 Dal-olk-a-le, We shall strike ourselves. 2 Dal- o - a - p e, You will strike yourselves. 3 Dal-o l7-a- ko, They will strike themselves. Neuter. Dal - ok-a, It will be struck. 'HE NOMINATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." FUTURE TENSE SINGULAR. Dal-ol-lkhan - i, If I shall strike myself. Dal-ok-khan-e nm, If thou wilt strike thyself. Dal-ol-kchan-e, If he will strike himself. DUAL. Dal-olk-khan-li, If we two shall strike ourselves. Dal-olS- khan-ben, If you two will strikeyourselves. Dal-old-khan-kin, If they two will strike themselves. PLURAL. Dal-ol-kha n -1 e, If we shall strike ourselves. Dal-olk-khan - p e, If you will strike yourselves. Dal-ok-khan- k o, If they will strike themselves. Dal-old--han, If it will be struck. SUBJUNCTIVE with "Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-i 4- - d a I o 1, Perhaps I shall strike myself. Paset'-em - d a - o k, Perhaps thou wilt strike thyself. Paset'-e-dal-olS, Perhaps he will strike himself. DUAL. Paset'-lin - d a - o k', Perhaps we two shall strike ourselves Paset'-ben- d a I - o 1, Perhaps you two will strike yourselves Paset'-kin- d a 1 - o P Perhaps they two will strike themselves. PLURAL. Paset'-ie-dcd-olS, Perhaps we shall strike ourselves. Past'-pe-dal-ol, Perhaps you will strike yourselves. Paset'-ko-dal-ol1, Perhaps they will strike themselves. Paset'-dal-o -, P e r - haps it will be struck, ( 204 ) SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. 1 2 2 3 INDICATIVI?. SINGULAR. I am strikin g myself. Dal-ok.'-1ca n - a - in, Thiou art striking, thyself. He is striking himself. DAIJL. Dcd-o1'-1ct an - a - li7', We two are striking ourselveCs, Dat -ok'-keanr - a - bent, You two are striking yourselves. Dal-o1.'-Iraq, - a Adifl, They two are striking0 thiemselves. PLURAL. Dal-olrc-kan-a-le, We are striking0 SUBJUNCTIVE with SUBJUNCTIVE,ý With "Khan." SINGULAR SINGULAR. Dal-o1'-kcan-1chart- Paset'-in"- d a I - o kio4, If I -am strik- Ican, Perhaps I am' ing, myself. striking myself. Dal-o1k-1can-1chan- Past'- em-dal-olklcan, em, If thou art Perhaps thou art striking thyself. striking thyself. Dat -o1,-Xa-1,a-Ahan- Past'- e-dal -o1- kc a n) e. If he is strik- Perhaps he is striking, himself. ing himself. DA1JL. DUAL. Dal-ok'-/ran-i-hanb- Paset'-liy'-cd a 1 - o 1cr - lini) If we two kan, Perhaps wye are strikingr our- two are striking ourselves. selves. Dal-ok1~ lean-/chart- Paset'-bert-c a I - o 7'bern, If yon two hart, Perhaps you are striking your- two are strikingy yourselves, selves. Dal-ok'-hart-hhart- Paset'-k-irt-ca I - o M.' - loin), If they two hrart, Perhaps they are strikingT two are striking tthemselves, themselves. PLURAL. PLURAL. Dcil-o1'-kart-hhart- Paset'-le-d at- ol-hcant, le, If we are strik- Perhaps we are striking0 ourselves, lug ourselves. Dal-oM-lcar-1-han - IPaset'-pe-dcd-ol'-hcan, pe, ff yon are strik-1 Perhaps you are. ing, youirselves... striking your-selves, Dal-olc'-lan-ldtar- Paset'-1,o-dat-ok'-lean, 1e0) If they are strik-J Perhaps they are ing themselves. strikingy themselves..Dat -oli-Je1ran-7;haqrt, _Pasel cia! -oJ,-.han. Perstruck.,,.pq b c 1 ourselves. 2 Dal-ok,'-hart - a - poe, You are striking yourselves. 3 Dal-o'l~ean-ahco, They are stri king themiselyes. Neuter DatI- oWk Jean-a, It is b~ejflo st'rick, INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-en-a-, I struck myself. * 2 Dal -e n-a-m, Thou struckest thyself. 3 Dal-en-a-e, He struck himself. DAUL. 1 Dal-en-a - li n, We two struck ourselves. 2 Dld-en-a- b e n, You two struck yourselves. 3 Dal-en-a- k i n, They two struck themselves. PLURAL. 1 Dal-en - a - le, We struck ourselves. 2 Dal-e n - a - p e, You struck yourselves. 3 Dal-en-a- ko, They struck themselves. Neuter. Dal- en a, It was struck. ( 205 ) RECENT PAST. SUBJUNCTIVE with SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." " Paset'." SINGULAR. SINGULAR. Dal-en-khan- i, Paset'-i~i - d a - en, If I struck my- Perhaps I struck self. myself. Dal-en-khan-e in, Paset'-em- d a 1 - e n If thou struck- Perhapsthoustruckest thyself, est thyself. Dal-en-kh a n - e, Paset-e-dal-en, PerIf he struck him- haps he struck himself. self. DUAL. DUAL. Dal-en-lkhan-li n, Paset'-lin- d a - e n, If we two struck Perhaps we two ourselves, struck ourselves. Dal-en-kchan-ben, Paset'-ben-d a - e n, If you two struck Perhaps you two yourselves, struck yourselves. Dal-en-lehan-kin, Paset'-kin-da It - e n, If they two struck Perhaps they two themselves, struck themselves. PLURAL. PLURAL, Dal-en-khan- 1 e, Paset'-le-dal-en, PerIf we struck our- haps we struck ourselves. selves. Dal-en-lhan- p e, Paset'-pe - d a - e n, If you struck Perhaps you struck yourselves, yourselves. Dal-en-khan - k o, Paset'-ko- d a 1 - e n, If they struck Perhaps they struck themselves, themselves. Dal-en-khan, If Paset'-dal-en, Perit was struck, haps it was struck. * Or have struck myself. ( 206 ) INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. I Dal-len-a-n, I struck myself. * 2 Dal-le n - a - m, Thou struckst thyself. 3 Dal-len-a-e, He struck himself. DAUL. 1 Dal-len-a- 1 i 2,) We two struck ourselves. 2 Dal-len-a-b e n, You two struck yourselves. 3 Dal-len-a-k i n, They two struck themselves. PLURAL. 1 Dal-e n-a -e, We struck ourselves. 2 Dal-len - a - pe, You struck yourselves. 3 Dal-len - a - k o, They struck themselves. Neuter. Dal-lena, It was, or had been struck. * Or had struck mys ANTERIOR PAST. SUBJUNCTIVE with SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan" " Paset'. " SINGULAR, SINGULAR. Dal-len-khan-i n, Paset'-i'- d a - 1 e n, If I struck my- Perhaps I struck self. myself. Dal-len-khan-em, Paset'-em-da l- e n, If thou struckst Perhaps thou thyself. struckst thyself. Dal-le-kha n - e, Paset'- e-d al-le n, If he struck Perhaps he struck, himself, himself. DAUL. DAUL. Dal len-khan-lini, Paset'-lid-da - len, If we two struck Perhaps we two ourselves, struck ourselves. Dal-len - han - Paset'-ben-dal -1 e n, ben, If you two Perhaps you two struck yourselves, struck yourselves. Dal-len-lchan-kin,- Paset'-kin-dal - le n, If they two struck Perhaps they two themselves, struck themselves. PLURAL. PLURAL. Dal-len-khan- 1 e, Paset'-le- d a I - e n, If we struck our- Perhaps we struck selves, ourselves. Dal-len-khan-pe, Paset'-pe- d a 1 - 1 e If you struck Perhaps you struck yourselves, yourselves. Dal-len-khan-ko, Paset'-ko-d a 1 - Ie n, If they struck Perhaps they struck themselves, themselves. Dal-len-khan, If Paset'-dal-len, Perit was struck. haps it was struck. elf. -" ( 20 7 ) SPECIAL INCOMIPLETE PAST. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1. Dat -o1-1can- t a - hZ-7an-a-k-' I was striking myself. 2DaZ-o1k-kan-t a - hekan-ct- m Thou wast stniking thyself..3 Dul~-ot3-kan-t a - It(;- ~ LI tvbt-U a was striking himself. PAUL. I Dal-ok'-kcan-t a - We two were striking ourselves. 2 Dal-olS-kan- t ah-e/ran. a -b en, You two were striking yourselves. 3 Dal-oli-lran-t a - h'1can -a -k-im,) They two were strikingy themnselves, SUBJUNCTIVE -with "Khan" SINGULAR. Dal-oJS,-k~an-tah~e' - kran-khan-in', If I was striking myself. DaZ-o1S'-kan-tahz - kan-Jchan-e-rn, if thou 'vast striking thyself. Dat-o1S-Jan-tah'e - kan-lchan-e, if he 'Was striking himself. PAUL. DaZ-oko'-kan-tah-e - kan-khan-lini, I f we two were striking ourselves. Dal- o1S-kan-tah~ kcan-khan- ben, If you two were striking yourselves. Dat-olJ-kan-[ah Z - k~an-khan-ko in, If they two were striking themselves. SUBJUNCTIVE with "Pctset'. " SINGULAR, Paset'-in'-dal-ok-krantah~kan, Perhaps I was striking myself. Paset'-ern- d at1 - o 15 -kan-tah~kctn, Per-,haps thou waststriking thyself. Paset'-e-dal-olS-lo n tah~ka n, Perhaps he was striking himself. DUAL. Paset'-lin'dal-o15-kan tah~ka n, Perhaps we two were striking ourselves, Paset'-ben- d a I- o1Lr. 1cai--tah~kan, Perhaps you two were 'striking yourselves. Paset'-kcin- cia I-0 o I-. kan-tah~lkan, Perhaps they two were, striking themselves. ( 208 ) PLURAL. I Dal-oAk-lean-t a - h~kcan-a-le, We were striking ourselves. 2 Dal-ok'-Man-t a - hZ-1cam- a - pe, You were strik PLURAL. Dat -ok'-lcan-tah Z - [can,-Ic han-le, If we. were striking' o-urselves. Dal-o4-3-lcan-tahZ - kan-ichan-pe, If you were striking PLURAL. Paset'-le-dal-okc'-lcan - tah~1ca n, Perhaps. we were strikingourselves. PaeQet'-pe-dal- o1lc'Ia-ntahZlcan, Perhaps. you were strikingo ngyourselves. yourselves, yourselves.:3 Dal-oki-lcan-t a - D-at-ok1'-k-ar-tah' -Pat'odaoJ-an hZlcan-a-ko, They kart-lhan-ko,. If tah~ka n,, Perhaps were striking they were strik- th~ey were striking. themselves. ingr the mselves.. themselves. NIeuter. Dal - o M~- Dat-o1k3-Jam-tahZ - Paset'-dal'-ol,'-Ican-taýkan-tah~Ja n - a, ican-ichan, If it W'1an, Perhaps it It was being struck. was being struck.. was being struck. Note.--This tense is used both, for special and general incomplete Past. ( 209 ) INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal--len-t ah ',kan-a-A", I had struck myself. 2 Dal-len- t ah -6 kan-cL-m, Thou hadst struck thyself. 3 Da1-ten- t ah -8 kan-a-e, He had struck himself. DUAL. 1 Dat-ten-taheJean, a-litzi, We two had struck ourselves. Dat-len-tahek-an-aben,% You two had struck yourselves. 3 Da14en- t ah Zkam-a-kin, They two had struck themselves. PLURAL. 1 Dal-ten-tah'ekana-le, 'We had struck ourselves. SUBJUNCTIVE with "1Khan," SINGULAR. Dctt-len-tah-eka m - kohan-ii, If I had struck -myself. Dcd-len-tah~ia n - kha n-em, If thou hadst struck thyself. Dal-en-tah~Jc a n - lohan-e, If he had struck himself. DUAL. Dat -len-tah~1ran - khctn-Zin', If we two had struck ourselves. Dat -1en-tah~kcn - khan- ben, If you two had struck yourselves. Dat-len-tah-ela nkhan-kin, If they two had struck themselves. PLURAL. Dat -ten-tah-ek~a n - Ichan-te, If we had struck ourselves. SUBJUNCTIVE with "1 Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-it,"-dat-ten-ta - h~kan, Perhaps II had struck myself. Paset'-elm-dat-en-ta - h Z1kan," Perhaps thou hadst struck thyself. Paset'-e-dal-ten-ta h '8 kan, Perhaps he had struck himself. DUAL. Paset'-tih~-dat-Zen.-ta - h~1can, Perhaps we to had struck our.; selves. Paset'6ben-clat-en-taM~1an, Perhaps you two had struck yourselves. Paset'-kin-dat -1en-tah Z1k a n, Perhaps they two had struck themselves. PLURAL. Paset'-le-dat -len- t a - h~-1Jan, Perhaps we had struck ourselves, N ( 210 ) _ Dal-ten-tah-1can Dat19-.ien-t ahV.a n - a-pe, You had khan-pe, If you struck your- had struck your-:selves, selves. 3 Dalen-tahtlcan I Dal-lenr-tcfham -.al-Ko,, They had kan-Jco, If they struck them- had struck themselves. -selves. Neuter. Dal-len-taý- Dal-len-tche~kan - hWkan-a, It had khan, If it had been struck. been.struck. Paset'-pe-dal-ten-t a hUkan, Perhaps you had struck yourselves. Pase'-Jko-dat-ten-t a h'1cka n, Perhaps they had struck themselves. Paset'-dal-ten-ta h t - k an, Perhaps it had been struck, ( 211 ) INCHOATIVE FUTURE. INDICATIVEO SINGULAR. I Dal-ok'-lagit'-in', I shall be about to strike myself. 2 Dal- o1'-lagit'-ern., Thou wilt be about to strike thyself. '3 Dal-o1M-lctgit' -e He will be about SUBJUNCTIVE with "4K/han." SINGULAR. Dail-o k' -1I a g i t' - khan-iýi, if I shall be about to strike myself. Dat-ole' - I a g i t' - ichan-em, If thou wilt be about to strike thyself. Dal-o Ml. - a g it e khan -e, Ifhbe 'to strike hinisuei. 'will be aobout to strike himself. DUAL. I DUAL. I Dal-olS-lagit'-tiZ", Dai-olk - I a g it' - We two shall be khan-lin", If we about to strike twoshalibeabout ourselves. to strike ourselves. 2 Dal-olc-l aqgit' - Dal-o7c'- Ia git'/eben, You two khan-ben, If you will be about to Itwo will be about.Strike yourselves, to strike yourselves. 3 Dal-oglJ-a g i1 t' - Dal-o~l'-agit'-lchan kin, They two -klein, If they will be about to two will be about strike themselves, to strike them. SUBJUNCTIVE. with "ae'" SINGULAMh Paset'-iti-dal-olA"-. a git', Perhaps I shall be about to strike myself. Paset' ein-claZ-olc-4 a gil', Perhaps th~ou wilt be about to strike -thyself. Perhaps he will be about to strike himself. DUAL. Paset'-lin"-dala-olS-l a - git 2, Perhaps we two shall be about to strike ourselves. Paset'- ben -da-oS- la gil'2, Perhaps you two will be about to strike yourselves.Paset'-kin-dal-ok'-la - git', Perhaps they two will be about to strike themselves. ( 21.2 ) PLURAL.' We shailbe about to strike oiur, selves'. Youwillbe about to strike your!!.selves. PLURAL. DaZ-ok'-tagit'-khanle, If we sh 'all be about to strike,ourselves. Dal ok'-tcgit'ckhan. -pe., If you will be about to strike yourselves. PLURAL. Perhaps we shall be about to strike owrselves,Paset'-pe-dat-pg- 1 a gWr, )Perhaps you Will be about to str''ike yourselves. Pas~et'-kordat-o1k - 1,a gil', Perhaps thiey will be about to,strike themselves. Pas,3et'cat-o13-la g it'e Perhaps it -will be Iabout to'be stru4*, ~1N Dat -ok~-lagit'-ko, Dat-ok'-lagit'-khan They will be k', If th~ey will about to strilse be about to strike themselves, themsel-ves. Feuter..Dat-ok'-Ia- Dat -o1k-tagit'-kha!gil', It will be n,) If it will be Whot tobestme~k., about to be struck, (213) INýCHOATIVE PRESENT. 11NDICAT'IVE. SINGULAR. 1 Da1-ok-tagid-ok-. kan-a-A, I am about to strike! myself. 2 Dat-ok'-lagid-Okckan-a-m, Thou art about to strike thyself. 3 Dal-_ok'_1agid-_o1_,kan.-a..e, He is about to strike himself. DYUALI Dal-ok~-tcgid-oAkkam-ti A, We twoare about to strike ourselves. 2 Dat-o!-Iagid-oTl.-- kan-a-beu, You two are about to strike- yourselIv-es-. a9 Pat-oklagid4-ok. kan-a-tkin, They two are about to strike the'mzelves, SUBJUN'CTIV IE with "Khan.)) SINGUL.AR. Dab-ok'4agid-o kM - kanm-khan-iri, If I am about to strike mysel f. Dat-;oM13-gil-;o 1Mkan-1char&-cm, If thou art about to strike thyself. Dat.oIJ-iagicl- 6 M' kan-khan-;e, If he is about to' strike himself. kan-khan- I i A~ If we: two- areabo ut to strike ourselves. kar&4chan-b a n, If you two; are: about to- strike yourselves. Dal-oýc-tagi'd- ok. kcan..Jchan-Ic ib n, IIf they two' are about to strikethemselve,.SU-BJUNCTIVE with I"IPaset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-int'-dal-okc - 1 a gid-olc'-kan, Perhaps I am, about to strike myself. Paset'-em-dat-ok'-1 a gid-alc-kar&, Perhaps thou art about to! strike thyself. Pase~t'-e-dal-oAk-tagi"cZok'-lan, Perhaps he is, about to strike himself. DUAL. 'Paset'-lini-dal-oA-4 a gicl-ol-lc a n, Per.haps. we two are about to strike ourselves. Paset'-ben-dal-ok-l a gid-olS-kam, Perhapsyou two; are about to strike yo-urselves. raset'-.cin-ddl-olz-la gid-okc'-Ic a n, Perhaps they two are about to strike themselves, ( 214 ) PLURAL. PLURAL. PLURAL. A Dal-o1-lagid-o- I Dal-o1-lagid- oE - Paset'-le-dal-o1E -la - kcan-a- 1 e, We kan-khan-le, If gid-ok'-kan, Perhaps are about to strike we are about to we are about to strike ourselves. strike ourselves. ourselves. 2 Dal-oE-lagid-ol- Dal-ol-lagid- o 1.- Paset'-pe dal-olS - lakan-a-pe, You kan-khan-pe, If gid-ok'-kcan, Perhaps areabouttostrike you are about to you are about to yourselves. strike yourselves. strike yourselves. 3 Dal-ol-lagid-ol- Dal-ok'-lagid- o M- Paset'-ko-dal-o- 1a - kan-a-ko, They kan-khan-ko, If gid-ol-kan, Perhaps are about to strike they are about to they are about to themrnselves. strike them - strike themselves. selves. Neuter. Dal-ok-la- Dal-olS-lagid-o IE - Paset'-dal-ol-lag i d - gid-olS-kan-a, It k -khan, if it o'-k an, Perhaps is about to be is about to be it is about to be struck. struck. struck. ( 215 ) INCHOATIVE PAST. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. I Dal-okldagid-ok' kan-tah-ekan-a-t,, I was about to strike myself. 2 Dal..oklc-agid-ok' kai--tah-1cctn -.a - ma, Thou wast about to. strike thyself. 3 Dctl-ok-lagici-o1k1ran~ah~Tan-a-e7, He was about to strike himself. SDUAL. I Dai-oTk-lagid-o1k kan-tah'ew1can- a lig~, We two were about to strike ourselves. 2 Dal-ol-1agidojSkan-tah-elan- a - ben, You two were abouit to strike yourselves. 3 DaZ-o1S'-tagid-oXkkam-tah~han- a - kin, They two were about to strike them - selves. SUBJUNCTiVE with " Khan." SINGULAR. kan-ta h ýk a nkhan-iti, If I was about to; strike Myself. kan-tah Z le a n khan-em, Ifthou, wast ab~out to, strike thyself. Dal-okl~agicl-o M1 kcan-ta hZ e, a n - lchan-e, If he6 was about to strike himiself. DUAL. Dal-olc-lagid-o IFka~n-ta h Z k aw n lohan-l~iti, If we two were about to strike ourselves. Dal-a1c'-lagid- o 9 -lean-ta h -e k a n - ic/an-ben, Ifyou two were about to strike yourselves. Dat -oM-lagidc o 17 = icon-ta h -1cl an - hican -kicin, if they two were about to strike themselves. SUBJUNCTIVE With Paset'. SINGULAR. Pasdt'_int,-da1_-OJ -1 Va gid -o1c'- can 44tleahV n, Perhaps I was abput to strike My. self. Pa8et"-em-dal-ok-ct - gict-oic'-kan-tahVelan Perhaps thou w''st about to strike thy-. self. Pa8et'-e-dcd-okc-iagi'd. o 1r,-k -an -t 'a h 'eý Ic a n., Perhaps he was' about to strike' hifmself. Paset'-lin`-dal-okM-1 a gid-:o1,c'-1an-tahZdian, Perhaps we t wo were about to strike ourselves. Pasget`-ben-cdal-olJ -Za,. Perbaps you two were about to strike y ourselves. Paset'-1cin-dal-o~c'-la -,q id- oJk- I.an - tahZIca n, Perphaps they two were about to strike themselves. ( 216 ) PLURAL. PLURAL. 1 Dal-ok'-lagid-oA- Dal-o1k-lagid- o c' - k -tahn-hekan-a - kan-tah -6 k a n - le, We were khan-le, If we about to strike were about to ourselves, strike ourselves. 2 Dat-o!k-lagid-og- Dat-ok'-ltagid-o Z9 - Acan-tah'kcan- a - ltn-tah Z' k a n - pe, You were Ichan-pe, If you about to strike were about to yourselves, strike yourselves. 3 Dal-o1S-lagid-o1. Dat-o1'-lagid-o I - kan-tahckan- a - kan-tah k' I a n - ko, They were Ichan-ico, If they about to strike were about to themselves, strike themselves. Neuter. Dal-ol'-ta- Dat-olc-tagqid-o Jogidok-kan-tahk -I kan-tah - Ic a n - kan-a, It was khan, If it was about tobe struck. about to be struck, PLURAL. Paset-le-dat-o If - M a gid-ok-kcan-tah'kacnq, Perhaps we were about to strike our. selves. Paset'epe-dat-o M_- I a - gidI-olc'-can-tah'ekan. Perhaps you were about to strike yourn selves. Pa9set'-Jo-dalZ:-o7d-t a - gi14o-'-kanr-tah~ can, Perhaps they were about to strike themselves..Paset1-dal-ok'-lag i d - o7l-Ican-t a h -6- ac n, Perhaps it was about to be struck. ( 217 ) OPTATIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE with SKhan." SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-kok -a -, I Dal-kok--khan-id, will or w o u d If I would strike strike myself. myself. 2 Dal-kooE- a- m, Dal-kok-khan-em, Thou wi lt or If thou would'st would'st stri k e strike thyself. thyself. 3 Dal-kok-a-e, He Dal-lkol-khan -e, will or woul d If he would strike himself. strike himself. DUAL. DUAL. 1 Dal-kokl-a- 1 i d, Dal-kokl-khan-lih, We two * would If we two would strike ourselves, strike ourselves. 2 Dal-kok-a-b e n, Dat-ko - l h a n - You two would ben, If you two strike your- would strike selves.* yourselves. 3 Dal-kolE-a-k i n, Dal-lcol - k han - They two* would kin, If they two strike them- would strike selves, themselves. PLURAL. PLURAL. 1 Dal-kok'-a-le, Dal-kolk k hanWe* would strike Ie, If we would ourselves, strike ourselves. 2 Dal-kogl-a- p e, Dal-kok-khan-pe, You *wouldI If you would strike yourselves. strike yourselves. 3 Dal-kolJ- a - k o, Dal-kolr-khan-ko, They * w o uld If they would strike themselves, strike themselves. Neuter. Dal-kolca, Dal-kok-khan, If it It would be struck.* would be struck. * Or will SUBJUNCTIVE with " Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-in-da I - lk o, Perhaps I would strike myself. Paset'-em-dal - k o, Perhaps thou would'st strike thyself. Paset'-e- d a 1 - k o, Perhaps he would strike himself. DUAL. Paset'-lid-dal - k o, Perhaps we two would strike ourselves. Paset'-ben-dal- k o, Perhaps yo u t w o would strike yo u r - selves. Paset'-kin-dal- k o, Perhaps the y t w o will strike t h e m - selves. PLURAL. Paset'-le-d a I - k o, Perhaps we will strike ourselves. Paset'-pe-da I - k o, Perhaps you will strike yourselves. Paset'-ko-da 1 - k o I, Perhaps they will strike themselves. Paset'-datl-ko, Perit would be struck, ( 218 ) CONDITIONAL. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. S(Oho) Dal-lena-n, Iwould will or should (not) strike myself. 2 (Oho) Dal-lena-m, Thou would'st (not) strike thyself. 3 (Oho) Dal-len-ae, He would (not) strike himself. DUAL. 1 (Oho) Dal-len - a-lin, We tw o would (not) strike ourselves. 2 (Oho) Dal--lena-ben, You two would (not) strike yourselves. 3 (Qho) Dal-te na-kin, They two would (not) strike themselves. PLURAL. 1 (Oho) Dal-len-ale, We would not strike ourselves. 2 (Qho) Dal-len-ape, You would not strike yourselves. 3 (Oho) Dal-lena-leo, They would not strike them.selves. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." SINGULAR.. Dal-len-khan-i n., If Iwould strike or have struck myself. Dal-len-k/han-em, If thou wouldst strike thyself. Dal-len-kha n - e, If he would strike himself. DUAL. Dal-len-klhan-li, If we two would strike ourselves. Dal-len-khan-ben, If you two would strike yourselves. Dal-len - k han - kin, If they two would strike themselves. PLURAL. Dal-len-lchan - e If we would strike ourselves. Del-len-lchan-p e, If you would strike yourselves. Dac-len-khan-k o, If they would strike them SUBJUNCTIVE with Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-i'- d a I I e n, Perhaps I would strike myself. Paset'-em-dal - e n, Perhaps thou wouldst strike thyself. Paset'-e-dal-len, Perhaps he would strike himself. DUAL. Paseft-lin-da 1 - e n, Perhaps we two would strike ourselves. Paset`-ben-dal - I e n, Perhaps you two would strike yourselves. Paset'-kin-dcda - e n, Perhaps they two would strike themselves. PLURAL. Paset'-le- d a 1 le 1, Perhaps we would strike ourselves. Paset'-pe-d a I -I e n, Perhaps you would strike yourselves. Paset'-ko- d a - e n, Perhaps they would strike themselves. Paset'-dal-len, Perhaps it would be struck, selves. Neuter. (Qho)Dal- Dal-len-khan, len-a, It would it would not be struck, struck. If be ( 219 ) CONTINGENT. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-en- g i - n, I Paset'-in-dal-en- g i, strike,* will or Perhaps I might would strike, myself. strike myself. 2 Dal-en - gi - m, Paset'-em-dal-en-q i, Thou strikest or Perhaps thou mightwilt strike thyself, est strike thyself. 3 Dal-en-gi-e, He Paset-e-dal-e n - g i, strikes, or will Perhaps he might strike himself, strike himself. DUAL. DUAL. D L.DUAL. 1 Dal-en-gi- L i, Paset'-li -dal-en-g i, We two strike, or Perhaps we t wo will strike our- might strike ourselves. selves. 2 Dal-en-gi-b e n, Paset'-ben-dal-en-gi, You two strike, Perhaps you two or will strike might strike youryourselves. selves. 3 Dal-en-gi- c i n, Paset'-kin-dal-en-g i, They two strike Perhaps they two or will strike might strike themthemselves. selves. PLURAL. PLURAL. PLURAL. SDal-en- g i - I e, Paset'-le-dal-en - g i, We strike or will Perhaps we might strike ourselves. strike ourselves. 2 Dal-en-g i -p e, Paset'-pe-dal-en- g i, You strike, or will Perhaps you might strike yourselves, strike yourselves. 3 Dal-e n-g i - k o, Paset'-ko-dal-en- g i, They strike or will Perhaps they might strike themselves. strike themselves. Neuter. Dal-en-gi, Paset'-dal-en-gi, PerIt will be struck. haps it might be struck. * The Contingent must sometimes be rendered into English by the Future, at other times by the Present, and very frequently by the Subjunctive Past. ( 220 ) PR SIMGULAR. I Dal-len-gi-4, I will first strike myself. 2 Did-ien- g-i-m, Thou wilt first strike thyself. 3 Dal-le - gi-e, He will first strike himself. DUAL. 1 Dal-len-gi- ii n, We two will first strike ourselves. 2 Dal-len-gi-be n, You two will first strike yourselves. 3 Dal-len-gi-ki n, They two will first strike them.selves. PLURAL. 1 Dal-ten-g i - 1 e, We will first strike ourselves. 2 DU-1en-gi - p e, You will first strike yourselves; 3 Dtl-len-gi - k o, They will first strike thermselves. Neuter. Dal- 1 e n - gi, It will first be struck. ELIMINARY SINGULAR. IbUALO ALURAL FUTURE. SINGiUJLAR. Paset'-i-dal-len- gi, Perhaps I first will strike myself. Paset'-em-cdal-len-gi, Pbrhaps thou first wilt strike thyself. Paset'-e-dal-len - g i, Perhaps he first will strike himself. DUAL. Pasee-lid -ddl-len-gi, Perhaps we two will first strike ourselves. Paset-ben-dal-ler-gi, Perhaps you two will first strike yourselves. Paeset'-kin-dale-ne - gi, Perhaps they two will first strike themselves. PLURAL. Paset'-Ie-dal-len-g i, Perhaps we will first strike ourselves. Pas(et-pe-da-len-g i, Perhaps you will first strike yourselves. Paset'-ko-dda-len-g i, Perhaps they will first strike t h e mselves. Paset-dat - 1en - g iPerhaps it will first be struck. ( 221 ) PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-len-nahs- n, I must first strike myself. 2 Dal-len-nahm -m, Thou must first strike thyself. 2 Dal-len-nahM- e, He must first strike himself. DAUL. Dal-len-nakh-lid, We two must first strike ourselves. Dal-I e n - n a h ben, You two must first strike yourselves. Dal4e n -n ah. kin, They two must first strike themselves. PLURAL. Dal-len-nahi-le, We must first strike ourselves. Dal-len-nahz-pe, You must first strike yourselves. Dal-len - n a h - k o, They must first strike themselves. Neuter. Dal- lee n - nah?. It must first be struck. PRELIMINARY PERSUASIVE. 1 Dal-len-ba-4, I must first strike myself. 2 Dal-len-b a - m, Thou mnust first strike thyself. 3 Dal-ew-ba-e, He must first strike himself. Neuter. Dal- len - *ban, It must first be struck. Dal-len- b a - i We two must first strike ourselves. Dal-len-ba- ben, You two must first strike yourselves. Dal-lea-ba- k i n, They two must first strike themselves. Dal-len-ba- e, W e must first strike ourselves. Dal-len-ba-pe, You must first strike yourselves. Da l-le n-ba-ko, They must first strike themselves. ( 222 ) PRELIMINARY ADMISSIVE. 1 Dal-len-en-a- c n I must first strike myself. 2 Dal-len-en-a-m, Thou must first strike thyself. 3 Dal-len-en-a- e, He must first strike himself. Neuter. Dal-I en - en-a, It must first be struck. Dal-len-en-a-lid, I We two must, first strike ourselves. Dal-len-en-a-ben, You two must first strike yourselves. Dal-len-en-a-kin, They two must first strike themselves. Dal-len-en-a-le, We must first strike ourselves. Dal-len-en-a-pe, You must first strike yourselves. Dal-le n - en - a - ko, They must first strike themselves. Remark. Regarding the difference between these three tenses or moods, vide remark on the same in the active nominative case. ( 223 ) PRELIMINARY BENEDICTIVE. SINGULAR. I Dal-len-m a - i, May I first strike myself! 2 Dal-len-ma-m! Mayest thou first strike thyself! -3 Dal-len-ma - e! May he first strike himself! Neuter. Dal-lenma! May it first be struck! DUAL. PLURAL. Dal-len-ma-lin! Dal-len-ma-le! May May we two we first strike ourfirst strike our- selves! selves. Dal-len-ma-ben! Dal-len-ma-pe! May May you two you first strike yourfirst strike your- selves! selves. Dal-len-ma-kin! Dal-len-ma-ko! May May they two they first strike themfirst strike them- selves! selves. PRELIMINARY IMPERATIVE. 2 Dal-t e - me! Dal - le - be n Dal-len-pe! Strike Strike thou first Strike you two first yourselves! thyself! first yourselves! BENEDICTIVE. 1 Dal-ok-m *a - n! Dal-ol-ma- 1 i! Dal-olk-ma-le! May May I strike my- May we two we strike ourselves! self! strike ourselves! 2 Dal-ok-ma - m! Dal-ok-ma-b en! Dal olk-ma-pe May Mayest thou May you two you strike yourstrike thyself! strike yourselves! selves! 3 Dal-ol- m a - e! Dal-ol-ma-k in! Dal-ok-ma-ko! May May he strike May they two they strike themhimself! strike themselves! selves! IMPARATIVE. 2 Dal-ok-me! Dal-ok-ben / Dal-olz-pe! Strike Strike thou thy- Strike you two you yourself! self! yourselves! ( 224 ) ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. Dal-ok7 (kin, * ben pe,) etc. Who will strike himself. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRE Dal-ok-lcan, Who is striking himself. RECENT PAST. Dal-en, Who struck himself. ANTERIOR PAST. Dal-ten, Who struck himself. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Dal-or'-kan-tah~k a n, Who was striking himself. INDICISIVE PLUPERFECT. Dal-len-tahlca n, Who had struck himself. INCHOATIVE FUTURE. Dal-ok~-lagit', Who will be about to strike himself. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. Dal-oK--lagidoM-kan, Who is about to strike himself. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal-ok-lagidok-k7an-taheka n, Who was about to strike himself. OPTATIVE. Dal-kok, Who will or would strike himself. CONDITIONAL. Dal-len, Who may have struck himself. GERUNDS. Dal-o'-reak, te, re, Of, by, in striking oneself. SENT. Dal-ok-l-an-realc, te, re, Of, by, in striking oneself now. Dal-en-reald, te, re, Of, by, in having struck oneself. Dal-len-realc, te, re, Of, by, in having struck oneself. Dal-ol--kan-tah kan-reak',te,re. Of, by,in striking oneself then. Dal-len-tahklcan-reak', te,re, Of, by, in, having struck oneself. Dal-o1c-lagit'-reak',te,re, Of, by, in being about~to strike oneself. Dal-oKl-lagidok-kan reak, te, re, Of, by, in being about to strike oneself now. Dal-ok'-lagido k-kan-tahnkan - real, te, re, Of, by, in being about to strike oneself then. Dal-kok-reak, te, re, Of, by, in wishing to strike oneself. Dal-len-rea', te, re, Of, by, in striking or having struckoneself. * Any of the Nominative Suffixes may be affixed to show who will strike him or themselves. Note.-The neuter Participles and Gerunds are like those belonging to the common gender, only with a passive meaning; as Dal-ok' Janhe, the Janlhe which will be struck (Der-.fschlagende Janhe). ( 225 ) 'AtWERBIAL, FUTURE. Dai-oIS.,-frhcn,, SPECIAL INCOMPLET-E RECENT PAST. Dctl-en-A-hai,b ANTERIOR PAST. Dat-len-ichan, SPECIAL INCOMPLET i, Dald-ok-Jcctn-tahehan-lkhml INDICISIVE PLUPE'RFE4, INCHIOATIVE, FUTURE. INCHOATIVE PR-ESENT. Dal-o1k-logido1k-kai--khan INCIhOATIVE PAST. DcZd'-oIJlcido1j-Jocrr-tcdiV ichan, OPTATIVE. Dal-1co1J'-Ahctn, CONDITIONAL. Dal-ten-ichan-, PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULA Dal-len-naihl', PRELIMINARY PERSUAQ Dal-len-bafi, PRELIMINARY A'DMISS Dal-len-erna, INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLES. Strikinga * oneself. PRE ISENT. Striking oneself now. Having struck oneself. Having struck oneself. Striking oneself then. Havingy struck oneself. Beingr about to strike oneself Bei ng( now oneself. Beingr then oneself. about to strike about to strike Wishing to strike oneself. Striking or having struck oneself'. First striking oneself., First striking oneself Firt striking oneself, Dal-o1J,, To strike oneself. *Or being Neuter:- being Btruck, ( 226 ) REFLEXIVE CAUSATIVE (and PASSIVE.) FUTURE, Dal-ocho-ct-a-4, I shall allow myself to be struck.* SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. Dal-ochkE-kan-a-1i, I am allowing myself to be struck. RECENT PAST, Dal-ocho-en-a-n, I allowed myself to be struck. ANTERIOR PAST. Dal-ocho-lern-a-i, I allowed myself to be struck. SPECIAL INCOM1PLETE PAST. Dal-ocho1S-kcan-tch1elan-a-c-', I was allowing myself to be struck. INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. Dal-ocho-len-tah1akar -a--., I had allowed myself to be struck. INCHOATIVE FUTURE. Dal-ochok-ltgit'-i, Ishail be about to allow myself to be struck. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. Dal-ochok-lagido1,o-kcan-a-c-, I am about to allow myself to be struck. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal -chok-lagidolE-Ian- tahtan-a-n, I was about to allow myself to be struck, OPTATIVE. Dal-ocho-lko1-a-c, I will or would allow myself to be struck, CONDITIONAL. (Oho) Dal-ocho-lena--, I shall or should (not) allow myself to be struck. * Or I shall be struck. Although this Causative is extensively used as a Passive, it does not lose its causative signification, and can not therefore always be an equivalent for our Passive; as tgpa-ocho.en.a-e, does notmean, " he was burried; but either that he allowed himself to be burried alive, or that he was caused to be burried (dead or alive) by a third party. Remark.-As this Causative follows "the Reflexive" the other tenes meed mot be writtenr ( 227 ) FUTURE. D. WITH THlE DATIVE CASE. INDIoATIVB. SINGULAR. I _Dal-can-at-e. He will strike * for Me-. 2 Dat-a-m'- a -e,) He will stri k e for tbee. 3 Dat-ct-e-c-e, He will strike f or him. DUAL. IDal-a-tin' - a -e He will strike for us, two. 2 -Dat-a ben.,a -el He. will strike, for you two. 3- Dcla-ki.n-act e-, He will strike for them two-. PLURAL. 1 DcZ-a-tZe -a,- e, Het will strike for us.S 2 Dat-a-p.e,-a -e, He. will strike, fo r you. 3Dat,-a-ic o -a..-e, He will strike for theni. Neater. Dat-a-13-'_.A~ e, H1ewill. strike' at,. on; to itý or them. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Eh an."' SINLGULAR. Da1-a-i'?,Jcha~n -e if he. will strike for me. D at-,a -mn-lkhcact-; e', If he. will strike for thee. Dal-a-e-khc& n If he will strikiei fo r h imr. DUAL. If he will strike for us two.. Dat-a-ben-klian-e;, If he will strike for you two. Dala-1circ-1han~e, If he will strike for th~em two. PLURAL. Dal-cc-te-Ihaq -e If he will strike. for us., "Dalt-a-pe-khan~- e-, If lie will- stri-ke for yo~u. D a I- a -It-, h-a, If, hel wvill strike for thetn. Dat c-it- ichan.0,.e, If he. Wilkstrike, at ( ete>. it, -o r them. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Paset'."' SINGULAR. Paset'-e - cd a 1' a - n Perhaps h~e will str-ik e for me. Paset'-e- di a. 1, a -m, Perhaps he wviill strike, for- thee.ý.Faet'e-dt-aePerhaps hie will. strike for himn. D;UAL.ý.Paset'-e-dat - a -4~ Perhaps: h e willI strike: for us twoii Pasct'e:dal- a -b~e n. Perhap-s hea wi..l strike for you two. Paset'-e-dat-a -- It- i'n Perhaps he will1 strike for them- two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dat_.a-loý Per-.. haps- heý will..~l for usq, Paset'-e-dca1 t-c& P.e, Pehapsa h-e wtli. strike. fot you. Pccset' e,,lda I- a -k.o, Perhap~s h1e Will1 stri-ke for them. Paset'-e-d~at-a4&-., Pe-- haps- hQ will stlrike,,, at it -(etc.>, or. them. Note--Neuter makes no distinction between- singrular., dual or. plural. *Dative is used in San-tali when we in English would use for~, at, to, on, ete. ( 228 ) SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dalt-a--kan-a - e, He is striking for me. 2 Dal-a-rm-kan-ae, He is striking for thee. 3 Dal-a-e-kan-a-e, He is striking for him. DUAL. 1 Dal-a-in-lik an - a-e, He is striking for us two. 2 Dal-a-ben-kan - a-e, He is striking for you two. 3 Dal-a-kin-kana-e, He is striking for them two. PLURAL,. 1 Dat-a-le-kan-a - e, He is striking for us. 2 Dal-a-pe-k an - a-e, He is striking for you. 3 Dal-a-ko-k an - a-e, He is striking for them. Neuter. Dal-a- 1 - kar&-a-e, He is striking at it. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." SINGULAR. Dal - a - j - kan - khan-e, If he is striking for me. Dal-ta - mrn - kan - khan-e, If he is striking for thee. Dal - a - e -kan - khan-e, If he is striking for him. DUAL. Dat-a-li, - kan - khan-e, If he is striking for us two. Dal-a-ben- k a n - khan-e, If he is strikingo for you two, Dal-a-kin- k an - khan-e, If he is striking for them two. PLURAL. Dal-a- I e - ic a n - khan-e, If he is striking for us. Dal-a-p e - k an - khan-e, If he is striking for you. Dal-a- k o - k an - khan-e, If he is striking for them. Dal- a - ' - k an - khan-e, If he is striking at it. SUBJUNCTIFE With " Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dal-a-n`-kan 0, Perhaps he is striking for me. Paset'-e-dal-a-m-kan, Perhaps he is striking for thee. Paset'-e-dal-a-e-ka n, Perhaps he is striking for him. DUAL. Paset'-e-dal - a - ii n - kan, Perhaps he is striking for us two. Paset'-e-dal-a - b e n - kan, Perhaps he is striking for you two. Paset'-e-dcl-a - k in - kan, Perhaps he is striking for them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dal-a-le-kan, Perhaps he is striking for us. Paset'-e-da - a -pekan, Perhaps he is striking for you. Paset'-e-da I - a - k o - kan, Perhaps he is striking for them. Paset'-e-dal-a-k'-kan, Perhaps he is strikingO at it. - -- -- Note&-Dative has no general incomplete Present. This tense is used for both, ( 229 ) RECENT PAST. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE with SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." ' Paset'." SINGULAR. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-ad - in - a - e, Dal-ad-i -kIhan-e, Paset'-e-d a - ad - i-, He struck for me. If he struck for Perhaps he struck me. for me. 2 Dal-at'- me - a-e, Dal-at'-me-khan-e, Paset'- e-dal - at'- me, Hestruckforthee. If he struck for Perhaps he struck thee. for thee. 3 Dal-ad-e-a-e, He Dal-ad-e - khan-e, Paset'- e - dal - ad - e, struck for him. If he struck for Perhaps he struck him. for him. DUAL. DUAL. A. DUAL. 1 Dal-at' - lid-a -e, Dal-at'-li,-khan-e, Paset'- e - dal-at'- lii, He struck for us If he struck for Perhaps he struck two. us two. for us two. 2 Dal-at'-ben-ben-a Dal-at'-ben-khan-e, Paset'- e - dal-at'.ben, -e, He struck for If he struck for Perhaps he struck you two. you two. for you two. 3 Dal-at'-kin -a-e, Dal-at'-kin-khan-e, Paset'- e-dal - at'-kin, He struck for If he struck for Perhaps he struck them two. them two. for them two. PLURAL. PLURAL. PLURAL, 1 Dal-at'- e - a - e; Dal-at'- le-khan-e, Paset' - e -da - at' - e, He struck for us. If he struck for Perhaps he struck us. for us. 2 Da-at' - pe - a-e, Dal-at'-pe-khan-e, Paset'- e- dal - at'-pe, He struckforyou. If he struck for Perhaps he struck you. for you. 3 Dal-at'- ko - a -e, Dal-aft'-o-khan-e, Paset'-e-da 1 - at' - k o, He str uc k for If he struck for Perhaps he struck them. them. for them. Neuter.Dal-a-t'-a-e, Dal -a- t'- khan - e, Paset'-e-dal-at, PerHe struck at it. If he struck at it. haps he struck at it, Note. Dative has no Anterior Past. This tense is used both as recent and anterior Past. (230 ) INWDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1Dal-c.alao-ad-i-;i-,a-e, He has' struck for mne. 2 Vact..aao-at -m7e0ýO He hasý struck for thee. SDq1a1cka~o-ad-eate, If e has struck, for him. DUAL. 1Dd-ak-&ao-at'-Ziia-e He has struck for us two. V 2al-akao-at'- ben f- a -!e, He has struck for you two. struck for -them two. P LUR AL. I Dal-akao-ctt'- lea-e, H e h as,struck for us, 2 Dat.-akao~at'pea-e, He h-a s struck for you. 3 Dal-akao-ýat'. ico.1 -a-e, He h~as struck for them. Neuter. Dal-akcaoat'-a-e, He has struck at it, PERFECT. SVBJTN-CTIVE with " REzan." SINGULAR. Dal-alcao- atd -,14, khan. e, If he bas struck for me, Dat -a kao-at'- rn e1rhan4,.e, If lehe s struck for thee. Dn~l,.ara o -c acd- e khctn-e, If he has struck for him. DUAL. Dat-akJao-at'- ih14 - kehart~e, If he has. struck for us two. Dat-a 1eao-at'- benkhan. e, If he 'has struck f or you two., Dal -rdao-at'- 7cmlchan-e, I f h e has struck f or them two. PLURAL. Dal-akao-at' - I e khan -e, Ifhbe has struck for us. Dat -a lcao- a t'- p eldian-e, If he has struck for you. Dat -akcto-a t'- ik o - lchan-_e, If he has struck for them. Dat -aicaco-at'-lchcine, If he has struck at 'It. SUBJUJNCTIVE With 11 Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dal-ak~ao~acti 4,Perhaps he has struck for me. Paset'- e-dat-aicao--at'.. mne, Perhaps hie has struck for thee..Paset'-e-da-t-aleao-ad9P e, Perhaps he has struck for him.. DUAL. FPaset' -e-dat-akcao-at' tin, Perhaps he has struck for us two. Panet'- e-dal - alcao-at'ben, Perhaps h e hbas struck for you two. Paser'`-e-dal- alcao-at'kin, Perhaps he has struck for themn two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dta-alcao-at'te, Perhacps. he has struck for us.Paset'--e-dal-akcao-at're, Perhaps he has struck for you. PRaset'-e-dat-alcao- atyl Ice, Perhaps he has struck for them. Paset'_e-cdal~akao-at',* Perhaps,h e h a - struck at it, ( 231 -). SPECIAL INCOMPLETE- PAST. INDICATIVE* SINGULAR. I Da7'-c- A. k a.n - tah~1caim-a-e., Ho was * strik in g for me. 2 Dat-c&-m- ik amn tah-e--kc6 n -a -e 'He was strikingr for thee. 3Dat-a- e,-k7 a ntchth'1a n- a- e. HEe. was, striking for him.* SUBJUNCTIVE with SINGULAR. Dal;-a - - kan~tah~Jean-khan-e, If he was striking, for me. Dat-a. - m - k a n - tah~Jcan-khan-e, If he was striking for thee. kan-khan- e. If he was striking for him. SUBJUNCTIVu wiith "Pa.set'." SINGULAR., Paset'-e-dal-a-n.-Jcaxtah-ekcan, Perhaps h e w a s strikingo for me. Paset'-e- d at I- a - m, kan-taht/can, P e. r - haps he was striking for the6. Paset'-e-dal-a-e-kan tah~Jcan, Pe rh a ps he was striking for him. DUAL. DUAL& DUIAL. 1 Dal-a-tia't4ca n -DaZ-a-ti,'-kan-ta,- P aset'-e-d aZ-a -. lbt tah~Jcan-a:-e, He, hZ.1can. - kltan-e, kan-tah~1can, Pex r was. strikingý for If he was strik-M haps. heý was strik-. us two. ingY for us two. ing for us two. 2 Dat-aben-. iam Dtaben- ic, a n. -Paset'--l alae-edat-a'. be~n tchthkan-a-e-; He tah~can-khan-ei, kan-tcthelkan, Per. was striking for If he was; strik- hap& h!e was striking you two. ing for you two., for you two. 3 Dat-a-lcir-Tcan- Dat-a-74im- lea n Pasdet-e.cat-a-, kc i n,. tahtJc amn a - e, t ahe-kan-kchan-e, kan-ptahZ lean, Per-. He was striking If he ýwas strik- haps he was strik. for them two. i~og for them two-. ingr for them two. PLURAL. PLURAL. PLURAL. I Dal-a-tele; -a n- Dat-aý 4e_-lkamn- P-aset" -e-d-a''t-a-4te.. tah can-are., He tahi~Jan-khian-e, lcan-tcth'oka e Was- striking for If he was strik- haps- he. xas. strik.. US. ing for us. fixg for us. Note.=-Daitive has, no general. incomplete, Past. This- tense, is used: foik both. * Or used' to strike for me, or also simply, struck for me.. ( 23.2 ) 2 Pat-a-.pe=ca n Dal,-a-p e - 1a n. Paset'-e-d a Z a - p e~ tahV1, at n-a -e, tah~Jkn. -ichan - kcr-tnz-tahZ~Jcan, PerHe was striking e, I f h1 e w a s hiaps hie was strikfor you, striking for you. ing for you. 3 Dctl-a-Jco-A anr- Dcl-a-le.o - le.a n - Paset'-e-d, a 1- a - o - tah~ei a n - a - e, tah~ran-Jchan-e, 1cart-tah~Jcan,, PerHe was strikingr If hie was strik- haps he was strikfor them. ing for themi. ing- for thiem. Neuter. Dat -a IS- Da1-aIS-1can-tahZ,- Paset'-e-cdal-aJS.-kc& 11, kan-takhJcan-a - kart-lhar-e, taltz1cart, Perhiaps e, He was strik- If he was strik-. he was striking. at Ing at it. ingr at it. it. INDECISIVE, PLUPERFECT. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. kan-a-e, He had struck * for me. 1 2 Dal-at'-me-tah'elckan-c&-e, He had struck for thee. a Dal-ad-e-ta h- e fran-a--e, He had -struck for him. DUAL. kan--a-e, He had -struck for usj two. SUBJUNCTIVE with "E han. " SINGULAR. kamp-krhan,-e, I f hie had struck* for me. DalI-o t'-mne-ta h e - lcam-krhan-e, if he h a d struck for thee. Dat-ad-e t ah elkanT--krtan-e, If he had struck for. him. DUAL. Dat -at'-tia'.ta h e" - kan-lchan-e, if he had struck for us two. SUBJUNCTIVE with " paýt' SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dat-a d - i 4 tahtVJan, Perhaps hie h~ad struck for mne. Paset'-e-ctat-at'- m e - tah-e1ran, Perhaps he had struck for thee. Paset'-e-cia I - a di - e tah~ian, Perhaps he had struck for him.. D UAL. Paset;-e-dal-at'-i, i 40i take ican, Perhaps lie had struck for-us two& *And it had been, altered or was no longer. of ally importance; as t6tadetaAek-an.a-n'. I had put (it) on him, but it was not on him (when another, VaOt took place.ý) ( 233. ) 2 Dal, a t'- b e n' - Dal-at'-ben-tah -C tahZ/ckan-a-e, He kan-lkhan..e, If had, struck for he had struck you two. -for you two. 3 Dal -at' - ic i - Dat -at'-Jcin-tah e - tah-elcan-a-e, He i-an-ichan-e, If had struck for hie had struck them- two. for themn two. PLURAL. PLURZAL. I Dai-at'-(e-tah e, Dal-at'-te - t a h e - lcar-a-,e, He had J'an-1rhan-e, If struck for us. he had struck, for us. 2 Dat-at' pe-tah-e- Dat-at'-pe-t a h e, - kan-a-e, He had k.1tin-khan-e, If struck for you. hie hiad struck for You. 3 *Dat-al'-Jco-tahi-e - Dal-at'-keo- t a h t - Akar-a-e, He had' /ran Akhan-e, If.Struck for them. he had struck Neuter. Dat-at'- for there. tabZ1c a In - a - e) Dat-at'- tah-Jcan - lie had struck klian-e, I f h e at it. had struck at it. Paset'-e-dctt-at'-be n - tah~kan, P er ha ps he had struck for you two. Paset'-e-dat-at'-lc i n - tah;1can, Perhaps he had struck for them two. PLURAL.. Paset'-e-dal- a t' - t e - tah~lcar, Pe r ha ps be had struck for US. Paset'-e-dat-a t' - p e,tah~kan., Perhaps hie -had struck* for yotl P aset'-e-dat- at' - k o - tah~1an, Pe rh ap s hie had struck for them. icar, Perhaps h e had struck at it. DECISIVE PLUPERFECT. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dat-alcao-ad-it,'taWickam-a-e, He had, struck*, for me. SUBJUNCTIVE with "E11 han." SINGULAR. Dal-alcao-acl - in' - tahi1can- khan-e, If he had- struck for mne. SUBJUNCTIVE with 11Paset'." SINGULAR, Paset'-e-dat-akao-ad-. haps he, had struck for me. *And it remained in its affects when another~act took place; as tql-aakaoad-e-.Wtoe~can-a-A. I had tied (it) on him and it was on him, when aniother act took place). 23 4 - 2 Dat-akao-at'-rmetah~1carn-a-e, He had struck for thee. 3 Dal-alccto - de tcth~1can-a-e, He bad struck for him. DUAL. I Dctl-akoao-at'- tini[ tcth~1car-a-e, He had struck for us. two. 2 Dcd..a~aoc-at'-bentcth'Zcan-ai-e, He -had struck for you two. 3 Dal-alzao-at'-Jci'ntah~Jcam-a-e, He had struck for them two. PLURAL. I Dal-a1cao-at'- le., tah~1caen-c~e) He had struck for us, 2 Dctl-ctkao-ctt-petah-elean-a-e, He had struck for YOU. 3 Dctl-alcao-at'-petah~caln-a-e., He had struck f o r them. Neuter. Dai-ctkaoat'-tah~an-a - e He had struck at it., Dal- akao-at'- metah~an-1chan-e. If he had struck for thee. Dal-akao-ad-e-tahZ kctn-khar&. e, If he had struck for him. DUAL. tah-e1can-1dhan-el, If he had struck for us two. DaZ-atkao-at'- bentah~tJccn-. khan-e, If he had struck for you two. Dat-a Jcao-at' kin-_ tah~ean- kchcn-e, If he had struck for them two. PLURAL. Dat -akao-ctt'-Ze~ta.. W~ean - lhan -e, If he had struck for us,. Dat-a1eao-at'- p e - tah~ean- khan-e, If he had struck for you. Dctt-akcao-at'- k otah'e1can- khan-e, If he had struck Sfor them. Dat -adcao- at'- tcthe" kan-Jean-e, If he had struck at Paset'_e-edat-akao-a t 'me-tah~1can, P e rhaps he had struck for thee. Paset'-e-dat--akzao-acl-- e-tah'eJcan, Perhaps he had struck for him. DUALO Paset" e-daZ-akcao-at'lin'-takhJca?.?m, P e rhaps. he had. s~truck for us two. Paset'`-e-dat-a~cao-at'.ben-tcth-ecan., Perhapsý he had. struck for you two. Pa~set'-e-dat-a~cao-. a~t' ki`n-iah~cdan, Perhaps he had struck for them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dat- akao-at'.. te-tah-e1can, Perhaps he had struck for us. Paset'-e-dat-akcao- at'-~ pe-tah-hlkan, Perhaps he had struck for you. Paset'-e-dat-a~eao-c6 t'. ko-tah-*an, Pý e r - haps he had struck for them. Pasee'-e-dat-akcao-a t?.6 tahtlean, Perhaps he had struck. at itC, ( 235 ) INCHOATIVE FUTURE. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. I Dal-a-g-lagit-e, He will be about to strike for me. 2 Dalc-a-m-lagit'-e, He will be about to strike for thee. 3 Dal-a-e-lagi- e, He will be about to strike for him. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." SINGULAR. Dal-a-- - la gi t'khan-e, If h e will be about to strike for me. Dal-a - m - lagit'lkhan-e, If he will be about to strike for thee. Dal-a-e - a g i t'khan-e, If h e will be about to Sstrike for him. DUAL. DUAL. 1 Dal-a-lin-lagit'-e Dal-a-li i - lagit'He will be about khan-e, If h e to strike for us will be about to two. strike for us two. 2 Dal-a-ben-lagit- Dal-a-ben-lagi t' - e, He will be khan-e, If he about to strike for will be about to you two. strike for you two. 3 Dal-a-kin-lagit-e Dal-a-kin-lag i t'He will be about khan-e, I f h e to strike for them will be about to two. strike for them two. PLURAL. PLURAL. 1 Dal-a-le-lagit'-e, Dal-a-le - a g i t'He will be about khan-e, If he to strike for us, will be about to strike for us. SUBJUNCTIVE' with " Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dal-a-4i-lagit, Perhaps he will be about to strike for me. Paset'-e-dal-a- m - lagit', Perhaps he will be about to strike for thee. Paset'-e-dal-a-e-lagit', Perhaps he will be about to strike for him. DUAL. Paset-e-dal-a-lin Zla. git, Perhaps he will be about to strike for us two. Paset'-e - dal-a-be n - lagit', Perhaps he will be about to strike for you two. Paset'-e-dal-a-kin-lak git', Perhaps he will be about to strike for them two. PLURAL. Paset'- e - dal-a-le-la. git, Perhaps he will be about to strike for us, ( 236 ) 2 Dal-a-pe-lag He will be ab to strike for y 3 Dal-ca-ko-lagi He will be ab to strike for th Neuter. Dal-ae git'-e, He be about to st at it, it'-e, Dal-a- pe- I agit'- J Paset'-e-dal-a - pe-laout khan-e, If lie git', Perhaps he ou. will be about to will be about to strike for you. strike for you. t'-e, Dal-a - ko - lag it'- Pw.et'- e-dal-a-ko- laout khan-e, If he git', Perhaps he em will be about to will be about to strike for them, strike for them. -le- Dal-ale'-lagit'-khan- Paset'-e-dal-ak-lagit', will e, If he will be Perhaps he will be rike about to strike about to strike at it. at it. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 DaL-a-i-la g i d - olE-kan-a-e, He is about to strike for me. 2 Dal-a-mn-la gi d - o-kacan-a-e, He is about to strike for thee. 3 Dal-a-e-ieagid-oJkan-a-e, He is about to strike for him. DAUL. I1 Dal-a-lit-lagidok-k1an-a-e, He is about to strike for us two. SUBJUNCTIVE with SUBJUNCTIVE With I 4Khan." 1 " Paset'." SINGULAR. Dal-a-A-lagid-o 7E - kan-kharn-e, If he is about to strike for me. Dat-a-m-lagid-oJkan-lchan-e, If he is about to strike for thee. Dal-a-e-lagid- o k - kan-khan-e, If be is about to strike for him., DUAL. Dal-a-lid-lagido1c-kan-k7ha - e, If he is about to strike for us two. SINGULAR, Paset'-e-dal-a-ti -1 a - gid-ol-kan, Perhaps he is about to strike for me. Paset'-e-dal-a -mr-lagid-ol-kccan, Perhaps he is about to strike for thee, Pasdt'-e-dal-a- e - la gid-ol-ican, Perhaps he is about to strike for him. D UAL. Paset'-e-dal-a-liZ-la - gid-olk'-ican, P e r - haps he is about to strike for us two. ( 237 ) 2. Dal-.a-bem-nlagid- -Dal-c-ben-lcgi d - ole'-lan-a-e, He o-lc'-an-kham -e, is about to strike JIf he is about to for you two. strike for you two. 3 Dcl-a-lkin-lagid- Dal-a-kiin-lagi d - o1z-lcan-a-e, He olo,'-lcan-kh& n - e) is about to strike If he is about to for them two. sttike for them two r PLURAL. PLURAL. I Dal-c-le-lag id - Dcl-ca-te-1ýqid-o1co17-kcan-a-e, He kan-khacn-e, If is about to strike he is about to for us. strike for us. 2 Dal-a-pe-lagi d - Dal-ca-pe-lagid-olo7'-kacn-a-e, He kctn-lchan-e, If is about to strike he is about to for you. strike for you. 3 Dal-ct-ko-lagi d - Dat-a-ko-lagid-o 1g o1k-lcan-a-e, He Icamn-lhctn-e, I f is about to strike he is about to for them. strike for them. Nquter. Dal-a1'-la- Datl-a-lacgic-o IY - giid-olS-kan-a - e, kcan-lcham-e, If He is about -to he is about to strike at it. strike at it. Paset'-e-dal-na-en-lca. gcid-ok-lcan, P e r haps he is about to strike for you two. Paset'-e-dal-a-kicn-lct.. gid-olc'-kan, P e r haps he is about to strike for them two. PLURAL, Paseft'- e-dal-a-le - a gid-ol-iWcan, P e r haps he is about to strike for us, Paset'-e-dal-a-pe- I a - gid-okc'- kan, P e'r haps he is about to strike for you. Paset'-e-dal-a-lo- I a a gib*d-olS-ican, P e r haps he is, about to strike for them. Paset'-e-dal-alc'-ZagidolS-kcan, Perhaps be is- about to strike at it. INCHOATIVE PAST. 1XNDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE 'with SUBJUNCTIVE with "Khan," "Paset'." SINGULAR. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. I1 Dal-a-,i-lag i di- Dal-a-'-lagic-o1S- Paset'-e-dal-a-,i -1 a o!S-kan-tahlktean- klan-taho k a n - gic,-okl-kan-tahtJcan, a-e, -He was lchan-e, If he Perhaps. he was about to strike was -about to about to strike fo for me. strike for me. me,, ( 238 ) 2 Dal-a-m-layi d - ok'-kai-ttahVkan - e, He was about to strike for thee. 3 DalxE~a-e-lagidl-okkan-tah~Jcan-a-e, He was about to strike for him. DUAL. 1 Dal-a-lini-lagic1 -o1g-lcan-tah-kana-e, H e was about to strike for us two. 2 Dai-a-ben-lctgidoiM-7ca-tah-e1can - ac-e, He 0w a s about to strike for you two. 3 Dat -a-kin-lagido1k-lcan-tah~ican-.a-e, H e was about to strike for them two. PLURAL. I Dai-a-ie-iag i d - o1s-kart-tah8'ana-e, Hie was about to strike for us. 2 Dai-a-pve-tagi d - okc-kan-tah~eana-e, He was about to strike for you, Di~al-a-mn-lagqid-ok'kam-ta h Z ir a n - khan-e, If he was abou t to strike for thee. Dal-a-e-lagid-oJJ - 1cac-t a h ý lc a n. - kham-e, If he was about to strike for him. DUAL. Dal-a-lini-la g i cd - o71-1can-tahJcran,khan-e, If h e was about to strike for us two. Dal-a-ben-lagi d - o71'-1oana-tah~1can - kham-e, I hbe was about t o strike for you two. Dat-a-kcin-lagi d - o7i-lcan-tcahZcankhala,-e, If he was about to strike for them two. PLURAL. Dac-a-Ze-tagid-olSlcctm-ta h - ic a n - khan-e, If he was about to strike for us. Dat-a-pc-la gicdo1c-1-cavn-tahJc an,kkan-e, If he was about to strike for yoU. Paset'-e-dal-a-rim-agib.4 dolc'-kam-tah Z Ic a n, Perhaps h e w as about to strike for thee. Paset'-e-daZ-ac-e- Za * d. olS-Ican- t a hZ l can, Perhaps he was about to strike for him. DUAL. Paset'-e-dal- a - I -Z lagid-o1l-kan-ta h -e -. klan, Perhaps h e was about to strike for us two..Paset'-e-dal-a. - b, e n lagid-olF-1can-tah Z - kan, Perhapsg h e was about to strike for you two. Paset'-e-dal-a - k, ii n - lagid-o1-kan-ta h E - kan, Perhaps he was about to strike for them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e- d a Z1- a - 1 e - lagid-oI-lckan-tah Z - ham, Perhaps he was about to strike for us. Paset'-ci a Ia- a,-p elagicd-olc-an-ta h 6 - han, Perhaps h e,was about to strike for you. ( 239 ) 3 Dal-a-lco-tagid4 - a-e, He was about to strike for them. Neuter. Dal-aA3-lakan-ct-e, He was about to;strike at it, D--pe-tagid-ok'- Paset'-e-da I1- a - Ico kau-t -a h -e k. a n - lagid ok~-1an-ta h -e khan-e, I f h e kan, Perhaps h e was ab o ut to was about to strike strike for them. for them. DaZ-aAk-lagid- o M- Paset'-e-da-a1k-1agictkan-ta h-ek a n- o1'- kan-t ahZ'lea nP klian~-e, If h e Perhaps he wa~s was ab ou t t o about to strike at it. strike at it. CONDITIONAL. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. I Is wanting. 2 DUAL. SUBJUNCTIVE with "1Khan." SINGULAR. Dal- alcao - a - A'khan-e, If he has struck for me. DaZ-aloao - a -v- - khan-e, If he has struck for thee. Dal-akao-a-e-khart e,) If he has struck for him. DUAL. Dal-alcao-a- I i n khan-e., If he has struck for us two. Dal-akao-a-b e n khan-e, If he has struck for 'You two. Dal-alcao-a- k i n - khan-e, If he has struck for them two,, SUBJUNCTIVE With "1Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dal-alcao-a4g,. Perhaps he h a struck for me. Paset'-e-dct-alcao-a-m, Perhaps he h as struck for thee. Paset'-e-dat-akrao-a-e, Perhaps he h as. struck for him. DUAL. Paset'-e-dal-akao - a 1A~, Perhaps he ha's struck for us two. Pctset'-e-dal-aloao - a ben, Perhaps h e has struck for you, two. Paset'-e-dal-alcao - a - kin, Perhaps he, has struck for them twola ( 240 ) 1 2 PLURAL,, PLýURAL. ( PLURAL. Dat -alao - a - 1 e - jPaset'-e-dal-alrao -- a klzan-e, If' hie Jle, Perhaps he has has struck for us. struck for us.. Dal-akao- a -p e- Paset'-e-dal-akao-a-pe kehan-e, If lie has' Perhaps h e li a s struck for you. struck for you.. Dat -alkao- a - leo - Pmset'-e-cala akavo -akham-e, If he has ko, Perhaps hie has struck for them. struck for them,. Neuter. Dal-akao- Paset'-e-dal-alcao-a-1k aJ-,-khan-e., If hie Perhaps h e h a s. has struck at it. struck at it. CONTINGENT, SINGULAR. I -Dal-ad-ini-gi - e He strikes, will f strike for me. 2 Dat-at'- me-gi-e, He strikes* forthee. 3 Dal-ad-e-g iWe He strikes* for haim.. DUAL. I Dat-at' tin gi-e, He strikes*, for us two. 2 Dal-at'-bert-gi-e, He strikes* for you two. 3 Dat-at'-kin-gi-e, He strikes* for them two. SINGULAR.,DUAL. SINGULAR. Perhaps he will t strike for me. Perhaps he will jt strike for thee. Paset'-e-dat-ad-e g, Perhaps he will t~ strike for him, DUAL. Perhaps he will t strike for us two. Paset -e-dal-at'-ben-gi,, Perhaps he will t strike for you two. Paset.'-e-dal-at'-kin-gi,. Perhaps he- will t strike for them two. *Or will or would strike. for (etc) ~or would, may or mioght. ( 241 )~ PLURA.L. I Dal*-at'- I e-g-e He strikes*, for us. 2 Dal-at' - pe -yi-e,I He 'strikes* for, He strikes* foxý, them. Neuter.* Dat - at'gi-e, Hle atrikes. at. it.. P.LURAL., PLURAL. Paset'-e-cala-at'- le-gi Perhiaps he will f strike for us. Peirhaps he willt strike for you. Paset'-e-dal-'at'-Jco-gi,_ lirhaps he will t strike for them. Faset,"e-dat..ta t-g i, PerWhaps h e will.t strike,at itiL PRELIMINARY' EXPOSTUJLATIVE.' SINGULAR. I. Dat-akao--a_,-- nahi-'-e,; He M ust first have -struck for:-me. 2; Dat-akJacwa - rnl - naht-e, He must first have. struc~k: for thee. 3 D at-alcc o -a -e,-~ n ahe.H, He mnus t first.have struck, for him., Neuiter. Daltmakd~oa1l-nake.-e3 H, e must first have, struck at, it. T\~. Th V U Ab. ELU1{AL D'at -aknao-c ý-2i n' Dat, -aJa-a-te-nah?,e,, qah1'be,. He must He must first have firtst have.struckl struck for us.,,for us two. DAt -'a Jao-,a_-b e, n- tal-aJdo-a-pel-nahlb.eC nah -e) He must He must first have,first havo, struck, struck for you. for you two., Dat" alcao-a-Jo-i n -- Dal" a~caoiw-a--7o-nqh-e nah,-'e., He must He must first have first have struck. s~truck -for theml, for them-, two. Or will. or would strike, f~r (. te.) jOr would, may or migh;t.P ( 242 ) PRELIMINARY PERSUASIVE, I Dal-akeo - a - * - ba-e, He mu s t first have struck for me. 2 Ddl-akao- a- m - ba-e, He must first have struck for them. 3 Datklcam o-a-eba-e, He must first have struck for him. Neuter. Dal-akaoak.-ba-e. He must first have struck at or on it. Dal-akeo-a- ii A - Dal-akao-a-t e- b a - e, ba-e, He must He must first have first have struck struck for us. for us two. Dal-akeo-a-ben - Dal-aJcao-a-pe-ba-e, ba-e, He must He must first have first have struck struck for you. for you two. Dal-cdkao-a- k in - DaZ-akeao-a-ko-b a - e ba-e, He must He must first have first have struck struck for them. for them two. PRELIMINARY ADMISSIVE. 1 Dal-akao- a- ' - DaZ-akcao-a-Zi,-en - Dat-akao-a-le-en-a-e, en-a-e, He must a-e, Hemust He must first have first have struck first have struck struck for us. for me. for us two. 2 Dal-akeo- a - m - Dal-aao-a-ben--n- Dal-akao-a-pe-en-a-e. en-a-e, He must a-e, Hemustfirst He must first have first have struck have struck for struck for you. for thee. you two. 3 Dal-aJkao-a-e-en- Dat -akao-aj- k i n - Dat-akao-a-ko-en-a-e, a-e, He must first en-a-e, He must He must first have have struck fo r first have struck struck for them. him. for them two. Neuter Dal-akcaoa iz-en-ta-e, H e must first have struck at it. ( 243 ) BENEDICTIVE OR PRECATIVE. STNGULAR. 1 Dal-a---ma - m! Mayest thou strike for me! 2 Dal-a-r-rm a - el May he strike for thee! 3 Dal-a-e-m a - ' May Istrike for him! Neuter. Da D - a k ma-e. May he strike at or on it! DUAL. PLURAL. Dal-a lin-ma-ko! Dal-a-le-ma-pe! May May they strike you strike for us. for us two! Dal-a-ben- mae-it! I Dal-a - p e - m a - o! Maywetwostrike May they strike for for you two! you! Datl-a- 1 i n - ma - bea! May you Dal-a- k o-ma-1e! two strike for May we strike for them two! them! IMPERATIVE. 1 Dal-a-4i-me! Datl-a-lin-ben! Dal-a-le-pe! Strike Strike thou for Strike you two you for us. me! for us two. 2 Dal-a-e-mne! Dat-a-e in - be n! Dal -a--ko-pe Strike Strike thou for Strike you two for you for them. him! them two. Neuter. Dalt- a 71 -ime! Strike thou at or on it! ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. GERUNDS. (ANIMATE.) FUTURE. cDal-a-ii (ko, kin, ben, pe em,) Dal-a-lco-reak, te, re, kkon, Of, Who will strike for me. by, in, from striking for them. SPECIAL INCOMPLETIr *PRESENT. Dal-ta-m-'an, Who is strik-J Dal-a-o-lcan-reaIS, te, re, Of,by, ing for thee. in strikiug for them now. ( 2,44, ) RECENT PAST. Dal-acI-e (ko,_ki*n, pete) He for whom they struck. PERFTECT. IDcttakao~at'-lin'*, Who has, struck for us two. SP~ECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Dal-a-ben-kan-tah~kam, Who was strikingr for you two. INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. Dal..at'-,kin-tahe~can, They two for -whom they had struck. DECISIVE PLUPERFECT. Da1-cakao-at'-le,-tah~kan, Who had struck for us. INCHOATIVE FUTURE.. Dat -a-pe-tagWt, Who will be about to strike for you., Dai-at'-ko-reak', te, re, Of, by, in havingr struck for. them. Datlctkao-ctt'-7oo-reaM, te, ye, Of, by, in having struck for the~m. Dal-a-ko-7ran-tah~lean-r e cklc, te, yre, Of, by, in striking for them then. Dal-at'-k~o-tahZkan-eak', te, re, Of, by, in having; struck for them. Dal -acao -at'-ko -ah~Joan -reakq, te, re, Of, by, in having struck for them. Dal-a-lco-iagit'-real3', te re, Of, by, in beingr about to strike for them. Dal-a-ko-lagido1M-kamn-reak', te, Ire., Of, by, in being about Ito strike for them now. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. Da1-a-ko-lagidoAk-kan, They, for whom they are about to strike. INCHO0ATIVE PAST. Dal-a-keo-tagidoki-kan.-tah~kan, They, for whom they are about to strike. Dal-a-1co-tctgico1k-kan - t a h -6 - kan-rea1k, te, rre, Of, by, in being aboutot strike for them then. CONDITIONAL. Dat -akao-ct.ko, They, fo, r Dal-cdcao-a-ko-reaJM, t e, r e, whom they, may have' struick. Of, byin (case) of ha~ving. struck for them. Note.-What has Siiready been observed with reference to the participle5,.in the abc. case,. is also the case in'the Dative participles, viz, that any of the dative Suffixes may be affixed to the root, and that. any of the nominat-ive Suffixeii 'm ay be added to the Dative Suffies asu Dal-ako-pe, Dal ape-ko, ( 245 ). ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. Dai -a/co-~khan, Strik in g fo r them. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PR-E-' Da1-ako-carn-1char&, Striking -for SENT. thein now. RECENT PAST. Dat-at'-ko-khan, Having struck for themn. PERFECT. Dat-akao-at'-/co-kha n, Having PERFET. Dstruck for them. SPECIALTINcOMPLETE PAST., Dat - a/co - kam - tahleTc7an - kharn, Striking for them then. INDrbECISIV`E PLýUPERPEC T. Dal -at'-ko-tah-lcan.-lclan, Having stru~ck for them. DECISIVE PLUPERFECTý Dat-a~iao-at'ko-tahZkan -ic h a n., Having struck for themn. li~cnHoATIVE FUTURE. Dat-a1ko -1agit'-khanr, B e i n g about to strike for them. INCAOATIVE PRESENT. Dat-ako-tagidol3-lan-khan, Beingr now about t o strike f o r them. INCHDATIVE PAST. Dat-akoIo-agido k~-Jan-tahe k a n khian, Being then about to, strike for. theEm.' CONDITIONAL, Dal-akao-alo-lchar&, (in case of) Having struck for them,. PRELIMINARY EX'P'OST'ULA-' Dat-akao-akco-nahz-, 'H a v i n g TIVE. first struck. for them. PRELIMINARYk PER SUASIVE. Dat-a'kao-alco-baii, Having first struck for them. PRELIMINARY ADmissiv.E. Dat-akao-ako-_ena, Havingerfirst struck for ýthem,. INFNIIV, Dt an, am, aaiaben, ak12n, etc., To strike for me, -thee-, -etc. ( 246 )t ADJECTIVE PAP TICIPLE.S. GERUNDS. (I NANI MATED.) FUTURh?. D11 (k-in, k-o, re, le, ben Dat0-a1-ve-'i, te, fre, Of, etc,) At, or on which they in striking at. it. (you we etc.) willistrike. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRXSENT. Dal-aVr-kctn, At which -they DalT-aW-kcn-r-ecWý, te, re, are striking,0 by, in striking at it now, RECENT PAST. I by, Oft Dat-at', At which they struck. PERFECT. Dal-akao ait', At which they have struck. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Dal -a1r'-kan-taihi 4 a n, At -which they were strikin~g. INDECISIVE PLUPER1FECT. Dal-at'-tald~can, At wh i c h they had struck. T~iF.jISIVE, PLUPERFECT. Dat -alcao-utl'-tah Z le a n, A t which they had struck. INCHOATIVE FUTURE4. Dal-a1.'-lagit', At which they will be about to strike. INC1HOATIVE PRESENT. Dat -a1r,-lagi d o Mk-ik a n, A t which they are about to strike. INCHOATIVE. PAST. Dal-at~'1Uagido~rt'-1 an-talr~JcIa n, At which they were about to strike. CONDITIONAL. _Dat -alcao-a14.' At which they inay have struck. Dat -at'reakc, te, re, Of, by, in having struck at it. D4t a~rao-at'-reallr, te, ye, Of, by, in having struck at it. Dal-a1S.-Iran- tali elan-re! Jr,te,re, Of, by, in striking at it the~n, Dal-at'-tah~lcan-ile'tac, te, re, Of, by, in having struck at it, Dal-acato-at'- talielman- r e a M', te, re, Of, by, in having struck at it. Of, by, in being, about to strike at it, Dal-aIS,-lagiidoJS4'-,an-iveaA3, te, re, Of. by,9 in being about to strike at it now, Dal aJ'-Ztagido1J..kcan-taki-1canrealtk, te, 2'e, Of, by, in beingr about to strike at it then, Dal-ak~ao-aV,-reako, te, re, Of, by, in having struck at it. Note.-Any of the Nominative Fsuffizes may be aki~ed to these dative participles, to show the Agent, 2 247) INANIMATE. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. RECENT PAST. PERFECT. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. INDECISLVI& PLUPERFECT. DECISIVE PLUPERFECT. INCHOATIVE, FUTURE. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. INCHOATIVE PAST. CONDITIONAL. PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULATIVE. PRELIMINARY PERSUASIVE. PRELIMINARY ADMISSIVE. Dal-cdS -bAan, Striking at it,, Dal-a1k-kan-bchan, Striking at 'it now. Dal-at'-lchan, Having struck at it. Dai-akao-at'-kch a n, H a v i n g struck at it. Dal-a/rbaIn-ta h -e lea n -ik h a n, Striking at it then. Dal-cW'-tah~ean-khan, Having struck at it. Dai-cdcao-at'-tah -6 k a n - k h a n Having struck at it. Ddl-a1r,-lagit'-bkhaizn B ein g about. to strike at 'it. Dal-aI-gio-1m-hn Being nlow about to strike at it. Dl-a~-laidoh-1at-tah -e Ir a n khan, Beijgý thlen about to strike at it. Dal -alco-a1V--khan, (in case of' Havingr struck at it. Dal- alcao-tde.-na It i&, H a v i n g first struck at it. Dal-alato-a1'- baA, Having first struick at it. Dal-akao-1 M-ena, Having first struck at it. INFINITIVE. Dal-aJ4' To strike at (it,) ( 248 ) REFLEXIVE. E. WITH THE DATIVE CASE. FUTi7RI TENSE. INDICATIVY. SINGULAR. I DabI.jo i-a-,- I shall strike for myself. 2 Dal- Q Aa - a-m., Thou wilt strike' for thyself. 3 Dat-joi-&a-e, He will strike for hiinself. D)UAL. 1 Daljoa - ii, We two shall strike for ourselves. 2 Dal-jQf-ca-b en, You two will strike for yourselves. 3 Dal joA-a- k i n, They two will strike for themselves. PLURAL. 1 Dal-jQiA-c-le, We shall strike for ourselves. 2 Dal joQA- a - pe, You will strike for yourselves. 3 Dal-jo- a - k o, They will strike for themselves SUBJUNCTIVE with " Klian." 'SINGULAR. Dat-jo-khan-i-A, If I shall strike for myself. Dcl -joQAkhann-em, If thou wilt strike for thyself. Dd-lonlc-kha n - e., If he will strike for himself. DUAL. D-a y-jo -khan-4i, If we two shall strike for ourselves. Dal- i-khan-ben, If you two will strike for yourselves. Dal-jo-khchacn-k1in, If they two will strike for themselves. PLURAL. Dal-jofi- khan- I e, If we shall strike for ourselves. Dal-j.o-khan-p e, If you will strike for yourselves. Dat1-jo-kha_-k o, Ifthey willstrike for themselves, SUBJUNCTIVE with " Paset'. " SINGULAR. Pcaset'-id- d al -jo1 0, Perhaps I shall strike for mnyself. Paset'-ern- d a I-j o, Perhaps thou wilt strike for thyself. Paset'-e-ddl-jio, Perhaps he will strike for himself. DJUAL. Paset'-ligid a ij Q, Perhaps we two shall strike for ourselves. Pacset'-ben-d a, -j o I, Perhaps you two will strike for yourselves. Paset' -kin-dat- jo, Perhaps they two will strike for themselves. PLURAL. Paset'-le - dat -a 1 h Perhaps we shall strike for ourselves. Paset'-pe- d at -j QA, Perhaps you will strike for yourselv es. Paset'-ko-d at - j Q g, Perhaps they will Sstrike for themselves, ( 249 ) SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. INDICATIVE4 SINGULAR. I Dal-jo~k-an-aii I am striking for myself. 2 Dai-jpil-k a n - a in, Thou ar t strikingr for thyself. 3 Dal-jQA-1ean-a- 'e, He, is striki n gr for himself. DUAL. I Dal-jg-Jca- a - liily, We two are strikingý for ourselves. SUBJUNCTIVEri with "EKhan." SINGULAR. Dal -yoh -kankhart-in, I f I am striking for myself. Dal "j q~z-klan1ehar-em, if thou art striking for thyself. Dal-] QIA-lanTkhan-e', If 1)e is striki ng( fo r himself..DUAL. Dal --jQiz-7an - lchan-Ili', If we two are striking for ourselves. SUBJUNCTIVE with "Paset'.' SINGULAR. Pas't'.-in'- d a 1 I Q. ft lean, Perhaps I am striking for myself. Paset'-en%-ca I -yg kain., Perhaps thou) art striking for thyself. Paset'-e-dal-joqi-7ra n, Perhaps he is strik-_ ingr for himself. DUAL. Paset'-ti~i- aI- j oqk - lean, Perhaps we two are strikingý for ourselves. Paset'-be-cl7atI -jo ýi - lean, Perhaps you two are striking for yourselves. PFas et'-7i n -c67at -jo n" - lean, Perhaps they two are striking for them selves. 2 Dal-jQph-lcan- a- Dal - Qi-leam - ben,, You two lehan-b'en, I f are strikingr for you t Nvo ar e yourselves, strikingr for yourselves. 3 Dal-jgh-lean-a- Dat-] Q?'-kankein, They two lehan-le i n, I f are striking for they two a r e themselves. str i k i nc fo r themselves, ( 250 ) PLURAL. 1 Dal-jon-kan- a - le, We are striking for ourselves. 2 Dal-joQ-kan- ape, You are striking for yourselves. 3 Dal-joQ-kan- a - ko, They are striking for themselves, INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-an-a - n, I struck for myself. 2 Dal-a n - a- m, Thou struckst for thyself. 3 Dal-an-a-e, He struck for himself. DUAL. 1 Dal-an-a - I i,i We two struck for ourselves. 2 Dal-an- a -be n, You two struck for yourselves. Dal-an-a- k i n, They two struck for themselves. 3 PLURAL. Dal -j'ijo _ -k an - khan-le, If we are striking for ourselves. Dal-j o-k ankhan-pe, If you are striking for yourselves. Da -j o - k an - khan-ko, If they are striking for themselves. RECENT PAST. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Khan." SINGULAR. Dal-an-khan-i, If I struck for myself. Dal-an-khzAn-e m, If thou struckst for thyself. Dal-an-khan-e, If he struck for himself. DUAL. Dal-an-kh(c[-hid, If we two struck for ourselves. Dal-an-khan-ben, If you two struck for yourselves. Dal-an-khan-kin, If they two struck for themselves. PLURAL. Paset'-le- d a -j - kan, Perhaps we are striking for ourselves. Paset'-pe- d a -j p - kan, Perhaps you are striking for yourselves. Paset'-ko-d a I -j Qo - kan, Perhaps they are striking for themselves. SUBJUNCTIVE with " Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'- in - dal - a, Perhaps I struck for myself. Paset' em - dal - a n, Perhaps thou struckst for thyself. Paset'-e-dal-an, Perhaps he struck for himself. DUAL. Paset'-lip - dal - a n, Perhaps we two struck for ourselves. Paset'-ben-d a I - a n, Perhaps you two struck foryourselves. Paset'-kin-da I - a n, Perhaps they two struck for themselves. Note.-There is no general incomplete present in the Middle voice This tense is used for both general and special incomplete Present, ( 251 ) PLURAL. 1 Dal-an-a-le, We struck for ourselves. 2 Dal-an - a - p e, Your struck for yourselves. 3 Dal-an - a - k o, They struck for themselves. PLURAL. Dal-an-khan- 1 e, If we struck for ourselves. Dal-an-khan-p e, If you struck for yourselves. Dal-an-khan-k o, If they struck for themselves. PERFECT. PLURAL, Paset'-le-dal-an, Perhaps we struck for ourselves.. Paset'-pe- d a I - a n, Perhaps you struck for yourselves. Paset'-ko- d a l - a n, Perhaps they struck for themselves. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE With SUBJUNCTIVE with C Khan." " Paset'." SINGULAR. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-akao-an-a-n-, Dal-akao-a n-khtkan- Paset'-id-dal-a k a - I have struck for i, If I have an, Perhaps I have myself. struck for myself. struck for myself. 2 Dal-akao-an-a- Dal-aJkao-an-lchan- Paset'-em-dal-ak a om, Thou hast em, If thou hast an, Perhapsthou hast struck for thyself. struck for thyself. struck for thyself. 3 Dql-akao-an-a-e, Dal-akao-an-khan- Paset'-e-dal-akao-an, He has struck for e, If he has struck Perhaps h e has himself. for himself. struck for himself. DUAL. DUAL. DUAL. 1 Datl-ak'ao-ana - Dal-alcao-an-khan-' Pacet'-lid-dal-ak a - lid, We two lisi, If we two an, Perhaps we two have struck for have struck for have struck for ourvurselves. ourselves. I selves. 2 Dal-akao-an- a - Dal-a1eao-an-khan- Paset'-ben-dal-a k asoben, You two ben, If you two an, Perhaps you have struck for have struck for two have struck for yourselves. yourselves. yourselves. 3 Dal-akao-an- a - Dal-akao-an-khan- Paset'-kin-dal-ak a okin, They two kin, If they two an, Perhaps they have struck for have struck for two have struck for themrselves. themselves, themselves. Note.-This ternm is used both a recent and anterior Past, -( 252 ) PLU'R'AL. PLURAL. PLURAL I Dat-akao-an- a - Dal-akdao-an-khan- Paset'-le-dai-akao-an, le, X e ha ve; le, If we have Perhaps we h av e strck or u - sruk for our- s-truck for ourselves. Selv es. selves. 2 Dal~t'cao-an 7- a - Dlao--haPaset*-pe-cal- a 7c a ope, You have pe, If you have an, Perhaps y -o u struck for your- struck for your- have struck for yourselves, selves, selves. 3 Dal-akao-an - a- Dal-alcao-an-1chan- Paset'-ko-dcJ-ak. a o - Ice They have Ice, If they have an, Perhaps they struck for 'them- struck -for them- have s t ru ck fo r selves. selves, themselves. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. SINGULAR. I Ddjiz-Ji-Ian-t ah-e1can-an', I was strikingr for myself. 2 Dccjoi -Jo-an-t ah-ekan-cc-r, Thou wast strikingr for thyself. 3 Daljiz-Jo-Jan-t ah~1can-a-e, H e was strikingr for himself. DUAL. I Dcct-joi-kaun-t ah-e1Ican-a-1iny', We two were striking for ourselves. ISINGULAR. Dal-joiz-Jcccn-tah~-e lean-1c~han-in', If I was striking for, mysel1f. Dal-joit-Jan-tah1*ican -lr~han-ern, If thou wast strik-.ing for thyself. Dacl-jofi-Ican~-tah eican-ichan- e., If he was strikingr for himself. DUAL. Dat-joizJkan~ac--:dh kan-khan-lin, if we two w er e striking for ourselves. SINGULAR. Patset'-i~z-da1l-Joiz-kantah~1can, Perhaps I was striking for myself. Paset'- em-da 1 - jo fi - kan-tah-e1cara, Perhaps thou wast striking for thyself. Paset'-e-dal-jofi-cantah~lcan, Perhaps he, was striking for him11self. DUAL. Paset'-lin,'-dal oJ ii 1can-tah~k-an., Perhaps we two were striking for o q rSelves. ( 253 ). Dat jo~iz-kctn-t a Dcutjoiz-1an-tah~h~caen-a-ben, Youl kan -khanr-b e en, two were st~riking If you two were for yourselves, striking for yourselves. Dal1-joiz-kaln-t a - Ddl-joi-kan-tah'eMJaen- a - k i n, kam?-khan-k i en, They two w e r e If they two were striking for them- striking for them - selves. selves. 3 PLURAL. 1 Da1-joit-kaen-t ahWcaen-a-le, We were strikingý for ourselves. 2 Dat-)o~i-1caen-t aht1can-a- pe, You were striking for yourselves. 3 Dal-jofi-Jcar-t ahMaen-a-ko, They were strikingr forthemselves. PL URAL. Dal-joA-kain-t 'ah~-e karu-kharu-te, if we were striking for ourselves. Dc4-johi-Jaen-tth'ekai2-kharu-pe, if you were strik-. ingr for yourselv~es. Dat-joi-kaen-tah7ekan.-khaen-kco, if they were strikingr for themselves. Paset'-ben-dat - i? o ~i kaen-tah-lkaen,. Perhaps you two were striking for yourselves. Paset-kin-dal - j o A kaen-tah~kam, Perhaps they two were striking for themiselves. PLURAL. Paset'-le-dai-joah-kantah~an, Perhaps we were striking- for ourselves. Paset'-pe-dat jofi-kantah~kan, Perhaps you were striking for yourselves. Paset'-ko-dat-joti-kantahdckam, 'Perhaps they were striking for themselves, INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1, Dat-aen-fah~iana-i I: had struck for mys elf. SUBJUNCTIVE with SUBJUNCTIVE with "1Khan." 1 "1Paset'.".SINGULAR. Dat -an-tah-elc a enkhan-iA, If I had struck for myself. SINGULAR. Paset'-i4-dal-a n-tah.'ekam, Perhaps I had struck for myself, ( 254 ) Dat-an-tah-kan - a-m, Thou hadst struck for thyself. 3 Dal-an-tahlkana-e, He had struck for himself. DUAL. 1 Dal-an-tchtkana-lin', We two had struck for ourselves. 2 Dal-an-tahjka na-ben, You two had struck for yourselves. 3 Da1-an-tcah-kana-kin, They two had struck for themselves. PLURAL. 1 Dal-an-takc-kana-le, We had struck for ourselves. 2 Dal-an-tahkkana-pe, You had struck for yourselves. 3 Dal-an-tah k2ana-ko, They had struck for themselves. Dal-an-tah~k a nkhan-em, If thou hadst struck for thyself. Dal-an-tahck a nkhan-e, If he had struck for himself. DUAL. Dal-an-tah-K ankhan-lid, If we two had struck for ourselves. Dal-an-tahlk a nkhan-b e n, If you two had struck for yourselves, Dal-an-tahUk a nkhan-k i n, If they two had struck for themselves. PLURAL. Dal-an-talc-k6 a nkhan-le, If we had struck for ourselves. Dal-an-tah-k a nkhan-pe, If you had struck for yourselves. Dal-an-tah*k a nkhen-ko, If ithey had struck for themselves, Paet'-enm-da 1-a n-tah-kan, Perhaps thou hadst struck for thyself. Paset'-e-dal-an-ta4 "kan, Perhaps h e had struck for himself. DUAL. Paset'-lii-dal-a n-t ahkcan, Perhaps we two had struck for ourselves. Pasit'-ben-dal-an-tahUkcan. Perhaps you two had struck for yourselves. Pasetc-kin-cdal-a-tahekcan, Perhaps they two had struck for themselves. PLURAL. Paset'-te-dal-an-takhkan, Perhaps we had struck for ourselves. IPaset'-pe-dal-an-tah&kan, Perhaps you had struck for yourselves. Paset'-co-dal-an-tah&kan, Perhaps they had struck for themselves. ( 255 ) DECISIVE PLUPERFECT. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-akrao-am-tahZI1can-a-n-i I bad struck for myself. 2 Dat-akJao-an-ta15 Ir. a nm a -in Thou hadst struck for thyself..3 Dat-alcao-an-tah-elcan-a-e, He had struck f or himnself. DUAL. 1 Dal-akao-an-tah-ecam-a-lini, We two had struck for ourselves. 2 Dal-alcao-an,-tah-eJaran- a - b e ni, You two had for yourselves. 3 Dat -alcto - a ntahtlean-a-Ic i n, They two -had struck for themselves, SUBJUNCTIVE with Khan." SINGULAR. Dc-al-ako-ctn-ta15ekan-kcha n - i n~ If I had struck for myself. Dat-akJao-an-taheIran-khan - e m, If thou hadst struck for thyself. Dat -alao-an-tahZhe bad struck for himself. DUAL. Dat -aklao-art-tahS-. If we two had struck for ourselves. Dal-alcao-an-taISIcau-Joanr-b e n, If you two had. struck for yotlr-- selves. Dat-ak~ao-art-tahekan-kkhan ki n, IIf they two had struck for themselves, SUBJUNCTIVE with "Paset'." SINGULAR. Past'-in'-dal-akcao-antalZ~ica n, Perhaps I had struck for my-.. self. Paset'-em -a- -aleca o - an-tai~kan, Perhaps thou hadst struck for thyself. Paset'-e-dal-alcao-a n tah-Jcan, Perhaps he had struck for himself. DUAL, Paset'-1i4.dal-alc a o - an-tahZ1,k a n, Perhaps we two had, struckfor ourselves, Pasqet'-ben-dat-aka o -am-tahle a n, Per.. baps you two had,struck for yourselves, Paset'-kin- 'dal-ak~ao an-talh-ht n., 'Perhaps they two had struck for the mselves ( 256 ) PLURAL. 1: Dal-akzao-a'n-tah~lcan-a-le, We had struck for ourselves. 2 Dal-akcao-an-tah~can-ct-pe, You had struck for yourselves. 3 Dal-akcao-ctn-ta-* h~kan-a-1ro, They had struck for themselves. 1~LIJRAL. YLURAL. Dal-qkao-an~-tahZ- Paset'-le-dal-aieao-aru kan-khwn-le, if tah-i~an, Perhaps we had struck we had struck forfor ourselves, ourselves. Dat -akao-an-tah ZPaset'-re-dat-a ik a o ican-Ichan-pe, If an-tah-ekan, P e r - you had struck haws you had struck for yourselves. Dat -a Jao-an-tahZlean'-ichan-Ico, if they had struck for themselves. for yourselves..Paset'-lco-dat-a ie a o - am-tah-6Jca n, Per~ haps they had struck for themselves. INCHOATIVE. FUTURE. INDICATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dat-joi-ta g it'n)s I sh all be about to strike for myself. 2 Dal-jQA-la g it' - em, Thou wilt be about to strike for thyself. 3. Dat-jpfi-lagit _e, He will be about,to strike for him-ll self, SUBJUNCTIVE With " Khan." SINGULAR. Dat Jim -1I a g i t - khan-i n., If I shall be abouti to strike for myself. Dal-jQiz- Z a gj i tikhan'-em, if thou wvilt be about to strikefor thyself. khan- e,3 If he will be about to, strike for himself, SUBJUCTIVE with 11cPaset'." SINGULAR. git, Perhaps 1' shall be about tostrike for myself. git't, Perhaps thou, wilt be about to strike for thyself. Perhaps he will be. about to strike forhiMself. ( 257 ) DUAL, iL Da'-f4- l lagit lid, We two will be about to strike for ourselves. 2 Dal-jo g-ait'ben, You two will be about to strike for yourselves. 3 Dal-4-lc g i t' - kin, They two will be about to strike for themselves. DUAL. Dal-jQo - Iag i t khan-id, If we two shall be about to strike for ourselves. Dal-jQf - 1 a g t' khan- be n, If you two will be about tostrikefor yourselves. Dal-ji -lagit' - khan- kin, If they two will be about to strike for themsalves, DUAL.. DuPrr,.. Pasee-idO-dal-9414a - git, Perhaps we two shall be about to strike for ourselves. Paset'-ben-da'l-jgiz-lagit, Perhaps' you two will be about to strike for yourselves. Paset'-kiGnS1-dl-?h-1lC5 - gi9, Perhaps they two will be about to strike for themselves. PLURAL. Pasete-e-dal-jyQ- la git', Perhaps we shall be about t o for strike for ourselves. Paset'-pe-dal-jg -1 agi', Perhaps you will be about to strike for yourselvesý Paset'-ko-dal-jQo- I agit, Perhaps they will be about to strike for themselves, PLURAL. PLURAL. 1 Dal-jv -agit-le, Dal-JoA - a g gi - Weshallbeaboit kharn-le, If we to strike for our- shall be about to selves. strike for ourselves. 2 Da-,joai-agit'-pe Dal-jo- l a g it' - You will beabout khan-pe, If you' tostrikefor your. will be about to selves, strike for yourselves. 3 Dat-jaQ-lagit-ko, Dal-jo 4 - a g it' - They will be khan-ko, If they about strike for will be about to themselves. strike for theiselves, Q ( 258: ) INCHOATIVE PRESENT. INDICATIVE SINGULAR. I Dai-jogfi-a gi dok'.kan- a-n,, I am about to strike for myself., 2 Dal~yQA-ia gj i dTho u a rt about to strike for thyself. 3 Dai-joi-ictgi7/do1c'-1can-a-e, He' is about to strike for himself. DUAL. I -DaL-jQA-ia g i dWe two are about to strike for ourselves. 2 Dalio-jQ ac g i cioAk-kavn-a - b e n., You two are about to strike for yourselves. 3 Da-jQA-ia g Ii dok'-kan-a- kc i n, They two ar e abouit to strike for fthemselves. SUBJUNCTIVE with "Khan." SINGULAR. Dal.jgo-1agid-.ok'kan-1chan-i,"', If. I am about. t o strike for myself. Dai..jQ4-agid-o 9ckan-ichan -e m, If thou art about to strike for thyself.I Dc4-jgfi-1agid-o Mc kan-Jchan-e., I f he is about-to strik e f o r h~i mself. DUAL. kan-Ich a ni i A, If we two are about to strike for ourselves'. Dal-jgn,-Zagid-o M..kan-lchan-b e n, If you two are about to strike for yourselves. Dai-jQo-tagici-o M.' kan-kchan-Ic i n, \If they two are about to strike for themselves,, SU.BJUNCTIVE with 11 Paset'." SINGULAR. Paset'-in -ai-jQf4-t a - gici-oI~Iarn, Perhaps I am about to strike for myself. Paset'-em-dal-jQa-l. agic1-oA-kan, Perhaps thou art about to strike for thyself. Paset'-e-lal-j Q ji- a - gid-oIk-kan, P e rhaps he is about -to. strike for himiself. DUAL. Paset'-lI~-dal-jo~-t a.gid-ogc-kain, P e r-9 haps we two are about to strike for ourselves. Paset'-ben-dal-jQi-1agid-oIS.~Ian., P e rhaps you two are about to strik 'e for yours 'elves. Paset'-kin-dai1-jg"'la--- gid-oIk-kan, P e rhaps they two are about to strike for themselves,, ( 259) PLURAL.. Dal-jQ' la gi f*d - o1k-1an-a-le, We a re about t o strike for.our-. selves, Da1-joA-la g i cto1Hecan a - pe. You are about to, strike for yourselves.. o Mlca n - c% - le o, Theyare about to, strike- for- thern selves. PLURAL. lcan-kham-le, Ifwe, are about to. strike for ourselves.. Dal-jQji-lagicI-o kkan-khan-pe,. If yo mv are about to, strike f or yourselves.. kan-khan-Jco, if they are about t o strike f o r themselves. PLURAL. Paset'-le-cial-j o A-1 a.. gid-o1r,-kan, P e rhaps we are about to. strikeý for ourselves. Paset'-pe-d'al'jQii- a-...gid-oc-1can~, Pe rhaps you are about to, strike, for yoursel-ves, Paset'-1co-cdal-jQfi- a - gid-ok~-kctm, P e rhaps they are about to strike for, themselves. INCHOATIVE- PAST. INDICATIVE~. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-jo'-l' g 'i d ok'-1an-tah~kana-' I was about to strike for myself. 2 Dal-jo-taq id-- okM-kan-ta~hekana-rn, Thou wast about to strike. for thyself. 3 Dal-jo&1a g- i d ok~-kan-tah~Jcana-e, H e 'wa s about to. strike for himiself. SUBJUNCTIVE with SUBJUNCTIVE With. Khan.))" Paset'." SINGULAR'. I SINGULAR.P. Dal-jbii-l1qid-o~c'- Paset-in-7d4l-j6h-l a - Jcan-tah -e Ir. a. n - gid-o4-Jo a n-t a h ~-e kkan~.i-, I was Joan, Perhaps I about to strike was about to strike for myself. for myself. Dal-JOz-la id-o&J' Paset'-em-dal1-jQ&-takan-tah Z ko a n - glid-oI."-Jan - t a-h. 9 -Johan-e m, I f Joan, Perhaps, thou thou wast about wast about to strike to strike for thy- for thyself. self. Datjo-jg1agid-~o 1-Paset~-e-da-jnG~ -1 Ia kan-tah ý ko a-n - gid)-oJk-Jon -t a h e, - Johan-e, If heý Jan, Perhaps. h e. was about t- o. was about to, strike strike for-hfimseWf for' himnself ( 260 ) DUAL. I Da1-jo~i-lagi d4 o k-7ra n -ta h -l/roa n a-tiA", We two were about to strike for ourselves. 2 Dcd-joi~-lag i 4 oIc'-1on-tah-ekana-bern, You two were about to strike for yourselves. '3 Dal-jQA-ta g i do1k-lcan-tcth1ckaa-lcin, They two wvere about to strike for themnselves. PLURXL. -1 Dal-jgh-lag i d4 a-ie, We wereA about to strike for ourselves. 2 Dal-jgA-a g ido1k-1an-tah'JO"avta-pe, You were baVout to strike for yourselves. 3Dat o-lQ'ag i d oJo'-Jan-tahZ la nalThey were about to strik~e for themselves. * DUAL. Dat -joi-laoid-o'Mkan-tah Z Jo a nt - kh~an-tin', If we two were about to strike for ourselves. kart-ta h lo7ca-n - kchan-bem,) I f you t w o were about to strike for yourselves. Dal-jQA-tagid-o i7 -krar-tah -e Jo a it - loha~n-oi n, IIf they two were about to strike for themselves. PLURAL. Dat-jo. 1Naqd-o 17 -Joam-tah Z Jk an i Johait-te, If we were about to strike for ourselves. tkan-tah -e 1r, a 'n - khait-pe, If you we..-3 ab~out to strilke for yourselves. Dcot-joitiafid-o 1I-, banta " - -,a nt - Jchan-Jzo, If thiey were, abJout -to strike i'o them-n selves, DUAL. gict-olS-kart- ta h -c Joan, Perhaps w e two were about to strike for ourselves. Pa~set'-bam-dal-joQ-1agidt-o1'-1oan- t a lo Z Joam, Perhaps you two were about to strike for yourselves. Paset' -Jin-dat-) g-tagid-olS-kam- t a h 'e Joan, Perhaps they two were about to strikce f or themselves. PLURAL. Paseet-te-ctd-jgii-t a - git-ol-Joan - t a h Z - Joan, Perhaps we were about to strike for ourselves. Paset'-pe-dat-jjQ'-1 a - qiri-l.-JO-am- t a h e. - Joan, Perhaps you were about to strike for yourselves. Paset'-Joo-dtcl-J oi- a - gict-olS-lo~ar- t ra h -c - Joan, Perhaps they were -abouitto strike for themiselves., ( 261 ) SINGULAR, a wanting. DUAL, PLURAL CONDITIONAL. SINGULAR. Da1l-an-khan-i n, If I should strike or have struck for myself. Dal-an-kchan- em, If thou wouldst strike for thyself. SINGULAR. Paset'-ii - a I - ai, Perhaps I should strike for myselfi Paset'-em-d a I - a n, Perhaps thou wouldst strike for thyself. Dal-an-khan-e, If Paset'-e-dal-an, Per.he would strike- haps he would strike for himself, for himself. DUAL. DUAL. Dal-an-khan-1 i i, Paset'-lii-d a I- a n, If we two should Perhaps wet w o strike for our- should str i k e for selves. ourselves. Dal-am-Ichan-ben, Puset'-ben-da I - a, If you two would Perhaps you t wej strike for your- would strike for selves, yourselves. Dal-an-khan-kin, Paset'-kin-d a I- a?, If they two would Perhaps they twco strike for them- would stri k e fo r selves, themselves. PLURAL PLURAL. Dal-an-khhan - le, Paset'-le - a I - a 7, If we should Perhaps we should strike for our- strike for ourselve, selves. Dal-ai-ckkan-pe, Paset'-pe- d aI- an, If you would Perhaps you would strike for your- strike for yourselves. selves. Dal-an-kIhan- Ic o, Paset'-kco - dla 1- a, If they would Perhaps they would strike for them- strike for t h e m selves, selves. ( 262 ) SINGULAR. I 2 DUAL., 2 3 CONDITIONAL PERFECT. SIaNGULAR. Dal-aklcao-an-khan- Paset' fi,, If Ihavestruck an, for myself. stru Dal-akao-an- Pa8e khan- em, If akac thou hast struck thou for thyself. thys Dal-akao-an-kchan- Paset e, If he has struck Perh for himself. stru DUAL. Dal-aEao-an- Pase khan-tlii, If we akao two have struck we t for ourselves. for o Dal-akao-an-khan- Pase ben, If you two aicao have struck for you yourselves. for y Da l-ak a o-a n - Pase khan-kin, If they acao two have struck they for themselves. for t PLURAL. Dl-akao-an-khan-le Paset' If we have struck Pert for ourselves. stru Dal-akao-an-khan- P a s pe, If you have akac struck for your- you selves. your Dal - ak a o-a n- Paset' khan-kco, If they an, have struck for have themselves, them INGULAR. -ird-dal-ak a o -o Perhaps I have ck for myself. t'- e m - d a - -an, Perhaps Shast struck for elf. -e-dal-akaeo-an, aps he has ck for himself. DUAL. t' -li d a I-an, Perhaps wo have struck urselves. ' - be n - da - - -an, Perh aps two have struck ourselves. ' - k in - d a - -au, Perhaps two have struck hemselves, PLURAL. -le-dal-akao-an, aps we have ck for ourselves. e t' - pe-dal - -an, Perhaps have struck for selves. -ko-dal-a-ka - Perhaps they struck for selves, PLURAL. 1 2 3 ( 263 ) PR] ELIMINARY FU SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-an-gi-4, I will first strike for myself. 2 Dal-an-gi - m, Thou wilt first strike for thyself. 3 Dal-an-gi-e, He will first strike for himself DUAL. 1 Dal-an-gi -1 i, We two will first strike for o u r - selves. 2 Dal-an-gi-ben, You two will first strike for yourselves. 3 Dal-an-gi-kin, They two will first strike fo r themselves. PLURAL. 1 Dal-an-gi-e, We will first strike for ourselves. DUAL, PLURAL. U RE. SINGULAR. Paset'-ifi-dal-an - g i, Perhaps I will first strike for myself. Paset'-em-dal-an-gi, Perhaps thou wilt first strikefor thyself Paset'-e-dal- an - g i, Perhaps he will first strike for himself. DUAL. Paset'-lii-dal-an- g i, Perhaps we two will first strike for ourselves. Paset'-ben-dal-an-g i, Perhaps you two will first strike for yourselvesPaset'-kin dal-an-gi, Perhaps they t w o will first strike for themselves. PLURAL. Paset'-le-dal-a n - g i Perhaps we will first strike for ourselves. Paset'-pe-dal-an- g i, Perhaps you will first strike for yourselves. Paset'-ko-dal-an - g i, Perhaps they will first strike for themselves, 2 Dal-an- g i -p e, You will first strike for yourselves. 3 Dal-an-gi - k o, They will fi rs t strike for themselves. ( 264 ) -1 Dal-a.i-'. I strike t for x-ny-self. '2 Dal-an -g i -m Thou strikest t for thyself. '3Dal.4=an-gi'-e, He. -strikes t for h imself. DUAL. I.Dal-an-gil-'141, We two strike t for ourselves., 2 Dat -a-n-gi-b e n, You. two -Strike t oryourselvs 3Dal-atn-gi-k in Theytwo-strike t -or themselves,, PLURAL, I Dat-.an-gi-le, We strike t for ourSelves. 2 Dat-an -,- re, You strike t for yourselves. 3 DaZ-an-g-k o, They strike t for themselves. CONTINGENT SINGULAR. DUAL, PLURAL SINGULAR Paset'-ipi-da -a -gi Perhaps I striket for myself. Paset`-em -da7l-an iS Perhaps thou strikestft for thyself. Paset'-e-dal atn- 7'; P~erha~ps he strikes t for himself. DUAL. Paset'-lipa-dat-a- -g 1i, Perhaps w e tw o striket for our selves. Paset'-6en-cd4l-an-gi, Perhaps you -t w o strike + for yourself. Perhaps they t w striket for tbemselves. FLURAL. Paset-te-al-a g I, Perhaps we~ strike'j for ouirselves. PasetZ pe-dat-an -gi i, Perhaps you strike t for yourselves. Paset'-kco-d at-a -g Perhaps they strikeft for themselves. 1' Or will or would strike. Note. It will be obae redp that a reprsxt b oth them an I' of the Accusative Reflex~ive. ( 265 ) PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-an-nahs- n,, I must first strike for myself. 2 Dal-an-nahi-m, Thou must first strike for thy-, self 3 Dal-an-nah- e, He must first strike for himself DUAL. Dal-an-nak-lib 1 n We two mustfirst strike for ourselves. Dal-an-nah1-be n, You two must first strike for yourselves. Dal -am-nahqikiqn, They two must first strike for themselves. PLURAL, Dal-an-nahd-le, we must first strike for ourselves. Dal-an-nahi-pe, You must first strike for yourselves, Dal-an-nahi'-ko, They must first strike for themselves, PRELIMINARY PERSUASIVE, I Dal-anm-ba.-A, Dal-an-ba-tliq 4, Dal-an-bea-le, We Imust first strike We two must must first strike for for myself, first strike for ourselves, ourselves. 2 Dal-an-b a - m), Dal-an-ba- be n, Dal-an-ba-p e, You Thou must first You two must must first strike for strike for thyself. first strike for yourselves, yourselves. 3 Dal-an - ba - a, Dat-an-ba- k i, Dal-am-ba-ko, They He must first They two must must first strike for strike for himself first strike for themnseiVs, themselves, ( 266 ) PRELIMINARY ADMISSIVE. 1 Dat-an en-a -, Dal-an-en-a- I i n Dalan-en-a-le,,We I must first strike We two must first must first strike for for myself. strike for our- ourselves. selves. 2 Dal-an-en-a-m, Dal-an-en-a-ben, Dal-an-en-a pe, You Thou must first You two must must first strike for strike for thyself. first strike for yourselves. yourselves. 3 Dal-an-en-a - e, Dal-an-en-a-kin, Dal-an - e n - k o, He must first They two must They must first strike for himself, first strike for strike for themselves themselves. PRELIMINARY PERFECT EXPOSTULATIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-akao - an - nah-n, I must first have struck for myself. 2 Dal-aka o - a n - nahz-m, Thou must first have struck for thyself. 3 Dal-alca o- a n - nahi-e, He must first have struck for himself. DUAL. Dal-akao-an-nahitin, We two must first have struck for ourselves. Dal-akao-an-n a - hi-ben, You two must first have struck for yourselves. Dal-acao-an-n a - hi- kin, They two must first have struck for themselves. PLURAL. Dal-akao-an-nahi-l e, We must first have struck for ourselves. Dal -akao-an-nahi-pe You must first have struck for yourselves. Dal-akao-an-naht-ko, They must first have struck for themselves, ( 267 ) PRELIMINARY PERFECT PERSUASIVE. 1 Dal-akao-an-ba-fi I must first have struck for myself. 2 Dal-akao-an-bam, Thou must first have struck for thyself. 3 Dal-aka o - an - ba-e, He must first have struck for himself. Dal-akao-an-b a - Dal-akao-an-ba - 1 e lit, We two We must first hav must first have struck for ourselves struck for ourselves. Dal-akao-an-b a - Dal-akao-an-ba - p ben, You two You must first hav must first have struck for your struck for your- selves. selves. 9 e,, e - Dal-akao-an-b a - kin, They two must first have struck for themselves. Dal-akao-an-ba - k o, They must first have struck for themselves. PRELIMINARY PERFECT ADMISSIVE. 1 Dal-akao-an-ena-n I must first have struck for myself. 2 Dat-akao-an-ena-m, Thou must first have struck for thyself. 3 Dal-akao-an-en a-e, He must first have struck for himself. -- - Dal-akao-an-e n - Dal-akao-an-en-a-t e a-lid, We two We must first have must first have struck for ourselves. struck for ourselves. Dal-akao an-en-a- Dal-acao-an-en-a-pe, ben, You two You must first have must first have struck for your. struck for your- selves. selves. Dal-akao-an-en-a- Dal-akao-an-en-a-ko, kin, They two They must first have must first have struck for themstruck for them- selves, selves. ( 268 ) PR ELIMINARY BENEDICTIVE SINGULAR. I Dal-an-m a - I! May I first strike for myself! 2 Dal-an-ma- m! Mayest thou first strike for th yself! 3 Dat-an- ma - e, May he fi r st strike for hi m- - self! DUAL. Dal-an-ma- I i! i May we two first strike for ou r - selves! Dal-an-ma-ben! May you two first strike for yourselves! Dal-an-ma-lci ql May they two first strike for themselves! PLURAL, Dal - an - ma - te May we first strike for ourselves! Da E - an - m a - pe l May you first strike for yourselves! Dal-an-ma-ko! May they first strike for themselves! PRELMINARY IMIPERATIVE. 2 Dal-an- mre! Strike thou first for thyself i Dat - an - be n Dal-an-pe! Strike you two you first for for yourselves! selves I Strike your I Dat-jono-ma - i'! May I strike for myself 2 Dal-joQ-ma- m! Mayest thou strike for thy-, self! 3 Dal-j&a-m a - e May he strike for himself! BENEDICTIVEI Dal-joi-ma-1 i ni! May we two strike for ou rselves! Dal-joQi-na-be n! May you two strike for youryourselves! Dal-jop-ma-ki n! May they two strike for themselves! Dal-jor-ma-le! May5 we strike for ourselves Dal-j o - m -pe! May you strike for yourselves! Dal-tjoA - ma - k co! May they strike for themselves. ( 269 ) IMPERATIVYE. ta-j ~-m! Daiolfl-jQ -en, Dal-joh-pe! Strike Strike thou for Strike you two you for yourselves! thyself!.for yourselves. AD)JECTIVE PARTIICIPLES. FuTURE. Dat-jo i-(ki', &.o, ben, pe, ete,) Who will strike for himself.* SPECIIAL INCOMPLETE RES Dat -jQ kan, Who is striking for hialself. RwCENT IPASST. Dat-an,- Who stý_ruck for hmim. self. PE RFET. Dat-alcac-an, Who has struck for himself. SiPECIAL IENCOMPLETE PAST. Dai-jQ~-Jcan-ta.1Jclam, W h o was striking flor himself. INDECISIIVE PLUPERFECT. Dat-an-tah~kmn,,Who h a d. struck f~or himself. DiswisivE IPLUPR TECT. Dal -alcao-an-tah-eJcan, Who had struck for himself. INCHOATIVF FUTURE. Dal -jpiz tagit, Who will he.about to' strike for himself. GERUNDS. Dal-jonp-reaJ', te, re, kk~an, Of, hy, in striking for oneself. ENT. Dat-jQi-Jcan-reak%, te, re, Of, by, in striking for ones elf-, now, Dat-an_-reakt', te, re, Of, by, in having struck for oneself'. Dat.akmao-an-reale,, te, re, Of~by, in having struck for oneself. Da1t h-jg,,-an-tah-e'7an rea14 te, 'rOf, by, in striking for oneself, then. Dat-an-tahZJean-,reak', te -re Of, by, in having struck for oneself. Dat -alao-an-tah~Jcan- rea1k, te., rY.e, Of, -by, in having, struck for oneself..Dc.1'ti-jg agit't-reak'1, t ev e Of, by, in b'eing about to stri'ke for oneself. *Any of the nominative suffixes may be affixed to the participles ini order to show who is the Agent. ( 270 ) INCHOATIVE PRESENT. Dal-j0A-lagidok'-kan, Who is Dal-jQg-lagidok-kan-reak', te, about to strike for himself i re, Of, by, in being now about to strike for oneself. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal-jfg-lagido -tahA k a n,, Dalt-jQfo-lagidok-kan-tah-ekan - Who was about to strike veak, te, re, Of, by, in then befor himself. ing about to strike for oneself. CONDITIONAL, Dal-an, Who a y have Dal-a-rea, te, re, Of, by, struck for himself. in (case of) striking or having struck for oneself CONDITIONAL PERFECT. Dal-akao-an, Who may have Dal-a kao-an-reak, te, re, Of, struck for himself. by,. in (case of) having struck for oneself. ADVERBIAL PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. RECENT PAST. PERFECT. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST,. INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. DECISIVE PLUPERFECT. INCHOATIVE FUTURE. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. Dal-joi-khan, Striking for oneself. Dalt-jo-kan-khan, Striking for oneself now. Dal-an-khan, Having struck for oneself. Dat-akao-an-khan, Havi n g struck for oneself Dal-toj-kan-tahk1can - Uh a n, Striking for oneself then. Dal-an-tahZ'kan-khan, Having struck for oneself. Dal-akao-an-tah-1can- ik h an, Having struck for oneself. Datl-j Q-tagit'-kh an, Beingabout to strike for oneself. Dal-joA lagidok'-kan - k ha n, Being now about strike for to oneself. ( 271 ) INCHOATINE PAST, Dal-jQi lagqidok-kan-tah-kankhan. Being then about to strike for one self. CONDITIONAL, Dal-an-khan, Striking or having struck for oneself. CONDITIONAL PERFECT. Dal-akao-an-khan, Havi n g. (in case of) struck for oneself. PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULA- Dal-an-nah4i Striking fi r s t TIVE. for oneself. IPRELIMINARY PERSUASIVE. Dal-an-bah, Striking first for oneself. PRELIMINARY ADMISSIVE. Dal-an-ena, Striking fi r s t for oneself, PRELIMINARY PERFECT Ex- Dat-akao-am-nahr,& Hay ing POSTULATIVE. first struck for one self. PRELIMINARY PERFECT PRE- Dal-akao-ar-basi, IH avi ag SUASIVE. first struck for oneself. PRELIMINARY PERFECT AD- Dal-akao-an-ena, Ha v i n g MISSIVE. first struck for oneself. INFINITIVE. Dal-joh, To strike for oneself F. THE RESERVATIVE FORM. ACTIVE. FUTURIE TENCE. INDIcATIVE. SUDJUNCTIVE with SUBJUNCTIVE With "Kian" " Paset'." SINGULAR. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. I Dal-ka-n'-a-e, He Dal-ka-&-kha n - e Paset'-e dcEl - a i, will strike me If he will strike Perhaps he will (and leavet me.) me. strike me. 2 Dat-ka- m - a - e, Dal-ka-m-khan-e, Paset'-e-dal - k a - mr, He will strike If he will strike Perhaps he will thee. thee. strike thee. 3 Dal-ka-e-a-e, He Dal-ka-e-khan-e, Paset'-e-da 1- k a - e will strike him. If he will strike Perhaps he will him. strike him. Note. The Neuter has no Reflective Dative. * As gqch'-kad-e-a-', I killed him and left him, kiri%-kad e-a, I bought bim and left him (did not take him with me.) ( 272 ) DUAL. I Dal-ka-lid - a - e, He will strike us two. 2 Dat-ka-ben-a- e, He will strike you two. 3 Dal-lka-kitn-a-e, He will stri k e them two. PLURAL. I Dal-ka-1 e - a - e, He will strike us. 2 Dal-ka-pe - a -e, He will strike you. 3 Dal-ka-ko - a - e, He will strike him. Neuter. Dal-k a /' - a-e, He will strike it. DUAL. Dal-ka-lin-kehan - e, If he will strike us two. Dal-kca-ben-khane, If he will strike you two. Dal-ka-kin-ichane, If he will strike them two. PLURAL. Da-lca-te-lchan-e, If he will strike us. Dal-ka-pe-ichan-e, If he will strike you. Da-kca-kco-k/han-e, If he will strike them. Dal-cka/c-khan- e, If he will strike it1 DUAL. Paset'-e-dal-ka- I i,, Perhaps he w ill strike us two. Paset'-e-dal-Jca-b e n, Perhaps he wilL strike you two. Paset'-e-dalt-ka-k i, Perhaps he will strike them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dal- k a- I e, Perhaps he wil l strike us. Paset'-e-dal-k a - pe, Perhaps he will strike you. Paset'-e-dal-k a - k o, Perhaps he wi l strike them. Paset'-e-da-kalJ, Perhaps he will strike it. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. 1 DaWt-ca_-k/can- IDal-kcEa--kan- Paset'-e-da t-ka-ta-= a e, He is strik- khan-e, If he kan, Perhaps he is ing me. is striking me. striking me. 2 Dal-nm-kan-a- e, Dal-ka-m - Ic a n - Paser-e-dal - k a - m - He is strikitig khan-e, If h e kan, Perhaps he thee. is striking thee. is striking thee. 3 Dal-/ a-e-ka n - Dal-kIca - e - k a n - Past'-e-dal-ka-e-ka n, a-e, He is striking kchan-e, If he Perhaps he is strikhim, ' is striking him. ing him. ( 273 ) a-e, He is strikingr us two..2 Dal~a-bemn-kanat-e, lie i8sStrik'ing you two. a-e,. He is strikingr them two. PLURAIA, 1Dal-ca-le-k a n a,-e, Hle is striking us. 2 Dctl-ka'-pe-Iran a-e, He is strikinig you. 3 D al - 7,a.k.o-J7ran - ac-e, He is striking them.,Neuter..Dal-ka-M,-kan-a-e, He is striking it. DUAL. -Dal-ka-lIs~n. kea n - khan-e, If. h e is striking us two., Datleka-ben'-k a n krhai-6--, If he is striking you two.,Dal-7ra-lein-7c a n khama-e, If he i -s strikingthern two. PLXi1MAL.' D at-leca-Z e - k, a n'khanv-e, If h eis striking us. Dat-1ta-pe - e aI n' lehan-e, If h e is striking you. Dctt-lea-leo-le.anlehan-e, If li e is st~rikingr them. Dt -zlea- 1 M-Ic a n lrhari-e, If h e is strikingr it. klean, Perhaps. he is striking us two. Paset'-'e-da la-b e n-: lea-n, -Perhaps h1e is striking. you, twvo.ý lean, Perhaps: he, is Otriking them ~two;. PtURAL. Pase'-eclut lea - Cle~a, Perhaps ht-1 is strkin tS. Paset'-e-datl-ke a -pe - lean, Perhaps he is strikingr you. Paset'-e-dat-lc a - keomm lean, P-erhaps- he is striking them. Paset'-e-da I - le a -Y lea`n, Perhaps he is striking it. RECEF~NT PAST. SINGULAR. SINGULM." IDat-lea-d-ini-a -e, Dcd-kttd-,* -khant*He struck mne e, If he struck (and left me). mne..2 Dat-kat'-rne-a-e, DaL-leat'-me-leha-', lie struck thee. el If he struck thee. 3Dat-lead-e,- a - e) Dal-lrad-e-lchan-e, He struck him.- If he struc~k hin. SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dai-lcad--i?` n'i Perhaps he struck me.n Paset'-e.-dd-kleat'- me9 Perhaps.he struck thee. Pas-et'-er-d at- lea d, e Perhaps he str~uck him, DU7AL. I Dal. kat'-ti~ae Re struck us two. 2 DaZ-lxtt-ben-a-e, Hie struck yon two. 3 Dat-I at'-AIcin-ct-e, He struck them two. PLURAL1, 1Dat-Icat'-le-a -e He struck us. Dal- lat'-tin-*-khan - e, If he struck us two.Dal -ka t' b e nkham-e, If hi e struck you two. Dat" -, a t'- k i nkhan-e, If h e struck them two.. PLURAL. -Dat -Jr at'-te-Ic ham-e, If he struck us. DUAL. Paset'..e-dat-Ieat-tA, Perhaps he struck us two. Pa set'-e-dat17-kat'. ben, Perhaps he struck you two. Pa.3et'-e~dat-Icat'4ckin, Peiha~ps he struck them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e- dal-/ca t'- I eV Perhaps he struck us. Paset'-e-dat-Icat'.. p e Perhaps he strucký von. Paset'-e-dat-kat'- k.o, Perhaps he struck them. Paset'e -.cd at1-/c.a t'. Perhaps he struck it. 2 Dat-A He st 3 Dat-A He st Neuter. a-we, it,' ~at'-pe-a- e, Dat-Icat'-pe-/chanruck you. ex. if he struck you.;at'-/co~a- eDat -ka t'-Iro-I khan 10 ruck them. e, if be struck themi. Dat-/cat'- Dat-/cat'-kham- e, Hle striick. If he struck it. PE~RFECT. SINGULAR.' 1 Dai--a/cad-iiz- a - e. He has struck!2 Dcdataat'-me-a C., He has struck thee. 3 Dat-akad-e-a-e, He has struck Lim. SINGULAR. Datl(/ rakd - if, kliam,-e, If he has struck me. Dat-a/c. a t' - m e,kham-e, If he has struck thee. ýDat-a/cac-e-khan,e, Ife has struck him. SINGULAR. PaSet'-e-dat-a/cad-i" i', Perhaps he has struck me. Paset'-e-d atI-a k.a t'me, Perhaps he has struck thee, Paiset'-e-dat-acact -ePerhaps he has struck him, ( 275 ) DU-AL. e, He has struck us two. 2 Dal-akat'- ben -ae, He has struck you two. 3 Dcd-alcat'-kin-ae, He has struck DUAL. khan-e. If he has, struck us two6 Dal-alca t' - b e n - kham-e, If he has struck you two. Dal-alca t' - k, i nlchan-e, If he has them two, struck them two..PLURAL. PLURAL. I Dal-alcat'-le-a-e, Dal-alrat'-te-JchanHe has st-ru ck e, If he h as IIIS. struck us. 2 Dal-alcat'-pe-a-e, Dal-akat'-pe-JchanHe has struck e, If he h as you. struck you. 3 Dal- Jat'a-k-o-a-e, Dal-alcat'-lco-khamHe has struck e, If he, h- a s them. struck them. N~euter, Dat-ajeat'- Dai-ak-at'-lchan-e,. a-e, He h a s If he has struck struck it. it. DUAL. Paset'-e-dal-ak-at'-ZUi,4 Perhaps he has struck us two. Paset'-e -dat a ic a t be~n, Perhaps' h e has struck you two. Paset'-e-dal - a )c a t kein, Perhaps he has struck them two. PLURAL..Paset' e-dat-alcat'- I e, Perhaps he has struck us. Paset-e-dcdl-alat'-p 6, Perhaps he has struck you. Paset'-e-dai-afc~at'-ko, Perhaps h e ha, s struc'k them. Paset -e-cial a k a t', Perhaps h e h a s, struck it, SPE3CIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. STNOGULAR. SINGULARt. I Da1-1ca-,-Jce a n - Dcj-7ea-?1'_-ka-tah~j tahVca~n--a-e, He kan-khctn-e, If 11 was strikingr me. wfvs striking me. 2 Dul-l;a-m-1ca 'n - Dal-Jca-mn-lrav,-tatilhdcan-a-e, He hZ~kan-liha n - e, -was. striking thee. If lie was strikiLVy thee. 3 Dat-ka-e- 7r. a 9- Dad-i1'a~a-kan-ta - tak7ikan-a-e, He hLZicaq?,-1"Ia m e wais str i k i na g If he was strikhim. n himat SINGULARI..Paset'ecakaia~ta/Leiran, Perhaps he was strilking me.. Paset'-e-d-((I- kc a - rn - i'an-ta1l7icaxn, Perbaps lie was. strikPast'I-e-da I - le a - e kan-tafhelcum, Perhaps he was strikC2 ing him. ( 276 ) DUAL. Dat -lia-iii'-kan tah-ekaln-a-e, He was strikingr us two. 2 Dat-ka-ben-icantahZJcap-a-e, He was strikimg you two. -3 Dal-k a-ki*nkan-tah-e1can- a - e, He was striking themt two. PLURAL. SDat-kea-te-ka n - tah~ean-a-e., He: was strikingo us. 2 Dat-ica-pe-k antahelkan-a-e, He was striking, you: ~3 Dal9-Ja-co-kantah~Jcan-a-e., He was striking them. Neuter. Dal-1cak, - -kan-tah Z k ani- - a-e, He was striking it. )DUAL. Dal-ka -tin-k- a n~ - tahVeAan-k-han-e, If he was strikingr us two. Dat -7a-ber,,-ka n tah-elcan-l'han-e, If he was striking you two. tahdcan-khan-e, If he was striking them two. PLURAL. Dat -ka-te-4kanu-ta - hMican-kha u - e If he, was strik-_ ing us, Dat -Jc-pe,-Jcam~ah7Jcan-lch a n - If he, was striking, you. DUAL Paset'-e- dat-ka - 1 U - 1can-tah-Jcan, Perhaps he was striking us two. Paset'-e-dat-Jca-b e n k-an-tah-Jcan, Perhaps he was, strikrng you two. IPaset'-e-clal-ka-k i n - kcan-tah-e1can, Perhaps he was striking them twvo. PLUTRAL, Paset -e-dal -lca--Ie - 1can-tah-e/an, Perhaps he was strik-- mo* u.ts. Ecset'-e-dat -ka -p ekan-tahT'lJcan,, Perhaps he was striking you. 0 I Dat-kca-ko-kan-ta- Paset'-e-dal-ka- k o - hzknn-kchan - e, kan-tah~kan, P -erIf he wvas strik- haps he was striking the.m. ing them. Dal,-ka1k-kan-ta-' Paset'-e-dat-1l- k a k' - h-ekan-kkan - e) kan-tah~lcan, Per-, If he was sýtrik- haps be Wa's striking. it. ing it. ( 277 ) INDEISGISVE PLUPERYEO T. SIXGULAR. SINGULAR. SINGULAR I Dat-kad-in'-tahZ Dal-kad,-qiA-tah-e, Paset'-e-dal-Jcac-i, lcan-a-e, He had kan-ldzan-e, If he tak'eJcan, P erh aps struck me. had struck me. he had struc-k me.,2Dal-kat'-me -tcth Dcd-kat'-me-tah-e - Paset'-e-dal-lrat'-m e kan-a-e, He had kan-khan-e, If he tah-ekan., Perhaps struck thee. had struck thee. he had struck thee. 3 Dal-1cad-e-tahe - Dal-lcad.=e-t a he*. - Paset'-e-dal-kact-e-takan-a-e, He had 'kan-khan-e,If he h Z k an, Perhaps struck him, had struck him. he had struck hi~m. DUAL. D )UAL. ]DUAL. I Dal-kcat'-liii-t a -Dal-kat'- tin" -tah ', Paset'-e-dal-Jcat'-lin' hie1cari-a-e, He kan-lchan..e, If tah~1can, Per h ap s had struck us he had struck us he had struck us two. two. two. 2 Dal-kat'-ben-ta - Dal-kat'-ben-tahZ- Paset'-e-dal-1eat'.bemq h~eJkan-a- e, Be kam-lehan-e, If tahZ- Je-,a n, Perhaps had struck you he had struck he had struck you two. you two. two. 3 Dal,-kat'-ldin-ta - Da1-7,-at'-1ein-tah'e- Paset'-e-dat-kat'-1,-intkWcam-a- e, He kam-lchcn-e, -If' tah/Z h an, Perhaps. had struck them he had struck he had struck thern two. them two. two. PLURAL. PLURAL. PLURAL..1 Dal-kat'-le-tah -e Dal-Jcat'-le-ta h -0 - Paset'-e-da1-1rat'- I e koan-a-e, He had kam-Jchan-e, If tah~Jin n, Perhaps struck us. he had struck us. 'he had struck us. 2Dal-kat'-pe-tahe- Dal,-kat'-p6-tah e - Paset'-e-ctctt-kat'- e kan-a-e, He had 1can-1khan-e, If tah~1kan, Perhaps struck you. he had struck you. he had struck you. 3Dct1-1cat'-kcoý t a - Dat.kat-'-kco-t ah Z - Pctset'-e-cdal-Jrat'- le - h~kan-a - e.lHe kan-kchan-e, If he, tah'e-kan, Perhaps had struck them. had struck them. he had struck them. -Neuter. Dat -A; at'-ta- Dal-lcat'-tah~-1-7an, Paset'-e-dal-keat'-tahk-e hU1cart-a-e, li-e kehan - e,3 If he, i can, Perhaps he had struck it. had struck it. ý had struck it, ( 2'78 ) DECISIVE PLUP ERFECT. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. I SINGULAR. I Dal-alcad--ig-ta - Dal-ct kad-in- t a - jPaset'"ee-dal-ctJad-ifi-: hVatn-a-e, He 1t'.-an-1chan-e, If tah~la n, Perhaps had struck me. hie had struck me. he had struck me. 2 Dal-a-lea-t'-m e -Dat -al'at'-me-tah&Z Paset'- e-dai-ak~at'-m a tahZAJ-an-a-e, He 1ian-1ohan-e, f lie tah.Z1can, Perhaps had struck thee. had struck thee. he had struck thee, 3 Dal-alcart-e-tahZ Dal-alraci-e-tah"C - Paset'-e-dal-a1f; a d -elean- a - e, He lcam-kehan-e, If lie tahWIan, Perhap s had struck him. had struck him. he had struck hitn. DUAL. DUAL. DUAL. I D-al-a1,kat'-ti;4-ta- Dal-akat'-li.-tcth'- Paset'-e-dat-a~cat'-liti.. lt-1can-a-e, He kan-A-han-e, If tcth~1oan, Perhaps had struck us he had struck us he had struck us two. two. two. 2 Dai-akcat'-b ein hD- ak-ant'-ben-ta - Paset'-e-clalia ko at' tahekart-c-e, He hZ1catn-1lchtn-e, If ben-taliZ-1Awn, P e r - had struck you he had struck Laps he had struck two. you two. you two. 3 Dal-akctt'-J i n - Dal-abat':IJdn-ta -Paset'-e-datI- a 7e a t' - 'taltVkani-a-e, He 1te car.-han4an.-e, If 1cin-tah~1ean, Perhad struck them he had struck Laps hie had struck twvo. them tw~o, them two. PLURAL. PLURAL. PLURAL. 1 Dal-aka-wt'-e-t a -Dal-akavt'-te-tahkZ - Paset'-e-dal-aJrat'-l e hVran-a- e, He icart-ichan-c, If tah-eVca n, Perhaps ha~d struck us. He had struck-. us. hie, had struck us. 2 Dal-aA,-at-pe-ta- D(1t-a Jeat'-pe-tahZ- Paset-e-cfl -aliat'-pe e IteAran-a-e, He lcan-lchan-e, If he taAZ7ram,Perhaps hie had struck you. ha-d struck you. had struck you. 3 Dat-a cat'-/co-ta - Dat -a lcat'-/co-ta h -e Paset'-e-clat-alcrat'-k 0 -hWlan-a-e, He kan-1c-han-e, f lie tah~1can, Perhaps had struck themy. had struck them. lie had struck thern. Neuter. Dal -a/.alt'- Dat-a/cat'- t a h. Z - Paset'-e-calt-alcat'-ta tah~/can-a-e, He lcar-khan-e,) If ha/can, Perhaps he.had struck it. he had struck it. had struck it, ( 279 ) INCHOATIVE FUTURE.' 2 3 2 SIN-GULAR. SIN,ýGULAR. le, lHe will 'be kltan-e, I f li e about to strike will b~e about to m e. st~rike me, Da1-Jia vrn-lagit'- Dl-amtg't e, lie will b~e khan-e, If hie about to strike wilt be about to thiee. strike thiee. Dal-kct~e-layit' -DlJxe-6yi' e, He will be khan-e, If hie about to strike will be about to him. strike him. DUAL. DUAL. Dal-ka-li~ I a - Dctl-Jca-Upla-lctit' git'-es lRe will khan-e, If' h e be about to strike wvill be about to us two. strike us two. Dal-ka-bert- 1 a - Dal-ka-ben-iagit' - yit'-e) He will, lhan-e, If h e be about to strike. will be about to you two. strike y~ou two. Dal-ka-lkiil- I a -Dal-ka-kin-lagitgit'-e. He will khctm-e, If h e be about to strike, will be about to them two. strike them two. PLURAL. PLURAL. Dal-ka-le-lagit' Dal-ka-le-lag 't' C, He will he khan -e,,If h e about to strike will be about to I-S. strike us. e, He will be lchan-e, If he, about -to strike_1 will be about to you. Istrike you. SINGULAIM. PaSet'-e-dct_-ka-i1-l agit'J, Perhia ps h e will be about to strike mne. Pas~et-e-dal4Ia-rn -lagit',) Perhaps he will be about 'to strike thee. Paset'-e-dac'l-kcta-e-1 a git', Perha p s h e wvill be about to strike him. IDUAL. tagit', Perhaps he will be about t o strike us two, Pa~set'-e-dal-Jxt-b e n lagit', Perhiaps lie wvill be abo ut to strike you two..Paset'-e-dal-ka-kin, Jagit', Perhaps he will be about to strike them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-.dal-ka-le-la.. git'), Perhaps h e will be about t o strike us. Paset'-e-dal-Jca-re-lagil', Perhaps hi e will be -about t o striko. You, 3Dcd-ka-ko-6agi*tl, e, He will be abift to strike Neuter. Dal-ca1& lagit'-e, Hel will be about to strike it. I NC SINGULAR. It Dcikt gid ok'-lcan.-a-e, He is abo'ut to strike me. 2Dct1-la-m-la 0~ do1-kart-a-e, He is about-to strike thee. S Da14cct-e-tcg i doTc.-kan-a-e., He 'Is about to strike 'him. I Dai-kct-li,'-lagict-is about to strike us 'two. okka-aeHe is about to strike ý70O1fivto. 3 Dacal4t-cin-lctid. - okh'a-a-, le is about to:strilie themn two. ( 280, Dal-icaq-ko-tagi t' - Paq -e-dal-lJaJko-cl, lchan-e, If he git', Perhaps he will be. about to will- be about to, strike them, strike themn. Dalr-kaJ-la g i t' - Paset'-e-dal-leaM1~a - kchan-e, If lie git', Perhaps he, will be about to will be about to strike it., strike it, HOATIVE PRESENT. SINGULAR. kam-khan-e, I f he is about, to strike me. Dal-ka-mi-tag i d.. o1e!-kan-khan -e, If h e is about to strike thee. Dat-ka-e-lagidoJ.kan-khan-e, If he is about to strike him. DUAL. o1r.-Acan-kihan -c If he is about to strike us two. Dal-ka-btri-Iaq)ido1~ka'n-1cha n-e. If he was abhout to strike you two. Dal-kra-kinA-lLtgidcolS-b-[am-ldzctm-. If ble i's about to strike themn two, SlINGULAR. Paset -e-clal-ka-g,-lagiclolc-Ian, Per haps he is abou~t to strike mne. gicolo-kcam, P e r haps he is about to strike thee. Paset'-_e-dal-ka-e-l a giclo13-ka'n, P e r haps he is about to stirike him_..DUAL. Paset,'-e-dalc-ka- I i ni lgidoV'-kal', Per. Laps he is about to strike us two. PasQet'-e-dcd-7ea-be na,. ~gido~kct.,n, Per~ balps lie is about to strike you two. Paset'.e-dal-k~a-/c i6 na - lagildok'-kan, Per`ýhaps be is about to strike thein two. (2-81 ) PLURAL. 1* Dal-1a-te-laglidO1e'-lan-a-e, He is about to strike us. 2 Dat -ka-pe-lagidolJ-lcan.-a-e, He is about to strike you. 3. Dat-/ca-ko-lagidoo-k-Jan-a-e, He is about to strike -them. Neuter. Dal-lca-iSIa gidolS-lean-a - -e,, He is about to strike it. PLURAL.` Da-lea -te-lagidoM,lean-khan-e', if he is about to strike us. Dat-kea-pe-tagi d - oS-lean-lehan - e, If he is'about to strike you. Dat -ica-lco-tagi d ' oloS-lan-khan. e, If he is about to strike them. Dal -ka-iS-tagidolSkan-lehan-e, If he, is about to strike it. P LuJrATJ, Paset)--a-e-et gidolS-lan, Perhaps he is about to strike US. Paset'-e-dal-lea-pe-ta-~ gidolr, -lan, Perhap's he is about to strike you. Paset'-e-dal-ca-leo-tagidol3'-lean, Perhaps he is about to strike: them. Pas-et'-e-dat-lea-1g- a gidolc'-kan, Perhaps he is about to strike it. INCHOATIVE PAST. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. I Dat -.la-n`-tagictd Da~l7ea-n--lagidok& ol'-lean-i ah-le an- lean-ta h A- la n a-e, H e w aIs lehan-e, If h e about to strike was ab o ut t o me. strike me. 2Dat-lea-m-lagicl- Dal-lea-rn- t ag i o1IS kcan - tah -elean - dolS -l'ean- t a h -6'= a-e, IH e w a -s kan-khan%-e, I f about to strike be was about to thee. strike thee..3 Dal-ka-e-lagict- Dal-lca-e-tagidolSo~le-an-tah'Uean- lean--ta h -e lea n - a-e, He was lehant-e, If h e -about to strike wajs ab-o u t t o him. strike him., SINGULAR. Paset'-e-dat lek a - n tagidok~-lan-ta h e lean,. Perhaps h e,was about to strike Paset'-e-dal le7 a -m tagidoclS-lean- t a h 'e lean, Perhaps h e was about to strike thee. Paset'-e-da I - ka -e tagidolS '-lean-I a h -', lean -Perhaps h e was abou t to strike him. ( 282 ) DUAL.. I Da1-1lea-ini-Ia - gidoke-lean-tahZ - lean-a-c, Hie was about to strike us two. 2 Dat-la-ben- I a - gidoklecan tah e - lean-a-e, He was about to strike you two. 3 Dal-leca -kinlagidoklc-Jan-ta - h~ca~n-a- e, H e was about to strike them two. PLUIRAL. I al.-lca-le-lagictolk-1 a n - t a h Z' lean-a-c, He was about to strike us. 2 Dal-/ca-pe-lagidolc3-le a n - t a lit - lean-a-c, He was about to strike you. 3 Dal-lea-Jeo-lag&1,-7 okr.ler a n - t a h Z -I lean-a-c, He was about to strike them, Neuter. D atI-kea IV la~qido M - kea n - tah~ilan-a-c, He was about to strike it.. DUAL. ol3 -lea n - t a h 'e - lean-lchan-e, if he was about to strike us two. Dalt-lea-ben-la qid-ý ol'-le a n -tah e lean-kchan-e, I ~ hie was about to strike you two, Dalra-lekin-l~igidokr.'ic a n - t a h c - lean-/c han-c, If he was about to strike them two. PLURAL. Dal-lea-i e-laq I'd - olc'-ca n - t a 7h -e - lean-kb han-c, If he was about to istrike us. Dat-lea-pc-lag i, doke-loaT6- tath 71 -lean-ickan-e, If he was -about to strike you.' Dat-/a-i-co-la~gi d - ok-lean n-tahZlean-lehan-e, If he was about to strike them. Dat-Jea-1e-tagidolelean-ta h l7ca n - lehan-e, I f h e was about to strike it, DUAL. *Pasct'-e-dal-lca -i 121 - tagidol'-lean- t a h -e - lean, Perhiaps h) e was about to strike us two. Paset'-e-dat -lea-b e n - tagidole.-lean-t a h 'e" - lean, Perhaps h e -was about to strike you two. Pas-et'-e-dat-Jeca-Je i n layidoki-lean-t a h Z lean, Perhaps h e w Ias about to strike them two. PLURAL. Paseti-e-cala- lo a - I e iagidol%-'ea-n-t a h Z - lean, Perhaps h e was about to strike Paset'-e-dlalIt-,l a - p e tagidokY lean- t ac h -e - lean, Perhaps 11 e was about to strike you. Paset'-c-dat-le a - le o - lagidole'-lean-t a hi e - lnPerhaps h e was about to strike them. Paset'-c-da I - lea - Y~ - tagido1k'-lean-t a h Z - lean, Perhaps h e was about to strike. ( 283 ) CONDITIONAL. SINGULAR. 1 Is wanting. 2 3 DUAL. 2 PLURAL. 2.3 Neuter. SINGULAR. Dal-alca-A'-Jchan-e, If he has struck me. Dald-alka-m-lchan - e, If he has~ struck thee. Dal-akla-e-kcham,-e, If he has struck hiM1. DUAL. Dal- ak~a1i 41-1chaneIf h e ha s struck us two. Dal - alia - b ein - kl.-am-'e, If 1i e has struck yo u two. Dal -alIca -lic q lechan-e, If' he has struck themn two. PLURAL. Dat-a/ca-ic-k/ian e, If hie ha s struck us. Dat -akia pe-lkkane, If hie has struck you. Dal-alca-ko-/chane, If he has struck thjem. Da.'-alcae-khn e, If he has struck it. SINGULAR.& Paset'--e-dat -a7c a. - Perhaps he has struck me. Faset'-e-dat -ale a- m, Perhaps h e ha s struck thee. Paset'-e-d at- a io a -e, Perhaps h e hasa struck him. DUAL. Perhiaps h e h a s struck us two. Paset'-e-dat-aka-ben 5P Perhaps h e ha s struck you two. Paset'-dat-akia- 7- i n) Perhaps h e hi a s struck them two. PLURAL. Paset'-e-dat-akca - Z e, Perhaps he has struck us. Paset'-e-dat-aka- p e.9 Perhaps h e ha s struck you. Faset'-e-dat-alca- lt-,o, Perhaps h e hi a s struck them, Paset'-e-dat - a k. a-e Perhaps hi q h a s struck it. ( 284 ) SINGULAR. IL Dat-kad-4,n-qi.e, He trikes, will, or would strike me. 2 Dal-kat'-me-gie,1 He strikes thee. 3 Dal--kad-e-yi-e, He strikes him.. DUAL. 1 Dal-oat-'-tiý.gi-e, He strikes us two. 2' Daal-kaut'-benngiie, He strikes you two. t, Dal-Ja'-7mt` 7cin-g' He strikes them two. PLURAL. I Dal-kat'-te-gi 'lie strikes us. 2; Dal-Teat'-regi,-e, He strikes you 3 Dal-kaca'-ko-gile, He strikes them. Neuter. Dal-kat'-gid e, He strikes it. I CONTINGENT, SINGULAR. PILRAL. SINGULAR. Paset' -dat-kad-c4* n" -~ gi, Perhaps he strikes, will or would strike me.,Parset'-e-d;at-ka-t~'-.nmmegi, Perhaps be will strike thee. Paset'-e'al-Jaad-e-. i. Perhaps he will strike hi*.m. DUAL. P'aset'-e-dal-kat'42-E n' - gq,, Perhaps he will strike us two. Pas-et'-e-dal-klat'-bien - gi, Perhaps he will strike you two. Pasett'-e-dat-lcat'-kin 9i, Perhaps he will strike themn two., PLURAL. Paset'-e-dal-kat'-te-gli Perhaps he will strike us. Paset'-e-dal-lcat'-p e gi, Perhaps he will strike you. Paset'-e-datl-Iat'- 1r, o gi, Perhaps he wid strike them. Paset'-e-dat-loat' -9gi Perhaps he will strike it, 2 28,5 P'RELIMI[NARY EXPOSTULATIVE. 8 INGULAR. e, He must first strike me. 2Dal-aka-ra,-n a - ItU-6c, H e mu s t first strike thee. 3 Dat-a Jca-,,c-nah?-, c, He must first strike him. Neater. Dal-akcacnaut-e, Hle must -firsit strike it. LJUALJ. rLuRAL. Da1-aka-lin'-nahU- Dat -alca-te-n a h Z' *- 6 e, He must first He must first strike stri'ke us two. Us& Dat -aJa-ben-m a Dal-alca-pe-nah e,Uz-c, He must He, must first strike first strike you you. two. Dal-aka-kiin-n a - Dat-akic-ko- n a US - e \ -,He must He must first strike first strike them them, PRELI MINARY PERSUAIS1YE. He M ust first strike me. 2Dat.-ak-a-m-ba- c He must, first strike thee. 3 Dat-aka-e-bal- e,' He must first strike hlim. N~euter. Dal-aka-cba-c. He must flirst strike it. Dat-ab~a-tin-ba- e, Dat-alca-tc-bawec, Hý 'He must first m-ust first strike us. strike us two. Dat -a ka-ben-ba-e, Dat -afca-pe-ba-c, He He must first must first strike you. strike you two..Dat -aka-kim~n-ba-c,, Dat -a ka-ko-ba,-P, He He must first must first, strike Istrike th-em- two. them.x ( 286 ) PRELIMINARY ADMISSIVE. SINGULAR. I Dat-a/ka-4i en-ae, He must first strike me. 2 Dal-akca-m-en-ae, He must first strike thee. 3 Dal-aka-e-en-a - e, He must first strike him. Neuter. Dal-akcaeena, Hemustfirst strike, it. DUAL. Dal-alca-lin'-en-ae, He must first strike us two. Dal-alca-ben-e n - a-e, Hemustfirst strike you two. Dal-aka-kin-e n - a-e, He must first strike them two. PLURTAL, Dal-akca-Ze-e n - a - e, He must first strike us. Dal-acka-pe-en - a- e He must first strike you. Dal-aka-cko-en - a - e, He must first strike them. BENEDICTIVE. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-ka---ma-e! May he strike me! 2 Dal-ka-rn-ma-! i May I strike thee! 3 Dal-ca-e-ma-m! Mayest thou strike him. Neuter. Datl-kaca7 -ma-e! May he strike it. SINGULAR. 1 Dal-a- a- rme! Strike thou me! 3 Dac-kc- e - m e! Strike thou himl Neuter. Dal-lkaklme! Strikethou it DUAL. Dal-ka-lit-ma-cko May they strike us two! Dal-c-ka-ben- m a - le! May we strike you two. Dal--ka-kin- m a - pe! May you strike them two! PLURAL. Datl-ka-le-ma- k i n F May they two strikes us! Dat-ica-pe-ma- i ti, May we two strike you. Dat-ka-ko-ma-b e n. May you two strike them' IMPERATIVE. DUAL. Dal-ke-.a-lidz'-b en! Strike you two us two! Datl-kca-kin- ben i! Strike you two them two! PLURAL. Dal-ka-le-pe! Strike you us. Dat-ka-ko pe! Strike you them! ( 287 ) ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES. GERUNDS. FUTUIRE. DAt-kxt-, (ko, kin, pe, ben et(,.,) Dc4-ka-lco-rectJo, te, 7-e, 0 f, Who" wvill strike mne (and by, in strikingr them now. GENTRAL NCOMLETEPRESENT. Dat-ka-liti-kctm, Who is strik-. Dal-Jca-ko-kan-reaA, te, re, Of, ingr us twvo. by, in striking them now. RECENT PAST. Dal-lcat'-le, Who struck us. Dat-lcat'-ko-realc, te, re, Of, PERFECT, by, in having struck them. Dal-ak~at' -me, W h o h a s Dal-alcctt'-ko-ream1, te, lie, Of, struck thee. by, in havinga struck them. GENERAL INCOMPLETE PAST. DaU-,-a-ben-/kai? ta h Z lo a n'. Dal- ka- 7o-kan-tahZk an-rea1k, Who was striking you two. te, y'e, Of, by, in striking them INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. then. Dal1ca'-einta~1cn, They Dal-kat'-ko -taft eJcan-recd,-, te, two, whom they had struck. re, Of, by, in having struck DECISIVE PLUPERIFECT. them. Dal -alcat'-ko -tahJcan, They., Dal -akat'-ko-tah-Jcan,"-r e a whom they had struck. te, re, Of, by, in having INCHOATIVE FUTURE. struck them. Dai-ka-e.lagit', He, whom Dal-1ca-1co-tagit'-rea1k, te, re they will be about to strike. Of, by, in being about to INCHOATIVE PRESENT. strike them. Dat -ka-ko-Ia g i" d o k - le a n, Dal-ka-kco-lagidold-kan-rea JY, They, whom they are about te, 're, Of, by, in' being to strike, now about to strike them. INCHOATIVE& PAST. Dal-ka-ko-tctgidok'-1&cn-ta h e DaZ-kra-7o.tctgidoJ~-kan-t a ke kan, 'They, whom they k~an-reak te, re, Of. by, in were about to strike, beling then about to strike CONDITIONAL, them. bta-aka-ko, They, w h o m Dal- -aJ7-ko-i-eakY, te, ire, Of they may have struck. by, in having struck them, ( 288,) -AD-VERBIA PARTI-CIPLES. (ANIMATE.) "ZPECIAL INCOMPLETING PRESENT. RECENT PAST. PERFECT.. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT, DECISIVE PLUPERFECT,. INCHOATIVE FUTURE, INCHOATIrVE PRESEN*T. INCHOcATIVE PAST. CONDITIONAL. Dat -ka'-ko k h a n Striking' them, Dal-ka-icin-kan 4eha, Str~ik-' ing them two now. Dat -Icad- e - kc h a n, Havitig struck hiim. Dctt-alcat'-me-Icart. Having struck thee. Dat-ka-ý,z-1can-tcth'e-1can-khjan, Strikingr me then. Dal-1cat'-.pe-tak-Jca n - kc h a n, Having struck you. Dat-a~cat'-1e--&ahi~e/an- k h a n Having struck us. Datla-lko-tagit'-lchan, Being about to strike them. Dat-k~a-kro-agidoJr,-1can-kzhan, Beingr now about to strike them. Dat -ka ko-tctgido1k-kan-tah -8 - kart-khan-, Being then about to strik-e the n. Da(-ctka-ko- k h an, Having struck themn (i. e. in ca se of.) Dat -a ica-ko- n a h z-, Having first struck them. Dat-a/c~a- 7c o - b a it Having first struck them. Dat -alca-ko-ena, Having first..1struck them. Dat -ia-( ko, kin, e e tc.,) To strike them etc. PRELIMINTARY TIVE. P1arEimmINAIRX EXPOSTULA-. PERSUASIVE. -PRELIMIRARY A-DmIssivE;INFINITIVE. ( 289 ) A DJ ECT IVE -P ARTIGAP LES. (IJNANIMATE.) FUTURE. Dcd-ka1', Which they will.Strike. SPECIA.L INCOMPLETE PRE Dal1-1car,-1~-tan, Which 'they a~re str'iking.% RECENT PAST. *Dal-Jcctt'. Which they struck. PERFECT. Dal-aAkat', Which they bave struck. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST.,Dal-1i~a-1z'-kan-tath-elc~a., which,they were striking. INDECISIV E PLUPERFECT. DaZ-1cct'-tah~1cam, Which they had 'Struck. DECISIVE P-LUPERFECT. Dat -alcat'-tach73 le a n, Which they had struck. INCHOATIVE FUTURE. Dal-Ia-S-tlagit', Which -they -will be about to strikie. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. Dat -1a1k.lagidoL~1can, Which they are about. to strike. GERUNDS. D at -kloa lz- r ecaJM) te, re, Of, by, in striking it.. SENT. Dctt-Jca1_-1can-rea~er', te., re, Of, by., in striking it now. in having struck it. DAtl-alcat' rea1J,, te, re,.in having struck it. 'Of, by, Of, byp Dat-ca1S-Jcan-tctk~Jcan-reak", te, re, 0Of, by, in striking it then.,D~at-ic at-tah7,ban-vIecII7.-', fe, r e, Of, by, in having struck it. D~at-ct/cat'- tah~1cctn-veaMIS, te, ye, 'Of, by, in havingr struIck it. Dat.1~ca-lla git'-?realoS, te, re, Of, by, in beinDg about to strike it. Dcd-calS, laqidolc'lcan-realS, te, ye, Of, by, in beingp about to strike it now. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal-lca-1S-tagi'dolS-kan-t a h Dat.lcaJ-tagictolk-lan- t a h Ican, Which they were about ican-realS, te, re, Of, byý, in to strike, being about to strike it then, CONDITIONAL. Dat -aka-e, Which they may Dal-alcae-realS, te, 're, Of?, by have struck, in havin stukIt S ( 290 ) ADYERIAAL PART ICIPLES,. (INANIMATE.) FUTURE. Dat-loakJlchan, Striking 'It. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRE- Dat-caJo'~kan-khan, StrikincTZ SENT. it now. RECENT PAST. Dat-cat'-lchan, Having struck it. PERFECT. Dat -akat'-Je han, H av i ng struck it. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST, Dat -ha 1e-han-tah'Vcan-1 hta n Striking it then. INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. Dal- kat'-'tah-Ucan -hhan, Hay-- ing struck it. DECISIVE PLUPERFECT. Dat -aleat'-tahcth to a n - k1- h a n, Having struck it. INCHOATIVE FUTURE. Dat htl~-iay-it'-Jchan, Being about to strike it. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. Dal-lcal-layicdol-han-lo h a n, Being now ab~out to, strike it. INCHOATIVE PAST. Dal,-Jacak-lagido7,-,-a n -t a h Z - han-Jehan, Being then about to strike it. CONDITIONAL. Dal-akae-kh a n, H a v i n g struck (in case of.) PRELIMIN-ARY EXPOS T ITLAT- Dat-a Jcae-naht-&, Havingý first IVE. struck it. PRELIMINARY PERSUA'SIVE. Dat-akJae-bah., Having. first struck it. PRELIMINARY ADMIISSIV. D'at-ahave-ena, Having first; struck it. I NFINITIVE. Pat-ha l, To-strike it, ( 291 ) G. RESERVIATIVE FORM. SREFLEXIVE. FUTURE TENSE. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. I Dal-kolo-a-l, I Dal-ko/i-kIhain-i, will strike my- If I will strike self: myself. 2 Dal-kolk- a - c m,,Dal-hcok-khllan-ewm, Thou wilt strike If thou wiltstrike thyself. thyself. 3 Dal-kolh-a-e, He Dal-Jco-khha - e, wvill strike him- If he will strike self. himself. DUAL. 1 Dat-lcoh-a- Ii i, We two will strike ourselves. 2 Dal-kok-a-b en,, You two will strike yourselves. 3 Dal-kok/-a-ki in, They two will themselves. PLURAL. I Dal-hohi- a - I e, We will strike ourselves. 2 Dal-koh- a - ape, You will strike yourselves. 3 Dal-Ckol- a - k o, They wvill strike themselves,. DUAL. Da~lco/k-khan-til, If we two wil strike ourselves. Dal-kokh-khan-ben, If you two will strike yourselves. Dal-koMl-khan-kin, If they two will strike themselves. PLURAL. Dal l-ko'-khan-1, e If we will strike ourselves. Dal-kohi-khan-pe, If you will strike yourselves, D al-o-k-khlan-ho, If they willstrike themselves. SINGULAR. Paset'-ipi-d at I - l o /, Perhaps I will strike myself Paset'-em-dal - o M, Perhaps thou w il t strike thyself. Pa8et'-e- d a I - k o I, Perhaps he w ll strike himself. DUAL. Pacset'-ii-c-dala - ko /,c Perhaps we two will strike ourselves. Paset'-ben-dal- k o i, Perhaps you t w o will strike you r - selves. Paset'-kin-dcit- k o M, Perhaps they t wo will strike themi - selves. PLURAL. Paset'-le-d at - lik o, Perhaps we will strike ourselves. Paset'-pe-clda I - k o, Perhaps you w il I strike yourselves. Paset'-ko-da 1 - k o i Perhaps they will strike themselves. ( 292 ) SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. SINGULAR. SINGULAR. I Dai-1co1k-1ccn-a-e, Dal- k- o o- h a n - Hielf is striking hhaa-, Im-b limelf is striking hne, bI fh self. SINGULAR. Paset'- e-dal-ko1l4can, Perhaps he is strik.ing himself. SPECIAL INCOML1PLETE PAST. I Dat-/co Ir, I- a n -Dat-loIS,-1ran-tah-e6- Paset'..e-clal-cok>-Icantahzloan-a-e, He lc-art..ha~n-e, If tcchek-an, Perhaps was s-triking he was striking he was striking himhimself. himiself.- self. PERFECT. I DaL-a~ican -a - e, Dat -alcam-Ichan-e, He has struck If he has struck himself. himself. Paset'-e-d at- a Ic a n, Perhaps h e h a a struck himself. DECISIVE PLUPERFECT. 1 Dai-a7can-tah e - Dat-a/cam- ta h Z Ican - a -e, H e lkan-IcKam-e, if.had struck him- he had struck Paset'..e-d at- a k- a n Itah'e'kar, Perha-ps he had struck him,-, self. INCHOATIVE FUTURE. 1 Dal-kolS-Zagit'-e, Dat-/co/S - 1 a ge it- iPaset'-e-at-lok - I a - -He wvill be about khan-e, I f h e git', Perhaps h a to strike himself. will be about to will be about t o strike himself, strike himself. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. 1.Da-okol-tag id- jDaWlbolS-agidolS-. Paset`-e-daZ-koiS'-?; - oIS.Icoan-a-e, He jkan-khan-e, If gidoIS-Ian~, Pe'rhaps is about to strike! he is about to he is about to- strike himself, strike himself. himself. ( 293 ) I NCHOATIVE. PAST I ThDu-kolc-lcagi d - Dat-l7coA3-t-agiclolS Pas3et'-e-dal-leoIS- 1 a olS-_h a n - t a h Z - kan-tah Z k an - g idoo1-1kan- tahV lan, kan- a -e) H e khan-e, I f h e Perhaps h e wa s was about to was about to about to sirike hirnstrike himself. strike himself. self. PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULATIVE.. SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. 1 Dal-alcan-nahl- Dat -alcan-na h,'b- Dat -at7,an-na h -b 1 n., I must first lin',, We. two We must first have bave struck my- must first. have struck ourselves. self. struck ourselves. PRELIMINARY PERSUASIVE. I Dat-alean-ba '-,, Dat-a/can-ba-lin', Dat -aIkan-ba-le. We I must flrst have We two mnust must fir'st have struck myself. first have struck struck ourselves. ourselves. BENEDICTI YE. 2 Dal-IcoI-ma-m! Dat -kolS-ma ben! Dal - k o kI- m a - p e, Mlayest thou M~ay you' t wo May you strike strike thyself! strike yourselves.1 yours--)elves! IMPERATIVE. 2 Dat-le o inme! Dat - ko 7i -b en! Dat-7rolS-pe! Yo u strike thlyself! f You two strike strike yourselves yourselves! ADJECTIVE PARTICAIPLES. GERU NDS. FUTURE. Dat-leo/ (kin, 7co, p e e t e) Dal-leolr.-rcak1, te. re, Of, by, Who will strike himself, inl striking oneself. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRE- SENT. Dat-leoS-lean, Who is strik-' Dctt-leoJS,--leam7-realS, te, re, Of,9 ing himself, by, in striking oneself now. Or themse~ves etc. ( 294.) SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Dctl-1o1,,-1rai-b-tcth~1can, Who was striking himself. PERFECT. Dal-akean, Who has struck himself. DEi-CISIVE PLUPERFECT. Dal-alcan-tah~kan, Who had struck himself. INCHOATIvE FUTURE. Dal-kcok'. tagit', Who will be about to strike himiself. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. Dalt-ko13-lagido1k-1a n, WhoI is about to strike himself. Dal-1-o1~k~rai-tah~Jcctq-b 7ea1',t 'Ic re, Of, by, in striking oneself' then. Dal-alcan-recWr,, te, re,' Of, by, in having struck oneself. Dcd-akan-tah-ekan-reak,', te, re, Of, by, in having st ruck oneself. Dal-1co1', lagit'-reaJk, te, r e, Of,, by,.in being about to strike oneself. Dal-co1k-iagidolr.-1oan -,v e a M te, re, Of, by in being now about to strike oneself. INCHOATIVE PAST. t Dal -1co1--lagidokc-kant-tahZ1oan, Dcd-koki-lagidohi,-7kan -t ah e - XWho wý,as about to strike kcrn-reaVe,,to,i-e, Of, by, in himself. being then about to strike oneself etc. ADVE'RBIAL PARTICIPLES. FUTURE. Dat-kole,-Ihan, Striking himself or themselves etc. SPEiCIAL INCOMPLETE PRE- Dat -kok'-Jcan-Ihan, Striking SENT, himself now. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST, Dal -ko1k-1an-tah~kan Jo h a n, Striking himself then.. PERFECT. Dal-ak-a qn - k- h a n, Having struck himself. DEC1SIVE PLUPERFECT, Dal-actart-tah-Jc a n - k h an Havingy struck himself, ( 295 ) INCHOATIVE FUTURE. INCHOATIVE PRESENT. INCHOATIVE PAST. PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULATIVE. PRELIMINARY PERSUASIVE. PRELIMINARY ADMISSIVE. INFINITIVE. INFINITIVE PERFECT. Dal-kok-lagit'-khan. B e i n g about to strike himself. Dal-ho k-lagido'-kan-khan, Being now about to strike himself. Datl-ko-ltagidoki-kan-tahckan - khan, Being then about to strike himself. Dal-akarn-nrth;, Having first struck himself. Dal-aken-basi, Having first struck himself. Dal-akan-ena, Having first struck himself. Dal-ko k, To strike oneself. Daal-akcn. To have struck oneself. IMPERSONAL VERB. FUTURE. 2Tetai-i-a, I shall be thirsty (lit it will thirst me.) GENERAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. TetaA-ed-i4i-a, I am thirsty. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. Tetagi-ed-ii-kcan-a, I am now thirsty. RECENT PAST. Tetai-klced-in-a, I was thirsty. ANTERIOR PAST. Tetaiz-led-in-a, I was thirsty. GENERAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Teta -ed-iA-tah~1can-a, I used to be or was thirsty. SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Tetcti-ed-in4-kcan-tahZikaan-a, I was then thirsty. INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. Tetai-led-ind--tah kan-a, I had been thirsty. Rentark. As impersonal verbs are conjugated in the same way as an active verb in the accusative case (vide page 182) it will'not be necessary here to write out the full paradigrm. ( 296 ) CHAPTER Vi. OF AD VER~BS, POSTPOSITLrONS, CONJUNCTrIONS AND INTERlJECTIONS. SECTION I -OF ADVERBS. I. OF~ TIME. Nit, nlito1kdo, now. Nlahak', presently, soon, (the same day.) Dctra, soon. Auri, soon, not yet. IHcpen, soon, (not the same day.) DhinaiA, after mid-day. N~ebitar, now-a-days. Tehen~gapa, at present. BarsiA4orsi~,-i for the present. Enantno1cre, a little while ago. Enbetan, at that time. Enaa while ago. Onre, then. OnJe~hon, thence. OnjoWlc11c, then, at that time. Fmh1ilokc', on that daya Tehen', to-dlay. Gctpc, to-morrow. Mecti), the day after tomorrow, Endrae, three days hence. Pher endrac, four days hence, folac, yesterday. Mahrtder, the day before yesterday. OnMahnder, three days ago. Pahapoho, at the first dawn. Aiiga,.at dawn. Setak', in the morning. Berralrap', at sunrise. Ba8s~eak, at 9 A. M. Basiam,r at 101 A. M. Telcin, at 12 noon. Tek.ingrctk~, at I P. m. MJara~ta?-asin, at 2 P. M. T'arasini, at 08 P. m. 3IaragcdaA3[lober, at 4 P. m. ucIfd11br at 5 r. M. JhV-hiko~oreat sunset.?Jap; evening, at dusk, or nighltfall. Kedo1kjonl, at 9 P. K. ( 297 ) Si~gir, at 10 P. Al, Tinda, at night. Tata dinda, at midnight. Ghataodinda, at 1 A. M. Nes, this year. Kalom, next year. Satom, two years hence. Phersatom, three years hence. )inkrcdom, last year. Holkalom, two years ago. Mrihkalom, three years ago. Tis? when? Tinre? when? (at what time of the day.) Tis jokec1? at what time? Tinjolkhecl, at what time (of the day.) Okca, hilok'? what day? Jahatisre, whenever (not today.) Jahatinre, when, at any time (of the day.) Jahatisjahatis, now and then. TishIo, at any time. TishAbai, at no time. Tisho- alo, at no time(prohibit. ing Tishi gho, at no time (assurin g.) Sedaere, formerly,in past tirnes. Jaoge jaoge, repeatedly, always. Jao hilok, every day, always, Sinsatup, the whole day. JaejuEg, in all ages, always. Maraisimrak', first cock crowing. Hud'idsiqmrad, second cock crowing. Dinhila1, day after day, every day. Pahil, before. Lahare, before. 3Macnaire, before. Tis habich? how long? (not to day.) Tin habich? how long? (to day.) Nin habico, so much as this. In habici, so much as that. On habici, so much as that. Nonhabicl, so much as this. Mit'dhao, once. Ar mit'dhao, once more. Mit'din, one day. Bar sid, two days. Pe miha, three days. Mit' chanclo, one month. Mit' sermna, one year. ( 298 ) I. OF PLACE. Noide, here (nearest.) QnIde, there (further off, or absent). lHoQre, there (still further off). Hande, yonder, (furthest off) NQte, in this way. Onte, in that way. Honte, in that way. Hante, in that way. ARotere, in this place, Vntere. in that place. Holntere, in that place. Hantere, in yonder place. Yemie, here (nearest). Ende there (further off,) Henl, there (furthest off). Nete, in this way or direction. Ente, in that way. Bente, in that way. eetere, in this place. Entere, in that place. Hentere, in that place. Okare? where? Okate? in what direction? Okasen? Okaseci? in what direction? Olccathen? near what place, or thing? Okathenmre? in the vicinty of what? Olcakhon? whence? Jahjire, wherever. Samaire, before. Lahare, maraire, before. Sanamthen, every where. Sanam tandlire, every where. Jkarehbbafi, no where. Berhaere, all round. Mmtchat're, at the end, finally. Rachare, outside. Ohotre, above. Chettnre, upon. Latare, below. Noasa, this side. IHanasa, that side. No, on, hon, han-parom, on this or that side. Ne, en, hen-parom, on this or that side. ( 299 ) III. OrF MANNER AND QUALITY &c. ANonka, as this. Qn/ka, as that. Honka, as that. Hankca, as that. Nenlkea, as this. Enkca, as that. Benka, as that. Ninca, as this. Inkca, as that. Hin/ca, as that. (het'lekca? how? Voale/ca, like this, in this manner. Onalekca, in that manner. Bonaelca, in that manner. Hanatleca, in that manner. Nicalela, like this, in this manner. Intalelc, in that manner. Rincaeka, in that manner. Tincat? how much? Onakl', as much as that. Nonal, as much as this. Ninal, as much as this. Inak. as much as that. A1i, u1i, much. A1iutcor, very much. Katicftalani, a little. Nasenase, a very little. Baebaete, very gently, slowly. Hakopcko, very quickly. Dihredihre, very slowly. Satmente, quickly. Es/car, alone. Ekenf, only. Mit'tegqi, together. Begar begar, seperately. OQto-tainom, one after another. Sarigi, truly, really, indeed. Anripathauri, thoughtlessly, at random. Qrkate, gratis. Magnite, (Hindi) by request. Dualarakte, lovingly. Jormotrkate, forcibly. Erekate, falsely. Algate, easily. Ote, otechoi, even, jus t, exactly. Behaj, extraordinarily, very much. ( 300 ) 11i, yes. it yes. hA, yes. TV. OF AFFIRMATION, AND NEGATION. ba, bagi, not, no (asserting.) ato! not (entreating.) oho, not (assuring.) SECTION Re, in, on, at, while. Te, into, in, by. Then, at, to, by. Khon, from. Sec/, towards, for. Sen, towards, for, Lcgit', for. Lagat', for. Hiotete, through. late, on account of. Tuluch, with. Gate, with. Sante, with. BegQor, without, exceT Dhabic/, till, until, a Dharich, till, as far Haric, till, as far a liente, for, in order. Il-O- POSTPOSITIONS. Phedre, near. Sorre, near. Samaire, before, in front. Maraire, before, (time and place.) Lahare, before (time and place.) Tayomrte, behind, after. Tatlare, in the midst o f Motore 5 among. Leka, according to. Reakl, Reau, about, concern)t. innC. s far as. Tarive, under, s. Latare, under. s. Ohetanre, above. SECTION III-OF CONJUNCTIONS. Among the principle conjunctions are the following:a. COPULATIVES. Ar, and; ado, and; h1, also. Adverb, are declined like nouns; as re-khon from in; then-khon from near etc. $ 301 ) b. DJsjUNCTIVE S. Se, or; bah1cha~n, or else; baizdo-bctido-whether-or; bich.. korn, rather; ko-baii, nor;-It-h baiz-h5bbait, neither-nor. c. A.DVERSNTJYES. Me'nlham, but; emreh6,ý get; Tvehob-e'nreh715, althouglh -still d. CONJUNCTIVES. Adomadoim-adomadom, partly-partly. Jathati~gjahati~s-jcthati~sjahatisg-soinetiines -somnetimes, Eken4ba~ha-rinlerd n n-ho-, not only-but also; h5-1W--as well, as alsoe. CAUSAýLS. Ente, for; te, teroiz, khan,' because, as. f. CoLcusivEs..Endelchar?, thien; orate, therefore; sate, therefore, g. COMPAR~ATIVES. ~-Rhon, than; tekca, as;chet'lelca, a8. h. TEMPORALS. Khare) as; kharngi, then. Z. CONDITIONALS, Khatn, if; lrutkecli, if, in case. CONCESSIVE'S. BeIhW, although,. FiNALS Or 'CONCLUSIVES, Khajulc, that, in order that, so th'at,, ( 302 ) SECTION IV.-OF INTERJECTIONS. Interjections in Sonthali are very numerous. Among the principal are the following:a. OF CALLING. 1. (Addressing men), e!, eho! hinda! Henda ho! e go! ho! holla! firrah! 2. (To women). e go! e ayo! ho! hark 3. (To young men). ea! e baba! ho! hear! oh! 4. (To young women). e rmi! e na! ho! hear! oh! I b. OF SURPRIZE AND ADMIRATION. Ayoge! Durre! Uh! Baba re! oh, my! dear me! c. OF SILENCE. Hape Th'iro1 me! Hape-Jkol-pe! Baibqi-pe! hush! be quietf d. OF AVERSION. Ghhci! Chq'ire! Chhi! fie! for shame I e. OF GRIEF AND PAIN. lHaere! Haerehaere! ) haere Hae, Jlaehae ah! Jarejare! ah! alas o sad! woe is me! f. OF WARNING. Men! Men ya! Sontnrme! take care! g. OF ENCOURAGEMENT. Ma ma! Bugi bugi! well well! h. OF THREATENING. Hape! take care! Bhala! well, we will see ( 303 ) CHAPTER. VIL ON THE DERIVATION, AND COMPOSITION OF WORDS. All words are, in regard to their formation, either (a) Primitive, or (b) Derivative, (or c) Composite. A. ON THE DERIVATION OF WORDS. SECTION I--OF NOUNS. Nouns are formed from other nouns, adjectives, verbs, and adverbs. I. By affixing to the word any of the case-signs of the nouns, with the suffixes ick, kin, ko (he, they two, they.) II. By affixing to the word the suffixes ac aclkin, aklco, with or without tet' [it, they two, they (things.)] III. By affixing to the word the suffixes ici kin, ko. IV. By leaving the word unaltered and using it as a noun. V. By affixing to the word the suffix tet'. VI. By affixing n to the word. VII. By infixing p after the first syllable of the word, with a vowel homonymous to that of the first syllable. a. NOUNS DERIVED FROM NOUNS. These are formed: I. By affixing to any noun the Genitive, Dative, Ablative, or Instrumentat case-sign with the personal suffixes ic/i, kin, ko; and the impersonal suffixes ac, aJlcin, ak'co, ( 3O0i ) (with or without tet'). Each of these may be re-declined like a Nominative, the respective oblique cases of 'which may again he re-declined, 1. PERSONAL FROM PERSON AL NOUNS. G,3ENITIVE. 'Nom. O~en. Jnstr. bat. Abi. Nomn. Gen. 11nstr. D at Abl. Parufn-rert-ich', 'Pctrscfa-re~n icN-hreen-Jo, Pandat-ren o-icAt(herb-1oo, PavQd~ttven-ich~-Jdwn-k~o, She of Paudu. Those o~f her of Panda. Those by her of Pandu. Those with her of Panda., Those froin her of Panda. INSTRUMENTAL. Pana-hoteten-ich, lHe (or she) by Panda. Pcandt-hgotetemn-ictbi-rert,-ko, Those of him by Panda., is wanting. Pcunvja-h~otetem-fdll-(hteu-kio, Those withhimby Panda.?wiWLdt-hotetem~-icli-.khlom-ko,Tho'se fronm hima by Panda. DATIVE. Nom. Pai1a-fihem-iAh, He (or she) with Panda. ýGen. Pana- them-icfi-ren-ko, Those of him with Panda. Tnstr. Panda- then-idhxf-hotetert-ko, Those by himu with Panda. Dat. is wanting [Panda. Abi. Partda-(hen-il-khon,-?4o, Those fromn him with -Revzt-wk. 1 The- Accusative is like the Nominative. Iiemco-k. 2 Ccsmhar-ren-ko-thenko-k-hon noct do k h'alana, this has come from those (staýying ) -with those of gamhar village, is actually used. ( S05 ) ABLATIVYE. Nom. Panylu-kho&- ichi, He (or she) from. -Pan du, Gen. Pan4ua-1hon-ichi-rem-Jco, Those of him from Pandu, Instr. Panfl-khor&-ic/i-hQteten-7co, Those by him from Pand.a. Dat. Pan~hi-kchon-icfi-(hem-1co. Those withhimfromPand q Abl. is wantingr. IL. IMPERSONAL FROMI PERSONAL NOUNS., GENITIVE. Nom, Pancfuý-aJc, (or aldcin, o r That.(or those-twoo a 7ck o,) those things) of Panda. Qen. Pc ~ai4a- ren - 7co.a Ic, That of those of Pandu Instr. Pan ýu-rem-ko-kotete~c&1,, That by those of Panda. flat. Pan A-re n -1- then- aWr, That with thosedo Panda Abi. Pan'a-ren4leo-chon-ak~, That from thoseof Panda. INSTUUMENTAL. Nom. Patn#-hotete-a1,, That by Panda. Gen. Pan4u-hoteten-1co-0J, That of those by Panda, Instr. is wantingy.1 flat. Panu-hoteten-1l'o-hen-a1k, That with those by Panda. Abi. PaL*.a..kQteter-lko-khom-a1S, That from tho-se by Panda. DATIVE. Nom. Pa~i?4mhen-a1r,, That w'Ith Pandu, Gen. P ant u - Ih e a -,o -al7c, That of those with Panidu. lIustr. Pa n q- hem-1co-7b tetcae.a1 That by those With Panda,,Dat. is wantinig. Abi. Pav 4u- the n-ko-1cho n-a1, That from those with Pandu. *or ak~tet', c&Jte'1,in, a1~et1c, T ( 3o6 ) ABLATIVE. Nam. FandIu-khon*-a7c, That- from Panda,. Gen. Par,4m-khom-1co-a1k, That of those from Pandiz. Thstr. Pand1t~-kihon-1eo-kgtete-a1r,, That by those from Pandali fiat. Pafd-lz-hom-ko -theR-ai, (0,hat with those~from Pandu. Abi. is wanting. III. PERSONAL FRQM1 IMPERSONAL NOUNS. GENITIVE. Gen* Pany - d-enlo Th( Instr. Panu-act1-ten-/ko,* Tb It flat. Pantiu-a1S.#en ico, Th AUl. Pwnd1z-a1S-hon-kco, Th INSTRUMENTAL. Gen. Pctncizuhotete-a13.ren-ko, TI] )se of that (land etc.) of Pandu, ose (caught etc.) by hat (hook) of Pandu, ose with (near) that of Pand-a. ose from that (coun-) try) of Pand-U. ose of th-at (ship etc.) miade) by Panda. Instr. is wanting. Dat. Pctrdm-hotete -all 4lien-lco, Those *ith (near) that by Pandu. Abi. Patn dit -hotete-a13fkho n-1o, Those from that by Panda. Rem~ark. Sometimies it is -necessary to affix tet' after ale, in order to distinguish the noun from an adjective; as, Pandu-ako'tet' do ban' siel akat'a I h~ave not seen that of Paudu. * This is also used extensively as a Dative, denoting the movement towards somethingy; as Bzeru-ten-ko, those, who go to the hillso ae tnlo hs moving to the water, ( 307 ).DATIVE. Gen. Pane~u!hen ctl-7,en-ico, Instr. Paizmh-then-a1M-ten-?co, flat. Is wantinig, Abl. Faizm-!hen-cak-khon-Xro, Those of that (land etc.)ý near Pandu. Those- (fishes) (caughbt) by that (hook) with Pandu. Those from that (river) near Pandu. ABLATIVE. Gen. Paly/u-7chon-cW-re n-leo, Those of that (ship) from Pandu, Instr. Pctn.leL-khon-cdi-ten-kco, Those by that (hook) from Pandu. flat. PctzdcH-lhon-a~3-ther&4co, Those near that from Pandu. Abll Is wanthig. IV. IMPERSONAL FROM IMPERSONAL. GENITIVE. Gen. Pav du-a7ol-react1., That of that of Pandu. Instr. Pand1a-a13-te-a1k, That by that of Pandui. flat. Panv d a-ak- then-cd0, That with (near) that of Pandu. Abll Pctn~1m-a1-lhon ale. That fromi that of Pandu, Rem~ark. Land, country, ship, hook, flish etc, a re pnt in brack~ets, ill order to show how the different caises may be applied; as amem. inokat' gatdiaren hako balco nap~vak'o, Pcm4:t-hotete.-alc'-renko gilco napr-ak' -a, the fishes of thle tank which you have durr are* ýot large, those of that (tanki) (dugy) by Pandu are large,, ( 308 ) Gen.. Instr. flat. INSTRUMENTAL. Pajm44-1oteter'ea17r,, That of that by Pandu'' Is wanting. Paw 41u-hotetei-1ien-ak4 Abi. Pant&zrhotete-1chon-ak', / DATIVE, Gen. Paru/u-thet-a1S-vea1k, Thstr. Panu-then-a1-te-a1', Dat. Is wantingao AUl. Pa&(e-kko-k That near (or with) that by Pandu. That from that by Pandu, That of that with (or near) Pandu. That by that near (or with) Pandu, That from that with (near) Pandlu, That of that from P~andu, That by that from Pandu. That near that from Pandu. Gen. Instr. flat. ABLATIVI Pa'aqu-khon-ald -realcS, P an du- kho n- alM- t e -a, Pan r-lchon-alS-the&-alS, Abl. Is wanting. Among the preceding may be counted: a. P-ATRONYMICS. These are formed by affixing the genitive inflexion with the pronominal suffixes idil, kin, ko; as Panduren-ko, the sonas, or descendants of Pandu. ( 309 ) b. GENTILES. These are formed in the same manner as Patronymics; as Chamnpa-ren-c-ko, the inhabitants of Champa; Sikhai,-renko, the inhabitants of Sikhar; Jcambro-ren-Jko, the inhabitants of Jambro (village). c. POSSESSIVES (Neuter). These are formed by affixing k, arE, or aitet' to the word; as Paztdu-a1, that of Pandu; Buiru-na1, that of the mountain; Manjhi-aE, the work of the head-man. II. By inserting p after the first syllable with a vowel homonymous to that of the first syllable; as, COLLECTIVES, Hanjhee, a village-head-man. Ma-p.c-njhki-ko, a collection of village-head-men; Raj, a king. Ra-pa-j-ko, a collec. tion of kings. III. By affixing to the word hQopn; as, DIMINUTIVES. Dhiri, a stone, dhir-hopQn, a little stone; Orak, a house, Ora7c' hQpQn, a little house; Kumba, a hut, Kumba-hQpqn, a little hut. IV. By affixing to the word tet'; as, ABSTRACTS. ThakEur-tet'-il ba4dae-orom-alcat'-tae-ac, I have asertained his divinity (from Thakcur, God). ( 310 ) Manwa-tet' bad bujhqu-let'-tae a, bonga-lekc-gi-n aikcaukedea, I could not discover his humanity (any humanity in him) I thought him to be a god. V. By infixing t or n after the first syllable with a vowel homonymous to that of the first syllable; as, nu-tum, a name (from dum, to call by name). Lu-tu-r, the ear (from lur, to hear; but which is lost in the Sonthal language), (Compare lur-e, to listen, in Danish and laur-en, in German). U-nu-m, immersion, (From urm to bathe). Da-na-pal, a cover, (from dapal, to cover:) Ha-na-rup', a cover, (from harup' to cover up.) E-to-hop', beginning, (from ehop' to commence.) Su-nu-m, oil, may belong to this class; but sum does not exist in Santhali. Besides these there are a few words formed by prefixing a; as a-nu, to give to drink (trcenken) from ie, to drink. A-jo, to feed, (from jon to eat.) The formations of this -fifth class are very few. b. NOUNS DERIVED FROM ADJECTIVES. Nouns are formed from adjectives in four ways: I. By affixing the impersonal affixes ale, alkin, alcko; as a. INANIMATE CONCRETES. HIende-acE i4 hataoa, I will take the black (things) Aeteci-ack-zin ii hataoa, I will take the two hard (things.) Arak-ak-ko gi bugia, The red ones are good. II. By affixing the personal suffixes cid, kcin, ko; as, .311 b. ANIMATE CONCRETES4 Hencle-Icoii hat ao ka a, I wvvill take the -black ones. (Bein'gs.) PQoy.-bin bugi, do, baA loan alcin, The- two white, ones are not good. III. By affixdngy tet'; as,. e. ABSTRACTS6 HenvIe-tet', The- blackness. Pgnif-tet', The whiteness. Mlaraii-tet', The greatness. IV. By using the adjective as a N~oun,;, as,, NuncdJ harnal-te ba6 lagga13-a'? Will he not get tired by such a weight?2. c.NOUNS DE~RIYED FROM. VERBS. Nouns are formed from verbs by affi'xingr the im-personal affixes ak., aJe'ki"n, al~ico, the personal suffixes- iou, koin, loo, and the substantive suffi-x tet' to any verbal base, or adj ective parti. ciple, in any tense, case, voice or form. a. FROM THE.UNINFLECTED VERBAL BASESts Get'-ak' (ak'lciin, akico%, The tcut thing. Get'-ich~ (hein 1co) 'The cut Being. Get-tet', The cut (itself.) Get'-ocho-AJ_ The thingf caused to- be cut.. Get'-ooho-ich', The, Being caused to be cut..Remaerk. When duality i's required to be expressed lein is added to the aZc, and when Plurality, thien ko is affixed'to show the inanimate Noun;as get'.ek' kin, the two out things,, -and kuiiitutiog kin, or -koefor icb to ahow the aniani3te XoUU. g12 Gedo1k-aAk, Getol'-oick~k-cd Geydk-et'-c% krk, Gegt'-olchok-a1, Gegt'-olchok-i cli, Gegt'-olchoM-tet", Ged -t ka~in, lk, Gvedo'1-icl4(i, o2 Get'-ochog!2-ag~, Get'okcho~13-icl4, Get'okchog1-tet', The caused cut (itself.) The thing to be cut. The Being, who will cut himself. The cutti~ng oneself~ The thingý to be caused to be cut. The Being to be * caused to be cut. The about-to-be caused cut.f The cutting thingr. The cutting Being'-.the cutter. "The cutting (itself.) The thingr causing to be cut. The Beingr causing to be cut. The casn Cobect Thethn causing to b cut. The Beingr causingr to cut. The en causing r to cut. The thingr to be cut. The Being, who wvill cut him-, self. The cuttingr oneself. The thing to be caused to boe ute The Beingr about'to let hini:; self be cut. -Th e- letting, oneself to be cut. ~,Or the Being who ~il' let himself be cut, t 'Or the about-to-let-oneeielf be cut, 313 ) Gepet'-ak'kin, Gepet'-kin, Gepet'tet', Gepet'ocho-aklcin, Gopet'ocho-kin, Gopet'ocho-tet', Gepedok1-ak1c4in. GepedoeM-7in, Gepedold-tet', Gepet'ocho1-&dk1in, Gepet'ochoE-ki7n, Gepet'ochok-tet', Garxpet'-akki-n The two things cut together. The two Beings, who have cut one another. The (mutual) cut (itself.) The two things caused to cut or be cut together, The two Beings caused to cut one another. The being caused to cut together, or one another. The two things to be cut together. The two Beings who will cut one another. The being about to cut tocgether, or one another. The two things to be caused to cut together. The two Beings to be caused to cut one another. The being about to be caused to cut together or one another. The two things which will cut together. Reemark. In the above manner any adjective participle of any tense chse or form may be formned into a Noun; as Dcal-lcet'-ko-a-Uki they twvo, struck them -Dal-ket'-ko-kin, they (two) who struck them; Makc'-akat'-a-e, he has cut-Makl'-akat'- akin the two things which have been cut, Verbs formed from any of the cases of the nouns may again be re-formed into nouns in the above manner; as Pancltu-t1en-kco, they near PanduPandu-then-ok'-kan-ko, those who are joining Pandu. 314 ) Ge1~pet 4c14 The Beingr who- will cut (some-, thing) togýether. Ge1~pet'-tet', The cu-tting together. Gepet'-o1kocho-aJ4', That which causes to, be cut togrether or cut one another-. Gepet'o1kcho-ich, He who causes to he cut togrether or cut one another. Gepet'ok'cho-tet' The cautsingto be cut together, or to cut one another. G e1P e t'o V h o- a M, That which causes to cut together. GeJc'et'oJc'cho-iefi`, He who. causes to cut (something else) together. Ge1kpet'oJkcho-tet', The causing to cut together. b. FRtOM THE INFLECTED ADJECTIVE PARTICIPLES.-.7u7r-cad-e-a1M, That whieh fell upon himii (IDat.) Get'-cdcat'-aJý, That which they have cut. Get'-cdcat'-lco,' They, who have cut or been cut. Jfel-let'-ko-1oim, They two who saw them, Dadal-cctn-lco, They who are striking. xSerenilayiio1kJccn-1o, They, -who are about to sin'g. Dhasao-en-c4.', That which fell down (house.) RoraTcat'-a1J', That which has been spoken. c. FROM VERBS FORMED FROM THE SUTBSTANTIVE CASES. Panjm-them-ol'-kan-1eo, They, who- are going over to Pandu, Pai~1u.-ivem-ke~d-e-ko, They who made him Pandu's..UQr-tefl-Okad-e-k1o, They who have sent him (out) onl the road,, ( 315.Aur-akan-taken-al, That which has fallen. A t'-len-tae-alJ, That which is his, which was lost (but found again.) The cases may be declined and made verbs of ad libitum, and such verbs may again be formed into Nouns, as shown above, and re-declined ad infinitum. Each tense in its participial form is a'verbal base, and may be converted into a Noun by afflixing, all, icK, or tet', d. NOUNS DERIVED FROM ADVERBS. Nouns are formed from Adverbs either by affixing ac', calcin, a1c!ko, ich', kin, and ko, or by inserting n between the adverb and the above terminations. a. WITHOUT THE INSERTION OF n. Nit'-al. PThat of now (Germ. Das. Jetzige) (from nit', now.).Nit'-co, Those of now (Germ. Die Jetzigen.) TeheA-alS, That of today (Germ. Das. Heutige) (from tehet, to day.) Tehed.ko, Those of today (Germ. Die Heutigen. Meai-a7,, That of the day after to morrow (Germ. Das. Ueber'morgende) (from Meai6 the day after tomorrow.) MeaW-ko, Those of the day after tomorrow (Germ Die Uebermorgenden.) b. WITH THE INSERTION OF n. Ngonde-n-a1., That of this place (Das Hiesige) (from nwone here.) Noneje-n-ko, Those of this place (Die Hiesigen.) Qpe-n-a-ld, That of that place (DasDortige) (from Qgnee, there.) ( 316 ) Ond.e-n-ko, Those of that place (Die Dortigen.) Hoýide-n-aJ, That of that place (Das Dortige) (from hon'le there. Honde-n-ko, Those of that place (Die Dortigen.) Ha.de-n-al, That of that place (Dan. Dortige.) (from hande, yonder.) Hande-n-ko, Those of that place (Die Dortigen.) HIola-n-al1, That of yesterday (Das Jestrige.) (from hola, yesterday.) Bola-n-ko, Those of -yesterday (Die Jestrigen.) H'I-al, That which is promised (from hi yes.) SECTION II-OF PRONOUNS. Pronouns are formed in the following ways: 1st. Personal pronouns take the prefix a, which means it, or it is; as a-ko, it is they; a-(i)ci, it is he. (This ci is a contraction of icl, he, as i is a contraction of id, I,); as, Dal-a-ko, to strike it is they=they will strike. 2nd. Demonstrative pronouns are formed from demono. strative bases and the abridged personal pronouns; as, Jo-i, This (from no,here,and i, he-=here he=this) On-kcin, Those two, (from on, there, and kin, they two.) Hon-ko, Those (from hon, yonder, and ko, they.) Han-a, That (from han, yonder. and a, it.) Remark. Nouns may be formed from Prepositions by affixing n; as chetanre, above, upon chetan-re-n-ko, those above. These are however nouns in the genetive case, and may be treated as m^eh, '( 231V ') 3rd. Demonstrative pronouns of similarity are formed from the other demonstrative pronouns by affixing ka, like, with a n, and in certain instances adding a n to the demonstrative base; as, No-n-ka-n, Such as this (from no and ka.) On-ka-n, Such as that (from on and ka.) Ni-n-ka-n, Such as this (from ni and ka.) Hi-n-ka-n, Such as that (from hin and ea.) The derivation of pronouns as well as adverbs presents very much, that is interesting and assists considerably in tracing and comparing Santhali with other languages. SECTION III.-OF ADJECTIVES. Adjectives are formed from Nouns, other Adjectives, Verbs and Adverbs. a. ADJECTIVES FORMED FROM NOUNS. Adjectives are formed from Nouns: 1st. By affixing the impersonal suffixes al, al'kin, a'kqo, and the personal suffixes kin and ko to any of the five cases (Genitive, Instrumental, Dative, Ablative and Locative) in connection with the Nouns (vide formation of Nouns from Nouns); as, Pa.ndu-ren-kin hopon, The two sons of Pandu. Hasa-realh karda, The earthen vessel (from hasa, earth.) Thacur-hottee-n-ko hor, Men (created) by God =God-created men. Pandu-then-ko pera, The friends with Pandu. ( 318 ) Pandu-khon-ko pera, The friends, from Pandu. Sadom-te-n-ko hgr, The men on horse-back. 2nd. By affixing an (possessed of) to a Noun; as, Up'-an hor, A hairy man =a man with hair. Dare-an, Having strenrht -strong (from Dare strenght.) Herel-an, Having a husband (from herel, a man.) Salkm-an dare, A tree having leaves (from Sackamn, leave.) Achet-an kry, A man possessing riches= rich. 3rd. By affixing lek, leklc, lekian; as, Pargama-lek Dahri, a hat (topi, turban) meet for a District-chief. Kuri-leka-ti, a hand like that of a girl (Germ. jungfr a*i iche.) 4Aimai-lekmen her, a man like a womnan=womanish. 4th. By affixing sedet'; as Hasa-selet' bului, salt mixed with earth. Harket-selet'-rcsklc, joy mixed with trouble. 5th. By affixing postpositions and adverbs; [ad libit-um]; as Bura-chetan ato, a village upon a hill A1sar-begor hgr, a man without bow and arrows. Dare-latar hor a man unider a tree. Panizu tayom hgr the man after Pandu. 6th. By using Nouns adjectively; as, Bir thtii a jungly, or woody place (from bir, forest) Botor th(i, a dangerous place (from botor, fear) Remarlk. An, lek, leka, lekan, selet' are mostly in use in forming adjectives from Nonus, hence they have been treated separately from the other particles. Re, te, kchon, then (in the formation of the cases) are nothing more than postpoaitions. ( 319 ) thmul thti, a shadowy place (from umul, shadow.) Dare 1oQ a strong man (from dare, strength, power) b ADJECTIVES FORMED FROM OTHER ADJECTIVES. Adjectives are formed from other adjectives by affixing le, leka, eklcan, Machha, 7iole, an and selet'; as, Hzudii-leek-hor, a person worthy to te deemed small, Hudiid- lelcan * hor, a person appearing small Hudin-machha hkr, a person rather small. Hudin-Qo' hor, a person rather small (less in degree than the the above.) Iende-lekEanr merom, a black-looking goat. Hende-machha merom, a dark-some goat. Hende-;Jo merom, a goat, which is a little dark Hende-an merom, a goat with black spots. Hende-selet'-ara1 sadom, a dark-red horse. c. ADJECTIVES FORMED FROM VERBS. Adjectives are formed from verbs: 1st. By dropping the final a of any tense in any case, voice, form, gender and number (vide formation of Nouns from verbs); as, Dal-hor a struck man (from dal to strike) Dal-oIJ hor a person about to strike himself Dadal hor, a striking man. Dapal hogr, a fighting man Dal-ocho1 hogr, a person to be struck. ATam-og-o1, obtainable (from liamn to find) Sleka for inanimnate and leaczn for animate Nouns. ( 320 ) Dac-ked-e-co ihr, the men, who struck him. Dal-e-kin hgr, the two men, who will strike him. Ran-ad-e-tae-ko ojhca, the doctors who gave medicine to him, who is his. Dal-id-lagit' hor, the person about to strike me. Goch alcad-e hkr, the person whom they have killed. J'el-og-old, visible (from Aiel, to see.) 2nd. By affixing We, or lelcka, or lelcan to any of the adjective participles; as Dal-e-lek hor, a person worthy to be struck. GocI-lelcan h7T, a person like dead. d. ADJECTIVES FORMED FROM ADVERBS AND POSTPOSITIONSO Adjectives are formed from adverbs in the same manner as Nouns are (which see) viz. by affixing a1M, ak1kin, and ko with an insertion of n in some cases and in others without it; as Ngnfde-l-ko hor, the people of this place (from nonje here) Tehen-ko ho, the people of to day Enbetar-ko hlr, the people of former times. Iola-n-alc' Vry, the word of yesterday (Dae gestrige Wort). Ghetan-ko khoQr, the persons upon or above. SECTION IV.-OF VERBS. Verbs are formed from Nouns, Adjectives, Adverbs and Postpositions and by affixing voice, case, form, tense-signs and the pronominal suffixes:-in short, Nouns, Adjectives, Adverbs and Postpositions may all be treated as verbal bases, ( 321 ).a. VECiRBS FORMED FROMI NOUNS. IIordced-e-a-,i, I have made a man of him. IIor-ok-lca~h-a-e, he is becoming a man. Dahri-ad-e-ah', I provided him with a.,hat. Bahu-an-a-e, he took to hlimself a wife. B'ohu-ocho..-ad-e-ctr-ein, they two allowed him to take a wife. LThpon-k~ec-e-an', I made him (my) son, i'. e., gave him exi stence.,Pan~1u-* then,-ked-e-a,4, I made hi'm (to be> with Pandu, Par,4u-ren-akad-e-alco, they have made him (to be) Pandu's, Iai~u-then-o1J-kan-a..e, he is going over to Pandu's (opinion,etc.) 6b. VERBS FORMED FROMW ADJECTIVES. JHeride-1cet'-a-R-, I made it black. Jftrde-M'-kan-a, it is becoming black. Ilernde-acI-e-a-n', I put black on him. Maraiz-ochokd-1can-a.-e, he is being made great. C. VERBS FORM-ED FROM ADVERBS. VH.et-a-e, hesad yes, confessed., or consented. IP-4ad-e-a-1co, 'they said yes to him, -promised hi~m, Raa -7ret '-a~e, he said no, denied. BaAi-ad-e-a-ico, they said no to him, refuised him. Ba&.-at'-tin`-a, it made no to mine, i.e' I would not..Note-ke(?-e-a-4',? removed him hither. Hante-alcad-,e-a-co., they have removed him thither. Ohet'leka-1ced-e!-a-pe? What have you donie with him. SAny of the ca;aes in connection with the Noune may be treated as a -verbal base. U ( 322 ) Id,. VERBS 'FORMED FRlOM POSTPosxTIoNS, 1kdiuj-o1k-kai--a-e, he is going to accompany (tulueN, with.) &Pj-oo'-1,-an-a-e, he is drawing n.ear (sec/i towards.) Tayom-te1c-kanr-a-e,' he is getting lbehinld (tayomn te behind.) Laha-te-k'-kan-a-e, hie is gyetting in front. SECTION V.-OF ADVERBS. Adverbs are form-ed fromn other parts of speech 1st. By affixing te, kate, leloa, and gi.. 2.nd. By doubling the word itself. 3rd By inserting Ice betweeni two words or a doubled one. 4th. By prefixing or affixing various particles to other wvords,, in order to form adverbs of time and place. a BY AFFIXING te, k~ate, lela and gi; as, Algc-te A'am-ol-a, it can. easily be had (alga, easy, light-.,) Phasiara-icate e hataolct'a, he took it deceitfully (phasiara to deceive.) BeveZle -I la sahao~c'-rze Suffer like a man =In a manly way,, Sari-gi-i n-el-la1ka, I really saw, it (from sari, true, real.) 6. BY DOUBLING THE WORD. Ilerern-hereqn e rolra, he speaks sweetly (herein, sweet.) e. By INFIXING Ice. Sin-kee-sihA, day by day. Siq'71ke- i~nda, day and nibht. Cha~ndo-kc-chaundo, month aftermr nth.. ( 323 ) d. BY PREFIXING OR AFFIXING CERTAIN PARTICLES TO OTHER WORDS IN ORDER TO FORM ADVERBS OF TIME AND PLACE. Non.de, here (from non, here and di, place.) Qnde, there (from on there, and di, place. Note, hither (from no here, and te, to.) Hante, thither (from han, yonder, and te, to.).nde, there (from en, there, and di, place.) Nete, thither (from ne, here, and te, to.) Nebetar, now-a-days (from ne, this, and batar, time.) Enbetar, at that time (from en, that, and batar, time.) gEndrae, three days ago (from en, that, and darae approach.) Hol-a, yesterday (from holJ past, and a, it, that.) Sam-al-re, before (from sam, front, an, of, and re, in.) B. ON THE COMPOSITION OF WORDS. Compound words, especially verbs, are of very frequent occurrence in Santhali, and they afford great facility for expressing one self with ease and precision. They are principally of three kinds, namely,, Compound Nouns, Compound Adjectives and Comnpound Verbs. I. COMPOUND NOUNS, These are of two kinds: 1st., Nouns joined to Nouns, and 2nd adjectives joined to Nouns; as, ( 324 ) a. NOUNS JOINED TO NOUNS. Manjhi-eva, the village chief's wife, (from Manrjhi) chief, and era, wife. Orak-boizga, a house-god (otal, house, boiga, a god.) Ato-manjhi, the village Mainjhee (ato a village.) b. ADJECTIVES JOINED TO NOUNS. Marai-buru, the great height, or great mountain. II. COMPOUND ADJECTIVES. These are of two kinds: 1st., Nouns preceding adjectives, and 2nd,, Adjectives joined to other adjectives; a. NOUNS PRECEDING ADJECTIVES. Thakmrpbariabari, equal with God. b. ADJECTIVES JOINED TO ADJECTIVES, fende-arak', black-read= brown. III. COMPOUND VERBS. Such verbs are formed: 1st. By joining a verb and a noun; 2nd., By joining a verb and an adjective; 3rd., by joining two verbs; 4th., By joining a verb to an adverb 5th., By joining a verb and a postposition; 6th., By affixing certain parti. dcles to the verbs; as a. YERfBS JOINED TO SUBSTANTIVES. Asul-khoked-e.a-n, bringing him up I made a man of him. DaWl-ec-kcet'-co-a-e, striking them he subdued them, b. VYERBS JOINED TO ADJECTIVES. Dal-he/nde4-edea-m, thou didst strike him black, JAru-'-pon keft'a, he wabed it white. ( 325 ) c. VERBS JOINED TO VERBS. hbal-,1ir-ked-e-a-e, he made them run by striking them. Halaizt-samtao, to pick up (from halang to take up,) d. VERBS JOINED TO ADVERBS. Dal-note-ket'-a-e, he struck it hither. JQ1c hcnte-ket'-a-e, he swept it hither. e. VERIIS JOINED TO POSTPOSITIONS. Dal-tuluci-kecl-e-a-kQ, they made him to joirn by striking him. J. VERBS JOINED TO CERTAIN PARTICLES. The most frequent of these are dara, tora, oto, agu, hot', gpt', 9, baricli, botech; as, Dal-dara-kad-e-a-?, I struck him in coming. Dal-tora-kad-e-a-lko, they struck him in going (away.) Dal-ofo-kad-e-ko, they struck him and left him behind. Anjorm-ague-me! Go and hear (and bring the heard back.) JCel-agui-me! Go and see (and report about the things seen.) Dal-ggt'-ked-e-a-lco, they struck him immediately. Dal-hot'-lced-e-a-ko, they struck him quickly. Dal-,no1-ked-e-a-ko, they struck him a little. Dal-baricl-kad-e-a-ko, they almost struck him. Dal-botech-kce-h-a-ko, they might perhaps strike me. These particles are used very extensively and idiomatically. The meaning of dara is, that something takes place in coming, or in the course of time up to the time in which it is spoken; tora, means that something takes place in going away from a certain place; oto, means that something is done ( 326 ),and left behind in that state; agui, means that one shall go to another place and effect something and bring the result back; got', means, immediately; hot', means quickly; Aok7, means a little; barici, means almost; and boteci, means possibly. It should be borne in mind that the last word of the compound verb is inflected, not the first. This appears natural in most eases; but in connection with certain words it is perplexing at first; as, Pel-god-ked-e-a-n, I saw him die. Ael-kombro-ked-e-a-n, I saw him steal. This would at first appear to mean: seeing (him) I killed him-seeing (him) I stole him, as goci-ked-e-a-4 means I killed him, and kombro-ked-e-a-i, I stole him; but the meaning is of course Jel-ked-e-a-n, gocli (gojok) I saw him die. The following examples will serve to illustrate the manner in which Santhal verbs are joined and used: Get'-topa, to cut off; el-tap', to see through; chapat'gidi, to throw away; laga-odol, to drive out; kutam-ader, to strike in or into (einschlagen); Qr-orecN, to tear in pieces; sen-otoz, to go after= follow. There are other compound verbs, as the "Jingling verbs," in which the first word is the real, and the second only a kind of echo: as, akdt'-bakut', etc. Here akut' is the real word and means to be in a hurry. ( 32 ) PART IL. SYNTAX. CHAPTER I. OF SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. As the reader is supposed to be acquainted with Grammar, and consequently to know that a proposition consists of a subject and predicate; that the subject is either grammatical or logical; that the grammatical subject is either a noun or somie other word used substantively (as pronouns, adjectives, infinitives, etc.); that the logical subject consists of the grammatical subject with its modifications; that the subject is either simple or compound; that it may be modified by a noun, or by an adjective; that the Predicate likewise is either grammatical or logical; that it may be either simple or compound; that it may be modified by a noun or adjective; etc.: it is therefore hardly necessary to say much about the agreement of subject and Predicate; still, as every language has some peculiarities, it may not be out of place to make a few remarks. SECTION I.-OF THE SUBJECT. The Santhal language has the peculiarity, in regard to the subject of a sentence, that the suffixes are always added to the subject-noun, ( 328 ) a. SIMPLE SUBJECT. Pamgu-e chaloen a, Pandu he went away; Orcld' Aiurren-a, the house it fell down. b. SUBJECT MODIFIED BY A NOUN IN THE SAME CASE; as, Ale Pargana ko le chalal4-a, we Parganas we will go. c. SUBJECT MODIFIED BY A NOUN IN THE GENITIVE; as, Pa'iidu-real1 dulur marai-a, the love of Pandu is great. Horko-realo edre barae ororn-en-a, the anger of the people was apparent. d. SUBJECT MODIFIED BY AN ADJECTIVE; as, Bugi horko ko hecl-en-a, the good people came. SECTION II.-OF THE PREJDICATE. This is either a verb alone, or the copzula "kana" with a noun, adjective, adverb or postposition. a. SIMPLE PREDICATE; as, Hejzuld-a-e, he will come; Chalao-en-a-ko, they went away. b. PREDICATE MODIFIED BY A NOUN; as, Ritijaule exech-a, we will play Rinfjau (a game). c.1 PREDICATE MODIFIED BY AN ADVERB; as, Jaoge-e hejdul-a, he always comes. d. PREDICATE MODIFIED BY AN ADJECTIVE; as, Marat tielokkanae, he appears great Remark. The adjectives may of course be modified by adverbs, which again may be modified by other adverbs, etc. ( 329 ) SECTION III.-OF CONGRUENCE. a. CONCORD OF THE VERB WITH ITS NOMINATIVE. The verb, when in connection with the common gender, agrees with the subject noun, which stands in the nominative, in gender, number, and person;* as Pandu-e-chalao-en-ac Pandu, he went away; herelkin kin hecl-en-a the two men they have come; gimniko ko sen-en-a, the women have gone-but when the verb stands in the neuter gender, it shows neither number nor person; as orak-dhasao-en-a, the house fell down; ora" kcina (not a second kin. as is the case in the common gender,) dhasao-en-a, the two housesfell down; oralko dhasamoen-a, the houses fell down. Several subjects regarded collectively always take respectively plural suffixes, and the verb is always in the plural; as, sadomlko, datirako, setako, sdukrilco-lJo gocf-en-tidi-a, my horse, oxen, dog and pig have died. It is not at all necessary in Santhali that there should be more than one horse, &c., in order to affix the plural suffix to each subject respectively. A collective noun is always followed by the verb in the plural, as, horgad ko hejul-Uik-a, the multitude they are coming, i. e., the multitude is coming. If among many subjects one is to be rendered prominent, that subject is put in the instrumental case and takes * With the exception of, when the subject-noun is put in apposition to either 1st and 2nd person dual or plural; for in this case the noun takes the suffix of the 3rd person, as herelko-le, or herelko-pe hech'-en-a, we or you men have come. ( 330 ) the plural suffix, as, Pargana-te-ko ko hech-en-a, the Pargana with others came. If there be more than one nominative of different persons, then they are all put in the instrumental case and take the let person dual or plural in the verb; as am-te, ii-te, oni-te-,bon chalal a, you, I and he, we will go. b. CONCORD OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUBSTANTIVE. Many adjectives terminating in a take i in the feminine gender; as kcogka herel, a foolish man; kogki aima, i, a foolish woman. When the two subjects differ as to sex, and form their predicate by an adjective terminating in a, then the adjective is always repeated denoting the respective genders; as Kora Korilco adi kco kogca kozleki alana, the boys and girls have become very foolish. The adjectives may take the dual or plural suffixes; but then the suffixes are generally omitted from the substantives; as, am-ren-7,ki kora adikin hara-en-a, your two boys have grown very much. But the adjective and adjective pronouns generally undergo no change, the substantive assuming for the most-part the suffixes. The participles however in the oblique cases always take the infixes. (Vide participles.) When the genitive case takes the suffix ici and stand substantively, it denotes a feminine; as, Pandu-ren-ichi, she who is the wife of Pandu. This is not the case when iSi is affixed to other cases, (Vide page 33.) ( 331 )!e. CONCORD OF THE RELATIVE WITH ITS ANTECEDENT, As a rule in Santhali, the relative pronoun, which, when in the common gender, is either a personal or a demonstrative suffix or interrogative pronoun used relatively, precedes the correlative; as, Onokoko hecl-len, onko doko okaena? What has become of them who came (here); Okoekoko.chalak-a, onkco bare ko rorma, let them speak, who will go; Hani-vm dal-kede, oni bare 4 el-e-me, have a look at him whom you struck; One-m men-ket', that which you said; One kin ko idelket', those two things which they took away. (Vide page 38.) The relative and correlative pronouns agree in number and gender with their nouns. The Participles are most extensively used as relatives; as, dal-le-ko hor, those persons whom they may strike, iel-lede-m, (he) whom you saw. The correlative very often follows immediately after the relative; as, one ona-m agu,-ket', that which you brought; nolloe noa, that which; At other times the correlative is put last in the sentence, as, Oni ko dal-ked-e, oni, kangiae, he whom they struck, he it is; en serma-m nel-lede, oni kan gi-a-e, he is the man whom you saw at that time, ( 332 ) CHAPTER II. OF NOUNS AND CASES. SECTION I-THE NOMINATIVE AND VOCATIVE CASES. a; aTH NOMIINATIVE. The nominative is the case of the subject; as, Pandu-e-riua1-1oan-aj Pandu is sick; kuriko doko hecit-ena, the girls have come, b. THE VOCATIVE. The vocative is the case of address; as., Pandu.! oh Pandud Ayo-go! Oh mother! Ifenda Baba i Hear! SECTION Il-OF THE GENITIVE CASE. This case is used very extensively. It is used to indicate: 1. Connection; as Siok'lkoreakl nahel, the plough of the ploughers. 2. Possession; as 1i-alJ ot, my soil; Am-rem sadom, your horse. 3. Origin; as Panda-al'-Q1, the writing of Panda. Some of the most common of its applications are as follows: SDifference, as onm ar noa-realJ adi begar, there is great difference between this and that. ( 333 ),b. Price; as mit' taka-reald kiehrich1 a rupee worth of cloth. e.Material, as, hasaren,, made of earth; merhe~t'rea,1, made of iron. d. Age; as turwi sernma-ren~, six years of age. e. Use; as tahen-real4, for staying in (as a thFI1 place. f.Size; as mac-'e molca-mreak1J lichric/A, a pie-ce of cloth five hands long.o g.Instead of the Dative;, as thcdcur-ren. bairi, an enemy to -God;- Pandm-ak1, e ror-et"-C, he speaks for Pandu,. it. It is further used where we in E na1ish would use about. reading, against; as,* Pan1u-rea1cj, bA' badaeakcat'-a. Ido not know about Pandu;,Amd ka-aata I -have sinned a gainst' you. SECTION I11-OF THlE INSTRUMhENTAL CASE. This case denotes:. ~.The agent; as Thakour-fhem, stnam bemcto-en-a, all things are created by God. 2. The means; as Partdu-.hotete-i& bartchao-en..a, I was -saved by Pandu. S. The Instrunieut; as tengQcIX te-'2 malJket'-a, I cut with the axe. 4. Association; as Pa'n4u-te Ico Ico chat ao-en-a, Panda with others went away; htr-am, bucthi-te-keir kin 1ca,.Phariaolkcna the old man and the old womaan, (i. e,, husband and wife,) quarrel with each other. 1, os~session; ýas Dml(ý't6 permgI hor, a man full of love ( 334 ) SECTION IV.-OF THE DATIVE CASE. This case denotes: 1. A direction towards something; as Pacdt-then chcalalme.! go to Pandu 1! Bir-te chalcd-me! go to the jungle. 2. Near, or. with;. as Parn4u-then menal-a, it is near or with Pandu; dare buta-then menalc-a, it is near the root of the tree. 3. Ablative relation; as Panci-then-i 'anr-ket'-a, I got it from Pandu. (Vide dat. in connection with the verb.) SECTION V.-OF THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. This case denotes the direct object, and is mostly used in connection with the infinitive; Pan4u dcdal in niel-lede-a, I saw him striking Pandu, i. e, I saw that he struck Pandu. SECTION VI.-OF THE ABLATIVE CASE. This case denotes: 1. Separation (from); as Pancu-JEhon e hech akan-a, he has come from Pandu; Ragdhct-khon e dcr-ket'-a, he ran away from Raydha. 2, Comparison; as; Pai4u-khon Jogot a marasi-a, Jogot is greater than Panda. Renmark 1.-When the dative noun is followed by the verb in the dative case, then the former loses its dative sign as PaU.?i- emed-e-a, I gave it to Pandu. Remarkc 2--The accusative suffixes in connection with the verbs are very extensively used. Remark 3.-This case, in Santhali, is not used to denote the instrument as it does in Latin. We could not, for instance in Santhali, (nor in any Indian language) translate "oculis videmusa " with the Ablative, but should have to use the instrunental ease, ( 335 ) SECTION VII.-OF THE LOCATIVE CASE. This case denotes that something is, or is done, in a cer. tain place, and must in English be translated by in on, etc. as orali-re menaea, he is in the house; parkom-re e gitiakcana, he is sleeping on the bedstead. CHAPTER III, OF PRONOUNS. Very little needs to be added regarding pronouns, in addition to what has already been said in the chapter on Pronouns. (VTide page 23.) SECTION I.-OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS., Strictly speaking, only id, am, acl; alan, ali, aben, a7i; abo, abon, ale, ape, alco, with their respective suffixes are real Personal Pronouns-oni, onkin, onko, ona, onalki, onako being demonstrative Pronouns. Ach, alin, ako, meaning self, selves, are often used as he, they. Remark 1.-It should be observed that the locative case is strictly con. fined to a resting in or on something. Whenever a motion towards or into is to be indicated then the dative case must be used; as dak'-te-n gidi-khadleked-e-a, I threw him into the water. Remark 2.-A constructive case may be added to these 8 cases-namely, a case to which any adverb or postposition may be affixed; as Pandu-talare, Pandu-tulluc', etc. As however the noun does not change, it is not different in form from the nominative, and accusative cases, and needs therefore no special enumeration, a 336 ) Indirect speech is unknown in Santhali, hence in subor_ Ainate sentences, where in English we use the 3rd person the Santhal uses the 1st person; as, he said that he would not go under any circumstances, oni-e-men-ket'-a okalekacteh ha-d chalak-a, he said, I will in no wise go. Ach can only be used for self in the 3rd person-for 1st and 2nd person te is affixed to the personal Pronouns; as acR-e-ehalall-ma! let him go himself; in'-te (or integiid).halal-a, I will go myself; am amte chalak me! go yourself! Te may also be affixed to ac/i, akin, ako. The Santhal language has no honorefic pronouns, nor:are the personal pronouns used as such to any body but a person who either is related or by mutual consent is counted:as related to the speaker by marriage. (Vide page 14). SECTION II.-OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Ren is used as a genitive-sign, when the noun in the nominative is an animate object, and akc, a a, reakl, reas, are used when the noun in the Nominative is an inanimate object; as 14ren hopon, my son; i,-a'" ora1J, my house. Tet', and the genitive suffixes are often used instead of the possessive Pronouns; as hopon-tet', or hopon-tae, his son; or-aA'-,tam your house; hopon-tid (or hQpon-iA,) my son. (Vide page 34). Remark. Tet' is used with all persons and also with inanimate objects,s self; as i' tet', I myself; am-tet', you yourself; Pandu-tet', Pandu himself. ( 337 ) SECTION III.-OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. The difference between noi and ni, oni and ini, etc., is that ni, ini and hini convey the idea of the same; as ini kangea, it is the same person. This difference is also observable between onlkan and enkan. (Vide pages 36 and 37.) SECTION IV-OF INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. The difference between okoe and ohele is, that the first inquires into who one is; and the second into what he is; as okoe kanae? Who is he? chele kanae? What is he? Oka and oheft are used for inanimate objects. (Vide page 37.) SECTION V.-OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. Relative Pronouns have been fully explained at pages 38 and 39, therefore there is no need of further explanation here CHAPTER IV. OF VERBS. SEOCTION I.-OF THE VOICES. A. THE ACTIVE VOICE. The active voice is either transitive or intransitive. 1. Transitive; as hako-n sap-ko-a, I will catch fish; ora~iid benao-a, I will build a house. V ( 338 ) 2. l'ntraný'sitive;as dqi,1-et'-a-e, lie ran away; achhlimýý ket -'-cko, they sneezed. B. TUE REFLEXIVE VTOICE.' This voice, is used to express I. That the subject act 's upon itself; as clal-olk-1ccn-a.-e, he is striking b~imself; abLk-oI~canae, hie washes himself (hands or feet.) 2, That something takes place -with the subject, or that! it is in a certain state; as guju le-lean -a-e, hie is dying 3, Passivity; as iir-og-o1--kan-a, it is beingy cut (dhan); datocho-1,'-k-am-a-e, he is beingr struck; niei-o1k-Jan-a-e, hi is to be seen. 4.. Thatg the subject does something for itself; as bctchhcto_' jofia-e, he willI choose for himself; agu-joi-1ean-a-n,, 1 amn bringrino for myself; Dal-ocho-'o.-a aehis causingr to he struck for himself; 0. THE RECIPROCAL ACTIVE, This voice denotes the bringingr of two obj ects into mutual action; as dapal-lcet'-a-e, be-'struck (something) together, -(from. d~al, to strike); 7-apam-kat'-kin-a-e, he got themn two to find one another, i. e., to meet, (from. ntm, to gret); iiepel-ocho-at'-1in-a-e, he allowed them two to see (4ne another, i". e.,, to meet (from Yie1. to see); ( 339 ) D. THE RECIPROCAL REFLEXIVE. This voice denotes: 1. Reciprocal or mutual action directly; as dapal-ena-kin, they two struck one another; niapam-ena-ko, they found one another, i. e., met; dcpramn-ena-lco, they met one another (from daram to come towards.) 2. Reciprocal or mutual action with respect to one another; as chepet'-jo-kaln-a-ko, they consult (quietly) for themselves; epem-joi-klana-koo, they give one another. E. THE DEPONENT VOICE. This voice has no special form, it is only the reflexive voice with active signification; as horo-ko-er-ok'-kan-a, they sow rice; horo-ko ir-olS-kan-a, they cut (or reap) rice; chet'em-nam-kan-a? What do you want? (from iam to get.) From the above it will be seen what a facility the Santhal voices, in connection with the cases and causatives, afford for expressing one'self with precision. Greek, which is one of the most refined of languages, and has more voices than most of the Indo-Germanic tongues, is far inferior to Santhali in this respect. In Santhali we have separate forms for the accusative and dative cases middle voice; whereas in Greek we have only one; as dal-okJ-a-n, I will strike myself; dam-joi-ain I will find for myself. TVrro7alt, I strike myself; wtaKwo at, I find for myself. In Santhali we have separate forms for reciprocal and causal action, whereas in Greek we have to use the same (only) form in the middle voice' as ropoi--a-d ( 340 ) (fromn Vor to speak,) I will discourse (speak mnutuially with another person); Gidra~ro-?I' chet'ohojoiz-c, I will cause; or get the children to be taught; ZiaXtyonai, I discourse; Maaca 70V 7ra73ag, to get the children instructed for one'self (Germ.,Sich'die Kindei, unterrichten lassen). The Santhal voices, in connection with the cases and causatives, are so precise th~at n~o doubt as to the exact mneaning is possihie. SECTION I.-~OF TENSES. FUTURE TENSE. This Tense is used to express, 18t, FUJTURITY; as gapcc4i cwil1k-ct, I shall go to-morrow; ba-n-dat-me-a, I will not strike you (thee);, rctpudo!k-a, it will break. 2nd. GENERAL STATEMENTS; as Thialur- samam ico khon. e marak-a, God is greater than all; Panyfm-ae-a (dat. case,) he 1s P anaL i. e. he is called, or his name is pan4uu adji-edare-a1k-c, he is very strong. 3rd. HABIT OIL CUSTOM; as lahetre is abu3.ok-a, e'neete. enale jom-a, we first wash our hands and then we eat; noa bvurure serma-ke serrnale 8endrae-a, we hunt every year on this mountain. 4th. Present AND) Past. ACTIONS IN vi"vid NARATIVES;' -as cha~t.chando re adU~e, sendrae-a, baskceclJ' jomicate burute Zew O-halaJ. irruphe.1 tioloate, tingukate (arna-le rue, tirio-le -r a, scu~etet'anjoin~Jcte Disom hor ko jar-zvak--a, jarwamit' ( 341 ) kate burute le dejol/-a ar jelklco le goc-angi-in the month of Chait we 7hunt very much:-Having taken our breakfast we go to the mountain; arriving at the foot of it, we stand and play on the drum and blow the flute, hearing the sound of which, the people of the land come together, we ascend the mountain and kill a lot of deer. (Regarding gQchangi, vide Reflexive voice, dative case, contingent tense) Per ekothenm t kh'e/anre adi jutiA caikcautal-ca -seta/'re beret'kate burmte le ehalal/-a, sahan sa/cam le aguea, bugite le dakaea utuea, jomale, ar ayup'enlchan kcuhi muchat'te senlkate bugite le seresia, ned-ac-le, ar emecImoko t len/khan le gitiengi-when I was with'(my) friends I was very much pleased:After having risen in the morning we used to go to the mountains to fetch wood and leaves, to cook rice and vegetables and eat (when we came home) and in the evening we used to go to the end of the village to sing and dance, and being tired thereof we would go to bed. 5th. HYPOTHETICAL PRESENT; as hir bachon badqa.e. Bam badaekchan ii laiama nahak': Nondekhon senkate Basapathar sec/itemn chalakia, Thakurpr'atenm rakap'a, gda&e paromkrate Horinsii em n'ela, oinae ato senbagialte Deocham tioket'gi-I do not know the road (Ichweissja (choi) nicht den Weg). If you do not, I will soon explain it to you: Starting from here you go in the direction of Hasapather, enter Thakurpura, passing the river you see Horinsing, and leavinag that village behind you, you reach Deocha. ( 342 ) THE GENERAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. This tense is used to express in a general far-fetched way an act which has commenced and is not finished, without laying any stress on the present moment; as Thckur-e-iiel-et'-bona, God sees us, i. e., he has not ceased to see us (not particular now); apun-nit'-dhabicil-e-kamiet'-a, my father worketh until now; nebetar horo-le-rohoe-et'a, at this time we plant rice. (No stress being laid on the present moment, for in that case the Special Incomplete Present would be used; as bohok adi hasoedin-klana, my head is paining me very much now) This tense is never used like the English Present Indefinite to express general truths, or habits, i. e., actions done now and then, hence we could not translate the English, " God punishes the sinner," with, Thakur kqkik/o-e-danicomet'-ko-a; for that would mean: God has commenced and has not ceased to punish certain sinners; but we would have to use the Future and say; kakclilco Thaku1c-e-d1an'dom-ko-a. This tense can only be used when something is actually taking place. THE SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PRESENT. This tense ought--st, to be strictly confined to the present moment, when used in the General Form, Active; as dalel-e-lcan-a-lco, or dal-e-kan-a-ko, they are striking him now. 2nd it is used to express, that something is being tlie to be effected, but is failing; as mit'tan marai halco e sab-e-kan-a, rmenkhan ba-e sap-dar.e-ae-a, onte noge-e phe te pherecl kan-a, he is trying to catch a large fish but cannot, (because) he is dodging, ( 343) In the Reservative, Intensive and Continuative Form s as well as in the Reflexive Voice and Dative Case, which have no General Incomplete Present, this Tense is used for both the Present Tenses, but can never be used as an Indefinite Present; as Thakur e del--ka-bon-lkana, God looks or is looking on us; sisilkna-e, he learns now-a-days, or just now, to plough; jomal e eniabonkana, he gives us always or just now food; kamiakaetahen kan-a-e, he is continuing to work; vuak karn a e, he is sick. The difference between the Future, the General Incomplete Present and the Special Incomplete Present, (when the Future also is used as a Present Tense) is this: the Future is used when something is done now and then, under certain circumstances; as noa butrurepe sendraea sepe baia? ' Do you hunt on this mountain (or hill), or do you not? Jahatisjahatis le sendraea, Jahatisjahatis do baia, sometimes we do and sometimes we do not; the General Incomplete Present is used when something has actually commenced, but is not yet completed, without laying any stress on the present moment; as apun nit'dhabici e cami et'-a, my father worketh until now--and the Special Incomplete Present, when something is being, done just now; as dal-et' ko kana-e, he is striking them now. RECENT PAST. This tense is used-lst, to express past time, as having once taken place, without any reference to the time of our speaking: it thus corresponds with the Greek Aorist and ( 344 ) the Latin Historical Perfect, and is therefore the narrative tense; as Pcrgant edo chet' e merlet'a? Chet' bae me n, bugigi e men keet'c. What said the Pargana? What should he say, he spoke well, i. e., to my satisfaction. 2nd. As a sequence to the Anterior Past; as adi sener e mcatl lacld, olkoe cho ko idilet', he cut a lot of "rollas," who may have taken them? Encah ko hecli len-c, chalao-enako, they came in the forenoon, but have gone away; hollalom mit' tai dikco hopogn inakce bcarec kichrici e komrrolaae, acmn-ruar ket'ad. The year before last a Hindu stole two pieces of cloth from me, but I got them back. Bcee dar lad a? DCr let' giae, sap kedean, did he not run away? (Yes) he ran away indeed, (but) I caught him. 3rd. It is used to denote events, which have happened just now or recently; as jom? ket' ald, I have taken my food; hech enc klo, they have come; chalaoenako, they have gone. 4th. To express actions past, which have abiding effects; as, gQci enae, he has died, i. e., is dead; bagi ked idae, she has left me; tis e bcagi ket' mea? When did she leave you? A4i din re, long ago. THE ANTERIOR PAST. This tense is used to express--1st, actions performed in the past, but afterwards revoked or neutralized; as Senlenako, they went (but they have returned); tolledeako, they tied or had tied him (but he was let loose again); bagiledeae ( 345 ) hece rucar enae, she left or had left him, but she has returned; goci. lenae, he died (Jesus) (but is not dead); 2nd, actions which took place long ago, but have now lost their importance; as /ora joklhech ii nete ledeca, I saw him in youth; hapramlo noako bako nel &tal, our forefathers did not see these things; 3rd, actions which took place anterior to other actions in the past; as birre mit' ta. kil hopon in net le dea, ona ten hecfi ena, I saw the young of a tiger in the forest, therefore I have come; bae bugiledida adon bagikedea, he did not cure me, therefore I left him; auri gujukre adi e saset' lena, he suffered much before he died. THE PERFECT. This tense is used-1st, to call attention to thefact, that something has taken place in the past and remains in its effects, i. e., connects the past with the present; as tolakcadeako, they have tied him; kirin-alcadeand, I have bought him; Dapalaccaoat'ani, I have covered it up. It corresponds therefore in this respect with the English Perfect. 2nd. To denote, that something took place sometime ago and remains in its effects; as holaid kiria, kadea, I bought him yesterday; mahnder hilo' keo sap'akradec, they caught him the day before yesterday, (and have got him.) 3rd. To express that something took place long ago, but has not been altered, i. e., remains in its effects; as hotkalom klo hajot alcadea, they imprisoned him two years ago (and he is still in prison.) ( 346 ) The difference between the Recent Past, the Anterior Past and the Perfect presents a great many difficulties, and nothing is easier for the European than to use the Recent Past for the Anterior and vice versd, and the Perfect for the Recent Past. An example taken from the Creed will show the principal difference between these three tenses: ar, (ini patiaoakana) oniren hopon aboren k1isar Jesu Masire oni Dhorom Jiu hotete e garhaolen, ardaici Marialkhon e janam len, Ponti Pilat tarire e harlket' sasetlen, patakhuntire e khiljalat', ocholen, gQcilene, topaledeko, hanapurite eargulen, pe mnhaShilo1jre goQdkokh",n e beret'ruaren, sermate e dech en, Thalekr sanamndare apareal etomsecire e duruy'alan. Garhaolena and janamlena, here the Anterior Past is used, are because the event took place long ago; saset len, khiljalat'ocho lena, goch lena, topaledeklo, ra.gulena, here the Anterior Past is used, because he suffers no more, is no more on the Cross, is no longer dead, is not in the grave, has returned from hades. Beret'ruarena, dechi ena, here the Recent Past is used, because he has not returned to the grave and has not re-descended to hades, hence the Anterior Past could not be used in these two instances; for if we said beret rua lenae, it would mean that he rose but has died again; and we could not say gocli ena, for that would imply, that he has not risen. Durup'alcanae, he has seated himself and is sitting, here the perfect is used to show that he is still sitting. A few more examples will further illustrate the difference between these tenses: Tol ledeako, chilcate choc rar-.en? ( 347 ) They tied him, how may he have got loose? Tolkedeako, ar ohoe dardarelena, they have tied him, he cannot run away any more now; sr.igi ko tolaloadea, bar? patiaol'khan, enydekhan senkate neleme, indeed they have tied him, if you do not believe it, then go and see him. Scp'ledealko, they caught him (but he has got lose). Sap'kedeako, they caught him (historically true), and so far as I know he has not got lose. Sap'ckcadeako, they caught him, and he is in their hands. In the Reservative Form, and the Dative Case, there is only one form for both Recent and Anterior Past, and the meaning in each instance must therefore be gathered from the connection. THE GENERAL INCOMPLETE PAST. This tense is formed by adding tcah1can, zwas, to the Geneneral Incomplete Present. It denotes--st, that something was being done in the past, without laying any stress on the concurrence of other actions; as lqiet' tah1kcanae, he was saying, i. e., he, (on a certain occasion) said (among other things) so and so. 2nd. It is used to express habits or customs in the past; as sedaeren sendraet'tah-kana, nitokdon haranmena, in former times I used to hunt, (but) now I have grown old; perakothen tahekcanre, jel adin gochiet'-kotahVkcana, when I was staying with (my) friend I used to kill lots of deer. ( 348 THE SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. This tense is used to denote: 18t. That a certain action was going on, without being completed, when another event took place; as senerin mamal1kan tahVkana, onre mif'ta~ kill e bhi.rkaokedina, I was cutting rollas when a tiger frightened me. 2nd. That something was being tried, but failed; a s sabekln-tahalkanac, phaskcaoenae, I was trying to catch him, but he got off. In the Reservative Form and in Dative this tense is also used for the General Incomplete Past. THE INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. This tense is formed from the Anterior Past by adding tahekanca. It is used to denote: Sst. That something has occurred before some other event in the past time, but which had been altered again; as ape auri pe hejuld regi e zuumlen tcahekana, he had fallen into the water before you came (but was no longer there when you came); gocfiledetahklanan, esk/arente ko erekedi-?ia, I had killed him (before another hit him,) but being alone (and the friends of the other being many) they cheated me (of him, I did not get him.) Here it is used as a Pluperfect. 2nd. It precedes the Anterior Past, which again is followed by the Recent Past, which again may be followed ( 349 ) by the Present Tense; Koelede tah'EJanan, bae anjom-laka, onatet heci rzucrena, ar nelr'em elinkana, I requested him (to do so and so,) but he did not listen, therefore I have come back, and you see me here. (Here it is used as a past tense.) 3rd. It is used as a Past Conditional; as Am alom hechlenkhan in tunledetcahekana; if you had not come I would have shot him; mal" ledetahekaanaqi, menkan ban mal'ledect, I would have killed him, but did not do it (on account of such and such a thing.)* THE DECISIVE PLUPERFECT. This Tense is formed from the Perfect by adding tah`ckance. It is used: 1st. To denote that a certain action had taken place and remained in its effects, when another action took place in the past; as meromirn seniamkedea, tolckade tahicancako, I found the goat, they had tied her; perako then id sen lena, menkhan ruak hor-e gocgakaantahekanac jiwet'do bc&s senalmledea, I went to (my) friends, but the sick person bad died (and was dead), I did not find him alive. 2nd. It is used as an Incomplete Past with verbs, the Perfect of which have the meaning of the Present Tense; as durup'akan tahekatnae, he had seated himself and was sitting --was sitting; scp'akadetahklkan-ako, they had caught him= they where holding him. * The above may also be translated: I had almost shot him, i. e., I was on the point of shooting him. ( 350 The great difference between the two Plupelects is, that the Indecisive denotes that something had been done, but had been neutralized, when another event took place in the past whereas the Decisive denotes that it continued effective; as unumlen tahkcanae, he had sank into the water but had come up again; unumakcantahkI anae, he had sank into the water and was still there. INCHOATIVE FUTURE, This tense is used to express that something will be or is about to be done; as senol'-lagit'-e, he is about to go soon; dqlacgit'-ko, they are intending to run away soon. When this tense is used it implies that the action will not take place immediately; as umokl lagit'-ko, they intend to be baptized, i. e. have made up their minds for it and it will not be long before they will be baptized. INCHOATIVF PRESENT. This tense is used to denote that the action is going to. take place immediately, or is on the very point of being executed; as umolk lagidol-klanae, he is now about to be baptized, (in a few moments it will take place); merozm klo gojelagidoJ'-kcaa, they are just now about to kill a goat. INCHOATIVE PAST. This tense is used to denote that a certain action was just on the point of being executed, when another event took place; as jel-ii tnie lagidold-kan-tahekcan-re mit'lta chire-e 4udo-qgt'ena, onate-e dqrket'ca, just as I was about to shoot a deer a bird flew up and frightened him away. ( 351 ) THE OPTATIVE. This tense (or rather mood) is used to express: 1st. Option; as noa chaorice em emckina? Maente hatao me, would you give me this plaited cowtail? Well take it; (Germ nimm es doch); am barn hatao khan, elndekhan em em kiLa? If you will not take it, will you give it to me? Noko motore okoetam hataokea? Noitaý hotaokeea, which of them will you take? I will take this. 2nd. Condition; as am em sen lenkhan in" senkok-a, if you will or would go or have gone, I will or would go or have gone. It must however be born in mind that this tense even when used as a Conditional, retains its optative signification and must not be confounded with the Conditional (tense). This will be obvious from the following examples: Am noam em lid khan, ii hatao kiea, if you would give me this, I would accept of it. Noam emkin-khan adin raskakoka, if you only would give me this how glad would I be! THE CONDITIONAL. This tense is used to express actions conditionally in connection with negative particles (in participles and gerunds also without them); as, aloe dal lini khan, ohon dal lea, if he had not struck me I should not have struck him; amem sen-len-reho, oho gin sen lena, even if you went I should not go; ohoe hec1iruarlena, ti*nal em menlereh&, he will not come back, in spite of all you may say. ( 352) THE CONTINGENT. This tense is used to express a hypothetical future or present; as sener mamak~ birte chalaotalac me. Paset' kul e hejuk' adoe go cJ kedingi? Qhoe gocilema, am then e hec'lenkhan, taigatem makl daram kedegi, adoe dartap' engi, go to the forest and cut us some saplings. Perhaps the tiger may come and then he will kill me? No he will not kill youif he should come to you, well then you simply strike at him with your axe and he runs away. Here kill, strike, and runs are in the Contingent Tense (or mood). Kami bad Lamlekhan adon hecRruarengi, if I should not get work, well then I come back; gapa bare hejuk me, setak', ado laN jomket'gi, birte lai chalaengi, sener laN mak'lcet'gi, ado oradte lac hecli ruarengi, gitich angilac, come very early to morrow (morning), then we will take our food (together) go to the forest, cut sapings, return home and go quietly to bed. This tense is formed from the Recent Past by eliminating the final, "a" and substituting " gi." It is always used to express some imaginary future action and must be translated in English sometimes by the Future Indicative, sometimes by the Indefinite Present Indicative, and at other times, by the Future Potential. THE PRELIMINARY FUTURE. This tense is used to express that something will take place before another event in the future; as nonde lai jirao angi, endete lain ehop'a, we two w ill first rest here a little, then we two will commence-, hape, perathen-in bolo lengi ( 353 ) endete lai chalaca, wait, I will first call in at my friend's and then we will go; babon jiraoca? Noa gada bon paromlegi, shall we not rest? We will first cross the river. THE PRELIMINARY EXPOSTULATIVE. This tense is used in retorting, i. e., exposing the fallacy of an argument or the unreasonableness of a demand; as klomb'ro chakbape aguledea? Onile sap'le nah, ende-nahi-le aguea, why did you not bring the thief? We must first catch him and then we will bring him; nolo hor kwurhia-klante ko rengejol kLana, aloko kurhia len khan oho ko rengeci lena. Tisem nel kurhiaakat lea? Amdo adim badaea le kc.rhiak-kana mente. Dalc lenahk endre nahim arjaoa, these people are very lazy, therefore they are poor; if they were not lazy, they would not be poor. When have you seen us lazy? You know much about (I suppose) whether we are lazy or not: It must first rain, and then you will earn (riches). This tense (or rather mood) is always used when a person is angry with another for expecting or demanding what is unreasonable. THE PRELIMINARY PERSUASIVE. This tense ought perhaps rather to be called the Preliminary Corrective, or Modificative, as it is used to remind or persuade the speaker, that what he imagines to be easy of accomplishment, really requires the adoption of some preliminary measure which may prove unattainable or impracticable as, ne adin arjawo Thakur bhor emrembae, this year W (.354 ) I shall earn much. God must first give you his blessing, (and then YOu will earn much); bide semr6ate adijelko'.tudgoeli1koc. Aelncim leco-bam, going to the woods I will shoot a lot of deer. You must first see them; nonce adlutrtv utL qmencd7a, detabon joma. Daete dec1-d1ae-eme-babomh ere are lots of mangoes let us eat. We must first be able to climb the tree. THE PRELIMINARY ADMIISSIVE. This tense is either used to express an admission that something must be done previously to the adt proposed by another, or, in simple statements, that something must be done previously to something else; as kornbro chakl bam aguledea? Onii sap'dare le nahSd aaguea. I", scatyleenam. Why did you not bring that thief? I must first be able to catch him and then I will bring him. Yes (that is true) you must first catch him; sihurttinirebon tioga,'? Auria, gagabon paromle ena, when will we reach Sewry? Not yet, we must first pass the river. THE CONTINUATIVE FUTURE. This tense denotes: Ist. Continuative futurity; as, auvrie Vhg red dcal-aka-e tahen-a, I will continue to strike him till he confesses. 2nd. Indefinite Present; as, behaj ko a-a, diko hopoQn do, aurim. em-alco-re, kco ruhet'-alkct-'w-tahen-a, the Hindus are very troublesome, they continue to scold you till you give them. ( ~3~j') ) 3,rd. Dubious Perfect; as.olokolioe cyvn3om-akae- tahemJchwnm, ma rorpe! Whoever of you. may hiave heard it, say ont 'THE CONTINUATIVE PRESENT. This tense denotes that something 'has commenced and is being continued up to -the time of speaking; as Sin'satap in karni,-aleae-tahen-Je-an-a, enreh6b ba-e n'atum-ak'-tin'*-a,, I have, been working the whole day, still 'he does not recoggnize it (praise me). THE COiNTINUATIVE PAST. This tense denotes that something had coininencecd and was being continued in the pa-st; as mbit' tagate~i Jami-a/caetah~lzam-a, enreh& ay-tp'r7e hecli-kate e irmzhet'-got'-keed-ij11-a, -1 'had been working without intermission, still hle came anid. scolded me in the evening. THE PRELIMINARY I3ENEDICTIVE. This may be used both as a, Preliminary Beneditctive and a Precative; as, Jaekorarko liel tiole1komar, auqrim guju1,,redo! Mayest thou first see arand children. before thou diest I Gog ll eii minar, enc/e te ama1) achel iyz ha~taoa, Mayest thout first die,, and then I will t4ie thiy riches!I This mood may also be used when we in Engrlish would use that or in orde thawt; as aqv-i-- gujqJlire jaek-ora?. ko e 2nettIelioma. Onaiate Thaloar e soil jtttichfilaoadea, God ha~s prolonged -his 'Life, in order that -he may see, g randchildren be-fore he, dies. Re-marks. TUhisi tens;e is seldoea neued. ( 356 ) THE PRELIMINARY IMPERATIVE. This mood is used to express preliminary orders, wishes and requests; as, Durup' len me endetem ckalak a, sit first down, and then you (thou) may go. THE BENEDICTIVE, This mood is used in the same manner as Preliminary Benedictive, with the exception of the preliminary idea; as gujuWmmam! Mayest thou die! Mara~olmam! Mayest thou be great! (uLrolmcam, onaten ochoglcet'a, I took it away in order that you may or might fall. THE IMPERATIVE. This is used to express a command, will, order etc; as chalta me! Go! Hejul me! Come I The future tense with gi is used as a mild Imperative; as hejuM giam, you (then) must come (don't say no). THE CONTINUATIVE BENEDICTIVE. This is used in the same way as the other Benedictive, only with the addition of continuation; as?rua-akan-tahen. mam! Mayest thou continue to be sick! THE CONTINUATIVE IMPERATIVE. This is also used in the same way as the General Imperative with the addition of continuation; as aurin heci-ruRemark. The Benedictive is used extensively in dependent sentences, where we would use that, in order that etc., in English. ( 357 ) ar-old-re, 7orde durup'-akan-tahen-me! Remain sitting here till I come back! SECTION III.-OF MOODS. As the Benedictive, Imperative, Conditional, Contingent, and Optative have all been treated of in connection with the tenses, we have here only to treat of the Indicative, the Subjunctive, and the Infinitive,A. INDICATIVE. This mood is used in independent assertions and ques. tions; as chalaic-a-n, I will go; hec/-en-a-e, he came; mara;-kan-a-e, he is great; bae dal-ko-a, he will not strike them; chet'-em-nel-ket'-a? What did you see? Tinal-.em-damket'-a? How much did you get? B. SUBJUNCTIVE. This mood is used to express an action, objectively possible, as conceived by the mind. It stands between the Indicative, the actual, and the Optative or conditional, the subjective possible, and is always used whenever there is no positive reality on the one hand, and yet not a mere subjective possibility on the other; for, in the first case, the Indicative is used, and in the latter, the Conditional, or Optative. The difference in form between the Indicative and Subjunctive is that the latter leaves out the final " a." The Subjunctive may be used with or without prefixed or affixed particles. The most common particles used in con ( 358 ) nection with this mood are khan, if or when., choi, possibly, paset', perhaps, bare, may or oh that! Hutk1eci, in order. They are used in the following way:-Dal-khan-e, if lihe will strike; dal-ket'-khan-e, if he (really) struck; Paset'-ko dal-1ked-e, perhaps they struck him; paset'-e bagi-me,. perhaps he may leave you; bagi-lced-e-choe, chet' choi, he-possibly hals left her; oni-bare-e hejJsl, may he (or, oh, that he would) come! Khcajukie bad1e, that he may know. Edrehkate ar-e dal-me, en4eekhan chet'-em men-a? Getting angry and he strikes you, what will you then say? Ma ko kuruqmutumma, jahalekate kami ko salt, let them. work hard that they may finish the work. When chnAs is affixed to the verb it might be called the Potential mood; but as the termination of the verb is the same, with the exception of the particle, it is more correct to call it The &udjumctive with choi. The following examples may serve to show the different form and meaning of the mood: Dal-a-ko, they will strike; ar-lo-dal, and (in case) they strike; Dal-ke-a-ko, they would strike; Dal-le-klchan-ko, in case they should strike. C. INFINITIVE. As Santhali is extraordinary in its grammatical structure in other respects, it may be expected to be so likewise with regard to the Infinitive, and such is the case; for not IRemarik. Chgo, when affixed to subjunctive may also have an asserting meaning; as chaba-ket'-cho-, well, I bave finished it. i(ermn. Teh. habe es je volledet.) ( 339. ): only -has-this remarkable language an Thfilitive for eachvoice, jornmm ccttsative, case, nzumber, and person, but also for. each teasel. Theý forms of the Infihitives are the same as those of, the Adjective Participies.. Some of 'these Infinitives are of freq'uent, others -of are ~occurrence. Among the common, are the F uiture Infin'itives, General and Inteasive Fdrl-rn. and the Perfect, the second and third of whichi'enerally -are used as pure Infinitives, whereas the first is more used Jlike the Sans-Icrit Infinitive or tbe Latin':Supine,-. The Infinitive may, be used L Ass TH-E SUBJECT' OF Ak SENTENCE;- AS,` Dctdad do baA. bmgi-a, it is not good to strike. Thtu4' do algcdk-a, it is:easy to shoot., 2.' As THE PREDICATE.' Laich 6uyi h73 9QggC, to backbite is also to kill; Dhoromm 'itahen~gi bugi tahen, to live religiously is to, ive wvell.: 3: As,- THE OB3JECT'a' Dadal batich''gi le meta1M latna,. we call it bad to strike.,, Dularocho1 91i s8nae-lkana, he wishes to-be loved.. ACCUSATIVE -WITH" INFINITIVE: Thel accusative, with In nitive is constructed in twa warY s: ( 360 ) 1. By prefixing the Infinitive; as kokombro in eel-lede-a, I saw him steal; dadal in" aojom-alckd-e-a, I have heard him strike. 2. By infixing the Infinitive, as del-komb.ro-ked-e-a-n, I saw him steal; aijoim-dal-ked-e-a-z, I heard him strike. It is only the Future Infinitive of the General Form, i. e., the bare root, which can be used in the second instance, whereas the Future Infinitive of the Intensive Form and the Infinitives of any of the other Tenses may be used in the first mode of construction; as dadal e mnenakaoad-in-a, he has told me to strike; Dcr-ket' ko men et'-a, they say that (he) ran away (they say (him) to have run away); goQci-alan ko men et'-a, they say that he has died, they say (him) to have died; hecE len in anjom-lak'-a, I heard that he had come,-I heard (him) to have come. The simple root, (i. e., the Future Infinitive of the General Form,) is, with the exception of being infixed, as shown above, used more like the Latin Supine in umn or the Sanscrit Infinitive; as, sadom kiri' ii hech akana, I have come to buy a horse; da1k agu in kolakadea, I have sent him to fetch water; sadom tol-e e met-ad-ii-a, he told me to bind (him) the horse. D. OF PARTICIPLES. The Santhal language has two kinds of participles,-the adjective or relative, and the adverbial or absolute. Remark. It should be observed that any of the abridged Pronouns may be affixed to the Infinitive to show the person and case; as, em-ae e metadiri %, he told me to give him; dal-ko e metades, he told himto strike them. ( 361 ) I. THE ADJECTIVE OR RELATIVE PARTICIPLES. These are used: a. To express an attribute to a substantive; as dadal hor, a striking man; jorQkl-kan met', a weeping eye; chalak hor, a man about to go; dal hor, a struck man; adjom ror, a heard word; hejuk kan hor, a coming man; b. To express an attribute to a substantive relatively; as, del-dal-ledeko ho6r leo mendareacSa, the men who saw him strike are able to say; hec len ko h6r, the men who came; senolk/o h6r do okaenako? What has become of the men who will go; ndel-ede ko h.r, the men who saw him; janhe dadal ho.r, the man who will thrash out janhe; hola gocfien hor, the man who died yesterday; goQJ-ke-tam hor chal barn metadea? why did you not ask (tell) him, who would have carried your? (dhan.) These Participles may also be used substantively; ranad-e-tin-ko, they who gave medicine to him, who is mine; hopQnak hapa recKket'-tae-tin-klo, they who took away his stick, (he) who is my son; iel-kedetinkeo, they who saw him, who is mine; dal goci-ked-e-ko, they who killed him; delked-i i-pe, you who saw me; dal-let' me-n, I who struck thee. The Santhal language, as already has been shown in the paradigms of the verb, has a participle for each tense. A few examples showing how they are used may not be superfluous:Remark. It should be observed that the 3rd person singular takes the suffix ich', instead of e, when the Participle stands substantively; as emnat ko-ich', he who gave them. ( 3262 ), IFUTURE. Ohala1S hor'hohoq-ae-me 1 Call the man who istoUgo. Kanie tora aeemok hgr taim!.1 Yonder is. th-e way you shall go. GENERAL. INCOMPLETE' PRESENT;ý.A~jowet' hor cha1. ein~ q-hed,-e-1&,atn-t?ý Why do you scold the man, who. listens-? &tham mraJ,--et'`1co hor chc4o' in" edre ako-a? Why should I he angry with. those (mnen) who cut wood 2, SPECIAL INCOM~PLETE- PRESENT.Atiqi-et'kco-Z-aq? hgr do olcoec? Who is he who iis feedingr themn.(the cattle.) REzCENT PAST.' HalaA-4Joet' hor Iurneme f Name the. person who took it uip! ANTERIOR PAST.' Dqr-ie~t' ho' e 714uar- ena, the, man- who, ra~n away has returned.. PE RFE'CT. Sa~p'-cdcd-e hor buigi n- metaelcana, I ca11 the. man good who has caughlt himn. GENERAL INCOMPLETE' PAST.' Kombyo et' tcth-eJcan tale horipi 3aip'alrad:'e-at, I have caught. the man who used to steal our (dhan.) SPECIAL INCOMPLETE PAST. Al ~e-Jcan-tah'Z/vam hor, apme~pe! Bring the. ers-on; who, wvas seeing h-im (when he did itO ( 363 ) INDECISIVE PLUPERFECT. Jol-lecl-e-tahelcan heor i',qz tiei-ledea, I sawV him who had bound himt (released auaiD). ]DECISIVE PLUPERFECT., D'u~rup a1ý,ar tch~kan hgr ie iA' gel t'io7ý-7cet' lcoa, I grot to see those who had seated themselves, (adwr itng.) IL THE ADVERBIAL 0OR ABSOLUTE PARTICI PEES. These Participles are used very much like the Latin Participle when it is an abridged sentenace, and like the Ablative; as:-- Absolutte; as chctelhon ocdon~e-em~ihart, charnpct-le tiolr'-1et'-a, havin~g left Chae, we arrived in Champa; (compare Arstde, atriJ pmlsas, Lacedce mone~m fugi) Pargctna beret'-enlkha'm, ale ho& le hecli ena, the Parg~ana having, risen, we also came (home), (compare Pytliagoqws, Tarqgujnwo sztperbo r-egnartte, iv, Italian venit.) Ilejal,'chan, m~a hecli och~o ae, pe, (if) coming, let him come.Dal-ect-e-keha' em, chi7J-a-e-a, striking him, what can you do? S Zel-ede-lcan-b1n haohgm olcodare-tea, seeing himi ('now), you ccannot hide him Remnark. In the above manner the participles of any' tense, case.. causative, voice, form, number and person may he used. Remark. In Engylish these participles cannot always be rendered liter-ally, a'ý we bave not a specical participle for each tense, like in Santhab., Words like as wkeii aftee, etc. must be used with the verb in the indicative. ( 364 ) Sen lagidok kian khan ma e chalal ma! Being about to go, (well) let him go! Goldkaoat'me khan, bae emama? Having promised you, will he not give you? E. OF GERUNDS. The Gerunds are used to express the action of the verb as an abstract substantive-idea (Substantivbegriff); and are declined like other nouns. The Santhal language has one gerund for each tense. These gerunds partake of a two-fold declension: 1st, they partake, like the Infinitives and Participles, of the FOUR CASES IN CONNECTION WITH THE VERB; as dal, to strike; dal-ae, to strike for him; dal-tae, to strike his; dal-e, to strike him; and 2nd, THEY PARTAKE OF THE EIGHT CASES IN CONNECTION WITH THE NOUNS; as dal-akat', they having struck; dal akat'-reaj porho, the benefit of having struck; dal-akat'-te, by having struck; dal-akat'-then, near where one has struck; dal akat'-khon, from having struck; dal-akat'-re, in having struck. The gerundial concretes are also declined like the abstracts; as hech alkan-k/o-then chalal me! Go to those who have come! Irakat'-akl-khon idi me, take from the cut (dhan.) The instrumental case of the future Gerund is often used like an Infinitive; as hejukte ge hoyol-tama, you must come! The locative case gives very often the idea of with regard to; as dal-kedean dal-re-do. With regard to striking, I struck him, ( 365 ) The future Gerund of the Reservative Form is used very extensively as an adverbial participle; as dal-ka-te, striking or having struck. SECTION IV.-OF CASES IN CONNECTION WITH THE VERBS. As already stated, (p. 44), the verbs are influenced by four cases, the Nominative, the Genitive, the Dative, and the Accusative. A. THE NOMINATIVE. The Nominative is the case of the subject, which always, in the common gender, is an abridged pronoun, and affixed either to the final a and consequently stands last in the sentence, or to the last word before the verb; as dal-ket'a-le, we struck; hecl-en-a-ko, they have come; ale-rem hopon-then-ko hec-alcan-a, they have come to our son; am-hottee-i banchao-en-a, I was saved by you. B. THE GENITIVE. This case is used to express: 1st. Possession; as agu-ket'-tam-a-ko, they have brought yours; kombro-akat'-tid-a-ko, they have stolen mine. 2nd. Origin; as nel-akat'-tae-a-n ol, I have seen his writing. 3rd. Behalf of, or for; as kami-ka-tin-me, work for me; ror-tabon-ma-e! Let him speak for us! 4th. Dative relation; as dharao-tae-a-n, I owe (to) him; (3-6-6 joharctabon-me.! Be greeted (to us) (Germi. Sei. mm gegrusst.) 5th. Opposition, against; as ad/in' Jcci-akat'-tam-a, IL have sinned against you. 6th. Accusative relation; as' a71j~om-ti'-i-"ae. hear me c.TiHE DATIVE. This case is used, where we in English would use the prepositions to, for, on, towards, with, against, etc; as hech~-adia-e, he came to mne; benao-ad-e-a-k- IL made for him; to1 -ad-e-a-ko, they tied on, him; tie-tica-ad-in--a, he stretched the Land towards mie; edre-at'-Ako-a-e, he got angry with them; hislca-ad-,in-a-e, gheot a spite agrainst me. di. THE ACCUSATIVE. This case is used to express: 1st. The direct abject; as agu-/co-m! hningr thou them Zi~l~ct'=o~a~,I saw them; dcnl-e-m-e! strike tho'u him. 2nd. Ahiative sense; as tai,,a-e recli -iced-ikial he took the axe fom me; more talca e -agmced-i --a, he took five Rupees fron me; tGnalo' emn agu-iii-a.? how much will you take from m-e 2. 3rd. Engloish genitive; as pe -poisa e e~rekced-ipl-a, he cheated me of five pice. The last two are examples of a double, object, like inr~ Enls_ The j Udge fined him five, R-upees, ( 367 ) SECTION V.- --OF THE FORKS., a. THE GENERAL FORM. This form is used in a general way, like the only form in English.; as,dai-a-i, I will strike; gQcl-ke7d-e-a-kAo, they killed him; kirin-ked-e-a-n, I have bought him; nel-kedC-e-a-ko, they saw him; a jom-ket'-a-i, I heard it. b. THE RESERVATIVE FORM. This form denotes an action by which the object is brought into a certain state, in which it is allowed to contitue, so as to be available for any ulterior purpose. It is used where in German they would use am, auf, hin, etc.; as a.jom-ka1'-me! listen to it! (Hdre es an i) (that you may give evidence, in case it should be necessary), AVel-kad-ea-ko, they saw him (Sie sahen ihn an) (and left him in that state); kirid-ka-1ko-an, I will buy them up; (ich wercde sie tauf klaften); gocli-ka-ko-kan-a-ko, they are killing them; (sie schlachten sie hin) (and let them lie.) e. THE INTENSIVE FORM. This form denotes an effort to effect what the verb im. plies; as / -a- ct-m cranm-ae, he seeks (to get) (fronam icam, to get); - iam-et'-kan-a-e, is the general form and means, he is getting,-7ie-ieb-Jlatn-a-e, he is looking; iel-et'kan-a-e, he is seeing,.-(the latter is the general form) hako ko sca-sap'kan-a, (ha-ko-sap-et'-ko-kaan-,) they are catching fish, (the latter is the general form.) ( 368 ) d. THE CONTINUATIVE FORM. This form denotes continuation, and is formed from the Reservative Form; as nel-akaetahen-a-e, he will continue to see. e. THE REPETITIVE FORM. The Repetitive form has a general form; as dal-dal-Jcedea-le, we repeatedly struck him, a reservative one; as dal-dal-Jcad-e-a-le, we repeatedly struck him and left him,an intensive one; as dak-dal-lcana-le, we are trying to get ready with striking,-and a continuative form; as nel-delakae-tahen-pe, continue to see! It frequently has the same meaning as the general form. The second part of a compound verb is also repeated; as ropor-babarae from ror to speak, and barae to be engaged in. CHAPTER V. OF THE ARRANGEMENT OF WORDS AND CLAUSES. SECTION 1.-OF WORDS. The general arrangement, when the most of that parts of speech are to be included, is as follows: (369) 2. 3. 4. 5, 6. 7. 8. 10. The vocative. The genitive. The adverb. The adjective. An accusative noun. The instr. dat. or abi. A negative. A nominative suffix'. The root of the verb. The causative. 114' The tense'sign. 12. The acc. or dat. suffix. 13. The auxiliary present tense -sign. 14. Theauxiliary past tense-. sign. 15. The genitive suffix. 16. The 2nd gen. suffix. 17., The final "a" 18.* A conj'Unction. As: E. baba, hQponren a~k, marcth, sukri, onihotete, ba-ko och-ocho-ec--e-lcan-tah'elcan-tae-tam-a-memkham, e'ndekhcan phasiara metan'-me, hear, 'if they were not causing the very large pig of your son's- to be killed by him, then you may call me a deceiver. The followingr may serve as examples on shorter sentencesa Nom. Pa'iyu-e chatck'-c, Pandu he Will go. Gen. Fanuwren hQpQm-e chat ca1-c, Pandu's son will go. Instr. Panvyrer& hQpQnh inihotete-a banchaoena, Pandu's son was saved by me. Dat. Panyl JAgpt-then-e-chatak'-a, Pandu he will go to Jogot. Ace. Panyft AMJ~ daWa-e-reben-a, Pandu will be willing to strike Jogrot. Abl. Pandyu~ Jogot-khon-e hccli.en-a,, Pandu he came from Jogot. ILoo, Parn~u ork re,?nnea Naadu 'is at horn, ( 370 ) SECTION IL-OF CLAUSES. The Santhallanguage leans towards putting the subordinate before the principal clauses, but this is by no means invariably done; as okoeko ko chalak'-a, onlko bare klo hec'hodok'-ma, those who will go let them come at once; okare-m, tahena, ona bare Igi-me, say, where you will stay; oni-m dalakcad-e.te, adi-m ba.ricialcct'-a, you have done very wrong in having struck him (or that thou hast struck him,)--but it is also allowable to say: Anjom-akat'-a-ri, heci aaanae, I have heard, that he has come; chalak-a-bon, bae heci-len-khan, if he does not come, we will go, etc. In vivid descriptions, etc., the clauses are loosely connected, i. e., without a conjunction. In relative clauses the final "a" ought to be omitted. as oni hola-nm el-led-e (not delled-e-a) oni do okaena? What has become of him whom you saw yesterday? Or okaenae: oni hola-m del-led-e, what has become of him whom you saw yesterday? This is much more elegant and certainly more correct than to say: oni hola-m diel-ed-e-a, oni do okare, for the latter means literally: you saw him yesterday, what has become of him? P. S.-THE PROSODY WILL BE TREATED IN A SEPARATE VOLUME. Remark. Adverbs and Postpositions are fully explained elsewhere.